HomeMy WebLinkAboutAugusta Common Service Building , Phase I - B
Augusta Richmond GA
DOCUMENT NAME: AU.5G.~T-o.. c..oVn\'Y"\QYl SCYVI c..c.
Du.. \ \d\ nCj.vhQ~ "T-1)
DOCUMENT TYPE: Co n -\-Y-CL~-\-s
YEAR: ~O'-t
BOX NUMBER: 2\
FILE NUMBER: \"\ \<6 \
31
NUMBER OF PAGES: L
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
AUGUSrfA COMMON SERVICE BUILDING, PHASE I-B
Augusta, Georgia
AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSION
OFFICE COpy
Cranston, Robertson & Whitehurst, P.C.
Engineers - Planners - Surveyors
P.O. Box 2546 - 452 Ellis Street
Augusta, Georgia 30903
January, 2004
99-220.002
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Addendum No.1
to the
Contract Documents and Drawings
for the construction of
AUGUSTA COMMON SERVICE BUILDING, PHASE I-B
Our File No. 99-220.002
February 27, 2004
1.
The following are questions and responses from the February 24, 2004 Pre-Bid Meeting:
A. Will the general contractor be required to obtain a building permit?
Yes, all normal permits and fees still apply and will have to be taken care of by the
general contractor.
B. What will be the source of power during construction?
Power, water and sewer have already been run to the site and may be utilized during
construction at no cost to the contractor.
C. Since water and sewer lines have already been run to the site, will water and sewer
tap fees need to be paid?
No, water and sewer taps have already been made.
D. Who will be responsible for damage to restrooms incurred during July 4th events?
The City will be responsible for any damage to the restrooms or building by the
public during the July 4th events. The condition of such facilities will be well
documented before and after public access is granted to determine what damage, if
any, was caused.
E. Will the contractor be permitted to work during July 4th events while the public has
access to the restrooms?
Yes, the contractor will be allowed to continue work during such events. However,
it will be the contractor's responsibility to insure that all appropriate public safety
measures are in place.
F. Will there be a problem setting brick/scaffolding on back side of building?
Addendum No.1 - Page 1 of 17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
The driveway behind the building must be maintained at all times; however, there
will still be a work area of approximately 8 feet between the proposed building and
the construction fence.
G. What level of completion will be required for the restrooms at the intermediate
completion date?
The restrooms will be required to be functional in that everything shall be finished
except for the final floor coating and final painting. A prime coat of paint for the
walls and a sealant coat for the floors will be required for the intermediate
completion date.
II.
The following items have been revised or added to the contract documents and
specifications.
A. All references in the contract documents regarding the completion of the work within
150 calendar days after the date of written notice to proceed shall mean substantially
complete within 150 calendar days after the date of written notice to proceed. An
additional 45 calendar day wi II be allowed for completion of punchlist items. For the
purpose of this project, substantially complete shall be defined as the completion of
all work with the exception of the elevator installation and non-essential interior
finishes outside of Rooms 103 and 104.
B. Section 07410 - Metal Roofing, approved manufacturer: Metal Sales Manufacturing
Corp., Magna-Loc Roof System.
C. Section 08575 - Wood Clad Windows: Paragraph D.l.: Revised to read as follows:
D. Finish
1. Exterior: Factory finish to be selected by architect from the following
manufacturer's standard colors: white or pebble gray (or other neutral
gray).
1. Simulated Divided Lite Style with grilles on the interior face and
muntins on the exterior of each sash. See drawings for muntin layout.
1. Interior Grilles: 3/4 by 15/32 inch pine.
2. Exterior Muntins: Extruded aluminum or Ultrex Fiberglass.
D. Section 08710 - Door Hardware - add Hardware Schedule (attached, Sheets 5-9).
Addendum No. 1- Page 2 of 17
I
I
I
'1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
III.
E. Section 09250 - Gypsum Drywall - add under paragraph 03 - Materials:
L. Very High Impact and Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board Systems: ASTM C-
36; 5/8" thick, gypsum core panels, designed for use as an abuse-resistant
system. Finish wall joints with joint tape and setting compound.
1. Provide USG Fiberrock VHI Panels, or approved substitution.
2. Panels shall have UL rating where required on drawings.
F. Section 09670 - Add specification Section 09670 (attached Sheets 10-12).
G. Section 10155 - Toilet Partitions: Approved manufacturer: Partition Systems, Inc.
H. Section 10200 - Metal Louvers: Approved manufacturer: Arrow United Industries.
1. Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories: Add the following:
1. Item T A-4 - Mirror. add: Provide one at each lavatory in 204 and 205.
2. Item T A-8 - Liquid Soap Dispenser, add: Provide one at each lavatory and
each sink.
The following clarifications/amendments have been made to the contract drawings:
A. Supplemental Drawing: #1: A 6' chain link construction fence will be required for the
project for safety purposes. The limits of the construction fence are shown on
Supplemental Drawing #1 dated 2/27/04, Sheet 13 of this addendum. This area shall
also be used as a material lay down area. Any damage to the existing pavers, brick
fence or concrete drive during the construction period shall be repaired by the
contractor at no extra cost to the owner. No coring of the pavers or concrete road
will be allowed for the installation of the construction fence. Any additional material
lay down area required must be obtained by the contractor at no additional cost to the.
owner.
B. Sheet A2.1 - All gypsum board in exposed locations shall be vm (very high impact)
Type.
C. Sheet A2.2 - Revise:
I
I
1. Finish schedule: Change finish under floors titled "Synthetic Flooring" anq
"Base" each to "Fluid applied flooring - 1/4" thick". This finish shall apply
to gang toilets 103 and 104. Base shall be integral type of same material as
Addendum No.1 - Page 3 of 17
I
I
I
I D.
I E.
F.
I G.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
floor.
2. See added specification Section 09670 (Sheets 10 - 12).
Sheet A3.2 - All gypsum board shall be VID Type (walls and ceilings).
Sheet A6.2 - All gypsum board ceilings shall be VID Type.
Sheet P-l - Change water size. See Sheet 14 included for revised drawing P-lIRl.
Sheet P-l - Add water hammer arrestors. See Sheets 15 - 17 included for revised
drawings P-l/R2, P-l/R3 and P-l/R4.
Addendum No.1 - Page 4 of 17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.1.. ....._~.
~_.
I
I
.....l
Heading 01
(HwSet 01)
i"
._J
1 SGL DOOR(S) 100 TO
~. _~,:::...~?GL DO?R(S~108,-:T.~::::c - ~;.~'~-:::.~..:..~z.:~~:,;-~~'f'':''-:::::-~::' -: .--- ~._.~-:.~
.,.. .._--~~.=---,..",_._,-,...._"-" .:-,,~. '.x-'x.",}..~'~-""'.'-".".
Each Assembly Ie have:
1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE
1 EA RIM CYLINDER
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA KICK PLATE
1 EA DOOR STOP
1 SET SEALS
1 EA DOOR SWEEP
1 EA THRESHOLD
..... .. ..
. . -.. .. ..-
.." .>-..... .. ..... _._--.
- _._--
780 224HD X 83M
99L
951 6 PIN
4041 CUSH X TB
Kl0S0 6" X 34" X .050
462
160VA 1/36" 2/84"
200NA 36"
425 36M
Heading 02
-
(HwSet 02)
Hand
Degr'i<
Act 1nA
689
630
626
689
630
ROT
VON
FAL
LCN
ROC
ROC
NGP
NGP
NGP
AL
AL
AL
. DelJ;lree
Hand Act lnAc
1
1
SGL DOOR(S) 200 TO
SGL DOOR(S) 211 TO
Each Assembly to have:
1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE
1 EA RIM CYLINDER
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA KICK PLATE
1 EA DOOR STOP
1 SET SEALS
1 EA DOOR SWEEP
1 EA THRESHOLD
._~.. ~~-
Augusta Common
Addendum No. 1
x X X X X
i80 224HD X 83"
99L-F
951 6 PIN
4041 CUSH X TB
K1050 6" X 34" X .050
462
160VA 1/36" 2/84"
200NA 36"
42536"
689
630
626
689
630
AL
AL
AL
~..-
- -.-----.-- --
... ~~....~7'.:_;_~~(;~-~=::"~ --.','.;';..-..
.." -- . - -.'
Addendum No.1 - Page 5 of 17
ROT
VON
FAL
LeN
ROC
ROC
NG?
NGP
NG?
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I..~.~___._. __=_.~ ~-~_.. ~- . -..... .~=-~~-~ ~ .._..._.....-.~::-:'~~.~~'......--~-'-"7'.-:-7.~--'""-:':":"""----"-=:-:-:-.-:-:-..-'::-:'~:-:.. .". .~-
I
I
i
(HwSet 03)
Heading 03
~9yGroup
1
1
1
PR
PR
PR
DOOR(S) 101 TO
DOOR(S)1D5 TO
DOOR(S) 107 TO
XXXXX
. ~ -- - -.-..-.-- .
. ..- . .
. Oegra9
- -_._- Hand . Act InAct
Each Assembly 10 have:
6 EA HINGE
2 EA FLUSH SOL T
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE
1 EA lOCKSET
2 EA. OVERHEAD STOP
1 SET SEAlS
2 EA DOOR SWEEP
1 SET ASTRAGAl
1 EA THRESHOLD
881191 4.5 X 4.5 NRP
555
570
LM631 QG 6 PIN
9045
160VA 1nZ' 2/84"
200NA 36"
115NA 84"
425 36"
.630 .HAG
.626 -..ROC
~626 ~-.:ROC "'-'-
"-~~~e26 ';.FAL
630 GL Y
. Al.. NGP
-----:AL ,"""NGP
AL NGP
Al NGP
, ."-. ......- -.,. .'
. . . .
r--'_W
1 Heading 04
r-
(HwSet 04)
1
1
1
1
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
DOOR(S) 102A TO
DOOR(S) 202 TO
DOOR(S) 203A TO
DOOR(S) 2068 TO
x x x x x
Each Assembly to have:
3 EA HINGE
1 EA LOCKSET
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA KICK PLA. TE
1 EA WALL BUMPER
1 SET SE..3..LS
1 EA DOOR SWEEP
1 E.<\ THRESHOLD
881191 4.5 X 4.5
LM541 QG
4041 X TB
K1050 6- X 34" X .050
400
160VA 1136" 2/84"
200NA 36" .
425 36"
._--:. .....;...
Addendum No. 1 - Page 6 of 17
Augusta Common
Addendum No. 1
[iegree
Hand ActlnAet
630
626
689
630
626
AL
.. AL
AL
.. - . - --...-' .
HAG
FAL
LeN
ROC
ROC
NGP
NGP
NGP
I
I
I
1
I
. Each Assembly to have:
I 1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
1 EA lOCKSET
_::n. - 1 EA --SURFACE CLOSER
I'.'. 1 Ell, .: K1CK PLATE .
1 EA . MOPPLA IE
1 EA DOOR STOP
I 1 SET SEALS
1 EA DOOR SWEEP
. 1 EA THRESHOLD
1
I
1
1 SGL
I 1 SGL
1
1
1
1
SGL
SGL
SGL
SGL
DOOR(S) 103A TO
DOORCS) 1038 TO
OOOR(S) 104A TO
DOOR(S) 1048 TO
1--.
.....-L_.
DOOR(S) 106 TO
DOOR(S) 210 TO
lEach Assembly to have:
1 EA CONTINUOUS HINGE
1 EA LOCKSET
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA KICK'PLATE
1 SET SEALS
1 E.~ DOOR SWEEP
1 E.~ THRESHOLD
I
1
1
I
I . -. -'- .C - ..
.- .-.-....---..----.-.-
I
Augusta Common
Addendum No. 1
Heading 05 .. (HwSet 05) .. -.----.j
x x x x x
780 224HD X 83"
LM561 QG
..:,'.4041 X T8 .-
..:.. K1050 6" X 34" X .050
K10S0 6" X 35" X .050
462
1BOVA 1/36" 2/84"
200NA 36"
425 36"
-,....-
I
---1
~gl"Qe
Hand Ad loAd
Heading 06
(HwSet 06)
x x x x x
. . -., . .... .: De T99
. . -:. .._._.__.:~--.~~:.=--H3nd --Act ~nAct
.~. ..:.:..~._;.-r..~ "-~-'~.-.,:",:__
. . -. - .... .
.. .". ..._.. - n_ . . . .
. . . .'.'-
.' ... .. - .--. -_.. .--."
. .,,-~ - ..---------
.. .
---- -' . ."
"_.'a__. _ '. .._' ._.._._..._. -..-.-...-.....-.
. .~ ..:..~::- .'-:'_689 :...- ROT _::.:~.-
...:~: .:-.:;:~:~:;,; ::.=..;. ~26 . .~- F AL ~~-=- __- .:-
'.:. :._ -'-.'-~..~. .:..;:'689 :::LCN ~::..._-
.'-::':~~-:~-";' ,.::"..':':630 .:::: ROC .~'~-=.:...:
'.0 ~ ':.~:' ..'- .630 .:: ROC ::..:~~:.~ ..
. '. _.ROC
AL . NGP
AL NGP
AL NGP
780 224HD X 83" 689
LM561 QG 626
4041 SCUSH X TBI 689
K1050 6" X 34" X .050 630
160VA 1/36" 2184" AL
200NA 36" AL
425 36" AL
ROT
FAL
LeN
ROC
NGP
NGP
NGP
Addendum No.1 - Page 7 of 17
1_,",:,;-'1,:".'.<.--.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L
I
-c--
~._...-._~...__._._--- Heading 01
1 SGL DOOR(S) 102B TO
(HwSet 07)
1,-"
Degree
Hand Ac:tlnAct
x x x x x
Each Assembly to have:
3 EA HINGE
1 EA LOCKSET
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER
1 EA KICK PLATE
1 EA WALL BUMPER
3 EA SILENCER
8812794.5 X 4.5
LM541 QG
4041 X TB
K1050 6- X 34~ X .050
400
808
625
626
689
630
626
GRY
HAG
FAL
LCN
ROC
ROC
ROC
:_......y':ading 08 (HwSet08)
Hand
Oogree
A.ct loAd
1 SGL OOOR{S) 204 TO
1 SGL DOOR(S} 205 TO
1 SGL DOOR(S) 206A TO
x X X x x
Eacn Assembly to have:
3EA HINGE 8812794.5 X 4.5 626 HAG
1 E.~ PASSAGE SET LM101 QG 625 FAL
~ E:\ SURFACE CLOSER 4041 X T8 689 LeN
I
1 EA KICK PLATE K1050 6" X 34" X .050 630 ROC
1 EA MOPPLATE K1050 6" X 35" X .050 630 ROC
1 EA WALL 8UMPER 400 625 ROC
3 EA SILENCER 608 GRY ROC
~-~.~--o-.;..:.-'~-'..:...... -
... - -........-...-...,- ------ ..
~""2' _.._.._..~"'c-r.-.'. .'...... :- -.. - .
Addendum No.1 - Page 8 of 17
Augusta Common
Addendum No. I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.-....-..
-~. _..-:~...-
I
..... ~. -----., - . .
. - .
Heading 09 (Hw5et 09)
1 SGL DOOR(S) 201 TO
1 SGL DOOR(S} 207 TO
1 SGL DOOR(S} 207 A TO
1 SGL DOOR(S) 208 TO
1 SGL DOOR(S) 20BA TO
1 SGL DOOR(S) 209 TO
Each Assembly to hails:
3 EA HINGE
1 EA LOCKSET
1 EA WALL BUMPER
3 EA SILENCER
x x x x x
8812794.5 X 4.5
LM541 QG
400
606
1 EA KEY CABINET
Heading 10 (HwSet 10) r-
RWC-75-S
End of Schedule
-- - ',_.-' ..
.... .- -.".....
'1. .
\
O~r8e \
Hand Act lnAet '
!
;
\
626 HAG
626 FAL
626 ROC
GRY ROC
.~ .________""--___'--"_.o-.__~_~_______~._~._."..~_~~.____~.~_,.....
. - .,
Augusta Common
Addendum No. I
--",---"'-'
__ ,........r..I"~"(~~:-:-'~;..,.:~'~...... ,',
Addendum No.1 - Page 9 of 17
Dagraa
Hand Act InAct
GRY TEL
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
"I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Augusta Common
Addendum :-':0. 1
SECTION 09670
FLUID-APPLIED FLOORING
PART 1: GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Work of this section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements
of the contract documents.
1.02 WORK INCLUDED
0.0.1. Work of this section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary
to complete the high performance floor coatings as scheduled on the drawings
and/or specified herein.
1.03 RELATED WORK
A. Concrete - Section 03300
B. Floor Drains - Division 15.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01300 - Submittals.
B. Product Data: submit manufacturer's technical data, application instructions and general
recommendations for the flooring systems specified herein.
C. Samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's color charts showing full
range of colors and finishes available.
1. Submit samples of color chips from color chart selection designated by the architect.
D. Material certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that the flooring complies with
requirements specified herein.
E. Maintenance Instructions: submit manufacturer's written instructions for recommended
maintenance practices.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer qualifications: engage an experienced installer or applicator who has specialized
in installing high performance floor coatings similar to that required for this project and
who is acceptable to manufacturer of primary materials.
B. Single-source Responsibility: obtain composition flooring materials including primers,.
resins, hardening agents, and finish or sealing coats, form a single manufacturer.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original packages an containers with seals unbroken and bearing
manufacturer's labels containing brand name and directions for storage and mixing with
other components.
B. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's directions to prevent deterioration from
moisture, heat, cold, direct sunlight, or other detrimental effects.
1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental conditions: comply with composition flooring manufacturer's directions for
maintenance of ambient and substrate temperature, moisture, humidity, ventilation, and
other conditions required to execute and protect work. .
B. Lighting: permanent lighting shall be in place and working before installing resinous
flooring.
09670 - 1
aAAa"~lm Nn_ 1 - Pacre 10 of 17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I ..
I
I
Augusta Common
Addendum No. I
PART 2: PRODUCTS
2.01 FLUID APPLIED FLOORING SYSTEM - TYPE I - 1/4" THICK
A Materials: Troweled epoxy resin composition flooring.
B. Properties:
1. Colors: as indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, as selected by architect from
manufacturer's standard colors.
2. Physical Properties: provide flooring system that meet or exceed the listed minimum
physical property requirements when tested according to the referenced standard
test method in parentheses
Comprehensive Strength (ASTM C 579):
Tensile strength (ASTM C 307):
Flexural modulus of elasticity (ASTM C 580):
Water Absorption (MIL-D-3134):
Surface Hardness (ASTM 0-2240):
Abrasion Resistance (ASTM 0-1044):
Impact Resistance (MIL-0-3134, para 4.7.3):
11,000 psi
1,643 psi
4,300 psi
.3 percent max.
85.5 Ourometer "0"
0.0 gr.
0.024" max., no chipping, cracking loss
of adhesion.
No chipping, cracking, or delamination
and not more than 0.014" indentation.
Adhesion (AC.!. Comm. No. 503.1): 400 psi (100% failure in concrete)
Electrical Conductivity (NFPA 56A): Oi-electric
Flammability - Critical Radiant Flux (ASTM E-648): greater than 1.07 watts/cm2
Impact Resistance (Gardner Impact Tester):
4. Textured top coat: type recommended or produced by manufacturer of epoxy resin
matrix floor system for type and profile of desired final finish.
5. Anti-microbial Additive: Incorporate antimicrobial chemical additive to prevent growth
of most bacteria, fungi, algae, and actinomycetes.
C. Manufacturers (Type I Floor Systems):
1. Crossfield Products Corp. - Oex-o-Tex, Cheminert "K" with Posi-tred "0" top finish
(total OFT 1/4 inch).
2. Tnemec Co. Inc. - Series 231 Chemtread with Series 280 Tneme - glaze (total OFT -
1/4 inch).
3. Selby Crete - Selbaclad 425 (total OFT 1/4 inch).
4. Sauereisen - concrete 101 with Conoglaze 201 (total OFT 1/4 inch).
5. Stonhard 7 Stonclad GS with Stonkote HT4 protective top coating (total OFT 1/4
inch).
O. Extra protection: provide additional material to resist intermittent spills of hot items such
as grease a minimum of two feet beyond the diameter of the fryers and the tilt-table.
Provide Oex-o-tex Chem-rez "N" polymeric finish or finish recommended by coating
manufacturer.
PART 3: EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A Examine the areas and conditions where decorative quartz epoxy flooring is to be
installed and notify the architect of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected by the contractor in a manner acceptable to the architect.
3.02 PREPARATION
A Substrate: perform preparation and cleaning procedures according to flooring
manufacturer's instruction's for particular substrate conditions involved, and as specified.
Provide clean, dry, and neutral substrate for flooring application.
09670 - 2
Addendum No.1 - Page 11 of 17
I
I
Augusta Common
Addendum No. I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Concrete surfaces: shot-blast, acid etch, or power scarify as required to obtain optimum
bond of flooring to concrete. Remove sufficient material to provide a sound surface, free
of laitance, glaze, efflorescence, and any bond-inhibiting curing compounds or form
release agents. Remove grease, oil, and other penetrating contaminates. Repair
damaged and deteriorated concrete to acceptable condition. Leave surface free of dust,
dirt, laitance, and efflorescence.
C. Materials: mix components when required, and prepare materials according to flooring
system manufacturer's instructions.
3.03 APPLICATION
A. Type I Flooring System
1. General: apply each component of epoxy resin composition flooring system
according to manufacturer's directions to produce a uniform monolithic flooring
surface of thickness indicated.
2. Bond Coat: apply bond coat over prepared substrate at manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate.
3. Body Coat: over primer, trowel apply epoxy mortar mix at nominal 1/4 inch
thickness; hand or power trowel. When cured, sand or grind if necessary to remove
trowel marks and roughness.
4. Finish or Sealing Coats: after body coat has cured sufficiently, apply grout and finish
coats of type recommended by flooring manufacturer to produce finish matching
approved sample and in number of coats and spreading rates recommended by
manufacturer.
a) Final finish coat shall be in color and skid retardant profile as approved by the
architect.
b) Finished floor shall be 1/4" thick, uniform in color and free of trowel marks.
B. Type II Flooring System
I
1.' General: Apply component of decorative quartz epoxy flooring system according to
manufacturer's directions to produce a uniform monolithic flooring surface of
thickness indicated. .
2. Broadcast Coats: apply liberal application of clear epoxy resin mixture, allow to self-
level, broadcast (by hand 'or spray machine) ceramic coated quartz aggregate, allow
to set to hardness, sweep off excess unbonded aggregate and repeat process to
achieve total nominal thickness of 1/8".
I
I
I
3.04 CURING, PROTECTION AND CLEANING
A. Cure epoxy resin composition flooring materials according to manufacturer's directions,
taking care to prevent contamination during application stages and before completing
curing process. Close application area for a minimum of 24 hours.
END OF SECTION
I
I
09670 - 3
:' 1 ---i ,., I I 11 '--= ~
..,.1 ,_
. ., <. -----.1
c_.:'" " I ! !
> :. : I
~ 7. . ':'.::: I q I ! ;
I tw-.. . '. :.. : I I I I '
.~ ~ iii J->....i. ' ~ :1
: > P :> lj '_' . _ _t::::. ~ I I ;
. L i~ '.: I 1~'P ~ ~ ,
- rr - - -.- - - -:---~...-=---- - - - - n .
'. ~V . . !:II ;.... .O~O~.TII;:;~ I i I :' ~
. ". . - %. -, , I
i"\ . . , CO ~ n 41 c....1 . I
" . ~-/I . . .lL .... ___~.il~. , ::~d! :. 1 ~ ~ ~i I _ ' :~'I
' I ~ O''';;! I I '" I III l:", iE
!71 1 II :~~ I ,,; , : ~~ --..
I ,. '. I I ..'> Iil I . I I 05~
... . !!. '.' . E~ I ~, :~;:; i
'7 I I D' I>i I )0.:: '" ..' 7:.::::a:
7 ~ ~I ", I 'I :: '/-' II! ,'~ ' r /7/12 ·
I . . I .~, '" I '. .
~~ . '-1' I 1>.. j / i ~~ > ~ Ii ;:. :\\ .
Mn I I. .-In I' "'-
r- ~ ? po ?' . . . ;....:: 1,0, ,",' . ~'_
sw . I : I I A.>,_"_.:) '. I - > 1''=11
nr- ' ..... .;-/ _ ., '..".--.1 .... <. I'
,. ~ ;/' . .... .-.' I> , 1
g I 1- " '~" ~~, ~,,;;;;'-:j, i"-----l1" "~r" GP-~
. ;> ~ . C l;C i;::; lJC . U ...':. ,IJC ----.,;, 17. -i I
"'- - . - , 4 . I
! '. I ~., I : - . -" -':- I. L ~ I' I
I I ..~ ~.. ,Co, 1
I . ~ ""'. '.:.. > - I I
~'~ "1 ~~ ::;O~ -::-:.' ~ t 'I'
> I 1 V ..., , n ,) I ." I . !
I I "'I -." _ :. I II
>1.., ,__ i ::::~ _ .: -,- nla "I II I
I -< ~ c;D '7:: ~::!. r. ! I I.,
7 '-I' V I, I ~." ~n, . r.:" ! I; :
/ II'~ I ~: ~r 1-- I :~ ':':'\g.~.'ll n "" ", ,..... ~ ~ ll.~'. .. ;.)'
I I. . ... ." ..
I :" -;"1 I' i i
7 : ~1 . l I '<;1 I. 4 ~I ~ ! II . : "- ~
:> I I" ,J 1-<1 I ! :~ :. I ~ i__II;::; -.J I~
J, n I ' 'I I "'''' 1;1- .
C' -, I I' . "''-C. ,
I. f' ". ... , . I. ""'I'~' '" .." i.
" . I '--'---; , . ~:g ~, I "
. -- . ~ . ............ i +
! 1'1> I nl 'i ".:'::::,:.1 I ' ..1 ~ (1(l 1:0 ~
, I 1 I .,..,. I 10 I
~ !. ...;\::._::]1 ". " L..J:. I;z
I . . . ..:'.'. IV)
I >' ,I I I ';1 I > 1 ~ I I ~:d
:> ' II" ~ :1 1-, I . ,/-':.~~-j 4 . . ~~. II!~. 'I
I . .. ....1. L, 1:::1
t' I ,::.. i ."::. I ~ ~. IlL
. 'I> -- --- ~'.. I I '0
. ~-' J ~ ,
....-1- I. I."' .;:::". IZ
~ .. ;.. . .. ~ - ~ "t:
,,'/ I \7.1 "'I c' --:.:.;- ",J. II . .
/'..1 . . ::>-: :"_~::,.'", 1>.., t .
. . . I ,-- I ., .:'<.'.>!! I )! I'~ I
t I l I I .-.., ./. -- / - I,..
!' n . ..~.. ',.. I .,..1
\7 'I.' 1'" ~., ~"I/~W >--';w~w ~ - w-l...w~" . .,1: fT1
... I I I ~ ....:..1. I"'''''' I. 1 Ie I
' . . . .'-<"..:.; I~~ ... ; i
> 1.', . \ ~ .' '-,...~ rn I ~ I, ~
<' . I I'" I. N~ ! ,', i ' I" . :s I i ~
11 " ,'. I I ~ ~:. : i r. >l'" - I) I .
;'" n . ~: It. . ."- ~.,:' I ~ t:;:
:-:-:-... I. I> co ''''I~' .' ':. I ""'0
~ ~~ I . "I h r :- '. L ,/ . . ~ ;.,;..
~g~~ ~I V I. II I s ~.. :.~".:. I 4. p" . j~~. I
:i=' co ...g. I I. n '"' .-::0. I .'.' '" .., :, I I(nn
II - CI. ~", J .,y... .. -'..L.! I
. -'" I . .-J
~...,.. . -- ." .' - - ~- - - ~.
~~~ 7 - r 1, ~ '~-r:A'~! '-L- L\\\~,~:t
o >) 'I, I '3./,"=/~" 0- ~,. .
"';; - ,~r \ It]'. \ II, ""'~ rf.''''~- v' 'r;;.,,~ ,~:,\... , -- ,
f ! \ -. .---_____~___._L.~..(, -",_. I'
.'" \ - - - - - - -, 4_ 0-1'.,.1
, .' ,V ~ \ ., ." \ ~ BJ ., I \ /'" _ s i' ~; l: '"
'-.1 \ .. \ ~ ;... 4:. II \ - ./ to ~ 'iiC;"i ~ '-,,;
~:' ~ " "\ J:.' .... ,~ ?:'// ~ !~ L:lJ ~ ~ '. '~,~,.."
__I ~ _ > ~ ",,,Ji, t:- ~/., .' -" !"J~ ~ -L.. ~ 8r ~-
/'1::" ;, . -- t ' I ._--c/" \ ~ I ______
" \ '....2.'.- .....---., I
r",' \ i:~'~La',~,,': i
,9' ~. \ L---______ ~ I T
fI g \ / -' I
l... ~ ~ / ::; I -I:
4' 0..
-\1" \ / "--12",.--'-.-----'" "'__
.,~ \ [.'"
~": - - -r~ - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - --
.~:<~ ' ?-'(
~
-
:.
I
[:.
i
I
;
't'-_-
9
""
o
\.. r
\, I
~?;
'7
---.....
"
7
"
.;;J~
~
"
~
,
"
c.
:.
4
v
'?
>
,
>
~
...
"
~
>
C
~
r/JC
r/J
t!j~
~>
lati(j
(")0
t!j~
~~
SO
~Z
S~
Z~
0>
r/J
t1j
)oooi
~
I
t"
o
(')
>
..,
00(
o
2
o
':j
(')
o
:z
Vl
..,
~
e
(')
..,
00(
o
:z
':j
t-:'l
:z
(')
t-:'l
I
/
,/
/.
-.0
-.0
,
t../
t../
,
-=
-
>
'JJ
,',
~
------
/
t>
n
~
G ~
::s
~~ rn
~~ ~
:2 ! I ~
O~, g.
.., ~ ~ ~ :
.., ii~. &r ;
o ~ 0 ,.
rJl~Z::S=
('). RoO
~ t I ~..
" -<
~
g ~ M:
~,. (1)
~ ::r'
~ ~
~ IF-
'" 'i:l
....... .
'" n
~ .
o
""
02-11-2004 09:37am From-PRUETT FORD AND ASSOCIATES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
+7067245127
T-499
P.OO2l005
V
F-630
I
WUM
UPS
DETAIL
I '01 I
eN II
1100 J
-~
1--'-
I
I
I
,
I
L..___
CONNECT TO EXISTING WATER SUPPLY.
METER AND BFP ARE EXISTING
TITLE: WATER UNE SIZES CHANGE
I PROJECT NAME: AUGUSTA COMMONS
I DATE: '02/05/04
DRAWN BY: RWW ENGINEER: REP
SHEET NO. P-l\Rl
I
I
JOB NO. 0203.3
Addendum No.1 - Page 14 of 17
02-11-2004 09:37am From-PRUETT FORD AND ASSOCIATES
T-499 P 003/005 F-630
+ 7067245127
l2- -
I
I .
m.=.2 .w.t:1
~
4- L-.._-.J I
2"
~ L2.. rl
I
CONNECT TO EXISTING SEWER
FIELD VERIFY LOCATION OF
----------------~~Sn-NG-cLEANrOl1riRR/R--------------------------------------------------------
IS :i:20 FT. FROM 8ULDINC
TITI..E: ADDITION OF WATER HAMMERS
ROJECT NAME: AUGUSTA COMMONS
DRAWN BY: RWW ENGINEER: REP
I
I
JOB NO. 02033
SHEET NO. P- , /R2
--,
Addendum No.1 - Page 15 of 17
02-1)-2004 09:38am From-PRUETT FORO AND ASSOCIATES
4"WASTE UP
.co.=..l
I 104 I
+ 706 7245127
T-499 P 004/005 F-630
rv/~
':"'.', .~
_......._:.a:.::
.wtj
.wtl
r-----,
I I
I I
, I
, I
I I
I I
, I
I ,
., I
, I
, I
, ,
, ,
L_____-'
r-----,
I I
I I
, ,
, I
I ,
,
I
I
I
,
I
,
I
I I
L... _ _ _ _ ...oJ
3"
CONNECT T
FIELD VERI
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------E~StING-C
IS :t:20 FT.
TtK-
V4"
I
r/4"
105
JE=.1 3'FD-2 3"
I 3"
nTLE: ADDITION OF WATER HAMMERS
PROJECT NAME: AUGUSTA COMMONS
DRAWN BY: RWW ENGINEER: REP
JOB NO. 02033' SHEET NO. P-l/R3
I
I
Addendum No.1 - Page 16 of 17
02-1)-2004 09:38am From-PRUETT FORD AND ASSOCIATES
+7067245127
4'WASTE DOWN
.f.=.2
~
3"fQ_l
.Ie.:.2
~-
.IE.=2
P-5
I 205 I
~Q)
:..r~.
~~
~
~
I 20SA]
-{I
~.-
.- I '...
~
TI1l.E: ADDITION OF WATER HAMMERS
ROJECT NAME: AUGUSTA COMMONS
DRAWN BY: RWW ENGINEER: REP
I
I
JOB NO. 02033
Addendum No.1 - Page 17 of 17
T-499 P.005/005 F-630
-1
,
--T'--
,
I
I 207 I
r
SHEET NO. P-l/R4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
AUGUST A COMMON SERVICE BillLDING, PHASE I-B
Augusta, Georgia
AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSION
The Honorable Bob Young
Mayor
Betty Beard
Marion F. Williams
Barbara Sims
Richard Colclough
Bobby G. Hankerson
Andy Cheek
Tommy Boyles
Jimmy Smith
Williams H. Mays, ill
Don A. Grantham
George R. Kolb - City Administrator
Teresa C. Smith, P.E. - Director, Augusta Public Works Department
Cranston, Robertson & Whitehurst, P.e.
Engineers - Planners - Surveyors
Augusta, Georgia
January, 2004
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
T ABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE NO. OF PAGES
I Invitation for Bids 1
IB Instructions to Bidders 4
P Proposal 2
BB Bid Bond 2
CA Certificate of Owner's Attorney 1
NA Notice of Award 1
A Agreement 3
PB Performance and Payment Bonds 5
NP Notice to Proceed 1
GC General Conditions 25
SC Special Conditions 7
TS-O Index to Technical Specifications 4
TS Technical Specifications 292
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION I
INVIT A TION FOR BID
The Invitation to Bid will be issued
by the Augusta-Richmond County
Purchasing Department
*****END OF PAGE I-I *****
I-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.
SECTION IB
INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS
1.
GENERAL:
A. All proposals must be presented in a sealed envelope, addressed to the Owner. The
proposal must be filed with the Owner on or before the time stated in the Invitation
for Bids. Mailed proposals will be treated in every respect as though filed in person
and will be subject to the same requirements.
B. Proposals received subsequent to the time stated will be returned unopened. Prior
to the time stated any proposal may be withdrawn at the discretion of the bidder, but
no proposal may be withdrawn for a,period of thirty (30) days after bids have been
opened, pending the execution of a contract with the successful bidder.
2.
BID DEPOSIT:
A. Each proposal shall be accompanied by a deposit of cash or certified check for ten
percent (10%) of the amount of Base Bid No.1, and any proposal not accompanied
by such deposit shall be absolutely void and will not be considered. Checks shall
be drawn on a bank or trust company insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance
Corporation and shall be payable to the order of the Owner. The successful bidder,
upon his failure or refusal to execute and deliver the contract and bonds required
within (10) days after he has received notice of the acceptance of his bid, shall forfeit
to the Owner, as liquidated damages for such failure or refusal, the security deposited
with his bid.
B. In lieu of the bid deposit required herein, the bidder may execute a bid bond for the
same amount. Surety shall meet all requirements relating to performance bond
required in Paragraph IB-08.
EXAMINA TION OF WORK:
A. Each bidder shall, by careful examination, satisfy himself as to the nature and
location of the work, the conformation of the ground, the character, quality and
quantity of the facilities needed preliminary to and during the execution ofthe work,
the general and local conditions, and all other matters which can in any way affect
the work or the cost thereof under the contract. No verbal agreement or conversation
with any officer, agent or employee of the Owner, ei ther before or after the execution
of the contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations therein.
IB-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
4.
ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATIONS:
A. No interpretation of the meaning of the plans, specifications or other pre-bid '
documents will be made to any bidder orally.
B. Every request for such interpretation should be in writing addressed to CRANSTON,
ROBERTSON & WHITEHURST, P.c., P. O. Box 2546, Augusta, Georgia 30903
and to be given consideration must be received at least five days prior to the date
fixed for the opening of bids. Any and all such interpretations and any supplemental
instructions will be in the form of written addenda to the specifications which, if .
issued, will be sent by certified mail with return receipt requested to all prospective
bidders at the respective addresses furnished for such purpose, not later than three
days -prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids. Failure of any bidder to receive
any such addendum or interpretation shall not relieve such bidder from any obligation
under his bid as submitted. All addenda so issued shall become part of the Contract
Documents.
5.
PREPARATION OF BIDS:
A. Bids shall be submitted on the forms provided and must be signed by the bidder or
his authorized representative. Any corrections to entries made on bid forms shall be
initialed by the person signing the bid.
B. Bidders must quote on all items appearing on the bid forn1s, unless specific directions
in the advertisement, on the bid form, or in the special conditions allow for partial
bids. Failure to quote on all items may disqualify the bid. When quotations on all
items are not required, bidders shall insert the words "No Bid" where appropriate.
C. Alternate bids will not be considered unless specifically called for.
D. Telegraphic bids will not be considered. Modifications to bids already submitted will
be allowed if submitted by telegraph prior to the time fixed in the Invitation for. Bids.
Modifications shall be submitted as such, and shall not reveal the total amount of
either the original or revised bids.
E. Bids by wholly owned proprietorships or partnerships will be signed by all owners.
Bids of corporations will be signed by an officer ofthe firm and his signature attested
by the secretary thereof who will affix the corporate seal to the Proposal.
IB-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'I
I
I
I
I
6.
CONTRACT TIME:
A. The Owner is requesting two separate bids for this contract. Base Bid No.1 will be
forthe construction of the project wi thin One Hundred Fifty (150) calendar days from
the date of the Notice to Proceed. Base Bid NO.2 adds an intermediate completion
time of Ninety (90) calendar days from the date of the Notice to Proceed for the first
floor restrooms (Rooms 103 and 104) to be operationable and accessible for periodic
use during special events.
7.
BASIS OF A WARD:
A. The bids will be compared on the basis of a lump sum price which will include and
cover the furnishing of all materials and the performance of all labor requisite or
proper, and completing of all the work called for under the accompanying contract,
and in the manner set forth and described in the specifications. Owner reserves the
right to select the bidder from either Base Bid No.1 or Base Bid No.2.
B. The proposed quantities as shown in certain items of the proposal are for the purpose
of comparing bids and awarding payment of monthly estimates for items of
construction complete in place. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to check all
items of construction since final payment will be rendered according to the lump sum
amount as bid in the proposal. In case of error in quantities as shown, the lump sum
amount as stated in the proposal will prevail at the end ofthejob when final payment
is rendered except as set forth in the specifications. Should an error in the quantities
be noted, the prospective bidder should notify immediately the Engineer who will
check the quantity and issue addendum to all prospective bidders correcting the faulty
quantity. The bid will indicate that the bidder agrees completely with the quantities
as shown and is willing to accept the total lump sum as payment in full for all work
shown on the plans or covered in the specifications.
8.
BIDDER'S OUALIFICA TIONS:
A. , No proposal will be received from any bidder unless he can present satisfactory
evidence that he is skilled in work of a similar nature to that covered by the Contract
and has sufficient assets to meet all obligations to be incurred in carrying out the
work. The Owner will make such investigations as are deemed necessary to
determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work and the bidder shall furnish
to him all such additional information and data for this purpose as may be requested.
The Owner reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by the
bidder, or investigation of him fails to satisfy the Owner that such bidder is properly
qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work
contemplated therein. Part of the evidence required above shall consist of a list of
IB-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
9.
10.
the names and addresses of not less than five (5) firms, governments, or corporations
for which the bidder has done similar work.
PERFORMANCE AND PA YMENT BONDS:
A. At the time of entering into the Contract, the Contractor shall give a performance
bond and a labor and material payment bond to the Owner for the use of the Owner
and all persons doing work or furnishing skill, tools, machinery or materials under
or for the purpose of such Contract, conditional for the payment as they become due,
of all just claims for such work, tools, machinery, skill and materials, for the
completion of the Contract according to its terms, for saving the Owner harmless
from all costs and charges that may accrue on account of the doing of the work
specified, and for the compliance with the laws appertaining thereto. Said bonds
shall be for the amount of the contract price. The surety must be a substantial surety'
company satisfactory to the Owner and authorized by law to do business in the state
in which the work is located.
B. Attorneys-in-fact who sign bonds must file with each copy thereof a certified and
effectively dated copy of their powers of attorney.
REJECTION OF BIDS:
A. These proposals are asked for in good faith, and awards will be made as soon as
practicable, provided satisfactory bids are received. The right is reserved, however,
to waive informalities in bidding, to reject any or all proposals, or to accept a bid
other than the lowest submitted if such action is deemed to be in the best interest of
the Owner.
i11-4
L
I
I
I
I
I
I
I'
:
,:
, \
i I
I ,
,
,
,
,
SECTION P
PROPOSAL
DATE: March 9. 2004
I. BASE BID NO.1:
Gentlemen:
In compliance with your invitation for bids, the undersigned hereby proposes to furnish all labor, equipment
and materials, and to perform all work for the project referred to herein as:
AUGUSTA COMMON SERVICE BUILDING, PHASE l-B
in strict accordance with the Contract Documents and in consideration of the amounts shown on the bid schedule
attached hereto and totaling:
Grand Total:
cItI $ A1, v?
The undersigned hereby agrees that,'upon written acceptance of this bid, he will within 10 days of
receipt of such notice execute a formal contract agreement with the Owner, and that he will provide the bond or
guarantees required by the contract documents.
The undersigm;d hereby agrees that, if awarded the contract, he will corrunence the work within Ten
(lQ) calendar days after the date of written notice to proceed, and that he will complete the work within One Hundred
Fifty (150) calendar days after the date of such notice, .
The undersigned acknowledges receipt of the following addenda:
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
1
Addendum No. 2
Addendum No.
. Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Enclosed is a bid guarantee, consisting of Ten percent of basf> hi d
in the amount of
Respectfully s4bmitted,
,
,
R.W. Allen & Assn~ia~ps, Tn~ I
F2:N:land Ave.. Aug....", G~1090~
~S ADDRESS '1
;;y:-.,z -./'-.. ~ Glark
r- !
TITLE: Executive Vice President
)
P-l
I
I
I
DATE: March 9, 2004
II.
BASE BID NO.2:
I
I
Gentlemen:
In compliance with your invitation for bids, the undersigned hereby proposes to furnish all labor, equipment
and materials, and to perform all work for the project referred to herein as:
I
I
I
I
I
AUGUSTA COMMON SERVICE BUILDtNG, Pf.IASE I-B
in strict accordance with the Contract Documents and in consideration of the amounts shown on the bid schedule
attached hereto and totaling:
Grand Total:
~<.I ~ Iv' .4tI NV)UL~ 'f)
,and (J....c:> /100 dollars (
j..Jt~C M t:> Nt "i1-0\f fJbvJ')
7Ct I, ()v ri .)(:)~
.
The undersigned hereby agrees that, upon written acceptance of this bid, he will within 10 days of
receipt of such notice execute a formal contract agreement with the Owner, and that he will provide the bond or
guarantees required by the contract documents.
The undersigned hereby agrees that, if awarded the contract, he will commence the work within Ten .
QQ) calendar days after the date of written notice to proceed, that he will complete all work associated with the' first
floor restrooms (Rooms 103 and 104) within Ninety (90) calendar days after the date of written Notice to Proceed, and
that he will complete all remaining work within One Hundred Fiftv (150) calendar days after the date of such notice.
I
I
I
The undersigned acknowledges receipt of the following addelJ.da:
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Ad<;lendum No.
1
Addendum No. 2
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
Addendum No.
in the amount of
Ten percent"of base bjd
Enc10sedis a bid guarantee, consisting of
I'
I
Respectfully submitted,
R.W~. Allen & Associates, Inc.
FIRM NAME
1
I
I)
2205 Highland Ave., Augusta, GA 30904
~DRESS
B~ _ ~~;; Clark
TITLE:Ex~cutive Vice ~resident
I
P-2
I
I
TheStRiul
SlIrety
I
BID BOND
. AlA Document A310
I
Sr.. Paul Fire ~ nd M~rine Insurance Company
SL Paul G\Ufdi~n Insurance: Company
Sl. Paul Mercury lnsurancl! Comp3ny
United SL:ltcs Fidelity and GlL3ranty Company
Fidelity nnd Guaranty In.surance Underwriters, Inc.
fidelity and GtUr;lnty [nsur:lnc.e Company.
Princir~ Ofliec: 385 Washington Street
. Sl. Paul. Minnesota 55102
Sc.abO:lrd Surcty Compacy
Principal Of rice: 580 J Smith A venue
Ballimore, M!lJ)'IJr.d 21209
I
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, thOlt we,
I
I
Bond Number
1685634
R. H. Allen & Associates, Inc.
as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and
a corporation, duly organized under the laws of the Scate of
St. Paul Fire & Marine Insurance Company
~1innesota
I
as SurelY, hcrcinnfcer called LhcSurcty, are held and firmly bound unto
Augusta-Richmond County, Purchasing DeDartment
I
as Obligee, hcrein9.!ler the Obligee, in the sum of
I
Ten Percent of bid
for the payment of 'oVhich sum well 'and uuly to be made, the said Principal and Surety.
:LdministrJtors, successors, end assigns. joinLly and severally, firmly by these prcsenLj.
Dollllrs (.$ 10% of bid )
bind ourselves, our heirs, exeCutors,
I
WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for
I
Augusta Commons Service Building,
Phase I-B Bid #04-058
,
NOW THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shzl1 cnler into a Contract with the
Obligee in occordance 'with the terms of such bid. and give such bond or bonds a5 may be specified in the biddi ng or Conlrdc{
Documents with good and sufficienL surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt p:l.ymcnt of labor ;lnd
m:lCcri:l1 furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in lht: event of the failure of Lhe Principal to cnler such COOltrnct cnd give such bo'nd or
bonds, if Ihc Principal ~hall pay to th~ Obligce thc difference nOllo exceed the pcnslty hcrcof bctween the mOunt specified in said bid
:md such larger amount for which Obligee may in good faith contract with another party Lo perform tlle Work coy'crcd by s<lid bid, thcOl
this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and cff~l.
I
I
I
Signed, sealed a.nd dated
9th
day of
I
I
I
I
March
2004
R. H, Allen & Associa tes, Inc. (Seal)
~-~
/' . ~ I
St.( Paul Fire & ~la' f.l " rance Company
B
(Seal)
-in-Fact
Approved by the American Institute 01 Architects AlA Document No. A-31 0
6.';271 Rov. 9-1999 Printed In U.S.A. Prlnlod with pormissloo by ll10 Amllrican In,til11lo 0 Atchi~eCl&
I
I
TheStPdul
POWER OF ATTOR'iEY
I
Seaboard Surety Company
St. Paul Fire and :\Iarine Insurance Company
St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company
SI. Paul J\lercur)' Insurance Company
United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
I
Power of Attorney No.
21010
Certificate ~o.
1685634
I
K:'."OW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESEJ>;TS: That Seaboard Surety Company is a corporation duly organized uncer Ihe laws of Ihe State of New York, and that
SI. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, SI. Paul Guardian Insurance Company and SI. Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under
the laws of the State of Minnesota. and that Uniled States Fidelily and Guaranty Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the Slate of Maryland, and
thai FidelilY and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State ofIowa. and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters,
Inc. is a corporation duly organized under Ihe laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the "Companies "). and thai the. Companies do hereby make,
constitule and appoinl .
I
Roy Scarborough, Jr., Eugene A. Cronic and Alicia J. Rhoades
I
I
Augusta
Georgia
I
2003
I
'", .-: "\",',. .
.: ~ -.~:... -:.
..../. United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
.' Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company
Fidelily and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
I
~
~
Slate of Maryland
City .of Baltimore
18th March 2003
On this day of . before me, the undersigned officer, personally appeared Peter W. Carman and
Thomas E. Huibregtse. who acknowledged themselves to be the Vice President and Assistant Secretary, respectively, of Seaboard Surety Company. SI. Paul Fire and
Marine Insurance Company. SI. Paul Guardian Insurance Company. SI. Paul Mercury Insurance Company. Uniled States Fidelity and Guaranty Company. Fidelity and
Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.; and thai the seals affixed to the foregoing instrument are the corporate seals of
said Companies; and that they, as such, being authorized so 10 do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing the names of the
corporations by themselves as duly authorized officers. .
PETER W. CARM....'l. Vice President
t7~e.rI~
THOM>'S E. HUlBREGTSE, Assist:lnt Secre',ry
In Witness Whereof, I hereunlo set my hand and official seal.
~t~.~
My Commission expires the 1st day of July. 2006.
REBECCA EASLEY.ONOKALA. I'ot,rx Public
86203 Rev. 7.2002 Printed in U.SA
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CERTIFICA TE OF OWNER'S ATTORNEY
I, the undersigned Steve Shepard, the duly authorized and acting legal representative of
Augusta, Georgia, do hereby certify as follows:
I have examined the attached Contract(s) and surety bonds and the manner of execution
thereof, and I am of the opinion that each of the aforesaid agreements has been duly executed by the
. proper parties thereto acting through their duly authorized representati ves; that said representati ves
have full power and authority to execute said agreements on behalf of the respective parties named
thereon; and that the foregoing agreements constitute valid and legally binding obligations upon the
parties executing the same in accordance wit the erms, conditio s and provisions thereof.
DATE:
ct (11 cJ'i
CA-l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Public Works and Engineering Department
Errick L. Thompson, P.E., Assistant Director
Engineering Division
Pre-Co nstru ctio nSectio n
1815 Marvin Griffin Road
Augusta, Georgia 30906
(706) 796-5040 Fax (706) 796-5045
www.augustaga.gov
Teresa C. Smith, P.E., Director
April 1,2004
Mr. Scott Clark
R. W. Allen & Associates, Inc.
2205 Highland Ave.
Augusta, GA 30904
Re: NOTICE OF AWARD
Augusta Common Service Building, Phase I-B
File Ref.: #014(A)
The OWNER has considered the BID submitted by you for the above-described WORK in response to its
Advertisement for Bids and Information for Bidders.
You are'hereby notified that your BASE BID No.2 has been accepted for items in the amount of$791 ,000.00.
You are required by the Information for Bidders to execute the Agreement and furnish the required
Contractor's Performance and Payment Bonds within ten (lO) calendar days from the date of this Notice to you.
If you fail to execute said Agreement and to furnish said bonds within ten (lO) days from the date of this
Notice, said OWNER will be entitled to consider all rights arising out of the OWNER'S acceptance of your
BID as abandoned and as a forfeiture of your Bid Bond. The OWNER will be entitled to such other rights as
may be granted by law.
You are required to return an acknowledged copy of this NOTICE OF AWARD to the OWNER.
Dated this 1 st day of April, 2004.
*** ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE ***
Receipt of the above NOTICE OF AWARD is her~by
acknowledged by JIC.K Allen, PresLded
:~~~aYOf Apell ,20m.
TITLE:--F5 to ~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION A
AGREEMENT
t,
TillS AGREEMENT, made on the~ of April, 2004, by and between AUGUSTA,
GEORGIA BY AND THROUGH THE AUGUSTA-RICHMOND COUNTY COMMISSION, party
of the first part, hereinafter called the OWNER, and R. W. ALLEN & ASSOCIATES, INC. party
of the second part, hereinafter called the CONTRACTOR.
WITNESSETH, that the Contractor and the Owner, for the considerations hereinafter
named, agree as follows:
ARTICLE I - SCOPE OF THE WORK
The Contractor hereby agrees to furnish all of the materials and all of the equipment
and labor necessary, and to perform all of the work shown on the plans described in the
specifications for the project entitled:
AUGUSTA COMMON SERVICE BUlLDING, PHASE I-B
and in accordance with the requirements and provisions of the Contract Documents as defined in the
General and Special Conditions hereto attached which are hereby made a part of this agreement.
ARTICLE II - TIME OF COMPLETION -- LIOUIDA TED DAMAGES
The work to be performed under this Contract shall be commenced within ten (lQ)
calendar days after the date of written notice by the Owner to the Contractor to proceed. The work
shall be completed no later than One Hundred Fifty (150) calendar days after date of Notice to
Proceed. Additionally, should Base Bid No.2 be selected, then all work associated with the first
floor restrooms (Rooms 103 and 104) shall be completed no later than Ninety (90) calendar days afer
the date of written Notice to Proceed.
It is hereby understood and mutually agreed, by and between the Contractor and the
Owner, that the date of beginning, rate of progress and the time for completion of the work to be
done hereunder are ESSENTIAL CONDITIONS of this Contract. Contractor agrees that said work
shall be prosecuted regularly, diligently, and uninterruptedly at such rate of progress as will insure
full completion thereof within the time specified. It is expressly understood and agreed by and
between the Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the completion of the work described herein
is a reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic
range and construction conditions prevailing in this locality.
IF THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NEGLECT, FAIL OR REFUSE TO COMPLETE
THE WORK WITHIN THE TIME(S) HEREIN SPECIFlED, then the Contractor does hereby agree,
as a part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, to pay to the Owner the sum of Two
Hundred Fifty Dollars ($250.00), not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for such breach of
contract as hereinafter set forth, for each and every calendar day that the Contractor shall be in
default after the time(s) stipulated in the contract for completing the work.
A-I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
The said amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the
Owner because of the impracticability and extreme difficulty of fixing and ascertaining the actual
damages the Owner would, in such event, sustain, and said amounts shall be retained from time to
time by the Owner from current periodical estimates.
It is further agreed that time is of the essence of each and every portion of this
contract and the specifications wherein a definite portion and certain length of time is fixed for the
performance of any act whatsoever; and where under the contract an additional time is allowed for
the completion of any work, the new time limit fixed by extension shall be the essence of the
Contract.
ARTICLE III - PAYMENT
A. THE CONTRACT SUM
The Owner shall pay to the Contractor for the performance of the Contract the lump sum
amount as stated in the proposal, totaling $791,000.00. No variations shall be made in the
lump sum amount except as set forth in the specifications attached hereto.
B. PROGRESS PAYMENTS
The Owner will pay to the Contractor in the manner and at such times as set forth in the
General Conditions such amounts as required by the Contract Documents.
ARTICLE IV - ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT
A. Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and acceptance, the
Engineer shall within 10 days make such inspection, and when he finds the work acceptable
under the Contract and the Contract fully performed he wi II promptly issue a final certificate,
over his own signature, stating that the work required by the Contract has been completed
and is accepted by him under the terms and conditions thereof, and the entire balance found
to be due the Contractor, including the retained percentage, shall be paid to the Contractor
by the Owner within 30 days after the date of said final certificate.
B. Before final payment is due the Contractor shall submit evidence satisfactory to the Engineer
that all payrolls, material bills, and other indebtedness connected with the work have been
paid, except that in case of disputed indebtedness or liens the Contractor may submit in lieu
of evidence of payment a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner guaranteeing payment of all
such disputed amounts when adjudicated in cases where such payment has not already been
guaranteed by surety bond.
C. The making and acceptance ofthe final payment shall constitute a waiver of all claims by the
Owner other than those arising from unsettled liens, from faulty work appearing within 12
months after final payment, from requirements of the specifications, or from manufacturers'
guarantees. It shall also constitute a waiver of all claims by the Contractor except those
previously made and still unsettled.
D. If after the work has been substantially completed, full completion thereof is materially
delayed through no fault of the Contractor, and the Engineer, so certifies, the Owner shall
A-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
upon certificate of the Engineer, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the
balance due for that portion of the work fully completed and accepted.
Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except
that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have executed this Agreement, the day
and year first written above. ~
~ AUGUS
jJft By
l~k" .:T. o. d
~~I.liifU ~7
r;~. L .~ Ft-~,
~~ness . ~~
~ \,J ~~ f ~Ub6-")rk~ ~<
&t12fA
(SEAL)
ATT S1: CJt~
d ~
Witness
Title:
!~
Owner
"'
Address: 22tJ5 Y/~h&vd &.
~ Q-UlI?- cjtl9ClY
!
A-3
I
StRlul Surety
I
PERFORMANCE BOND
I Any singular reference to Contractor, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.
SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business):
CONTRACTOR (Name and Address):
I
1
I
I
R. W. Allen & Associates, Inc.
Post Office Box 3925
Augusta, GA 30904
St. Paul Fire & Marine Insurance Company
385 Washington Street
St. Paul, Minnesota
OWNER (Name and Address):
The City of Augusta, Purchasing Department
530 Greene Street
Augusta, GA 30911
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
Da~: April 1, ~004
Amount: $791,000.00
Description (Name and Location):
I
1
Augusta Commons Service Building, Phase 1-8
Broad Street
Augusta, Georgia
1 BOND
Date (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date): Apri,l 1, 2004
Amount: $791,000.00
I Modifications to this Bond: ~ None
o See Page 4
CONTRACTOR AS PRlNCIP AL SURETY
I Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (/ (Corporate Seal)
R. W. AlIe~ates, Inc. C St. Paul Fire & Mar.
I Signature: ~ ~ ~ ~ Signature:
Name and Title: _______Na-me and Title: -, ,.
~ Roy Sc borou..h, J ., Attorney-in-Fact
1 (Any additional signatures appear on page 4)
.~oy Scarborough & Associates, Inc.
rost Office Box 10106
Augusta, GA 30903-2706
1706-72 2-8338
I(FOR INFORMATION ONLY - Name, Address and Telephone)
AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect,
Engineer or other party):
Cranston Robertson & Whitehurst
452 Ellis Street
Augusta, GA 30901
IThe language in this document conforms exactly to the language used In the American Institute of Architects (AlA) A312 Performance Bond, December 1984 Edition,
Third Printing, March 1987. _
I
I
I
I
1. The Contractor and the Surety, jointly and
severally, bind themselves, their heirs,
executors, administrators, successors and assigns
to the Owner for the performance of the
Construction Contract, which is incorporated
herein by reference.
I
I
2. If the Contractor performs the Construction
Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall
have no obligation under this Bond, except to
participate in conferences as provided in
Subparagraph 3.1.
I
I
3. If there is no Owner Default, the Surety's
obligation under this Bond shall arise after:
I
3.1. The Owner has notified the Contractor
and the Surety at its address described in
Paragraph 10 below that the Owner is
considering declaring a Contractor Default
and has requested and attempted to arrange
a conference with the Contractor and the
Surety to be held not later than fifteen days
after receipt of such notice to discuss
methods of performing the Construction
Contract. If the Owner, the Contractor and
the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be
allowed a reasonable time to perform the
Construction Contract, but such an
agreement shall not waive the Owner's
right, if any, subsequently to declare a
Contractor Default; and
I
I
I
I
I
3.2. The Owner has declared a Contractor
Default and formally terminated the
Contractor's right to complete the contract.
Such Contractor Default shall not be
declared earlier than twenty days after the
Contractor and the Surety have received
notice as provided in Subparagraph 3.1; and
I
I
I
3.3. The Owner has agreed to pay the
Balance of the Contract Price to the Surety
in accordance with the terms of the
Construction Contract or to a contractor
selected to perform the Construction
Contract in accordance with the terms of
the contract with the Owner.
I
I
I
4. When the Owner has satisfied the conditions
of Paragraph 3, the Surety shall promptly and at
the Surety's expense, take one of the following
actions:
4.1. Arrange for the Contractor, with
consent of the Owner, to perform and
complete the Construction Contract; or
4.2. Undertake to perform and complete
the Construction Contract itself, through its
agents or through independent contractors;
or
4.3. Obtain bids or negotiated proposals
from qualified contractors acceptable to the
Owner for a contract for performance and
completion of the Construction Contract,
arrange for a contract to be prepared for
execution by the Owner and the contractor
selected with the Owner's concurrence, to
be secured with performance and payment
bonds executed by a qualified surety
equivalent to the bonds issued on the
Construction Contract, and pay to the
Owner the amount of damages as described
in Paragraph 6 in excess of the Balance of
the Contract Price incurred by the Owner
resulting from the Contractor's default; or
4.4. Waive its right to perform and
complete, arrange for completion, or obtain
a new contractor and with reasonable
promptness under the circumstances:
.1 After investigation, determine the
amount for which it may be liable to the
Owner and, as soon as practicable after
the amount is determined, tender
payment therefor to the Owner; or
.2 Deny liability in whole or in part
and notify the Owner citing reasons
therefor.
5. If the Surety does not proceed as provided
in Paragraph 4 with reasonable promptness, the
Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this
Bond fifteen days after receipt of an additional
2
I
I
I
written notice from the Owner to the Surety
demanding that the Surety perform its
obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall
be entitled to enforce any remedy available to
the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided
in Subparagraph 4.4, and the Owner refuses the
payment tendered or the Surety has denied
liability, in whole or in part, without further
notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any
remedy available to the Owner.
I
I
I
6. After the Owner has terminated the
Contractor's right to complete the Construction
Contract, and if the Surety elects to act under
Subparagraph 4.1, 4.2, or 4.3 above, then the
responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall
not be greater than those of the Contractor under
the Construction Contract, and the
responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall
not be greater than those of the Owner under the
Construction Contract. To the limit of the
amount of this Bond, but subject to commitment
by the Owner of the Balance of the Contract
Price to mitigation of costs and damages on the
Construction Contract, the Surety is obligated
without duplication for:
I
I
I
I
I
6.1. The responsibilities of the Contractor
for correction of defective work and
completion of the Construction Contract;
I
6.2. Additional legal, design professional
and delay costs resulting from the
Contractor's Default, and resulting from the
actions or failure to act of the Surety under
Paragraph 4; and
I
I
6.3. Liquidated damages, or if no
liquidated damages are specified in the
Construction Contract, actual damages
caused by delayed performance or non-
performance of the Contractor.
I
I
7. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner
or others for obligations of the Contractor that
are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and
the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be
reduced or set off on account of any such
unrelated obligations. No right of action shall
accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other
I
I
I
than the Owner or its heirs, executors,
administrators or successors.
8. The Surety hereby waives notice of any
change, including changes of time, to the
Construction Contract or to related subcontracts,
purchase orders and other obligations.
9. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this
Bond may be instituted in any court of
competent jurisdiction in the location in which
the work or part of the work is located and shall
be instituted within two years after Contractor
Default or within two years after the Contractor
ceased working or within two years after the
Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations
under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the
provisions of this. Paragraph are void or
prohibited by law, the minimum period of
limitation available to sureties as a defense in
the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.
10. Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the
Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the
address shown on the signature page.
11. When this Bond has been furnished to
comply with a statutory or other legal
requirement in the location where the
construction was to be performed, any provision
in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or
legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated
herein. The intent is that this Bond shall be
construed as a statutory bond and not as a
common law bond.
12. DEFINITIONS
12.1. Balance of the Contact Price: The
total amount payable by the Owner to the
Contractor under the Construction Contract
after all proper adjustments have been
made, including allowance to the
Contractor of any amounts received or to be
received by the Owner in settlement of
insurance or other claims for damages to
which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by
all valid and proper payments made to or on
behalf of the Contractor under the
Construction Contract.
3
I
I
I
I
I
12.2. Construction Contract: The
agreement between the Owner and the
Contractor identified on the signature page,
including all Contract Documents and
changes thereto.
12.3. Contractor Default: Failure of the
Contractor, which has neither been
remedied nor waived, to perform or
I
I
otherwise to comply with the terms of the
Construction Contract.
12.4. Owner Default: Failure of the
Owner, which has neither been remedied
nor waived, to pay the Contractor as
required by the Construction Contract or to
perform and complete or comply with the
other terms thereof.
MODIFICATIONS TO THIS BOND ARE AS FOLLOWS:
I
I
I
I
I
(Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the
cover page.)
I
CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL (Corporate Seal)
Company:
I
I
I
Signature:
Name and Title:
Address:
SURETY
Company:
(Corporate Seal)
Signature:
Name and Title: Roy Scarborough, Jr., Attorney-in-Fact
Address:
I
I
I
4
I
I
StPdul Surety
I
I
.1
PAYMENT BOND
Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable.
CONTRACTOR (Name and Address):
SURETY (Name and Principal Place of Business):
R. W. Allen & Associates, Inc.
Post Office Box 3925
Augusta, GA 30904
St. Paul Fire & Marine Insurance Company
385 Washington Street
S1. Paul, Minnesota
I
I
I
I
OWNER (Name and Address):
The City of Augusta, Purchasing Department
530 Greene Street
Augusta, GA 30911
CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT
Date: April 1, 2004
Amount: $791,000.00
Description (Name and Location):
I
Augusta Commons Service Building, Phase I-B
Broad Street
Augusta, Georgia
I
BOND
Date: (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date): April 1, 2004
Amount: $791,000.00
Modifications to this Bond: G None
o See Page 4
I
I
CONTRACTOR AS PRlNCIP AL
Company: (Corporate Seal)
R. W. AJIen & Associates, Inc.
Signatu:==X _ - ~ ~ Signature:
Name and Title: ~ame and Title:
(Any additional signatures appear on page 4)
I
I
I
(FOR INFORMATION ONLY -- Name, Address and Telephone)
AGENT or BROKER:
I
Roy Scarborough & Associates, Inc.
Post Office Box 10106
Augusta, GA 30903-2706
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE (Architect, Engineer or
other party): C b & W . h
ranston Ro ertson hlte urst
452 Ellis Street
Augusta, GA 30901
"fnr ...,...... 0........0
I
I
The languaga In this document confonns exactly to the language used In the American Institute of Architects (AlA) A312 Payment Bond, December 1984 Edition, Third
Printing, March 1987.
I
I
I
1. The Contractor and the Surety, joiritly and
severally, bind themselves, their. heirs,
executors, administrators, successors and assigns
to the Owner to pay for labor, materials and
equipment furnished for use in the performance
of the Construction Contract, which is
incorporated herein by reference.
I
I
2. With respect to the Owner, this obligation
shall be null and void if the Contractor:
I
I
2.1 Promptly makes payment, directly or
indirectly, for all sums due Claimants, and
2.2 Defends, indemnifies and holds
harmless the Owner from claims, demands,
liens or suits by any person or entity whose
claim, demand, lien or suit is Jor the
payment for labor, materials or equipment
furnished for use in the performance of the
Construction Contract, provided the Owner
has promptly notified the Contractor and
the Surety (at the address described in
Paragraph 12) of any claims, demands,
liens or suits and tendered defense of such
claims, demands, liens or suits to the
Contractor and the Surety, and provided
there is no Owner Default.
I
I
I
I
I
3. With respect to Claimants, this obligation
shall be null and void if the Contractor promptly
makes payment, directly or indirectly, for all
sums due.
I
4. The Surety shall have no obligation to
Claimants under this Bond until:
I
4.1 . Claimants who are employed by or
have a direct contract with the Contractor
have given notice to the Surety (at the
address described in Paragraph 12) and sent
a copy, or notice thereof, to the Owner,
stating that a claim is being made under this
Bond and, with substantial accuracy, the
amount of the claim.
I
I
I
4.2 Claimants who do not have a direct
contract with the Contractor:
I
I
.1 Have furnished written notice to
the Contractor and sent a copy, or
notice thereof, to the Owner, within
90 days after having last performed
labor or last furnished materials or
equipment included in the claim
stating, with substantial accuracy,
the amount of the claim and the
name of the party to whom the
materials were furnished or
supplied or for whom the labor was
done or performed; and
.2 Have either received a rejection in
whole or in part from the
Contractor, or not received within
30 days of furnishing the above
notice any communication from the
Contractor by which the Contractor
has indicated the claim will be paid
directly or indirectly; and
.3 Not having been paid within the
above 30 days, have sent a written
notice to the Surety (at the address
described in Paragraph 12) and sent
a copy, or notice thereof, to the
Owner, stating that a claim is being
made under this Bond and
enclosing a copy of the previous
written notice furnished to the
Contractor.
5. If a notice required by Paragraph 4 is given
by the Owner to the Contractor or to the Surety,
that is sufficient compliance.
6. When the Claimant has satisfied the
conditions of Paragraph 4, the Surety shall
promptly and at the Surety's expense take the
following actions:
6.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a
copy to the Owner, within 45 days after
receipt of the claim, stating the amounts
that are undisputed and the basis for
challenging any amounts that are disputed.
6.2 Payor arrange for payment of any
undisputed amounts.
2
I
I
I
7. The Surety's total obligation shall not exceed
the amount of this Bond, and the amount of this
Bond shall be credited for any payments made in
good faith by the Surety.
I
I
8. Amounts owed by the Owner to the
Contractor under the Construction Contract shall
be used for the performance of the Construction
Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any
Construction Performance Bond. By the
Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting
this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the
Contractor in the performance of the
Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy
obligations of the Contractor and the Surety
under this Bond, subject to the Owner's priority
to use the funds for the completion of the work.
I
I
I
I
9. The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner,
Claimants or others for obligations of the
Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction
Contract. The Owner shall not be liable for
payment of any costs or expenses of any
Claimant under this Bond, and shall have under
this Bond no obligations to make payments to,
give notices on behalf of, or otherwise have
obligations to Claimants under this Bond.
I
I
I
10. The Surety hereby waives notice of any
change, including changes of time, to the
Construction Contract or to related subcontracts,
purchase orders and other obligations.
I
11. No suit or action shall be commenced by a
Claimant under this Bond other than in a court
of competent jurisdiction in the location in
which the work or part of the work is located or
after the expiration of one year from the date (I)
on which the Claimant gave the notice required
by Subparagraph 4.1 or Clause 4.2.3, or (2) on
which the last labor or service was performed by
anyone or the last materials or equipment were
furnished by anyone under the Construction
Contract, whichever of (I) or (2) first occurs. If
the provisions of this Paragraph are void or
prohibited by law, the minimum period of
limitation available to sureties as a defense in
the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable.
I
I
I
I
I
I
12. Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the
Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the
address shown on the signature page. Actual
receipt of notice by Surety, the Owner or the
Contractor, however accomplished, shall be
sufficient compliance as of the date received at
the address shown on the signature page.
13. When this Bond has been furnished to
comply with a statutory or other legal
requirement in the location where the
construction was to be performed, any provision
in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or
legal requirement shall be deemed deleted
herefrom and provisions conforming to such
statutory or other legal requirement shall be
deemed incorporated herein. The intent is that
this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond
and not as a common law bond.
14. Upon request by any person or entity
appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this
Bond, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a
copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be
made.
15. DEFINITIONS
15.1 Claimant: An individual or entity
having a direct contract with the Contractor
or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to
furnish labor, materials or equipment for
use in the performance of the Contract.
The intent of this Bond shall be to include
without limitation in the terms "labor,
materials or equipment" that part of water,
gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline,
telephone service or rental equipment used
in the Construction Contract, architectural
and engineering services required for
performance of the work of the Contractor
and the Contractor's subcontractors, and all
other items for which a mechanic's lien
may be asserted in the jurisdiction where
the labor, materials or equipment were
furnished.
15.2 Construction Contract: The
agreement between the Owner and the
Contractor identified on the signature page,
3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
including all Contract Documents and
changes thereto.
required by the Construction Contract or to
perform and complete or comply with the
other terms thereof.
15.3 Owner Default: Failure of the
Owner, which has neither been remedied
nor waived, to pay the Contractor as
MODIFICATIONS TO THIS BOND ARE AS FOLLOWS:
(Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the
cover page).
CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL
Company: (Corporate Seal)
SURETY
Company:
(Corporate Seal)
Signature:
Name and Title:
Address:
Signature:
Name and Title:
Address:
4
I.
I
TheStRlul
POWER OF ATTORNEY
1
Seaboard Surety Company
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company
St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company
St. Paull\-Iercury Insurance Company
United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
1
Power of Attorney 1\0.
21010
Certificate 1\0. 16 8 56 4 4
1
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Seaboard Surety Company is a corporation duly organized under lhe laws of lhe Stale of New York. and that
St. Paul Fire and l\'larine Insurance Company. St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company and St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under
the laws of lhe Slate of Minnesota. and that United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the Slate of Maryland, and
that Fidelity and GuaranIY Insurance Company is a corporalion duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelily and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters.
Inc. is a corporal ion duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein col/ectil'e~1' called the "Companies "), and lhat the Companies do hereby make.
constilule and appoint
I
Roy Scarborough, Jr., Eugene A. Cronic and Alicia J. Rhoades
1
1
Augusta
Georgia
1
oflhe Cily of , State , their lrue and lawful Atlorney(s)-in-Fact.
each in their separale capacily if more lhan one is named above, 10 sign its name as surely 10, and to execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, undertakings.
contracts and olher written instrumenIs in the nalure lhereof on behalf of lhe Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelily of persons, guaranteeing the
performance of eontracts and execuling or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law.
1
IN WITI\ESS WHEREOF, lhe Companies have caused this inslrumenl to be signed and sealed lhis
18th
day of
March
200J
1
Seaboard Surety Company
St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company
St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company
St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company
United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company
Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.
I
@ PETER W. CARMAN, V;" Pre,;d,",
~er/~
I
State of Ivlaryland
City of Baltimore
THOMAS E. HUIBREGTSE. Assistant Secretary
I
18th March 2003
On this day of , before me, the undersigned officer, personally appeared Peter W Carman and
Thomas E. Huibregtse, who acknowledged themselves 10 be the Vice Prcsidenl and Assistant Secretary, respectively, of Seaboard Surety Company, St. Paul Fire and
Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Uniled States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, Fidelity and
Guaranty Insurance Company, and Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc.; and lhat the seals affixed to the foregoing instrument are the corporate seals of
said Companies; and lhal lhey, as such, being aUlhorized so 10 do, executed lhe foregoing inslrument for the purposes lherein contained by signing the names of the
corporations by lhemselves as duly aUlhorized officers.
I
I
In Witness Whereof, I hereunlo set my hand and official seal.
~,t~.~
I .
REBECCA EASLEY-ONOKALA. Notary Public
My Commission expires the I sl day of July, 2006.
i
86203 Rev. 7-2002 Printed in U.SA
...r- ?~
Public Works and Engineering Department
Teresa C. Smith, P.E., Director
Engineering Division
530 Greene Street, Room 701
Augusta, Georgia 30911
(706) 821-1714 Fax (706) 821-1708
www.augustaga.gov
Errick L. Thompson, P.E., Assistant Director
DATE:
April 6, 2004
TO:
R. W. Allen & Associates, Inc.
Post Office Box 3925
Augusta, GA 30904
SUBJECT: NOTICE TO PROCEED
PROJECT: AUGUSTA COMMON SERVICE BUILDING, PHASE I-B
Gentlemen:
You are hereby notified to commence work in accordance with the Agreement, within Ten (10)
calendar days following the date first written above, and you are to complete the work within One
Hundred Fifty (150) consecutive calendar days after the date of this notice. The date set for
completion of all work is therefore September 3, 2004
AUg:1GUSTA- :~=UN~Y CO ISSION
BY._~' 20b
. /
TITLE: Director of Public Works and Engineering
*** ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE***
Receipt of the above NOTICE OF AWARD is hereby
acknowledged by
this the day of ,20_
TITLE:
'1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
AIoIi'- .~
'::' ~~
SECTION NP
NOTICE TO PROCEED
DATE
TO
SUBJECT:
PROJECT:
NOTICE TO PROCEED
AUGUSTA COMMON SERVICE BUILDING, PHASE I-B
Gentlemen:
You are hereby notified to commence work in accordance with the Agreement, within
Ten (lQ) calendar days following the date first written above, and you are to complete the work.
within One Hundred Fifty (150) consecutive calendar days after the date of this notice. The date set
for completion of all work is therefore
AUGUST A-RICHMOND COUNTY COMMlSSION
BY:
TITLE:
*** ACCEPTANCE OF NOTICE ***
Receipt of the above NOTICE OF AWARD is hereby
acknowledged by
this the
day of
,20_<
TITLE:
OWNER
NP-l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-O 1.
GC-02.
GC-03.
GC-04.
GC-05.
GC-06.
GC-07.
GC-08.
GC-09.
GC-I0.
GC-l1.
GC-12.
GC-13 .
GC-14.
GC-15.
GC-16.
GC-l 7.
GC-18.
GC-19.
GC-20.
GC-21.
GC-22.
GC-23.
GC-24.
GC-25.
GC-26.
GC-27.
GC-28.
GC-29.
GC-30.
GC-31.
GC-32.
GC-33.
GC-34.
GC-35.
GC-36.
SECTION GC
GENERAL CONDITIONS
INDEX TO ARTICLES OF GENERAL CONDITIONS
Section
Page No. .
Definitions ........................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Additional Instructions and Detail Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Schedules, Reports and Records ...................................... 5
Drawings and Specifications ............ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Shop Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Materials, Services and Facilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 7
Inspection and Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Substitutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Patents .......................................................... 9
Surveys, Permits and Regulations ..................................... 9
Protection of Work, Property and Persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Supervision by Contractor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . '.' . . . . . . . 10
Changes in the Work .............................................. 11
Changes in Contract Price .......................................... 11
Time for Completion and Liquidated Damages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Correction of Work .;............................................. 12
Subsurface Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Suspension of Work, Termination and Delay ........................... 13
Payments to Contractor ............................................. 15
Acceptance of Final Payment as Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Insurance ....................................................... 16
Contract Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Indemnification .................................................. 19
Separate Contracts ................................................ 19
Subcontracting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Engineer's Authority .............................................. 20
Land and Rights-of-Way ........................................... 21
Guarantee . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
I
Taxes .......................................................... 21
I
Work Adjacent to Railway or Other Property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
I
Order and Discipline .............................................. 22
. I
Warning Devices and Signs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
I
Special Restrictions ............................................... 22
I
As-Built Drawings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
I
Contractor Not to Hire Employees of the Owner......................... 22
GC-l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-37.
GC-38.
GC-39.
GC-40.
GC-41.
GC-42.
GC-43.
GC-44.
GC-45.
GC-46.
GC-47.
GC-48.
GC-49.
GC-50.
Drawings .......;............................................... 22
Field Office Facilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Rights-of-Way. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Estimate of Quantities ............................................. 23
Existing Structures and Utilities ..................................... 23
Contractor's Breakdown of Lump Sum Payment Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 .
Prior Use By Owner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Cleaning Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Maintenance of Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Maintenance of Access ............................................ 24
Erosion Control and Restoration of Property. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Bypassing Sewage ................................................ 25
Safety and Health Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Pre-Construction Conference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
GC-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-Ol.
DEFINITIONS:
Wherever used in the Contract Documents, the following terms shall have the
meanings indicated which shall be applicable to both the singular and plural thereof.
1. ADDENDA: Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the execution of the
Agreement which modify or interpret the Contract Documents, Drawings and
Specifications, by addition, deletion, clarifications or corrections.
2. BID: The offer or proposal of the Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting.
forth the prices for the work to be performed.
3. BIDDER: Any person, firm or corporation submitting a bid for the work.
4. BONDS: Bid, Performance and Payment Bonds and other instruments of security
furnished by the Contractor and his Surety in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
5. CHANGE ORDER: A written order to the Contractor authorizing an addition,
deletion or revision in the work within the general scope ofthe Contract Documents
or authorizing an adjustment in the contract price or contract time.
6. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: The contract including Advertisement for Bids,
Information for Bidders, Proposal, Bid Bond, Notice of award, Agreement,
Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Notice to Proceed, Change Order, General
Conditions, Supplemental General Conditions, Special Conditions, Technical
Specifications, Drawings and Addenda.
7. CONTRACT PRICE: The total monies payable to the Contractor under the terms
and conditions of the Contract Documents.
8. CONTRACT TIME: The number of calendar days stated in the Contract Documentsi
for the completion of the work. .
9. LIFE OF THE CONTRACT: The total duration of the contract from Notice to
Proceed to completion of all the work.
10. CONTRACTOR: The person, firm or corporation with whom the Owner has
executed the Agreement.
GC-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
11. DRAWINGS: The part of the Contract Documents which show the characteristics
and scope of the work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved
by the Engineer.
12. ENGINEER: The person, firm or corporation named as such in the Contract
Documents.
13. FIELD ORDER: A written order effecting a change in the work not involving an
adjustment in the contract price or an extension of the contract time issued by the
Engineer to the Contractor during construction.
14. NOTICE OF AWARD: The written notice of the acceptance of the Bid from the
Owner to the successful Bidder.
15. NOTICE TO PROCEED: Written communication issued by the Owner to the
Contractor authorizing him to proceed with the work and establishing the date of
commencement of the work.
16. OWNER: A public or quasi-public body or authority, corporation, association,
partnership or individual for whom the work is to be performed.
17. PROJECT: The undertaking to be performed as provided In the Contract
Documents.
18. RESIDENT PROJECT REPRESENTATIVE: The authorized representative ofthe
Owner who is assigned to the project site or any part thereof.
19. SHOP DRAWINGS: All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, brochures, schedules, and
other data which are prepared by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, Manufacturer,
Supplier or Distributor, which illustrate how specific portions of the work shall be
fabricated or installed.
20. SPECIFICATIONS: A part of the Contract Documents consisting of written
descriptions of a technical nature or materials, equipment, construction systems,
standards and workmanship.
21. SUBCONTRACTOR: An individual, firm or corporation having a direct contract
with the Contractor or any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the
work at the site.
22. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION: That date as certified by the Engineer when the
. construction of the project or a specified part can be utilized for the purposes for
which it is intended.
GC-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
23.
24.
25.
26.
GC-02.
1.
2.
GC-03.
1.
2.
SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS: Modifications and/or additions to
the General Conditions of a specific nature generally aimed at the specific contract
of which it is a part.
SUPPLIERS: Any person, supplier or organization who supplies materials or
equipment for the work, including that fabricated to a special design, but who does
not perform labor at the site.
WORK: All labor necessary to produce the construction required by the Contract
Documents and all materials and equipment incorporated or to be incorporated in the
project.
WRITTEN NOTICE: Any notice to any party of the Agreement relative to any part
of this Agreement in writing and considered delivered and the service thereof.
completed, when posted by certified or registered mail to the said party. at his last
given address or delivered in person to said party or his authorized representative on
the work.
ADDITIONAL INSTRUCTIONS AND DETAIL DRA\VINGS:
The Contractor may be furnished additional instructions and detail drawings, by the
Engineer, as necessary to carry out the work required by the Contract Documents.
The additional drawings and instructions thus supplied will become a part of the
Contract Documents. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the
additional detail drawings and instructions.
SCHEDULES. REPORTS AND RECORDS:
The Contractor shall submit to the Owner such schedule of quantities and costs,
progress schedules, payrolls', reports, estimates, records and other data as the Owner
may request concerning the work performed or to be performed.
Prior to the first partial payment estimate, the Contractor shall submit schedules'
showing the order in which he proposes to carry on the work, including dates at
which he will start the various parts of the work, estimated date of completion of
each part and as applicable: .
2.1 the dates at which special detail drawings will be required; and
2.2 respective dates for submission of shop drawings, the beginning of
manufacture, the testing and the installation of materials, supplies and
equipment.
GC-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-04.
GC-OS.
3.
The Contractor shall also submit a schedule of payments that he anticipates he will
earn during the course of the work.
DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS;
1.
The intent of the drawings and specifications is that the Contractor shall furnish all
labor, materials, tools, equipment and transportation necessary for the proper
execution of the work in accordance with the Contract Documents and all incidental
work necessary to complete the project in an acceptable manner, ready for us,
occupancy or operation by the Owner.
2.
In case of conflict between the drawings and specifications, the specifications shall
govern. Figure dimensions on drawings shall govern over general drawings.
3.
Any discrepancies found between the drawings and specifications and site conditions
or any inconsistencies 0 r ambiguities in the d rawingso r specifications shall be
immediately reported to the Engineer, in writing, who shall promptly correct such
inconsistencies or ambiguities in writing. Work done by the Contractor after his
discovery of such discrepancies, inconsistencies or ambiguities shall be done at the
Contractor's risk.
4.
All work that may be called for in the specifications and not shown on the drawings,
or shown and not called for in the specifications, shall be executed and furnished by
the Contractor as if described in both these ways and should any work or material be
required which is not detailed in the specifications or drawings, either directly or
indirectly, but which is nevertheless necessary for the proper carrying out of the
intent thereof, the Contractor is to understand the same to be implied and required
and shall perform all such work and furnish any such material as fully as ifthey were
particularly delineated or described.
5.
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor, by careful examination, has satisfied
himselfas to the nature and location of the work, the conformation of the ground, the
character, quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of
equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the
work, the general and local conditions and all other matters which can in any way .
affect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any
officer, agent or employee of the Owner, either before or after the execution of this
contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained.
SHOP DRAWINGS:
1.
The Contractor shall provide shop drawings as may be necessary for the prosecution
of the work as required by the Contract Documents. The Engineer shall promptly
review all shop drawings. The Engineer's approval of any shop drawings shall not
release the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the Contract.
GC-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-06.
GC-07.
Documents. The approval of any shop drawing which substantially deviates from the
requirement of the Contract Documents shall be evidenced by a Change Order.
2.
When submitted for the Engineer's review, shop drawings shall bear the Contractor's
certification that he has reviewed, checked and approved the shop drawings and that
they are in conformance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
3.
Portions of the work that require shop drawing or sample submission shall not begin
until the shop drawing or submission has been approved by the Engineer. A copy of
each approved shop drawing and each approved sample shall be kept in good order
by the Contractor at the site and shall be available to the Engineer.
MATERIALS. SERVICES AND FACILITIES:
1.
It is understood that, except as otherwise specifically stated in the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, labor, tools,
equipment, water, light, power, transportation, supervision, temporary construction
of any nature and all other services and facilities of any nature whatsoever necessary
to execute, complete and deliver the work within the specified time.
2.
Materials and equipment shall be so stored as to insure the preservation of their
quality and fitness for the work. Stored materials and equipment to be incorporated
in the work shall be located so as to facilitate prompt inspection.
3.
Manufactured articles, materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected,
erected, used, cleaned and conditioned as directed by the manufacturer.
4.
Materials, supplies or equipment shall be in accordance with samples submitted by
the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.
5.
Materials, supplies or equipment to be incorporated into the work and purchased by
the Contractor of the Subcontractor will be subject to a chattel mortgage or under a
conditional sale contract or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the
seller.
INSPECTION AND TESTING:
1.
All materials and equipment used in the construction of the project shall be subject
. to adequate inspection and testing in accordance with generally accepted standards.
The Contractor shaH provide, at his expeose, the necessary testing and inspectiJ
services required by the Contract Documents, unless otherwise provided. I
2.
GC-7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
9..
3.
The Owner shall provide all other inspection and testing services required by the
Contract Documents.
4.
If the Contract Documents, laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any
public authority having jurisdiction require any work to specifically be inspected,
tested or approved by someone other than the Contractor, the Contractor will give the
Engineer timely notice of readiness. The Contractor will then furnish the Engineer
the required certificates of inspection, testing or approval.
5.
Neither observation by the Engineer nor inspections, tests or approvals by persons
other than the Contractor shall relieve the Contractor from his obligations to perfonn
the work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
6.
The Engineer and his representatives will at all times have access to the work. In .
addition, authorized representatives and agents of any participating Federal or State
Agency shall be pennitted to inspect all work, materials, payrolls, records of
personnel, invoices of materials and other relevant data and records. The Contractor
will provide proper facilities for such access and observation ofthe work and also for
any inspection or testing thereof.
7.
If any work is covered contrary to the written request of the Engineer, it must, if
requested by the Engineer, be uncovered for his observation and replaced at the
Contractor1s expense.
8.
If any work has been covered which the Engineer has not specifically requested to
observe prior to its being covered or if the Engineer considers it necessary or
advisable that covered work be inspected or tested by others, the Contractor at the
Engineer's request, will uncover, expose or otherwise make avai lab Ie for observation,
inspection or testing as the Engineer may require, that portion of the work in
question, furnishing all necessary labor, materials, tools and equipment. If it is found
that such work is defective, the Contractor will bear all the expenses of such
uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory
reconstruction. If, however, such work is not found to be defective, the Contractor
w~ll be allowed an increase in the contract price or an extension of the contract time,
or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection,
testing and reconstruction and an appropriate change order shall be issued.
The Contractor shall give the Engineer 24 hours notice of starting any new work. No
work shall be done or materials used without suitable supervision and inspection by
the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with necessary samples of
material for testing purposes.
GC-8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-08.
GC-09.
GC-IO.
2.
SUBSTITUTIONS:
1.
When a material, article or piece of equipment is identified on the drawings or
specifications by reference to brand name or catalogue number, the perfomlance or
other salient requirements and that other products of equal capacities, quality and
function shall be considered. The Contractor may recommend the substitution of a
material, article or piece of equipment of equal substance and function for those
referred to in the Contract Documents by reference to brand name or catalogue
number and if, in the opinion of the Engineer, such material, article or piece of
equipment is of equal substance and function to that specified, the Engineer may
approve its substitution and use by the Contractor. Any cost differential shall be
deducted from the contract price and the Contract Documents shall be appropriately'
modified by change order. The Contractor warrants that if substitutes are approved,
no major changes in the function or general design of the project will result.
Incidental changes or extra component parts required to accommodate the substitute
will be made by the Contractor without a change in the contract price or contract
time.
PATENTS:
1.
The Contractor shall pay all applicable royalties and license fees. He shall defend all
suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and save the Owner harmless
from loss on account thereof except that the Owner shall be responsible for any such
loss when a particular process, design or the product of a manufacturer or
manufacturers is specified, but ifthe Contractor has reason to believe that the design,
process or product specified is an infringement of a patent, he shall be responsible
for such loss unless he promptly gives such information to the Engineer.
SURVEYS. PERMITS AND REGULATIONS:
1.
The Owner shall furnish all land surveys and establish all base lines for locating the
principal component parts of the work together with a suitable number of
benchmarks adjacent to the work as shown in the Contract Documents. From the
information provided by the Owner, unless otherwise specified in the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall develop and make all detail surveys needed for
construction such as slope stakes, batter boards, stakes for pile locations and other
working points, lines, elevations and cut sheets.
The Contractor shall carefully preserve benchmarks, reference points and stakes and
in case of willful or careless destruction, he shall be charged with the resulting
expense and shall be responsible for any mistakes that may b e caused by their
unnecessary loss or disturbance.
GC-9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-l1.
3.
Permits and licenses of a temporary nature necessary for the prosecution of the work
shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor. Permits, licenses and easements for
permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities shall be secured and
paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall give all
notices and comply with all laws, ordinances, rules and regulations bearing on the
conduct of the work as drawn and specified. If the Contractor observes that the
Contract Documents are at variance therewith, he shall promptly noti fy the Engineer
in writing and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in Section 13,
Changes in the Work.
PROTECTION OF WORK. PROPERTY AND PERSONS:
1.
The Contractor will be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all
safety precautions and programs in connection with the work. He will take all
necessary precautions for the safety of and will provide the necessary protection to
prevent damage, injury or loss to all employees on the work and other persons who
may be affected thereby, all the work and all materials or equipment to be
incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site or other property at the site
or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways,
structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the
course of construction.
2.
The Contractor will comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations
and orders of any public body having jurisdiction. He will erect and maintain, as
required by the conditions and progress of the work, all necessary safeguards for
safety and protection. He will notify the owners of adjacent utilities when
prosecution of the work may affect them. The Contractor will remedy all damage,
injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by the
Contractor, and subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of
them or anyone. for whose acts any of them are liable, except damage or loss
attributable to the fault of the Contract Documents or to the acts or omissions of the
Owner or the Engineer or anyone employed by either of them or anyone for whose
acts either of them may be liable and not attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole
or in part, to the fault or negligence of the Contractor.
3.
In emergencies affecting the safety of persons or the work or property at the site or
adjacent thereto, the Contractor, without special instructions or authorization from
the Engineer or Owner, shall act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. He
will give the Engineer prompt written notice of any significant changes in the wor~
I
or deviations from the Contract Documents caused thereby and a Change Order shall
be issued covering the changes and deviations involved.
4.
The work under this Contract in every respect shall be at the risk of the Contractor
until finished and acc~pted, except to damage or injury caused directly by th~
Owner's agents or employees.
GC-IO
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-12.
GC-B.
GC-14.
GC-15.
1.
SUPERVISION BY CONTRACTOR:
1.
The Contractor will supervise and direct the work. He will be solely responsible for
the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. The
Contractor will employ and maintain on the work a qualified supervisor or
superintendent who shall have been designated in writing by the Contractor as the
Contractor's representative at the site. The supervisor shall have full authority to act
on the behalf ofthe Contractor and all communications given to the supervisor shall
be as binding as if given to the Contractor. The supervisor shall be present on the site
at all times as required to perform adequate supervision and coordination of the work.
CHANGES IN THE WORK:
1.
The Owner may at any time as the need arises, order changes within the scope of the .
work without invalidating the Agreement. If such changes increase or decrease the
amount due under the Contract Documents or in the time required for performance
of the work, an equitable adjustment shall be authorized by Change Order.
2.
The Engineer, also, may at any time, by issuing a field order, make changes in the
details of the work. The Contractor shall proceed with the performance of any
changes in the work so ordered by the Engineer unless the Contractor believes that
such field order entitles him to a change in the contract price or time or both, in
which event he shall give the Engineer written notice thereof within ten (10) days
after the receipt of the ordered change pending the receipt of an executed change
order or further instruction from the Owner.
CHANGES IN CONTRACT PRICE:
1.
The contract price may be changed only by a change order. The value of any work
covered by a change order or of any claim for increase or decrease in the contract
price shalI be determined by one or more of the following methods in the order of .
precedence listed below:
1.1 Unit prices previously approved.
1.2 An agreed lump sum.
1.3 The actual cost for labor, direct overhead, materials, supplies, equipment and
other services necessary to complete the work. In addition there shall be
added an amount to be agreed upon but not to exceed fifteen (15) percent of
the actual cost of the work to cover the cost of general overhead and profit.
TIME FOR COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES:
The date of beginning and the time for completion of the work are essential
conditions of the Contract Documents and the work embraced shall be commenced
on the date specified in the Notice to Proceed.
GC-ll
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
GC-16.
2.
3.
2.
The Contractor will proceed with the work at such rate of progress to insure full
completion within the contract time. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and
between the Contractor and the Owner, that the contract time for the completion of
the work described herein is a reasonable time, taking into consideration the average
climatic and economic conditions and other factors prevailing in the locality of the
work.
3.
lfthe Contractor shall fail to complete the work within the contract time or extension
oftime granted by the Owner, then the Contractor will pay to the Owner the amount
for liquidated damages as specified in the Agreement for each calendar day that the
Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated in the Contract Documents.
4.
The Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated damages or any excess cost when
the delay in completion of the work is due to the following and the Contractor has
promptly given written notice of such delay to the Owner or Engineer.
4.1 To any preference, priority or allocation order duly issued by the Owner.
4.2 To unforeseeable causes beyond the control and without the fault of
negligence of the Contractor, including but not restricted to, acts of God or
of the public enemy, acts of the Owner, acts of another Contractor in the
performance of a contract with the Owner, fires, floods, epidemics,
quarantine restrictions, strikes, freight embargoes and abnormal and
unforeseeable weather; and
4.3 To any delays of subcontractors occasioned by any of the causes specified in
Paragraphs 4.1 and 4.2 of this Article.
CORRECTION OF WORK:
1.
The Contractor shall promptly remove from the premises all work rejected by the
Engineer for failure to comply with the Contract Documents, whether incorporated
in the construction or not and the Contractor shall promptly replace and re-execute
the work in accordance with the Contract Documents and without expense to the
Owner and shall bear the expense of making good all work of other Contractors
destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement.
All removal and replacement work shall be done at the Contractor's expense. If the
Contractor does not take action to remove such rejected work within ten (10) days
after receipt of written notice, the Owner may remove such work and store the
materials atthe expense of the Contractor.
Any omissions or failure on the part of the Engineer to disapprove or reject any work
or material shall not be construed to be an acceptance of any defective work or.,
material. The Contractor shall remove, at his own expense and shall rebuild and
GC-12
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-17.
GC-18.
replace same without extra charge and in default thereofthe same may be done by the
Owner at the Contractor's expense or in case the Engineer shall not consider the
defect of sufficient importance to require the Contractor to rebuild or replace any
imperfect work or material, he shall have the power and is hereby authorized to make
an equitable deduction from the stipulated price.
SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS:
1.
The Contractor shall promptly and before such conditions are disturbed, except in the
event of an emergency, notify the Owner by written notice of:
1.1 Subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing materially from
those indicated in the Contract Documents.
1.2 Unknown physical conditions at the site, of an unusual nature, differing
materially from those.ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as
inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents.
2.
The Owner shall promptly investigate the conditions and if he finds that such
conditions do so materially differ and cause an increase or decrease in the cost of, or
in the time required, for performance of the work, an equitable adjustment shall be
made and the Contract Documents shall be modified by a Change Order. Any claim
of the Contractor for adjustment hereunder shall not be allowed unless he has given
the required written notice; provided that the Owner may, ifhe determines the facts
so justify, consider and adjust any such claims asserted before the date of final
payment.
SUSPENSION OF THE WORK. TERMINATION AND DELAY:
1.
The Owner may, at any time and without cause, suspend the work or any portion
thereof for a period of not more than ninety days or such further time as agreed upon
by the Contractor, by written notice to the Contractor. The Engineer shall fix the date
on which work shall be resumed. The Contractor will resume that work on the date
so fixed. T he Contractor w ill be allowed an. increase in the contract p rice, an
extension of the contract time, or both, directly attributable to any suspension.
2.
If the Contractor is adjudged bankrupt or insolvent, or if he makes a general
assignment for the benefit of his creditors or if a trustee or receiver is appointed for
the Contractor or for any of his property or ifhe files a petition to take advantage of
any d ebtor1s act tor eorganize under the bankruptcy 0 r a pplicable laws 0 r if h e
repeatedly fails to supply sufficient skilled workmen or suitable materials or
equipment, or ifhe repeatedly fails to make prompt payments to subcontractors or for
. labor, materials or equipment Or ifhe disregards laws, ordinances, rules, regulations
or orders of any public body having jurisdiction of the work or if he disregards the
authority of the Engineer, or if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor fails
GC-13
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
to make satisfactory progress in prosecuting the work, or ifhe otherwise violates any
provision of the Contract Documents, then the Owner may, without prej udice to any
other right or remedy and after giving the Contractor and his Surety a minimum of
ten (10) days from delivery of a written notice, terminate the services of the
Contractor and take possession of the Project and of all materials, equipment, tools,
construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor and finish
the work by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such case, the Contractor
shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished. If the
unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds the direct and indirect costs of
completing the Project, including compensation for additional professional services,
such excess shall be paid tot he Contractor. If such costs exceed such unpaid
balance, the Contractor will pay the difference to the Owner. Such costs incurred by
the Owner will be determined by the Engineer and incorporated in a Change Order.
3.
The Contractor must obtain permission from the Engineer before any equipment can
be removed from the job site. In the event such equipment is removed without the
Engineer's approval, the job will be terminated until such time as the equipment is
returned to the project and any time and money lost by the Contractor as a result of
moving the equipment shall be absorbed by the Contractor.
4.
.Where the Contractor's services have been so terminate by the Owner, said
termination shall not a ffect any right of the 0 wner against the Contractor then
existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of monies by the
Owner due the Contractor will not release the Contractor from compliance with the
Contract Documents.
5.
After ten (10) days from delivery 0 f a written notice to the Contractor and the
Engineer, the Owner, may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or
remedy, elect to abandon the Project and terminate the Contract. In such case, the
Contractor shall be paid for all work executed and any expense sustained plus
reasonable profit.
6.
If, through no act or fault of the Contractor, the work is suspended for a period of
more than ninety (90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public
authority of the Engineer fails to act on any request for payment within thirty (30)
days after it is submitted or the Owner fails to pay the Contractor substantially the
sum approved by the Engineer within thirty (30) days of its approval and
presentation, then the Contractor may after ten (10) days from delivery of a written
notice to the Owner and the Engineer, terminate the Contract and recover from the
Owner payment for all work executed and all expenses sustained. In addition, and
in lieu of terminating the Contract, if the Engineer has failed to act on a request for
payment or ifthe Owner has failed to make any payment as aforesaid, the Contractor
may, upon ten (10) days n'otice to the Owner and the Engineer, stop the work until
he has been paid all amounts then due, in which event and upon resumption of the
work, Change Orders shall be issued for adjusting the contract price or extending the
GC-14
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-19.
2.
3.
contract time or both to compensate for the costs and delays attributable to the
stoppage of the work.
7.
If the performance of all or any portion of the work is suspended, delayed, or
interrupted as a result of a fai lure of the Owner or the Engineer to act within the time
specified in the Contract Documents, or if no time is specified, within reasonable
time, an adjustment in the contract price or an extension of the contract time or both,
shall be made by Change Order to compensate the Contractor for the costs and delays
necessarily caused by the failure of the Owner or the Engineer.
PA YMENTS TO THE CONTRACTOR:
1.
Between the first (1st) and the fifth (5th) of each month, the Contractor will submit
to the Engineer a pm1ial payment estimate filled out and signed by the Contractor on
an approved form covering the work performed during the period covered by the
partial payment estimate and supported by such data as the Engineer may reasonably
require. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not
incorporated in the work but delivered and suitably stored at or near the site, the
partial payment estimate shall also be accompanied by such Supp0l1ing data,
satisfactory to the Owner, as will establish the Owner's title to the material and
equipment and protect his interest therein, including applicable insurance. The
Engineer will, within thirty days after receipt of each partial payment estimate, either
indicate in writing his approval of payment and present the partial payment estimate
to the Owner, or return the partial payment estimate to the Contractor indicating in
writing his reasons forrefusing to approve payment. In the latter case, the Contractor
may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the partial payment estimate. The
Owner will, within thirty days of presentation to him of an approved partial payment
estimate, pay the Contractor a progress payment on the basis of the approved partial
payment estimate. The Owner shall retain ten (10%) percent of the amount of each
payment until final completion and acceptance of all work covered by the Contract
Documents. The Owner at any time, however, after fifty (50%) percent of the work
has been completed, if he finds that satisfactory progress is being made, shall make
payment on the current and remaining estimates, in full, so that the retained
percentage at the completion of the work will be approximately five (5%) percent.
On completion and acceptance of a part of the work on which the price is stated
separately in the Contract Documents, payment may be made in full, including
retained percentages, less authorized deductions.
The request for payment may also include an allowance for the cost of such major
materials and equipment which are suitably stored either at or near the site.
All work covered by partial payment shall thereupon become the sole property of the
Owner, but this provision shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor of the
sole responsibility for the care and protection of the work upon which payments have
GC-l5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-20.
GC-21.
been made or the restoration of any damaged work, or as a waiver of the right of the
Owner to require the fulfillment of all terms of the Contract Documents.
4.
Upon completion and acceptance of the work, the Engineer shall issue a certificate
attached to the final payment request that the work has been accepted by him under
the conditions of the Contract Documents. The entire balance found to be due the
Contractor, including the retained percentages shall be paid to the Contractor, except
such sums as may be lawfully retained by the Owner for saving the Owner or the
Owner's agents harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of
Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of
machinery and parts thereof, equipment, tools and supplies, incurred in the
furtherance of the performance of the work. The Contractor shall, at the Owner's
request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature designated
above have been paid, discharged, or waived. If the Contractor fails to do so, the
Owner may, after having notified the Contractor, either pay unpaid bills or withhold
from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably
sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is
furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged whereupon payment to the
Contractor shall be resumed, in accordance with the terms of the Contract
Documents, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to
impose any obligations upon the Owner to either the Contractor, his Surety, or any
third party. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, any payment so made by the
Owner shall be considered as a payment made under the Contract Documents by the
Owner to the Contractor and the Owner shall not be liable to the Contractor for any
such payments made in good faith.
5.
If the Owner fails to make payment 30 days after approval by the Engineer, in
addition to other remedies available to the Contractor, there shall be added to each
such payment, interest at the maximum legal rate commencing on the first day after
said payment is due and continuing until the payment is received by the Contractor.
ACCEPTANCE OF FINAL PAYMENT AS RELEASE:
1.
The acceptance by the Contractor of final payment shall be and shall operate a~ a
release to the Owner of all claims and all liability to the Contractor other than claims
in stated amounts as may be specifically excepted by the Contractor for all things
done or furnished in connection with this work and for every act and neglect of the
Owner and other relating to or arising out ofthis work. Any payment, however, final
or otherwise, shall not release the Contractor or his Sureties from any obligations
under the Contract Documents or the Perforn1ance Bond and Payment Bonds.
INSURANCE:
1.
The Contractor shall purchase and maintain during the life of this Contract such
insurance as will protect him from claims set forth below which may arise out of or
result from the Contractor's execution of the work, whether such execution by
GC-16
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
himself or by any Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any
of them or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.
1.1 Claims under Workman's Compensation, disability benefit and other similar
employee benefit acts,
1.2 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or
disease or death of his employees,
1.3 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease or death of
any person other than his employees,
1.4 Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which
are sustained (1) by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly
related to the employment of such person by the Contractor or (2) by any
other person; and
1.5 Claims for damages because of injury to or destruction of tangible property,
including loss of use resulting therefrom.
2.
Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior
to commencement of the work. These Certificates shall contain a provision that
coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled unless at least fifteen (15)
days prior written notice has been given to the Owner and Program Manager.
3.
The Contractor shall procure and maintain, at his own expense, during the life ofthe
Contract, liability insurance as hereinafter specified.
3.1 Contractor's General Public Liability and Property Damage insurance
including vehicle coverage issued to the Contractor and protecting him from
all claims for personal injury, including death, and all claims for destruction
of or damage to property, arising out of or in connection with any operations
under the Contract Documents, whether such operations be by himself or by
any Subcontractor under him or anyone directly or indirectly employed by the
Contractor or by a Subcontractor under him. Insurance shall be written with
a limit of liability of not less than $200,000 for all damages arising out of!
bodily injury, including death, at any time resulting therefrom, sustained by
anyone person in anyone accident; and a limit of liability of not less than
$500,000 for any such damages sustained by two or more persons in anyone
accident. Insurance shall be written with a limit ofliability of not less than
$100,000 for all property damage sustained by anyone person in anyone
accident; a nd a I imit of liability 0 f not less than $ 200,000 for any such
damage sustained by two or more persons in anyone accident. Contractor's
insurance policy shall name Owner and Program Manager as insureds UNder
this policy.
GC-17
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-22.
3.2 The Contractor shall acquire and maintain, if applicable, Fire and Extended
Coverage insurance upon the Project to the full insurable value thereoffor the
benefit of the Owner, the Contractor and Subcontractor as their interest may
appear. This provision shall in no way release the Contractor or Contractor's
Surety from obligations under the Contract Documents to fully complete the
Project.
4.
The Contractor shall procure and maintain, at his own expense, during the life of the
Contract, in accordance with the provisions of the laws of the state in which the work
is performed, Workman's Compensation Insurance, including occupational disease
provisions, for all of his employees at the site of the project and in case any work is
sublet, the Contractor shall require such Subcontractor similarly to provide
Workman's Compensation Insurance, including occupational disease provision for
all of the latter1s employees unless such employees are covered by the protection
afforded by the Contractor. In case any class of employees engaged in hazardous
work under this Contract at the site of the Project is not protected under Workman's
Compensation statute, the Contractor shall provide and shall cause each
Subcontractor to provide adequate and suitable insurance for the protection of his
employees not otherwise protected.
5.
The Contractor shall secure, if applicable, "All Risk" type Builder's Risk Insurance
for work to be performed. Unless specifically authorized by the Owner, the amount
of such insurance shall not be less than the contract price totaled in the bid. The
policy shall cover not less than the losses due to fire, explosion, hail, lightening,
vandalism, malicious mischief, wind, collapse, riot; aircraft and smoke during the
contract time and until the work is accepted by the Owner. The policy shall name as
the insured the Contractor, the Engineer and the Owner.
Contractor shall provide a Builders Risk All Risk insurance policy for the full
replacement value 0 f all Project work including t he value 0 fall 0 nsite 0 wner-
furnished equipment and/or materials associated with Program Manager's services.
Such policy shall include coverage for loss due to defects in materials and
workmanship and errors in design, and will provide a waiver of subrogation as to
Program Manager and the Owner, and their respective officers, employees, agents,
affiliates, and subcontractors.
CONTRACT SECURITY:
1.
The Contractor shall, within ten (10) days after the receipt of the Notice of Award,
furnish the Owner with a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond in penal sums
equal to the amount of the contract price, conditioned upon the performance by the
Contractor of all undertakings, covenants, terms, conditions and agreements of the
Contract Documents and upon the prompt payment by the Contractor to all persons
. supplying labor and materials in the prosecution of the work provided by the Contract.
Documents. Such bonds shall be executed by the Contractor and a corporate bonding
company licensed to transact business in the state in which the work .is to be
GC-18
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-23.
GC-24.
performed and named on the current list of "Surety Companies Acceptable on
Federal Bonds" as published in the Treasury Department Circular Number 570. The
expense of these bonds shall be borne by the Contractor. If at any time a Surety on
any such bond is declared a bankrupt or loses its right to do business in the state in
which the work is to be performed or is removed from the list of Surety Companies
accepted on Federal Bonds, Contractor shall within ten (10) days after notice from
the Owner to do so, substitute an acceptable bond (or bonds) in such form and sum
and signed by such other Surety or Sureties as may be satisfactory to the Owner. The
. premiums on such bonds shall be paid by the Contractor. No further payments shall
be deemed due nor shall be made until the new Surety or Sureties shall have
furnished an acceptable bond to the Owner.
ASSIGNMENTS:
1.
Neither the Contractor nor the Owner shall sell, transfer, assign or otherwise dispose
of the Contract or any portion thereof, or his right, title or interest therein, or his
obligations thereunder, without written consent of the other party.
INDEMNIFICATION:
1.
The Contractor will indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and Program Manager
and the Engineer and their agents and employees from and against all claims,
damages, losses and expenses including attorney's fees arising out of or resulting
from the performance of the work, provided that any such claim, damage, loss or
expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or
destruction of tangible property, including the loss of use resulting therefrom; and is
caused in whole or in part by any negligent or willful act or omission of the
Contractor and Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them
or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.
2.
In any and all claims against the Owner or the Engineer or any of their agents or
employees, by an employee of the Contractor, Subcontractor, anyone directly or
indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be
liable, the indemnification obligation shall not be limited in any way by any
limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by
or for the Contractor or any Subcontractor under Workman's Compensation acts,
disability benefit acts or other employee benefits acts.
3.
The obligation of the Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability
of the Engineer, his agents or employees arising out of the preparation or approval
of maps, drawings, opinions,. reports, surveys, change orders, design or
specifications.
GC-19
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-25.
GC-26.
SEPARATE CONTRACTS:
1.
The Owner reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with this Project.
The Contractor shall afford other contractors reasonable opportunity for the
introduction and storage of their materials and the execution of their work and shall
properly connect and coordinate his work with theirs. If the proper execution or
results of any part of the Contractor's work depends upon the work of any other
Contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Engineer any
defects in such work that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results.
2.
The Owner may perfom1 additional work related to the Project by himself or he may
let other contracts containing provisions similar to these. The Contractor will afford
the other Contractors who are parties to such contracts ( or the 0 wner, if he is
performing the additional work himself), reasonable opportunity for the introduction
and storage of materials and equipment and the execution of the work and shall
properly connect and coordinate his work with theirs.
3.
Ifthe perfoffi1ance of additional work by other Contractors or the Owner is not noted
in the Contract Documents prior to the execution of the Contract, written notice
thereof shall be given to the Contractor prior to starting any such additional work.
Ifthe Contractor believes that the performance of such additional work by the Owner
or others involves him in additional expense or entitles him to an extension of the
contract time, he may make a claim therefor as provided in Sections GC-13 and GC-
14.
SUBCONTRACTING:
1.
The Contractor may utilize the services of specialty Subcontractors on those parts of
the work which, under normal contracting practices, are performed by specialty
Subcontractors.
2.
The Contractor shall not award work to Subcontractor(s), in excess of fifty (50%)
percent of the Contract Price, without prior written approval of the Owner.
3.
The Contractor shall be fully responsible to the Owner for the acts and omissions of
his Subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them, as
he is for the acts and omissions of person directly employed by him.
4.
The Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts.
relative to the work to bind the Subcontractors to the Contractor by the terms of the
Contract Documents insofar as applicable to the work of Subcontractors and to give I
the Contractor the same power as regards terminating any subcontract that the Owner,
may exercise over the Contractor under any provision of the Contract Documents.
GC-20
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-27.
GC-28.
GC-29.
5.
Nothing contained in this Contract shall create any contractual relation between any
Subcontractor and the Owner.
ENGINEER'S AUTHORITY:
1.
The Engineer shall act as the Owner1s representative during the construction period.
He shall decide questions which may arise as to quality and acceptability of materials
furnished and work performed. He shall interpret the intent of the Contract
Documents in a fair and unbiased manner. The Engineer will make visits to the site
and determine ifthe work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents.
2.
The Contractor will be held strictly to the intent of the Contract Documents in regard
to the quality of materials, workmanship and execution ofthe work. Inspections may
be made at the factory or fabrication plant or the source of material supply.
3.
The Engineer will not be responsible for the construction means, controls,
techniques, sequences, procedures, or construction safety.
4.
The Engineer shall promptly make decisions relative to interpretation ofthe Contract
Documents.
LAND AND RIGHTS-OF-WAY:
1.
The Owner will furnish all land and rights-of-way necessary for carrying out and for
the completion of the work to be performed pursuant to the Contract Documents. If
all land and rights-of-way are not obtained prior to the issuing of the Notice to
Proceed, the Contractor shall begin work upon lands and rights-of-way that have
been acquired.
2.
The Owner shall provide to the Contractor information which delineates and
describes the lands owned and rights-of-way acquired.
3.
The Contractor shall provide at his own expense and without liability to the Owner
any additional land and access thereto that the Contractor may desire for temporary
construction facilities, or for storage of materials.
GUARANTEE:
1.
The Contractor shall guarantee all materials and equipment furnished and work
performed for a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion. Th~
Contractor warrants and guarantees for a period of one (1) year from the date 0]
substantial completion of the system that the completed system is free from ad
defects due to faulty materials or workmanship and the Contractor shall promptl~
make such corrections as may be necessary by reason of such defects including the
repairs of any damage to other parts of the system resulting from such defects. The
Owner will give notice of observed defects with reasonable promptness. In the event
that the Contractor should fail to make such repairs, adjustments or other work that
GC-2l
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-30.
GC-31.
GC-32.
GC-33.
GC-34.
may be necessary by such defects, the Owner may do so and charge the Contractor
the cost thereby incurred. The Performance Bond shall remain in full force and effect
though the guarantee period.
TAXES:
1.
The Contractor will pay all sales, consumer, use and other similar taxes required by
the law of the place where the work is performed.
\VORK ADJACENT TO RAIL\VAY OR OTHER PROPERTY:
1.
Whenever the work embraced in this Contract is near the tracks, structures or
buildings of the Owner or of other railways, persons, or property, the work shall be
so conducted as not to interfere with the movement of trains or other operations of
the railway, or, if in any case such interference be necessary, the Contractor shall not
proceed until he has first obtained specific authority and directions therefor from the
proper designated officer of the Owner and has the approval of the Engineer.
ORDER AND DISCIPLINE:
1.
The Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among his
employees and any employee of the Contractor who shall appear to be incompetent,
disorderly or intemperate or in any other way disqualified for or unfaithful to the
work entrusted to him, shall be discharged immediately on the request of the
Engineer and he shall not again be employed on the work with the Engineer's written
consent.
WARNING DEVICES AND SIGNS:
1.
The Contractor shall furnish, erect, paint and maintain warning devices when
construction is on or near public streets for the protection of vehicular and pedestrian
traffic. Such devices will be in accordance with the Georgia Manual on Uniform
Traffic Control Devices for Street and Highways, "Traffic Control for Highway
Construction and Maintenance Operations," latest edition.
2.
A 20" x 30" sign, mounted on a solid post, 8 feet above the ground, indicating the
name and a 24-hour phone number ofthe Contractor in 4" letters, shall be erected at
prominent locations on the construction site as directed by the Engineer. The
Contractor may remove the sign following the maintenance period.
1.
SPECIAL RESTRICTIONS: I
No work shall be allowed after the hours of darkness or on Sunday without
permission of the Owner. I
2.
If Contractor wishes to work before 8 a.m. or after 5 p.m. Monday through Friday,
on weekends, or Augusta, Georgia legal holidays refer to Special Condition SC-25.
GC-22
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-35.
GC-36.
GC-3 7.
AS-BUILT DRAWINGS:
1.
The Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer three (3) sets of marked up drawings for
an "As-built" record showing all deviations from the Contract Drawings. The
marked up sets shall include actual dimensions from pern1anent markers accurately
locating all underground piping.
CONTRACTOR NOT TO HIRE EMPLOYEES OF THE OWNER:
1.
The Contractor shall not employ or hire any of the employees of the Owner.
DRAWINGS:
The Owner will furnish to the Contractor, free of charge, up to five (5) sets of direct.
black line prints together with a like number of complete bound specifications for construction
purposes. Location of all features ofthe work included in the Contract are indicated on the Contract
Drawings. The following drawings comprise the plans for the Contract:
Note:
GC-38.
The Contract Drawings are listed under Special Condition SC-02., LIST OF
DRAWINGS:.
FIELD OFFICE FACILITIES:
The Contractor shall provide, at a point convenient to the work, suitable office
facilities for housing records, plans and contract documents. A telephone shall be provided at the
Contractor's office for expediting the work and be made available for the use of the Engineer. A
complete and up-to-date set of the plans and specifications shall be available at the field office at all
times that the work is in progress.
GC-39.
RIGHTS-OF-WAY:
The Owner will furnish all land and rights-of-way necessary for the carrying out of
this contract and the completion of the work herein contemplated and will use due diligence in
acquiring said land and rights-of-way as speedily as possible. But it is possible that all land and
rights-of-way may not be obtained as herein contemplated before construction begins, in which event
the Contractor shall begin his work upon such land and rights-of-way as the Owner may havtt
previously acquired and no claim for damages whatsoever will be allowed by reason of the delay irl
obtaining the remaining lands and rights-of-way. Should the Owner be prevented or enjoinedfrocl
proceeding with the work or from authorizing its prosecution, either before the commencement, bf
reason of any litigation or by reason of its inability to procure any lands or rights-of-way for the said
work, the Contractor shall not be entitled to make or assert any claim for damage by reason of saicl
delay or to withdraw from the contract except by consent of the Owner; but time for completion of
the work will be extended to compensate for the time lost by such delay; such determination to bb
set forth in writing and approved by the Owner. I .
GC-23
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
GC-40.
ESTIMATE OF QUANTITIES:
The estimated quantities of work to be done and materials to be furnished under this
contract if shown in any ofthe documents including the bid are given only for use in comparing bids
and to indicate approximately the total amount of the contract and the right is especially reserved
except as herein otherwise specifically limited to increase or diminish them as may be deemed
reasonably necessary or desirable by the Owner to complete the work contemplated by this contract
and such increase or diminution shall in no way vitiate this contract nor shall any such increase or
diminution give cause for claims or liability for damages.
GC-41. EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES:
The existence and location of structures and underground utilities indicated on the
plans are not guaranteed and shall be investigated and verified in the field by the Contractor before
starting work. The Contractor shall be held responsible for any damage to and for maintenance and.
protection of existing utilities and structures.
GC-42.
CONTRACTOR'S BREAKDOWN OF LUMP SUM PAYMENT ITEMS:
The Contractor shall, immediately after the contract has been awarded, submit to the
Engineer for his approval, a breakdown showing estimates of all costs apportioned to the major
elements of equipment, material and labor comprising the total work included under any of the lump
sum items shown in the proposal. These estimates as approved will serve as the basis for estimating
of payments due on all progress estimates.
GC-43.
PRIOR USE BY OWNER:
Prior to completion of the work, the Owner may take over the operation and/or use
of the uncompleted project or portions thereof. Such prior use of the facilities by the Owner shall
not be deemed as acceptance of any work or relieve the Contractor from any of the requirements of
the Contract Documents.
GC-44.
CLEANING UP:
The Contractor shall keep the premises free from the accumulation of waste material
and rubbish and upon completion of the work, prior to final acceptance of the completed project by
the Owner, he shall remove from the premises all rubbish, surplus materials, implements, tools, etc.,
and leave his work in a clean condition, satisfactory to the Engineer.
GC-45.
MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC:
In any work within the public right-of-way, the Contractor shall provide adequatJ
'warning and protection for pedestrian and vehicular traffic from any hazard arising out of th~
Contractor's operations and will be held responsible for any damage caused by negligence on his part
or by the improper placing of or failure to display danger signs and road lanterns. All traffic lanesl,
sidewalks and driveways will be kept open and clear at all times except as provided below. The
Contractor shall not block traffic on any street more than 30 minutes or without written permission
from such agency. Before leaving the work each night, it shall be placed in such condition as to
cause the least possible hazard therefrom. Should the Contractor fail to comply with the provisions
GC-24
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
of this paragraph, the Owner may, with his own forces, provide signs, flagmen, barricades and/or
passageways or clear the pavement and deduct the cost thereof from sums due to the Contractor.
GC-46.
MAINTENANCE OF ACCESS:
The Contractor will be required to maintain access to business establishments during
all time they are open for business, to churches, schools and other institutions during the time they
are open and to all residential and other occupied buildings or facilities at all times. Bridges across
open trenches and work areas will be required to provide vehicular and pedestrian access. Bridges
with handrail protection will be required for crosswalks at street intersections. It is recognized that
it will be necessary to remove bridges and to block cross traffic while equipment is in operation. The
Contractor shall, however, plan and pursue his operations so as to minimize the time that direct
entrance is blocked.
GC-4 7.
EROSION CONTROL AND RESTORATION OF PROPERTY:
The Contractor will be required to schedule his work and perform operations in such
a manner that siltation and bank erosion will be minimized during all phases of construction. Any
areas disturbed during the course of construction shall be restored to a condition equal or better than
the original condition. The Contractor will be required to submit a Soil Erosion and Sedimentation
Control plan that is in compliance with the work site erosion control plan, per the Georgia
Department of Transportation.
GC-48.
BYPASSING SEW AGE:
The Contractor will be required to schedule and coordinate construction sequences
and to use temporary construction and other approved methods which will minimize the bypassing
of sewage during construction ofthe sewer facilities. The diversion of sewerage to open ditches or
streams will not be permitted.
GC-49.
SAFETY AND HEALTH REGULATIONS:
The Contractor shall comply with the Department of Labor Safety and Health
Regulations for construction promulgated under the Occupational and Health Act of 1970 (PL31-
596) and under Section 107 of the Contr,:ct Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (PL91-54).
GC-50.
PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE:
A preconstruction conference shall be held at an acceptable time to the Owner and
the Contractor prior to the "Notice to Proceed" to coordinate the work and satisfy all requirements
of the Contract Documents.
GC-25
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION
SC-O 1.
SC-02.
SC-03.
SC-04.
SC-05.
SC-06.
SC-07.
SC-08.
SC-09.
SC-lO.
SC-11.
SC-12.
S C-13.
SC-14.
SC-15.
SC-16.
SC-17.
SC-18.
SC-19.
SC-20.
SC-21.
SC-22.
-
Scope
List of Drawings
Bonds
Project Sign
Protection of the Environment
Temporary Toilets
Plans and Specifications Furnished
Record Drawings
Shop Drawings
Existing Structures
Salvage Material
Referenced Specifications
Traffic Control
Surveys.
Construction Order and Schedule
Inspection and Testing of Work
Site Access
Georgia Prompt Pay Act
Disputes
Interest Not Earned on Retainage
Equivalent Materials
After Hours Inspection
SC-1
SECTION SC-O
INDEX TO SPECIAL CONDITIONS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION SC
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
-01. SCOPE OF THE WORK:
The project referred to in the Agreement shall consist of furnishing all materials,
labor, machinery, etc. necessary to construct a 4,800 square foot, two-story building with all
associated appurtenances.
-02. LIST OF DRAWINGS:
The following drawings, prepared by Cranston, Robertson & Whitehurst, P.C.;
Hughes, Beattie, O'Neal, Law & Associates; Pruett-Ford and Associates; and Electrical Design
Consultants, Inc. comprise the plans for the project:
DATE
SHEET NO. TITLE ORIGINAL REVISED
Cover Sheet 12/5/03
C1.1 Site Plan 12/5/03
C2.1 Site Details 12/5/03
A2.1 Floor Plans - Base Bid 12/5/03
A2.2 FinishIDoor Schedule and Door/Frame Details 12/5/03
A3.1 Wall Sections 12/5/03
A3.2 Building Sections 12/5/03
A3.3 Roof Plan 12/5/03
A3.4 Front Elevations (Base Bid and Alternate 1) 12/5/03
A3.5 Millwork Details 12/5/03
A6.2 Reflected Ceiling Plan 12/5/03
S1.1 General Notes 12/5/03 12/5/03
S2.1 Foundation Plan 12/5/03 12/5/03
S2.2 Roof Framing Plan 12/5/03 12/5/03
S3.1 Structural Details 12/5/03 12/5/03
S3.2 Structural Details 12/5/03 12/5/03
P-l Plumbing Plans 12/5/03
P-2 Plumbing Plans 12/5/03
M-l HV AC Plans - Base Bid 12/5/03
M-2 HV AC Details, Notes and Legend 12/5/03
SC-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SHEET NO.
M-3
El.1
E2.1
E3.1
E4.1
DATE
ORIGINAL REVISED
12/5/03
12/5/03
12/5/03
12/5/03
12/5/03
TITLE
HV AC Schedules
Legend, Notes, Schedule, and Details
Lighting Plans
Power Plans
Systems Plans
SC-03.
BONDS:
The Contractor will include in the lump sum payment for mobilization the cost of his
performance and payment bonds.
SC-04.
PROJECT SIGN:
The Contractor will furnish and install one (1) project signs, one on each end of the
project, on the construction site. The signs will carry in a prominent manner the names of the
project, the Owner, the Engineers, the Architect, the Contractor, and a 24-hour phone number for
the Contractor in 4 inch letters. The sign shall be constructed and erected on wood posts in a
substantial manner 8 feet above the ground. The full size stencil shall be approved along with colors
before fabrication. The Contractor shall include the cost of the project signs in the lump sum bid
item for Mobilization.
SC-os.
PROTECTION OF THE ENVIRONMENT:
The Contractor will carefully schedule his work so that a minimum amount of
exposed 'earth will be subject to erosion by rainfall or wind, and he will provide means satisfactory
to the Engineer to minimize the transportation of silt and other deleterious material into the stream
beds of water courses adjacent to the project.
All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project operation,
whether herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant or of other classification, must show
approval of either EPA or USDA. Use of all such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in
conformance with printed instructions.
SC-06.
TEMPORARY TOILETS:
Contractor shall provide temporary toilet facilities on the site for workmen employed
in the construction work. Toilets shall be adequate for the number of men employed and shall be
maintained in a clean and sanitary condition. Workmen shall be required to use only these toilets.
At completion of the work, toilets used by Contractor shall be removed and premises left in the
condition required by the Contract.
SC-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-
ii
SC-07.
PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS FURNISHED:
The Contractor will be furnished, free of charge, by the Owner up to five (5) sets of
direct black line prints together with a like number of complete bound specifications for construction
purposes. Additional sets of plans and/or specifications will be furnished to the Contractor at the
cost of reproduction upon his written request.
SC-08.
RECORD DRAWINGS:
The Contractor will maintain in his office one complete set of drawings (including
any supplemental sketches) pertaining to the project upon which, at the end of each day's work any
deviations from the construction lines shown thereon and all changes ordered by the Engineer will
be shown accurately in red pencil. Ifnecessary, supplemental drawings will be made to show details
of deviations or changes, and these will be kept with the marked set. The drawings will be available
to the Engineer for inspection during construction. Satisfactory progress toward the preparation of
the record drawings shall be a condition of approval of monthly payment estimates. At the
completion of construction, prior to submitting his estimate for final payment, and as a condition for
payment thereof, three copies of the record drawings, satisfactorily completed, will be transmitted
to the Engineer.
SC-09.
SHOP DRAWINGS:
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for his review shop drawings, cuts,
diagrams, bar lists, steel details, and other descriptive data on every item, where required on the
drawings or herein. The Contractor shall check all submittals and so indicate on each copy thereof.
Five copies of such shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer before ordering
ofthe material. Submittals which have not been checked by the Contractor will not be reviewed by
the Engineer. Reviews by the Engineer of submittals will cover only general conformity with the
project requirements, while responsibility for detailed conformity shall remain with the Contractor.
The Contractor will be notified by mail of the results of the submittal reviews within ten (10) days.
of the receipt by the Engineer thereof.
SC-10.
EXISTING STRUCTURES:
Where sidewalks, street signs, private signs, walls, sidewalks, fences, etc, are
removed in accomplishing the work, each and every item will be replaced in the same or better
manner or condition than that in which it was before construction began. The Contractor will protect
and hold harmless the Owner from any suit, action, or dispute whatever arising from the Contractor's
work adjacent to private property.
SC-l1.
SALVAGE MATERIAL:
All existing installations to be removed, including but not limited to masonry and
concrete rubble, asphalt, pipe, etc. will be disposed of at an approved location by the Contractor.
SC-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
SC-12.
REFERENCED SPECIFICATIONS:
Where specifications or standards of trade organizations and other groups are
referenced in these specifications, they are made as much a part ofthese specifications as ifthe entire
standard or specification were reprinted herein. The inclusion ofthe latest edition or revision ofthe
referenced specification or standard is intended.
SC-13.
TRAFFIC CONTROL:
Traffic control shall conform to the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices
(MUTCD) of the Federal Highway Administration, latest edition. The Contractor shall give prior
written notification to and shall obtain the approval of the Augusta Fire Department, Police
Department, Emergency Medical Services, and the Augusta Traffic Engineering Department of any .
street closures.
SC-14.
SURVEYS:
The Engineer has established a benchmark for locating the principal component parts
of the work. From the information thus provided, the Contractor shall develop and make all detail
surveys needed for construction lines and elevations. The Contractor shall employ only Registered
Land Surveyors or Registered Professional Engineer to perform all detail surveys.
The Contractor will diligently preserve and maintain the position of all stakes,
reference points and bench marks after they are set and, in case of willful or careless destruction, he
shall be charged with the resulting expense and shall be responsible for any mistakes that may be
caused by their unnecessary loss or disturbance.
SC-15.
CONSTRUCTION ORDER AND SCHEDULE:
1.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed order, schedule, and methods of
construction activities within the general guidelines specified for maintenance and
protection of highway and pedestrian, traffic; utility lines; drainage ways; adjacent
properties; and as otherwise specified.
2.
After notice to proceed and prior to the first payment on the contract the Contractor
shall submit the following for review:
A. Breakdown of contract price into units of cost for each item required to
complete the total work; this breakdown will be the basis for judging the,
percentage complete at any time.
B.
A statement of the order of procedure to be followed that will result in the
required protection and completion of the work within the overall contract
time.
C. A bar chart showing the percentage of each item schedules against time and
so scheduled that Contractor1s order of construction is clearly shown.
SC-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.
With each request for payment the Contractor shall submit two copies of the bar chart
clearly marked to show the work completed at the date of the payment requested.
SC-16.
INSPECTION AND TESTING OF WORK:
The Owner shall provide sufficient competent engineering personnel for the technical
observation and testing of the work.
The Engineer and his representatives shall at all times have access to the work
whenever it is in preparation or progress, and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such
access, and for inspections.
Inspectors shall have the power to stop work on account of a workman's
incompetency, drunkenness, or willful negligence or disregard of orders. An inspector may stop the
work entirely ifthere is not a sufficient quantity of suitable and approved materials or equipment on
the ground to carry it out properly or for any good and sufficient cause. Inspectors may not accept
on behalf of the Owner any material or workmanship which does not conform fully to the
requirements of the contract and they shall give no orders or directions under any possible
circumstances not in accordance with the Specifications. The Contractor shall furnish the inspector
with all required assistance to facilitate thorough inspection or the culling over or removal of
defective materials or for any other purpose requiring discharge of their duties for which service no
additional allowance shall be made. The inspector shall, at all times, have full permission to take
samples of the materials that mayor may not be used in the work.
Any inspection provided by the Engineers is for the purpose of determining
compliance with provisions of the contract specifications and is in no way a guarantee of the
methods or appliances use by the Contractor, nor for the safety of the job.
If the specifications, the Engineer's instructions, laws, ordinances, or any public
authority require any work to be specially tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Engineer
timely notice of its readiness for inspection, and if the inspection is by an authority other than the
Engineer, ofthe date fixed for such inspection. Inspections by the Engineer shall be made promptly,
and where practicable at the source of supply. If any work should be covered up without review or
consent of the Engineer, it must, if required by the Engineer, be uncovered for examination and
properly restored at the Contractor's expense.
Re-examination of any work may be ordered by the Engineer, and, if so ordered, the
work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If such work is found to be in accordance with ,the
Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay the cost of re-examination and replacement. If such work
is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall pay such cost.
The Owner will employ a qualified materials testing laboratory, hereinafter referred
to as the Laboratory, to monitor more fully on the Owner's behalf the quality of mate rials and work,
and to perform such tests as may be required under the Contract Documents as con,ditions for
acceptance of materials and work. The Laboratory will be solely responsible to and paid separately
by the Owner. The timing ofthe work of the Laboratory will be coordinated by the Engineer through
his duly authorized inspector.
SC-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
The Owner will bear the cost oftesting a particular material or area of the work once.
Where retesting, is required following corrective measures or under other circumstances, the
Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost of additional testing.
SC-17.
SITE ACCESS:
In order to minimize damage to existing paving, and landscaping, access to the site
for the Contractor's personnel and equipment will be restricted to the routes designated by the
Owner. The Contractor will be required to use only these routes unless prior written approval is
given by the Owner.
SC-18.
GEORGIA PROMPT PAY ACT:
This Agreement is intended by the Parties to, and does, supersede any and all
provisions ofthe Georgia Prompt Pay Act, O.c.G.A. Section 13-11-1, et seq. In the event any
provision ofthis Agreement is inconsistent with any provision ofthe Prompt Pay Act, the provision
of this Agreement shall control.
SC-19.
DISPUTES:
All claims, disputes and other matters in question between the Owner and the
Contractor arising out of or relating to the Agreement, or the breach thereof, shall be decided in the
Superior Court of Richmond County, Georgia. The Contractor, by executing this Agreement,
specifically consents to venue in Richmond County and waives any right to contest the venue in the
Superior Court of Richmond County, Georgia.
SC-20.
INTEREST NOT EARNED ON RET AINAGE:
Notwithstanding any provision of the law to the contrary, the parties agree that no
interest shall be due to the Contractor on any sum held as retainage pursuant to this Agreement and
Contractor specifically waives any claim to same.
SC-21.
EQUIVALENT MATERIALS:
Notwithstanding any provision ofthe general conditions, there shall be no substitution
of materials that are not determined to be equivalent to those indicated or required in the contract
documents without an amendment to the contract.
SC-22.
AFTER HOURS INSPECTION:
If the Contractor opts to work before or after normal working hours, 8 a.m. to 5 p.m.,
Monday through Friday, or on Augusta, Georgia Legal Holidays, then the Contractor must pay for
the cost of inspection by the City of Augusta, Georgia and follow all necessary procedures listed in
"Section 15, Right-of-way Encroachment Guidelines, Part E, Outside of Normal Working Hours,"
of the Augusta-Richmond County Planning Commission Development Documents dated September,
1999. Ifinspectors of Augusta-Richmond County are needed to work outside normal business hours,
Augusta-Richmond County needs to be notified in advance.
SC-7
I
I
I
I
SECTION
I 02070
I 02210
02221
I 02515
02525
I 02580
02721
I 03101
I 03300
04100
I 04150
04200
I 04810
05100
I 05120
I 05310
05400
I 05500
06200
I 06400
06670
I 07150
I
I
SECTION TS-O
INDEX TO TECHNICAL SPECIFICA TIONS
TITLE
NO. OF
PAGES
1
6
4
3
5
3
4
5
9
2
2
4
4
2
7
4
5
5
2
4
5
1
Demolition
Grading
Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling for Pipe Lines
Concrete Pavement
Curbs and Gutters, Concrete
Brick Pavement
Storm Sewer System
Concrete Construction - Civil
Cast-in-Place Concrete
Mortar
Masonry Accessories
Unit Masonry
Site Masonry
Structural Steel Studs and Accessories
Structural Steel
Steel Deck
Pre-Engineered Light Gage Steel Truss Frames
Miscellaneous Metals
Carpentry and Millwork
Architectural Woodwork
Cellular (PVC) Fabrications
Dampproofing
TS-O-l
I
I
I NO. OF
SECTION TITLE PAGES
07190 Pre-Molded Membrane Vapor Barrier 1
I
07210 Building Insulation 2
I 07250 Firestop Cement and Safing Insulation 1
07410 Metal Roofing/Gutters and Downspouts/Soffit and Insulation 5
I 07600 Aluminum Coping 1
07650 Plastic Wall Flashing 1
I 07900 Caulking and Sealants 3
08100 Metal Doors and Transom Panels 3
I 08110 Metal Door Frames 3
I 08200 Wood Doors and Transom Panels 2
08305 Metal Access Panels 1
I 08351 Folding Doors 2
08575 Clad Wood Double-Hung Window 4
I 08710 Door Hardware 5
08800 Glass and Glazing 2
I
09100 Metal Support Systems 3
I 09250 Gypsum Drywall 3
09310 Ceramic Tile 3
I 09510 Acoustical and Metal Ceiling Systems 4
09650 Resilient Flooring 3
I 09680 Carpet 5
09900 Paints and Coatings 8
I
10110 Markerboards 3
I 10155 Toilet Partitions (Solid Phenolic) 3
10200 Metal Louvers 1
I TS-0-2
I
I
I
I NO. OF
SECTION TITLE PAGES
10530 Awnings 1
I
10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories 4
I 10811 Baby Changing Stations 2
10900 Firefighting Devices 1
I 11130 TV Wall-Mounted Brackets 1
12500 Venetian Blinds 1
I 14240 Hydraulic Elevators 12
15050 General Provisions 10
I 15051 Codes, Permits and Inspection 1
I 15060 Firestopping 2
15090 Mechanical Supporting Devices 2
I 15100 Val ves 1
15140 Pumps 1
I 15200 Vibration and Sound Control 1
I 15250 Mechanical Systems Insulation 3
15401 Domestic Water Systems 3
I 15405 Soil, Waste and Vent System 3
15424 Water Heaters and Accessories 2
I 15450 Plumbing Fixtures and Accessories 3
15701 Piping for Mechanical Systems 2
I 15773 Split System Heat Pump 2
15795 Electric Heaters 1
I
15820 Fans 1
I 15840 Air Distribution System 6
15900 HV AC Controls 3
I TS-0-3
I
I
I
I NO. OF
SECTION TITLE PAGES
16000 General 11
I 16010 Lighting and Power Panelboards 3
I 16015 Fuses 2
16020 Raceways 6
I 16030 Conductors 3
16040 Outlets 2
I 16050 Wiring Devices & Device Plate 4
I ' 16060 Lighting Fixtures and Lamps 3
16070 Disconnect Switches 2
I 16090 Photo Control & Contactor 1
16100 Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes and Fittings 1
I 16110 Grounding 6
16120 Equipment Identification 1
I 16130 Data/V oice Conduit & Outlet System 2
I 16140 Fire AlarmJIntrusion Alarm System 5
16160 Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors for Main Services and 4
Distribution Panels
I 16175 Firestopping 6
I 16220 Construction Reviews Inspection and Testing 2
I
I
I
I TS-0-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02070
DEMOLITION
PART 1 -
SCOPE:
1.1 GENERAL
A.
Work covered by this section includes the removal of all existing items and material,
including existing structures, pavement, and all other items shown on the drawings
or necessary to accomplish the intended works under this contract.
PART 2-
PRODUCTS:
2.1 BARRIERS AND DUST PARTITIONS:
A.
Barriers, barricades and dust partitions to protect the Owner's property as well as
adjoining private property from damage from demolition operations shall be erected.
PART 3-
EXECUTION:
3.1 DEMOLITION WORK:
A. All portions of existing structures as indicated and as required to accomplish the new
work shall be demolished and removed. The Contractor shall provide protection to
persons and property and existing buildings by providing shoring, bracing,
barricades, temporary walls and partitions, and other protective materials and devices
as required to provide the protection and security specified. All active utilities to
remain shall be protected and preserved in operating condition, including but not
limited to electric services, water mains, sewers, drains, manholes, catch basins,
valves, valve boxes, poles, guys and other appurtenances. Any damage to such
utilities and to work under this contract shall be repaired at no additional cost to the
Owner. Demolition material and debris shall not be allowed to accumulate on the
site. Materials resulting from the demolition operations, except salvage materials to
be delivered to the Owner, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be
removed from the site.
B. Before demolition operations begin, the Contractor shall arrange for an inspection
and decision covering all salvage items by an authorized representative ofthe Owner,
the Engineer, and the Contractor.
DEMOLITION
02070-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02210
GRADING
PART 1 -
GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section covers grading for the roadways, parking areas, buildings, drives and/or
walks, including all excavations, formation of embankments, preparation of subgrade for
pavements and finishing and dressing of graded earth areas, shoulders, and ditches. Work
in connection with excavation, trenching, and backfilling for utility lines is specified
under section entitled "Excavating, Trenching, and Backfilling for Pipe Lines."
B. In the course of preparing the site to final grades, the Contractor shall work in close
coordination with the representative of the geotechnical engineer to identify problem areas
and to properly prepare sub grade soils for their use in supporting the loads to be imposed.
Preparation of soils may include proofrolling; in-place compaction; removal, replacement
and compaction; removal, importation of borrow and compaction; or other method
approved by the geotechnical engineer.
PART 2-
- PRODUCTS
2.1 SELECTION OF BORROW MATERIAL
A. Borrow material shall be selected to meet the requirements and conditions of the particular
fill for which it is to be used. The material shall consist of sand soils or sand-clay soils
capable of being readily shaped and compacted to the required densities and shall be free
of roots, trash and any other deleterious material. All fill soil to be utilized shall be
subject to approval prior to their use. Any necessary clearing, grubbing, disposal of debris
and satisfactory trimming and drainage ofthe borrow areas shall be considered incidental
to operation of the borrow excavation and shall be performed by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Owner. On-site excavated materials may be used as borrow
provided that they are approved for use as backfill by the geotechnical engineer.
B. Borrow Area(s): Borrow material shall be furnished by the Contractor from private
sources selected by the Contractor and shall consist of a suitable material of the type
mentioned above. The Contractor shall obtain from the Owners the right to procure
material, shall pay all royalties and other charges involved, and shall bear all the expenses
of developing the sources, including rights-of-way for hauling.
GRADING
02210-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 3-
- EXECUTION
3.1 CONSERVATION OF TOPSOIL
A. Except where otherwise noted on the plans, topsoil shall be removed without
contamination with subsoil and spread on areas already graded and prepared for topsoil,
or shall be transported and deposited in storage piles convenient to areas that are to
receive application oftopsoillater, or at locations indicated. Topsoil shall be stripped to
a depth determined by the geotechnical engineering firm's field representative and when
stored, shall be kept separate from other excavated materials and piled free of roots,
stones, and other undesirable materials.
3.2 EXCAVATION
A. Classification: Excavation will be classified as common excavation or rock excavation
in accordance with the following definitions.
1. Common Excavation: shall be defined as the excavation of all materials that can be
excavated, transported, and unloaded by the use of heavy ripping equipment and
wheel tractor-scrapers with pusher tractors or that can be excavated and dumped into
place 0 r loaded onto hauling equipment by means 0 f excavators having a rated
capacity of one cubic yard and equipped with attachments (such as shovel, bucket,
backhoe, dragline, or clam shell) appropriate to the character ofthe materials and the
site conditions.
2. Rock Excavation: shall be defined as the excavation of all hard, compacted 0 r
cemented materials the accomplishment of which requires blasting or the use of
excavators larger than defined for common excavation. The excavation and removal
of isolated boulders or rock fragments larger than one cubic yard in volume
encountered in materials otherwise conforming to the definition of common
excavation shall be classified as rock excavation.
3. Excavation will be classified according to the above definitions by the Engineer,
based on his judgement of the character of the materials and the site conditions.
4. The presence of isolated boulders or rock fragments larger than one cubic yard in size
will not in itself be sufficient cause to change the classification of the surrounding
material.
5. For the purpose of this classification, the following definitions shall apply:
GRADING
02210-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
(a) Heavy Ripping Equipment: shall be defined as rear-mounted, heavy duty, single-
tooth, ripping attachment mounted on a tractor having a power rating of at least
200 net horsepower (at the flywheel).
(b) Wheel Tractor-Scraper: shall be defined as self-loading (not elevating) and
unloading scraper having a struck bowl capacity of at least 12 yards.
(c) Pusher Tractor: shall be defined as a track type tractor having a power rating of
at least 200 net horsepower (at the flywheel) equipped with appropriate
attachments.
B. Excavation of every description regardless of material encountered within the grading,
limits of the project, shall be performed to the lines and grades indicated. Suitable
excavated material shall be transported to and placed in fill areas within the limits of the
work. When directed, unsuitable material encountered within the limits ofthe work shall
be excavated below the grade shown and replaced with suitable material. Materials
considered unsuitable are those conforming to Classes PT, OH, CH, MH, or OL as
described under the Unified Soil Classification System. Rock encountered in the grading
process that is not gradable using conventional equipment (including rippers) shall be
blasted. Such material removed and the selection material ordered as replacement shall
be included in excavation. Unsuitable and surplus excavation material not required for
fill shall be disposed in designated waste or spoil areas. During construction, excavation
and filling shall be performed in a manner and sequence that will provide drainage at all
times. Material required for fills in excess of that produced by excavation within the
grading limits shall be excavated from the borrow areas indicated or from other approved
areas selected by the Contractor, as specified herein.
C. Blasting: The transportation, handling, storage and use of dynamite and other explosives
shall be direCted and supervised by a person of proven experience and ability in blasting
operations. Blasting shall be done in such a way as to prevent damage to the work and
existing structures and utilities or unnecessary fracturing of the foundation and shall
conform to any special requirements of this specification.
D. Excavation of Ditches and Gutters: Ditches and gutters shall be cut accurately to the
cross-sections and grades indicated by the drawings. All roots, stumps, and other foreign
matter in the sides and bottom of ditches and gutters shall be cut one foot below finish
grade. Care shall be taken not to over-excavate ditches and gutters below the grades
indicated. Any excessive ditch and gutter excavation due to removal of roots, stumps,
etc., or due to over-excavation shall be backfilled to grade either with suitable material,
thoroughly compacted, or with suitable stone or cobble to form an adequate gutter paving,
as directed. The Contractor shall maintain all ditches and gutters excavated under this
specification free from detrimental quantities ofleaves, sticks, and other debris until final
acceptance of the work. Suitable earth material excavated from ditches and channel
GRADING
02210-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
changes shall be placed in embankments. Excavated material shall not be deposited
within a distance from the edge of any excavation of less than 1-1/2 times the depth ofthe
excavation. When storm drain pipe terminates in a new ditch, the headwall or end section
together with ditch pavement shall be constructed immediately as called for on the plans.
Ditch slopes and disturbed earth areas shall be grassed as required under section entitled
"Grassing." The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining these newly constructed
ditches and take immediate action subject to approval to keep erosion of the ditch bottom
and slopes to a minimum during the life ofthe contract. No additional compensation will
be given to the Contractor for the required maintenance.
E. Compaction: In parking and slab areas where excavation is required to reach finished
grades, the upper 12 - 18 inches of material shall be scarified and recompacted to a
minimum of 98 percent of standard proctor maximum dry density.
3.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING SERVICE LINES AND UTILITIES STRUCTURES
A. Existing utility lines that are shown on the drawings or the locations of which are made
known to the Contractor prior to excavation that are to be retained, as well as utility lines
, constructed during excavation operations, shall be protected from damage during
excavation and backfilling, and if damaged, shall be repaired by the Contractor at his
expense. In the event that the Contractor damages any existing utility lines that are not
shown, or the locations of which are not known to the Contractor, report thereof shall be
made immediately to the Engineer.
3.4 FILLING AND BACKFILLING
A. Preparation of Ground Surface for Fill: All vegetation, such as roots, brush, heavy sods,
heavy growth of grass, and all decayed vegetable matter, rubbish and other unsuitable
material within the area upon which fill is to be placed shall be stripped or otherwise
removed before the fill is started. In no case will unsuitable material remain in or under
the fill area. Sloped ground surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal on which fill
is to be placed shall be plowed, stepped or benched, or broken up as directed, in such
manner that the fill material will bond with the existing surface. Prepared surfaces on
which compacted fill is to be placed shall be wetted or dried as may be required to obtain
the compaction specified.
B. Proofrolling: After the subgrade has been stripped of topsoil, associated root mat and
debris, evaluate all at grade or fill areas by proofrolling. Proofrolling will consist of
patrolling the sub grade areas utilizing a fully loaded tandem-axle dump truck (20 ton
minimum) during a period of dry weather. Areas which rut or deflect excessively under
the wheelload of the proofrolling vehicle will not be considered suitable for the placement
offill or structures and will therefore require remediation. It may be possible to compact
the existing soils in place, or these soils may have to be removed and replaced witH
suitable soils. The decision on the type of remediation will be made in the field in
GRADING
02210-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
consultation with the geotechnical engineer. All proofrolling will be performed in the
presence ofthe geotechnical engineer.
C. Fill: Fills and embankments shall be constructed at the locations and to lines and grades
indicated. The completed fill shall correspond to the shape ofthe typical section indicated
or shall meet the requirements ofthe particular case. Suitable material removed from the
excavation shall be used in forming the fill. Fill material shall be reasonably free from
roots, other organic material and trash, and from stones having maximum dimension
greater than 6 inches. No frozen material will be permitted in the fill. Stones having a
maximum dimension larger than 4 inches shall not be permitted in the upper 6 inches of
fill or embankment. The material shall be placed in successive horizontal layers of 8
inches in loose depth for the full width of the cross section and shall be compacted as
specified below.
D. Backfill Adjacent to Structures: B ackfilladjacent to structures shall be p laced and
compacted uniformly in such manner as to prevent wedging action or eccentric loading
upon or against the structures. Slopes bounding or within areas to be backfilled shall be
stepped or serrated to prevent sliding of the fill. During backfilling operations and
formation of embankments, equipment that will overload the structure in passing over and
compacting these fills shall not be used. Backfill for storm drains and subdrains,
including the bedding, shall conform to the additional requirements as specified.
3.5 COMPACTION
A. Structural Fill: Each layer of the fill or embankment, except in areas indicated as not
requiring compaction, shall be compacted by rolling with an approved tamping roller,
heavy rubber-tired roller, three-steel wheeled power roller, vibratory roller or other
compaction equipment, whichever is best suited for the types of soil encountered.
Compact all fill to a minimum of 95 percent of Standard Proctor maximum dry density.
Compact the upper 12 to 18 inches offill for paved and building areas to 98% of Standard
Proctor maximum dry density.
B. Field Control: In all fill areas field density tests will be performed in a sufficient number,
as recommended by the geotechnical engineer, (minimum of one test for every 2,000
cubic yards of fill or 500 cubic yards in building area) to insure that the specified density
is being obtained. These tests will be made at the expense of the contractor and will be
in accordance with ASTM D 698.
3.6 FINISHED EXCAVATIONS, FILLS, AND EMBANKMENTS
A. All areas covered by the project, including excavated and filled sections and adjacent
transition areas, shall be uniformly smooth graded. The finished surface shall be
reasonably smooth, compacted, and free from irregular surface changes. The degree of
GRADING
02210-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
finish shall be that ordinarily obtainable from either bladegrader or scraper operations,
supplemented with hand raking and finishing, except as otherwise specified. The finished
surface shall be not more than 0.10 foot above or below the established grade or approved
cross section. Ditches and gutters shall be finished so as to permit adequate drainage.
The surface of areas to be grassed shall be finished to smoothness suitable for the
application of grassing materials. The surface of embankments or excavated areas for
road construction or other areas to be paved on which a base course or pavement is to be
placed shall not vary more than 0.05 foot for the established grade and approved cross
section. In areas where the bulking of soil as a result of grassing operations will tend to
retard surface drainage along the edge of pavements, the finished grades shall be left 0.1
foot below grade prior to grassing.
3.7 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL
A. All vegetation, roots, brush, sod, broken pavements, curbs and gutter, rubbish, and other
unsuitable or surplus material stripped or removed from the limits of construction shall
be disposed of off the site, except where otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer.
The material shall be dumped, spread, and leveled to drain. Surplus excavation shall be
hauled to, compacted in accordance with overall and overlot areas and sloped to drain in
the disposal area where directed. The unsuitable material shall be leveled to drain and
firmed under the normal operation of spreading and hauling equipment. Any trees,
stumps, brush, down timber, etc., in the area to be used for disposal shall be cleared by
cutting (to within six (6) inches ofthe ground) and shall be disposed of by removal from
the property. Clearing and disposal oftrees, stumps, etc. shall comply with the applicable
portions of the clearing and grubbing specifications.
3.8 PLACEMENT OF TOPSOIL
A. Topsoil shall be placed on all shoulders, slopes, ditches, landscaped areas, and other earth
areas graded under this contract, excluding borrow areas, unless otherwise specified on
the plans. Topsoil shall be uniformly placed, in 12 inch loose layers maximum, on these
areas to a depth of not less than four (4) inches after compaction as specified below. The
material shall b e free from clods 0 f s oil, matted roots, roots greater than 2 inch in
diameter, and any other objectionable material which might hinder subsequent grassing
and mowing operations. The material shall be placed, leveled, and lightly compacted with
at least one pass of a cultipacker or light pneumatic-tired roller, to required cross sections,
but shall be left one-tenth (0.1) of a foot below the finished earth grade.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Newly graded areas shall be protected from traffic and from erosion, and any settlement
or washing away that may occur from any cause, prior to acceptance, shall be repaired and
grades re-established to the required elevations and slopes, at no additional expense to the I
Owner.
GRADING
02210-6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02221
EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING FOR PIPE LINES
PART 1 -
SCOPE:
This section covers all excavation, trenching and backfilling for pipe lines, complete.
1.1 EXISTING lMPROVEMENTS:
A. The Contractor shall maintain in operating condition and protect from damage all
existing improvements including utilities, roads, streets, sidewalks, drives, power and ,
telephone lines, gas lines, water lines, sewers, gutters and other drains encountered,
. and repair to the satisfaction of the Engineer any aerial, surface or subsurface
improvements damaged during the course of the work. Where and if shown on the
plans, the locations and existence or nonexistence of underground utilities are not
guaranteed. The Contractor shall contact the various utility companies to determine
and/or verify such information prior to proceeding with the work. He shall make
reasonable and satisfactory provisions for t he maintenance 0 f traffic 0 n streets,
drives, walkways and at street crossings and if necessary to provide temporary
walkways and bridges for crossing of the open trench as directed.
1.2 EXCAVATION:
A. All excavation of every description and of whatever substances encountered shall be
performed to the depths indicated on the drawings or as specified herein. Excavation
shall be made by the open cut method except as otherwise specified or shown on the
drawings. Excavation methods shall comply with codes and ordinances of governing
authorities having jurisdiction and to the requirements of OSHA Health and Safety
Standards for Excavations, 29 CFR Part 1926, or successor regulations.
B. All excavated materials not required for fill or backfill shall be removed and wasted
as directed. The banks of shallow trenches shall be kept as nearly vertical as
practicable and where required shall be properly sheeted and braced. Except where
otherwise indicated, trench bottoms shall be not less than 12 inches wider nor more
than 16 inches wider than the outside diameter of the pipe to be laid therein, and shall
be excavated true to line, so that a clear space of not less than 6 inches nor more than
8 inches in width is provided on each side of the pipe. The bottom of trenches shall
be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing and support for each section of the
pipe on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length, except for portions of
the pipe sections where it is necessary to excavate for bell holes and for the proper
sealing of pipe joints. Bell holes shall be dug after the trench bottom has beeri
graded. Bell holes shall be excavated only to an extent sufficient to permit accurat~
work in the making of the joints and to insure that the pipe, for a maximum of it~
length will rest upon the prepared bottom of the trench. Depressions for joints othet
. than mechanical shall be made in accordance with the recommendations ofthe joint
EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING FOR PIPE LINES
02221-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
manufacturers for the particular joint used. Excavation for structures and other
accessories shall be sufficient to leave at least 12 inches in the clear between their
outer surfaces and the embankment or timber which may be used to hold the bank
and protect them. Where damage is liable to result from withdrawing sheeting, the
sheeting will be ordered to be left in place. Except at locations where excavation of
rock from the bottoms of trenches is required, care shall be taken not to excavate
below the depths indicated. Where rock excavation is required, the rock shall be
excavated to a minimum overdepth of 4 inches below the normal required trench
depth. The overdepth rock excavation and all excess trench excavation shall be
backfilled with loose, moist earth, thoroughly tamped. Rock is defined as materials
which are so hard or cemented that the excavation of such material requires blasting.
The excavation shall proceed in a conventional manner with satisfactory effort made
to remove hard materials before the Engineer makes a determination of need for
blasting. Predrilling and blasting will be allowed, if the Contractor can provide,
evidence for the Engineer's review that boring logs c an and w ill show that the
material can or cannot be excavated. Evidence will be provided for the Engineer's
review and approval before predrilling and blasting is undertaken. The excavation
and removal of isolated boulders or rock fragnlents larger than one cubic yard in
volume encountered in materials of common excavation shall be classified as rock
excavation. Whenever wet or otherwise unstable soil that is incapable of properly
supporting the pipe, as determined by the Engineer or indicated on the drawings, is
encountered in the trench bottom, such soil shall be removed to a depth required for
the lengths designated by the Engineer, and the trench backfilled to trench bottom
grade, as herein specified, with coarse sand, fine gravel, or other suitable material.
Backfill with earth under structures will not be permitted and any unauthorized
excess excavation below the levels indicated for the foundation of such structures
shall be filled with sand, gravel, or concrete, as directed.
1. GRADING AND STACKING: All grading in the vicinity of trench excavation
shall be controlled to prevent surface ground water from flowing into the
trenches. Any water accumulated in the trenches shall be removed by pumping
or by other approved methods. During excavation, material suitable for
backfilling shall be stored in an orderly manner at a distance from the edges of
trenches to avoid overloading and prevent slides or cave-ins. Material unsuitable
for backfilling, as determined by the Engineer, shall be removed from the job site
and disposed of by the Contractor in a manner as approved by the Engineer.
2. SHORING AND SHEETING: All shoring, sheeting, and bracing required to I
perform and protect the excavation and to safeguard employees and the public
shall be performed. The failure of the Engineer to direct the placing of such
protection shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for damage
resulting from its omission.
(a) Whenever sheeting is driven to a depth below the elevation ofthe top ofthe
pipe, that portion ofthe sheeting below the elevation of the top of the pipe I
shall not be disturbed or removed. Sheeting left in place shall be cut off not
less than 1 foot below finished grade. No sheeting shall be removed until
the excavation is substantially backfilled as hereinafter specified.
3. WATER REMOVAL: Where water is encountered, it shall be prevented from
accumulating in excavated areas by pumping, well-pointing and pumping, or by
EXCA V A TING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING FOR PIPE LINES
02221-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
other means approved by the Engineer as to capacity and effectiveness. Water
removed from excavations shall be discharged at points where it will not cause
injury to public or private property, or the work completed or in progress. Under
no circumstances shall trench bottoms be prepared, pipes laid, or appurtenances
installed in water. Water shall not be allowed to rise in unbackfilled excavations
after pipe or structures have been placed.
4. BLASTING: Explosives are to used only within legal limitations. Before
explosives are used, all necessary permits for this work shall be secured and all
precautions taken in the blasting operations to prevent damage to private or
public property or to persons. The Contractor shall assume full liability for any
damage that may occur during the use of explosives. No blast shall be set off
within 50 feet of pipe already laid in the trench.
5. TREE PROTECTION: Care shall be exercised to protect the roots oftrees to be
left standing. Within the branch spread of the tree, trench shall be opened only
when the work can be installed immediately. Injured roots shall be pruned
cleanly and backfill placed as soon as possible.
1.3 BACKFILLING:
A. Trenches and other excavations shall not be backfilled until all required tests are
performed and the work has been approved by the Engineer. The trenches shall be
carefully backfilled with the excavated materials approved for backfilling consisting
of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel, soft shale, or other approved materials.
No material shall be used for backfilling that contains mulch, other unstable
materials, stones, blasted rock, broken concrete or pavement, or other hard materials
having any dimension greater than 4 inches; or large clods of earth, debris, frozen
earth or earth with an exceptionally high void content.
B. For backfill up to a level 1 foot over the top of pressure pipelines and 2 feet above
the top of gravity pipelines, only selected materials shall be used. Select materials
shall be finely divided material free from debris, organic material and stone, and may
be suitable job excavated material or shall be provided by the Contractor from other
sources. The backfill shall be placed in uniform layers not exceeding 6 inches in
depth. Each layer shall be moistened and carefully and uniformly tamped with
mechanical tampers or other suitable tools. Each layer shall be placed and tamped
under the pipe haunches with care and thoroughness so as to eliminate the possibility
of voids or lateral displacement.
C. The remainder ofthe backfill material shall then be placed and compacted above the
level specified above. In areas not subject to traffic, the backfill shall be placed in
12 inch layers and each layer moistened and compacted to a density approximating
, that ofthe surrounding earth. Under roadways, driveways, paved areas, parking lots,
along roadway shoulders and other areas subject to traffic, the backfill shall be placed
in6 inch layers and each layer moistened and compacted to density at least equal to
that of the surrounding earth so that traffic can be resumed immediately 'after .
backfilling is completed. Any trenches which are improperly backfilled, or where
settlement occurs, shall be reopened to the depth required for proper compa9tion,
then refilled and compacted with the surface restored to the required grade
compaction. Along all portions of the trenches not located in roadways, the ground
EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING FOR PIPE LINES
02221-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
shall be graded to a reasonable uniformity and the mounding over the trenches left
in a neat condition satisfactory to the Engineer.
D. Sheeting not specified to be left in place shall be removed as the backfilling
progresses. Sheeting shall be removed in such a manner as to avoid caving of the
trench. Voids left by the removal of sheeting and shoring shall be carefully filled
and compacted. Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, damage is liable to result
from withdrawing sheeting, the sheeting will be ordered to be left in place.
1.4 BORING AND JACKING:
A. Where required by the drawings, the pipeline will be installed in a steel casing,
placed by boring and jacking. Where boring is required under highways, the
materials and workmanship will be in accordance with the standards of the State,
Highway Department or local authority. Boring and jacking under railroads will be
governed by the latest A.R.E.A. standards and those of the railroad involved. The
steel casing shall be in accordance with ASTM A252 to the thicknesses shown on the
drawings.
1.5 PAVEMENT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT:
A. Where necessary existing pavements shall be removed and replaced, the applicable
standards ofthe Georgia Department ofTransportaiton or local authority shall govern
this work. Joints shall be sawed, unless joints equally uniform in the opinion of the
Engineer result from other means. Refer to Augusta-Richmond County Right-of-
Way Encroachment Guidelines for pavement removal and replacement.
EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING FOR PIPE LINES
02221-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02515
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
PART 1 -
GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1. This section covers the construction of concrete pavements. The work shall consist of a
pavement composed of Portland cement concrete constructed on a prepared sub grade in
accordance with these specifications, and in the areas and to the typical cross sections
shown in the plans. The Contractor is to provide for the construction and completion in
every detail of the work described. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, ,
equipment, tools, transportation and supplies required to complete the work in accordance
with the plans, specifications, and terms of the contract documents.
2. Concrete pavement construction shall conform in all respects to the section "Concrete
Construction - Civil" ofthese specifications. The requirements below shall be considered
additional requirements for pavement.
1.2 SUBMITTALS AND APPROVALS
1. Concrete and other materials specified shall be furnished from sources of sup ply approved
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit a "Proposed Paving Construction Plan,"
showing joint types and locations, and a statement of proposed sequence and schedule of
paving operations. This submittal shall also include a brief description of paving
equipment to be used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
1. Concrete shall be composed of Portland cement, aggregates, and water conforming to the
section of these specifications on Concrete Construction except as noted below.
2. The concrete shall have the following percentages of entrained air:
1. For 1-1/2 inch maximum size aggregate, entrained air content shall be 5 +/ - percent
by volume.
2. For: 3/4 or 1 inch maximum size aggregate, entrained air content shall be 6 +/-
percent by volume.
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02515-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3. Joint materials and curing compounds shall be as specified under the section
"Concrete Construction - Civil" hereof.
2.2 CONCRETE MIX, DESIGN AND TESTING
A. The concrete mix shall conform to the section "Concrete Construction - Civil" hereof,
except that the slump range shall be 2 to 4 inches.
PART 3-
EXECUTION
3.1 PLACING AND FINISHING
A. SUBGRADEPREPARATION: Subgrade construction shall generally conform to Section
306.08 of the Standard Specifications for Highway Construction of the South Carolina
Department of Highways, latest edition.
B. The sub grade shall be systematically test rolled with a heavily loaded vehicle prior to
paving. All soft and yielding material and portions of the sub grade that will not compact
readily when rolled or tamped shall be removed and replaced with suitable material. The
subgrade shall be brought to an unyielding condition by compacting it to uniform density
at or slightly above standard optimum moisture. Immediately prior to placing concrete,
the sub grade shall be moistened as required to provide a uniform dampened surface at the
time concrete is placed.
C. LINES AND GRADES: The concrete pavement shall be installed true to line and grade
accurate to accommodate the thickness of the specified surface courses in each individual
area. Where alternates may be specified, plan grades shall be adjusted accordingly.
D. FORMING: Forms shall be set to the required grades and lines to facilitate orderly
concrete placement. Forms shall be of such cross section and strength and so secured as
to resist the pressure of the concrete when placed without springing or settlement. Forms
shall be cleaned after each use and coated with form release agent as often as required to
ensure separation from concrete without damage.
In lieu of fixed forms, the Contractor may place concrete with a slipform paver designed
to spread, consolidate, screed and float finish the freshly placed concrete in one complete
pass of the machine. The slipform paver shall be operated with as nearly a continuous
forward movement as possible, with stopping and starting ofthe paver held to a minimum.
E. CONCRETE PLACEMENT: Concrete shall be deposited and consolidated in such a
manner as to prevent the formation of voids or honeycomb pockets. However,
overconsolidation of the concrete so as to cause segregation of aggregates shall be
avoided.
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02515-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F. JOINTS: Contraction joints, expansion joints, and construction joints shall be placed as
indicated on the approved "Proposed Paving Construction Plan," specified above. Depth
of contraction joints shall be equal to at least one-fourth the depth of the slab and may be
installed by either hand- forming, or by sawing. If sawing is used, the joints shall be cut
as soon as the saw will not ravel the edges and in no case more than 24 hours after the
pavement has been placed.
G. FINISHING: The finishing sequence of all slabs shall consist of striking off and
consolidating, floating, straight-edging and final surface finishing. Adding water to the
surface of the concrete to assist in finishing operations shall not be permitted. A uniform,
gritty, non-slip finish shall be provided using a stiff-bristled broom or by the use of a
burlap drag just before the water sheen disappears.
H. CURING: Curing shall be as specified under "Concrete Construction - Civil" of these
specifications.
CONCRETE PAVEMENT
02515-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02525
CURBS AND GUTTERS, CONCRETE
PART 1 -
GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
1. This section covers construction of Portland cement concrete curbs and gutters, complete.
2. Concrete and the equipment, workmanship and materials therefor shall conform to the
applicable requirements of the "Concrete Construction - Civil" section, except as'
hereinafter specified. Concrete shall have a slump of not more than 3 inches. The
'concrete mixtures shall have an air content by volume of 4.5 percent, plus.,or minus 1.5
percent, based on measurement made on concrete immediately after discharge from the
mIxer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
1. Provide materials, not specifically described but required for proper completion of the
work ofthis Section, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval ofthe Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SUBGRADEPREPARATION
1. The sub grade shall be constructed true to grade and cross section. The sub grade shall be
of materials equal in bearing quality to the sub grade under the adjacent roadway or street
and shall be placed and compacted to conform with applicable requirements of "Graded
Aggregate Base Course" with the following modifications. The sub grade for curb and
gutter shall extend in all cases at least one foot in width back of the curb or gutter or
valley pavement. The sub grade shall be tested for grade and cross section by means of a
template extending the full width ofthe curb, gutter, or combination curb and gutter. The
sub grade shall be maintained in a smooth, compacted condition, in conformity with the I
required section and established grade until the concrete is placed. In cold weather, the
sub grade shall be prepared and protected so as to produce a sub grade free from frost when
the concrete is deposited.
3.2 FORMS
1.1
1. Forms shall be of wood or steel, straight, and of sufficient strength to resist springing
CURBS AND GUTTERS, CONCRETE
02525-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
during depositing and consolidating the concrete. The outside forms shall have a height
equal to the full depth of the curb or gutter. The inside form of curb shall have batter as
indicated and shall be securely fastened to and supported by the outside form. Straight
forms of wood shall be two inch nominal surface plank, and of steel, shall be of approved
section with a flat surface at the top. Rigid forms shall be provided for curb returns except
that benders or thick plank forms may be used for curb or curb returns with a radius often
feet or more, when grade changes occur in the return, or where the central angle is such
that a rigid form with a central angle of ninety degrees cannot be used. Back forms for
curb may be made of one half inch benders, for the full height of the curb, cleated
together. Curb forms shall be carefully set to alignment and grade and to conform to the
dimensions of the curb. Forms shall be held rigidly in place by the use of stakes placed
at intervals not to exceed four feet. Clamps, spreaders, and braces shall be used where
required to insure rigidity in the forms. The forms on the front of the curb shall be '
removed not less than two hours nor more than six hours after the concrete has been
placed. Forms back of curb shall remain in place until the face and top of the curb have
been fmished as specified in the Finishing paragraph. Gutter forms shall not be removed
for twelve hours after the concrete has been placed. Forms shall not be removed while
the concrete is sufficiently plastic to slump in any direction. Forms shall be cleaned and
coated with form oil each time before concrete is placed. Wood forms may, instead, be
thoroughly wetted with water before concrete is placed, except that with probable freezing
temperatures, oiling is mandatory.
3.3 JOINTS
1. Expansion joints and contraction joints shall be constructed at right angles to the line of
curb, gutter, and combination curb and gutter. Dowels, tie bars and reinforcement when
required will be shown on the plans and shall be installed in accordance with the
applicable details.
1. Contraction Joints: Contraction joints shall be constructed by means of one-eighth
inch thick separators, of a section conforming to the cross section ofthe curb, gutter,
entrance pavements, and combination curb and gutter. Contraction joints shall be so
placed that monolithic sections between curb returns will not be less than five feet nor
greater than fifteen feet after the concrete has set sufficiently to preserve the width and
shape of the joint. After separator plates have been removed, all exposed edges of
joints shall be rounded with the proper edging tool to a radius of one-fourth inch. I
I
I
2. Expansion Joints: Expansion joints shall be formed by means of preformecl
expansion joint filler material cut and shaped to the cross section ofthe curb, gutteJ,
entrance, and combination curb and gutter.
3. Expansion joint filler, unless otherwise specified, shall conform to ASTM StandarQ
D1751-60 or D1752-60 or shall be resin impregnated fiberboard conforming to th1e
physical requirements of ASTM Standard DI752-60. Expansion joints shall be
provided in curb and combination curb and gutter at the ends of all returns.
CURBS AND GUTTERS, CONCRETE
02525-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Expansion joints at least one half inch in width shall be provided at intervals not
exceeding fifty feet. Expansion joints shall be provided in nonreinforced concrete
gutter at the locations indicated.
3.4 CONSTRUCTION
1. Curbs, Gutters and Combination Curb and Gutters: Shall be of the dimensions and
sections shown on the drawings.
2. Reconstruction: Where the plans provide for reconstruction of existing curb or
combination curb and gutter and the limit of new work specified does not fall on ajoint,
the entire section shall be removed and the new curb, combination curb and gutter or
entrance pavement shall join the old curb at the first joint line beyond the specified limit.
3. Placing Concrete: The faces and adjacent edges of abutting rigid pavements and
structures shall be painted with an approved bituminous material prior to placing concrete.
Concrete shall be placed in the forms to the specified depth in six inch layers and
thoroughly consolidated by tamping and spading so that there are no rock pockets at
forms, and mortar entirely covers the top surfaces. Concrete may be compacted by means
of mechanical vibrators.
4. Finishing: The edges of the gutter and top ofthe curb shall be rounded with an edging
tool to a radius of one-fourth inch and the surfaces shall be floated and finished with a
smooth wood float until true to grade and section and uniform in texture. The floated
surfaces shall then be brushed with a fine hair brush with longitudinal strokes.
Immediately after removing the front curb form, the face of the curb shall be rubbed with
a wood or concrete rubbing block and water until blemishes, form marks, and tool marks
have been removed. The surface, while still wet, shall be brushed in the same manner as
the gutter and curb top. The top surface of gutter and entrance shall be finished to grade
with a wood float. Except at grade changes or curves, the finished surfaces shall not vary,
from the testing edge of a ten foot straightedge, more than one-eighth inch for gutter and
entrance and one-fourth inch for top and face of curb. Irregularities exceeding the above
shall be satisfactorily corrected. Visible surfaces and edges ofthe finished curb, gutter,
and combination curb and gutter shall be free ofblemishes and form and tool marks, and
shall be uniform in color, shape, and appearance.
5. Curb forming machines for constructing curb and gutter will be approved based on trial
use on the job. Use of the equipment shall be discontinued at any time during the
construction if the equipment produces unsatisfactory results, and the work shall be
removed and reconstructed for the full length between regularly scheduled joints.
Removed portions shall be disposed of as directed.
CURBS AND GUTTERS, CONCRETE
02525-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.5 CURING AND PROTECTION
1. Curing: Immediately after the finishing operations, the exposed concrete surfaces shall
be cured by one ofthe following methods as the Contractor may elect:
1. Mat Method: The entire exposed surface shall be covered with cotton mats
conforming to Federal Specification DD-M-148 or with two or more layers of burlap
conforming to Federal Specification C CC-C-467b having a combined weight 0 f
fourteen ounces or more per square yard when dry. Mats shall overlap each other at
least six inches. The mat shall be thoroughly wetted with water prior to placing on
the concrete surface and shall be kept continuously in a saturated condition and in
intimate contact with concrete for not less than seven days.
2. Impervious Sheeting Method: The entire exposed surface shall be wetted with a fine
spray of water and then covered with waterproof paper conforming to ASTM
Standard Cl71 63, or with wetted polyethylene coated burlap or polyethylene
sheeting conforming to the water retention requirements of ASTM Standard C 171-
63; polyethylene sheeting and polyethylene film bonded to burlap shall be not less
than 0.004 inch thick.
1. Sheets shall be laid directly on the concrete surface with a light colored side up
and overlapped twelve inches when a continuous sheet is not used. The curing
medium shall not be less than eighteen inches wider than the concrete surface to
be cured and shall be securely weighted down by placing a bank of moist earth
on the edges just outside the forms and over the transverse laps of form closed
joints. Sheets shall be satisfactorily repaired or replaced if damaged during
curing. The curing medium shall remain on the concrete surface to be cured for
not less than seven days.
3. Membrane Curing Method: The entire exposed surfaces shall be covered with a clear
membrane forming curing compound. The curing compound shall be applied in two
coats by hand operated pressure sprayers at the coverage of approximately two
hundred square feet per gallon for both coats. The second coat shall be applied in the
direction approximately at right angles to the direction of application of the first coat.
The compound shall form a uniform continuous coherent film that will not check,
crack, or peel and shall be free from pin holes and other imperfections. Concrete
surfaces that are subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after the curing
compound has been applied shall be resprayed by the method and at the coverage
specified above at no additional cost to the Owner. Joint openings shall be sealed at
the top by inserting moistened paper or fiber rope or covering with strips or
waterproof paper prior to application of the curing compound, in a manner to prevent
the curing compound from entering thejoint. Concrete surfaces to which membrane
curing compounds have been applied shall be adequately protected for seven days
from pedestrian and vehicular traffic and from any other action which might disrupt
CURBS AND GUTTERS, CONCRETE
02525-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
the continuity of the membrane. Any area covered with curing compound and
damaged by subsequent construction operations within the seven day period shall be
resprayed as specified above at no additional expense to the Owner.
2. Protection: After curing, debris shall be removed and the backfill shall be placed as
indicated. The completed curb, gutter, and combination curb and gutter shall be protected
from damage until accepted. The Contractor shall repair damaged concrete and clean
concrete discolored during construction. Curb, gutter, and combination curb and gutter
that are damaged shall be remove and reconstructed for the entire length between regularly
scheduled joints, not by refinishing the damaged portion. Removed damaged portions
shall be disposed of as directed.
3.6 SEALING JOINTS
1. The sealing of expansion joints in curb and gutter sections will not be required, Any
expansionjoint material protruding after the concrete is cured shall be trimmed flush with
the surface. Expansion joints in the valley pavement shall be sealed with an approved
joint sealer, conforming to Federal Specification SS-S-164. The joint opening shall be
thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material before the sealing material is placed. The
sealing shall be done in such manner that the material will not be spilled on the exposed
surfaces of the concrete. Any excess material on the exposed surfaces of the concrete
shall be removed immediately and the exposed concrete surfaces cleaned.
CURBS AND GUTTERS, CONCRETE
02525-5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02580
BRICK PAVEMENT
PART 1 -
SCOPE:
1.1 GENERAL:
A.
The work under this section shall consist of constructing a brick pavement on a
grout bed over a previously placed concrete base. Brick facing and other ordinary
masonry work are covered by another section of these specifications.
PART 2-
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Bricks shall meet the requirements of ASTM C-902-79A for Type II Class MX.
Brick shall have nominal dimensions of2Y4 inch deep by 4 inches wide by 8 inches
long. Brick shall be made of clay mined in Georgia. Brick shall be Pathway Red-
Flashed Paver, as manufactured by Boral Brick Company, Augusta, Georgia, or
approved equal. Paving brick shall be manufactured of material ofthe same color as
brick throughout the project, including facing brick for adjacent walls. Brick which
are misshapened, dished, bowed, discolored, marred, out of square, or otherwise
inferior shall not be acceptable. Brick shall be neatly piled outside the pavement
lines without dumping. The manufacturer shall present evidence that the brick he
intends to furnish will not exhibit efflorescence. Such brick that shows efflorescence
at the completion of the job will be rejected and replaced by the Contractor at no
additional cost to the Owner.
B. Sand for the joint filler shall consist of clean, hard, durable uncoated particles free
from clay and all deleterious substances. Sand shall be so graded that when dry 100
percent shall pass a No.4 sieve, not more than 35 percent by weight shall pass a No.
. 50 sieve, and not more than 10 percent by weight shall pass a No. 100 sieve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GROUT BED
I
A. A grout bed of the required depth shall be placed on the concrete base, not sooner
than 10 days after the base slab has been poured. The grout bed shall be brought to
exact elevations, and the brick shall be laid in fresh grout.
BRICK PAVEMENT
02580-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2 CONSTRUCTION METHODS:
A. The bricks shall be carefully laid with the best face up, in the pattern indicated, and
shall be laid straight and at right angles to the edging line, except at intersections,
where they shall be laid at such angles as are shown on the plans or as directed by the
Engineer. Joints shall be close and at right angles to the tops and sides. No half
bricks or bats shall be used except at the ends of courses where needed and no bats
shall be less than 3 inches in length. All joints shall be broken with a lap of not less
than 3 inches.
B. Where curvature permits, the brick shall be laid in radial courses, allowing at the
outside of the curve a space, between the courses, not exceeding 1fa inch. When the
curvature exceeds the above, the brick shall be laid in rectangular courses and closure .
made by cut bricks at the edges of pavement dividers.
C. No portion of a brick less than 3 inches in length shall be used for batting such
closures, and the amount of space to be batted in shall not exceed a whole brick. In
no case shall brick be cut longitudinally to make a closure on a curve.
D. All brick shall be clean when placed in the pavement. Bricks which in the opinion
of the Engineer are not satisfactorily clean shall be washed before being placed.
E. In no case shall the grout bed in front of the pavement be disturbed during the laying
of the bricks. Bricks shall be laid firmly in the grout bed allowing no mortar to enter
the spaces between bricks so that all bricks lie with side faces flush.
F. After the bricks have been laid, any soft, broken, or misshapened bricks shall be
removed by the Contractor. Any brick slightly spalled or kiln-marked shall be turned
over and, should the opposite face be acceptable, it may be replaced in the pavement;
otherwise, it must be removed and discarded.
G. In laying brick pavement, the Contractor shall keep the bricks culled, and shall make
the necessary changes and replacement so that the work shall be ready for rolling
while the grout bed is still wet.
H. After all objectionable bricks have been removed from the pavement and all
replacements have been made, and while the setting mortar is still soft, the pavement
shall be swept clean and thoroughly rolled with a self-propelled roller. This rolling
shall start along the low edges and progress toward the other side until the surface is I
even. After final rolling the pavement shall be tested with a 10 foot straightedge laid
parallel with the curb, and any depression exceeding 1/8 inch shall be corrected and
brought to the proper grade. All bricks disturbed in making replacements or
correcting depressions shall be settled into place by ramming or by rerolling. All
BRICK PAVEMENT
02580-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
gutter bricks must be brought to grade by ramming. Portions of the pavement
inaccessible to roller shall be tamped to grade by the use of hand tamper applied upon
a 2 inch board.
I. If during or after the rolling ofthe pavement the grout cushion shall work up between
the brick more than one fourth their depth, the brick shall be taken up and the excess
grout removed. The brick shall then be replaced. After final rolling any broken brick
shall be replaced.
1. After the grout bed has set a sand filler shall be applied to fill the slight joints
between bricks. Brick shall be clean and dry when the sand filler is applied. Before
filling the joints the surface of the brick shall be swept clean. Clean, dry sand shall
be swept across the surface until all slight joints are filled. Excess sand shall be '
swept off, and the surface shall be thoroughly wetted. When dry the surface shall be
swept with dry sand as necessary to insure that all joints are completely filled.
K. Brick surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned using agents and methods approved by the
brick manufacturer. All grout spatter, stains, and other objectionable blemishes shall
be removed as a condition of final acceptance.
3.3 SAMPLES:
A. Two representative samples for each type and finish of brick shall be furnished for
approval. Samples shall be of a sufficient number to show the full range to be
expected in color, texture, finish, and quality. Brick delivered shall be equal in all
respects to the approved samples.
BRICK PAVEMENT
02580-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 02721
STORM SEWER SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. This section covers the storm drainage system, including pipe culverts and appurtenant
structures, complete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE MATERIALS FOR CULVERTS AND STORM DRAINS:
A. Pipe for Culverts and Storm Drains: Pipe for culverts shall be reinforced concrete pipe
of the class or D-Ioad strength indicated and shall conform to ASTM C76 or AASHO M
170 with the following additional requirements. Pipe shall have a readily visible line at
least 12 inches in length painted or otherwise applied on the inside and outside ofthe pipe
at each end by the manufacturer, so that, when the pipe is laid in its proper position, the
lines will be at the top of the pipe. The line shall be accurately located to indicate the
position where the pipe reinforcing steel is nearest to the exterior surface, of the pipe.
Non-reinforced concrete pipe shall conform to the latest ASTM C-14.
B. Pipe may also be corrugated metal pipe which shall conform to the latest AASHO M-36.
Bituminous coating, where required by the drawings, shall consist of asphalt cement
having a minimum thickness of 0.04 inch measured at the crest ofthe corrugations. Paved
inverts in corrugated metal pipe, where required by the drawings, shall consist of asphalt
cement applied on the inside of the pipe for one quarter of its circumference (bottom of
pipe when installed). The pavement shall have a minimum thickness of 0.50 inch tapering
to 0.1 inch at the sides.
2.2 MATERIALS FOR DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
A. Drainage structures, where indicated in the plans shall be of the following types,
constructed of the materials specified for each type and in accordance with the details
shown on the plans.
1. Inlets shall be constructed of reinforced concrete, plain concrete or brick complete
with frames and covers.
2. Headwalls shall be constructed of brick, reinforced concrete or plain concrete as
indicated.
STORM SEWER SYSTEM
02721-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Concrete and reinforced concrete shall conform to the requirements specified under the
section on "Concrete Construction-Civil" of these specifications. Aggregate shall be as
specified in the section on "Concrete Construction-Civil." Forms shall be made of sound
lumber and constructed to the shape, form, line, and grade required, and shall be
maintained sufficiently rigid to prevent deformation under load, and inspected for
approval prior to placement of concrete. Water shall be removed from excavations before
concrete is placed. Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to forms as rapidly as
practicable without segregation or loss of ingredients. Concrete shall be placed in layers
not over 18 inches deep and shall be spaded and compacted as directed. The concrete
covering over steel reinforcing shall be as shown on the plans, but where not shown, it
shall be not less than 1 inch for covers and not less than 1-1/2 inches for walls and
flooring. Concrete deposited directly against the ground shall have a thickness of at least
3 inches between the steel and the ground. Expansion joint filler shall be preformed
bituminous fiberboard, or wood board except where specifically noted on the drawings.
Surfaces exposed to view shall be a smooth finish with all blemishes removed. All
concrete surfaces shall be cured for at least 7 days by covering with waterproof paper, or
kept moist with cotton mats or burlap as approved.
C. Mortar for connections to drainage structures shall be composed of one part by volume
of Portland cement and two parts of sand. The Portland cement shall conform to ASTM
CI50-65, Type I or II. The sand shall conform to AASHO Standard M 45, and shall be
of an approved gradation. Hydrated lime may be added to the mixture of sand and cement
in an amount equal to 25 percent of the volume of cement used. Hydrated lime shall
conform to Federal Specification SS-L-351, Type M, or ASTM Standard CI4l-61, Type
A. The quantity of water in the mixture shall be sufficient to produce a stiff workable
mortar, but shall in no case exceed 7 gallons of water per sack of cement. Water shall be
clean and free of injurious acids, alkalies and organic impurities. The mortar shall be used
within 30 minutes from the time the ingredients are mixed with water. The inside of the
joint shall be wiped clean and finished smooth. In pipe too small for a man to work
inside, wiping may be done by dragging an approved swab or longhandled brush through
the pipe as work progresses. The mortar bead on the outside shall be protected from air
and sun with a proper covering until satisfactorily cured.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING FOR DRAINAGE STRUCTURES
A. Excavation and backfilling for drainage structures shall conform to the applicable
requirements specified herein-before in the section, "Excavation, Trenching and
Backfilling for Pipe Lines." Trenches and pits shall be of sufficient size to permit the
placing and removal of forms for the full width and length of structure footings and
foundations, as shown on the drawings. The dimensions and elevations indicated on the
drawings are approximate only and may be changed when deemed necessary to secure
satisfactory foundations Bracing, sheeting and shoring shall be provided where required.
STORM SEWER SYSTEM
02721-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPE
A. Each pipe shall be carefully examined before being laid, and defective or damaged pipe
shall not be used. Pipe lines shall be laid to the grades and alignment indicated. Proper
facilities shall be provided for lowering sections of pipe into trenches. Under no
circumstances shall pipe be laid in water, and no pipe shall be laid when trench conditions
or weather are unsuitable for such work. Full responsibility for the diversion of drainage
and for dewatering of trenches during construction shall be borne by the Contractor. All
pipe in place shall have been approved before backfilling. When storm drain pipe
terminates in a new ditch, the headwall or end section, together with ditch pavement, if
specified, shall be constructed immediately as called for on the plans. Ditch slopes and
disturbed earth areas shall be grassed and mulched as required by the section "Grassing."
The Contractor will be responsible for maintaining these newly constructed ditches and,
take immediate action subject to approval to keep erosion of the ditch bottom and slopes
to a minimum during the life of the contract. No additional compensation will be given
to the Contractor for the required maintenance.
1. Jointing: For concrete and reinforced concrete pipe, joints shall be of the Bell and
Spigot type and installed according to manufacturer's recommendations using
Portland cement mortar. Corrugated metal pipe joints shall be made by riveting or by
means of connecting bands with bolted couplings in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Alignment: Elliptical concrete pipe with circular reinforcing and circular concrete
pipe with elliptical reinforcing shall be so placed that the reference lines designating
the top ofthe pipes will be not more than 5 degrees from the vertical plane through
the longitudinal axis ofthe pipe. In all backfilling operations that Contractor shall be
responsible for preventing damage to or misalignment of the pipe.
3.3 TESTS FOR PIPE
A. Responsibility and Certifications: The Contractor shall be responsible for having the pipe
he proposes to furnish tested to demonstrate conformance to the applicable specifications.
Certified copies of the test reports shall accompany each load of pipe and shall be
delivered to the Engineer for review before the pipe is installed.
B. Strength tests for reinforced concrete pipe shall be the tests of ASTM C-76.
C. Strength tests for concrete pipe shall be the tests of ASTM-C-14.
D. Strength tests for corrugated metal pipe shall be the tests of AASHO M-36.
STORM SEWER SYSTEM
02721-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.4 TESTING
A. Displacement Test: Mains will be checked to determine whether any displacement ofthe
pipe has occurred (a) after the trench has been backfilled to two feet above the pipe and
tamped as specified; and (b) upon completion of the project. The test will be as follows:
Alight will be flashed between manholes 0 r, if t he manholes have not as yet been
constructed, between the locations of the manholes, by means of a flashlight or by
reflecting sunlight with a mirror. If the illuminated interior of the pipe shows any
misalignment, displaced pipe, or any other defects, the defects designated by the engineer
shall be remedied by the Contractor at his expense.
STORM SEWER SYSTEM
02721-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 03101
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION - CIVIL
PART 1 -
GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. The work included under this section will be all plain and reinforced concrete work of
every description throughout the site work portion of the project and including pavement
slabs resting on earth grade, curb and gutter, and storm and sanitary sewer structures.
PART 2-
PRODUCTS
2.1 REINFORCED STEEL MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing steel shall be deformed bars meeting ASTM A-15 latest for open hearth,
intermediate grade, new billet bars, or ASTM A-16latest for all rail steel bars. Bars shall
be free from flaws, cracks or other defects of rolling, shall be true to size and shape, and
shall be free from heavy dirt, paint, grease, oil or other destroyers of bond. They shall be
prefabricated to detail and delivered on the job plainly tagged and ready to set. Furnish
shop detail drawings, all according to ACI 315, latest, in quadruplicate and obtain
approval before fabricating bars.
B. All reinforcing steel will be unless otherwise noted herein, of size and spacing as called
for on the drawings.
C. All reinforcing when delivered to the job shall be systematically piled and kept free from
dirt or grease, should any reinforcement become dirty or greasy or objectionably rusty, it
shall be thoroughly cleaned before being placed in the work.
2.2 PORTLAND CEMENT MATERIALS
A. General: All cement used for structural and architectural concrete work shall be Portland
cement conforming to the American Society for Testing materials specification C-150
(latest edition), Types I, or III, or air entrained cement ASTM C-175 (latest edition), Type
IA or IlIA.
B. Cement shall be delivered on the job in bags containing one cubic foot (approximately 94
lbs.) each (unless a special arrangement to use bulk cement has been developed.). Each
consignment of cement shall be so piled as to be segregated from every other consignment
and shall be housed in a waterproof shed and stored on a floor or platform above the
general ground level and shall be well protected from dampness. No cement which has
partially hardened or been otherwise damaged shall be used on this job. Retempering of
cement shall not be permitted under any circumstances.
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION CIVIL
03101-1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
15
I
16
I
17
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3 FINE AGGREGATE MATERIALS
A. Fine aggregate shall preferably be sand and particles shall be coarse, sharp and clean.
Limestone screenings, pulverized rock, or fine gravel will not be accepted. Sand shall be
free from dust, loam, dirt, vegetable matter, or any other foreign or deleterious material.
When dry, sand shall pass a screen having 3" square mesh and not more than 6 percent
shall pass a 100 mesh screen. Decantation tests may be made to limit the amount ofloam.
2.4 COARSE AGGREGATE MATERIALS
A. Aggregate used in concrete work shall be either screened, crushed rock, or natural gravel,
washed and graded. In any case, coarse aggregate shall be regularly graded from a
maximum of I" down to a minimum of 3", and shall be clean, hard and durable, free from
any long splintery pieces (or a maximum of 5% by weight), and free from dust, dirt,
vegetable or organic matter. Mixed aggregate will not be permitted, such as a crushed run
stone or bank run gravel, because of the uneven ratio of fine to coarse materials. Coarse
aggregates shall be cleaned, screened and regarded for uniformity.
2.5 AIR ENTRAINMENT
A. The concrete shall be air-entrained with air content from 3 percent to 5 percent total air
as determined by the method of ASTM C231. No other admixture is to be used without
prior approval of Engineer.
2.6 WATER
A. It is anticipated that tap-run water will be used for mixing concrete, but any water that is
potable shall be deemed suitable for this purpose.
2.7 WELDED WIRE FABRlC
A. Welded wire fabric shall be rectangularly welded wire of gauges and spacing specified
and shall be delivered on the job in rolls and there straightened and placed. Tags
designating the wire size and spacing shall be left on each roll until ready for use. Welded
wire fabric shall be with end laps of one full mesh tip to tip for longitudinal selvage wires
and wiring all laps securely together. Tuck ends of welded wire mesh well down into
edge beams or walls. Do not leave unreinforced border strips.
PART 3-
EXECUTION
3.1 SUBGRADE
A. The sub grade shall be well drained and compacted and prepared in accordance with other
sections of specifications.
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION CIVIL
03101-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2 FORMS
A. All forms, including those for edge slabs, shall be constructed to accurate dimension of
smooth, dressed and seasoned lumber, which shall be free of defects, knots, etc.
B. All forms shall be substantially and solidly placed to prevent movement or deflection.
C. All forms shall be carefully plumbed immediately before the concrete is poured and shall
be constantly checked during time of pouring, so that movements and deflections may be
observed and corrected.
D. The forms shall be constructed that the finished concrete surface when forms are removed,
shall be free of honeycombs.
E. The forms shall be vigorously rapped during the placing of the concrete to eliminate air
pockets, honeycombs, etc.
F. All projecting comers shall be chamfered. Wood for all chamfered corners, etc., shall be
clear white pine. Earth trenches may not be used without forms unless by the special
permission ofthe Engineer.
3.3 PLACING OF REINFORCEMENT
A. Placing of reinforcing shall be done carefully and accurately and exactly as detailed, and
all properly secured against displacement during the pouring of concrete. All bars shall
be evenly spaced and all work shall be well wired in place with non-slip ties and properly
supported. Where reinforcing rests upon earth grade, it shall be properly and securely
wired together at each intersection and supported on brick bats to permit concrete to flow
under the same.
B. Before being covered with concrete, all reinforcement shall be adjusted to proper height
and location and maintained so until covered.
3.4 CONCRETE
A. Measuring Concrete Materials: The method of measuring the materials including water
for concrete or mortar, shall be one which will insure separate and uniform proportion of
each of the materials at all times, controlling by weight.
B. Proportion: Conforming to ACI Standards, concrete shall be proportioned by the water-
cement ratio method. The proportioning of materials shall be based on the requirements
for a plastic and workable mix with the use of not less than 52 sacks of cement per cubic
yard and not more than 6 2 gallons of water per sack of cement, including the surface
water carried by the aggregate. T he proportion of fine to coarse aggregate shall be
adjusted to produce maximum workability, but in no case shall the ratio offine to coarse
aggregate be outside the limits of a to 2 and the coarse aggregate 2 to b of the total fine
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION CIVIL
03101-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
and coarse aggregate. Concrete shall be placed with a slump of approximately 4" if
manually spaded into place and 3" if internal vibrators are used.
C. Concrete shall develop an ultimate compressive strength of at least 3,000 pounds per
square inch in standard 6" x 12" cylinders at 28 days moist cured in the laboratory.
D. Placing Concrete: Concrete shall be placed in a manner that will permit the most
thorough compacting and shall be worked into all the recesses. Concrete shall be placed
in its final position as soon as possible after mixing and must be in place within 12 hours
after the water has been added to the dry materials. It should be placed in one continuous
operation from construction joint to construction joint.
E. Joints: Joints shall be formed, not simply stopped off, and such forms shall generally be
perpendicular to stress lines. Construction joints are best made at joints of minimum
shear, as for example midspan of slabs, joist, and beams. If joints are made at any other
point, the Engineer will design a shear-key of concrete with crossed reinforcing bars to
develop the shear.
F. Internal vibration is desirable, providing that it is not overdone. Care should be taken to
keep the vibrators off the reinforcing steel. If internal vibrators are not available,
handspading of the concrete into all recesses will be required.
G. Where work is stopped so that the concrete has hardened before placing is resumed, the
surface shall be left level or square by roughened and covered with wet burlap. When
starting again to place, clean the surface of all foreign matter and 2 laitance, slush with a
thin layer of mortar mix made with one part cement and two parts of sand. Furnish and
set dowels in all construction joints as called for on the plans or as directed by the
Engineer.
3.5 FINISHING
A. All floors shall be finished as follows:
1. Interior floor slabs shall have a "Steel Troweled Finish."
2. Exterior slabs, sidewalks, curbs and pads shall have a "Broom or Belt Finish."
3. Ramps shall be finished with "Detectable Warnings" as specified in ADA (American
with Disabilities Act) paragraph 4.29.
(a) Provide contrasting color with adjoining surfaces.
4. Exterior p asvement, drive 0 r parking lot approaches s hall have a uniform gritty
I
texture produced by two (2) passes of a damp burlap or cotton fabric, unless otherwise I .
directed by local or state authorities.
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION CIVIL
03101-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
5. Light pole bases shall have an architectural concrete "As-Cast" finish, patches shall
match surrounding color and texture.
6. Exterior Garden Shop concrete floor slab finish shall be "Broom Finish."
3.6 CURING
A. All concrete trim shall be protected by wet burlap or canvas covering from sun, wind, and
rain and this shall be frequently wetted in dry and hot weather so that the entire surface
is kept wet for a period of one week, or liquid curing compound satisfactory to the
Engineer shall be used, applied as directed.
3.7 PROTECTION FROM WEATHER
A. All concrete work shall be discontinued during freezing weather. All work recently built
must be properly protected. All work injured by the weather must be taken down and
rebuilt at this contractor's expense.
3.8 CLEANING
A. On completion of this contract, clean down all exposed .concrete work and remove from
the premises form lumber, cement sacks, scutan paper and other debris caused by this
work.
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION CIVIL
03101-5
I
I
I
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 References
I
":. \
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
SECTION 03300 - CAST-tN-PLACE CONCRETE
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
I
I
American Concrete Institute (ACt)
ACt 301-99
ACt 304R-00
I
I
I
ACt 305R-99
ACt 306R-88
ACt 318-02
Specifications for Structural Concrete
Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete
Hot Weather Concreting
Cold Weather Concreting
Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
American SocietY; f?rTesling and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM A 185-01
I
ASTM A497-01
I
ASTM A615-0 1
I
ASTM A996-01a
I
ASTM A706/
A706M-01
I
I
I
ASTM C31/
C3 1 M-OOe 1
ASTM C33-02
ASTM C94/
C94M-ODe2
ASTM C143/
CI43M-DO
I
ASTM C 150-02
t:j'
I
,
CAST-IN-PlACE CONCRETE
Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement
Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for
Concrete
Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement
Standard Specification for Rail-Steel and Axle-Steel Deformed Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
Standard Specification for low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens inlhe Field
Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates
Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete
Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete
Standard Specification for Portland Cement
03300-1
I
I
I
I
I
ASTM C171-97a
ASTM 072-99
.!:
ASTM C1 73/
CI7JM-Olel
ASTM C231-97el
I
I
ASTM C260-0 1
ASTM C309-98a
I
ASTM C494/
C494M-99ael
ASTM C595-02
I
ASTM C618-0 1
I
A5TM C920-02
I
A5TM C989-99
ASTM C1116-02
I
I
ASTM 0,119~~,9.7
~ I .
ASTM 01751-99
I
A5TM 01752-84
(R 1996)e 1
I
Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete
Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Volumetric Method
Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
Pressure Method
Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing'
Concrete
Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements
Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural POlzolan
for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete
Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
Standard Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in
Concrete and Mortars
Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Concrete and Shotcrete
Standard Specification for Concrete Joint Sealer, Hot-Applied Elastic Type
Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving
and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types)
Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansiol1loint
Fillers for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
Army Corps of Engineers (COE)
Handbook for Concrete and Cement
I
COE CRO-
C 572
I
COE CRO-
C 621
I
I
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
1974 Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstop
1989 Non-shrink Grout
03300-2
I
I
1.2 General Requirements
I
A.
In the ACI publications referred to herein, the advisory provIsions shall be considered to be
mandatory, as though the word "shall" has been substituted for "should" wherever it appears.
I
1.3 Subm itta/s
A.
Submit to the Architect the following:
I
Certificates of Compliance:
I
Cement
Aggregates
Adm ixtures
Reinforcement
Joint filler
Joint sealant
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1. Concrete:
A. Contractor Mix Design:
I
ACI 301, except as modified herein. Concrete shall have a 28-day minimum compressive strength of
3000 psi. Slump shall not exceed 5 inches in accordance with ASTM C143. Provide ASTM CD
aggregate Size No. 57 or 67 and 4 to 6 percent air entrainment for concrete exposed to freeze-thaw
conditions. Accomplish air-entrainment using an air-entraining admixture.
I
B. Ready-Mixed Concrete:
I
AsTM C94, except as modified herein. Ready-mixed concrete is defined in this specification <IS
concrete produced regularly by a commercial establishment and delivered to the purchaser in the
plastic state,
I
2.2 Materials:"
I
A.
Cement:
I
ASTM C150, Type I or II or AsTM C595, Type IP (Ms) or IS (Ms) blended cement, except as modified
herein. The blended cement shall consist of a mixture of AsTM C150 cement and one of the
following mat,erials: AsTM C618 pozzolan or fly ash, or AsTM C989 ground iron blast furn<:1ce slag.
The pozzola'~/f1y ash content shall not exceed 25 percent or the ground iron blast furnace slag 50
percent by weight of the total cementitious material. For exposed concrete, use one manufacturer for
each type of cement, ground slag, fly ash, and pozzolan.
I
I
Fly Ash and Pozzolan: ASTM C618, Type N, F, or C, except that the maximum allowable loss
on ignition shall be 6 percent for Type Nand F. Add with cement.
Ground Iron Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C989, Grade 120
I
I
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-'3
I
I
B.
Water:
I
Water shall be potable.
I
C. Aggregates:
I
AST":' C33; obtain aggregates for exposed concrete surfaces from one source, Aggregates shall not
contain any substance that may be deleteriously reactive with the alkalis in the cement.
D. Fiber Reinforcement:
I
I
ASTM Cll16 for fiber reinforcement. Polypropylene fibers engineered and designed for secondary
reinforcement of concrete slabs, complying with ASTM C1116, Type III shall not be less than 3/4
inch.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
I
Bilco Fibers, Cormix Construction Chemicals
Durafiber, Durafiber Corporation
Fiberstrand 100, Euclid Chemical Company
Fibermesh, Fibermesh Company, Div. Synthetic Industries, Inc.
Forta,. Forta Corp.
, Grace Fibers, W.R. Grace & Company
Polystrand, Metalerete Industries
I
I
E.
Adm ixtures:
I
ASTM C260 for air-entrained concrete. ASTM C494 for water-reducing (Type A, D, or El, accelerating
(Type C), and retarding (Type B or D), to be used only when approved. Calcium chloride shall not be
used as an admixture,
I
F. Reinforcing Bars:
ASTM A706/A706M, Grade 60 or ASTM A615, Grade 60.
I
G, Materials for Curing Concrete:
I
Impervious Sheeting: ASTM C171; waterproof paper, clear or white polyethylene sheeting, or
polyethylene-coated burlap.
I
Liquid Membrane-Forming Compound: ASTM C309, white-pigmented, Type 2, free of paraffin or
petroleum. Do not use when finished appearance is important. Use where approved only.
I
Liquid Chemical Sealer-Hardener Compound: Compound shall not contain petroleum resins or
waxes. Do not use on exterior slabs exposed to freezing conditions, Compound shall not reduce the
adhesion of resilient flooring, tile, paint, roofing, water-proofing, or other material to be applied to the
concrete.
I
H, Expansion-Joint Filler:
ASTM D175,l ,~Jr ~STM D1752, 1/2-inch thick, unless otherwise indicated.
I
~ '.
I
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-4
I
I
I. Joint Sealants.: ,
I
1. Horizo"ntal Surfaces (3 percent slope, maximum):
I
Outside Buildings: ASTM 01190
.Inside Buildings: ASTM 01190
I
2. Vertical Surfaces (greater than 3 percent slope):
ASTM C920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.1 Material Handling:
A.
Delivery:
I
Do not deliver concrete until ready for concrete placement.
I
8,
Storage:
I
Store concrete aggregates to prevent contamination or segregation. Store reinforcement of different
sizes and shapes in separate piles or racks raised above the ground to avoid excessive rusting, Protect
from contaminants such as grease, oil, and dirt. Provide for accurate identification after bundles are
broken and tags removed.
I
c.
Forms:
I
ACI 301 i."Set'forms true to line and grade and make mortar-tight. Chamfer above grade exposed
,joints, edges, and external corners of concrete 3/4 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Before concrete
placement, coat the contact surfaces of forms with a non-staining form coating compound. Do not
use mineral oil on formed surfaces to be painted.' Prevent concrete damage during form removal.
Concrete for footings may be placed in excavations without forms upon inspection and approval by
the Structural Engineer. Excavation width shall be a minimum of 4 inches greater than finished
dimensions indicated on the contract documents.
I
I
3.2 Placing Reinforcement and Miscellaneous Materials
I
A. ACI 301 - Provide bars, wire fabric, and other reinforcing materials, including wire ties, supports, and
other devices necessary to install and secure the reinforcement.
B. Cover and Splicing:
I ACI 301 - unless otherwise indicated.
C. Setting Miscellaneous Material:
I
Place and secure anchors and bolts, pipe sleeves, conduits, and other such items in position before
concrete placement. Plumb anchor bolts and check location and elevation. Temporarily fill voids in
sleeves with readily removable material to prevent the entry of concrete,
I
I
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-5
I
I
D.
Construction Joints:
I
ACI 301 - Continue reinforcement across joints, unless otherwise indicated. Fusion weld waterstop
splices.
I
E.
Expansion Joints and Contraction Joints:
I
ACI 301 - For slabs on grade, provide at edges of interior floor slabs, adjacent to walls, and as
indicated. Make expansion joints 1/2-inch wide, except as indicated otherwise. Fill expansion joints
not exposed ,to weather with preformed joint material. Seal joints exposed to weather with joint
sealant. 'Do n'o't extend reinforcement or other embedded metal items bonded to the concrete through
any expansion joint, unless an expansion sleeve is used. Provide contraction joints, either formed or
saw cut or cut with a jointing tool to the indicated depth after the surface has been finished. Sawed
joints shall be completed within 4 to 8 hours after concrete placement. Protect joints from intrusion
of foreign matter.
I
I
3.3 Measuring, Mixing, Tr,lIlsporting, and Placing Concrete
I
A. ACI 304, except as modified herein. ASTM C94; machine mix concrete and provide mandatory batch
ticket information for each load of ready mix concrete. Begin mixing within 30 minutes after the
cement has been added to the aggregates. Place concrete within 90 minutes of either addition of
mixing water to cement and aggregates or addition of cement to aggregates if the air temperature is
less than 85 degrees F. Reduce mixing time to 60 minutes if the air temperature is greater than 85
degrees F. Additional water may be added, provided that both the specified maximum slump and
water-cement ratio are not exceeded. If the entrained air content falls below the specified limit, add a
,sufficient quantity of admixture to bring the entrained air content within the specified limits. Do not
, place concrete when weather conditions prevent proper placement and consolidation in uncovered
areas during periods of precipitation or in standing water. Prior to placing concrete, remove dirt,
construction debris, and water from within the forms. Consolidate concrete slabs greater than 4
inches in depth with high frequency, internal, mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand
spading and tamping. Consolidate concrete slabs 4 inches or less in depth by tamping, spading, and
,settling with a heavy leveling straight edge.
I
I
I
I
I
B. Cold Weather:
I
ACI 306R - Provide and maintain 50 degrees F minimum concrete temperature, Do not place
concrete when the ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F. Cover concrete and provide with a
source of heat sufficient to maintain 50 degrees F minimum while curing.
C. Hot Weather: .
. '.:1,1
I
.-
ACI 305R - Concrete temperature from initial mixing through final cure shall not exceed 90 degrees F.
Cool ingredients before mixing, or substitute chip ice for part of required mixing water or use other
suitable means to control concrete temperature to prevent rapid drying of newly placed concrete.
Shade the fresh concrete and start curing as soon as the surface of the fresh concrete is sufficiently
hard to permit curing without damage.
I
I
3.4
Surface Finishes
I
A. ACI 301 for repair and finish, unless otherwise specified. Slope floors uniformly to drains where,
drains are provided. After troweling is completed, apply a liquid chemical sealer-hardener to interior
slabs that do not receive floor covering.
I
CAST-iN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-6
I
I
B.
Defects:
I
Repair formed surfaces by removing minor honeycombs, pits greater than 1 square inch surface area
or 0.25 inch maximum depth, or otherwise defective areas. Provide edges perpendicular to the
surface and patch with non-shrink grout. Patch tie holes and defects when the forms are n~moved.
Concrete with extensive honeycomb (including exposed steel reinforcement, cold joints, entrapped
debr~s, separated aggregate, or other defects) which affect the service abi I ity or structural strength will
be rejected, unless correction of defects is approved. Obtain approval of corrective action prior to
repair. The surface of the concrete shall not vary more than the allowable tolerances of ACI 301.
Exposed surfaces shall be uniform in appearance and finished to a smooth form finish, unless
otherwise specified.
I
I
I
I
C. Floated Finish:
I
Place, consolidate, and immediately strike off concrete to obtain proper contour, grade, and elevation
before bleedwater appears. Permit concrete to attain a set sufficient for floating and supporting the
weight of the finisher and equipment. If bleedwater is present prior to floating the surface, drag the
excess water off or remove by absorption with porous materials. Do not use dry cement to absorb
bleedwater. Surface shall be level to within 1/4 inch in 10 feet where floor drains are not provided,
D.
Steel Troweled Finish:
I
First, provide a floated finish. When slab has attained a proper set, trowel to a smooth, hard, dense
finish. Finished surfaces shall be free of trowel marks, uniform in texture, flat within 0.01 foot
, (approximately 1/8 inch) in 10 feet. Hand-finish portions of the slab not accessible to power finishing
equipment (e.g., edges, corners) to maich the remainder of the slab. Power trowel once and finally
, hand trowel where a finished floor covering (e.g., tile, carpet) is specified. Power trowel twice and
finally hand trowel for exposed concrete floors.
I
I
E.
Broomed Finished:
I
Provide for exterior walks, platforms, patios, and ramps, unless otherwise indicated. Provide a floated
finish, and then finish with a flexible bristle broom. Permit surface to harden sufficiently to retain the
scoring or ridges. Broom transverse to traffic or at right angles to the slope of the slab.
I
F.
Pavement Finish:
I
Screed the concrete with a template advanced with a combined longitudinal and crosswise motion.
Maintain a slight surplus of concrete ahead of the template. After screeding, float the concrete
longitudinally. Use a straight edge to check slope and flatness; correct and refloat as necessary.
Obtain final finish by belting, Lay belt flat on the concrete surface and advance with a sawing
motion; continue until a uniform but gritty non-slip surface is obtained. Round edges and joints with
an edger having a radius of 1/8 inch.
I
I
3.5 Curing and Protection
I
A. ACI 301 - Protect concrete from injurious action by sun, rain, wind, flowing water, frost, mechanical
injury, tire ma~ks, and oil stains. Do not allow concrete to dry out from time of placement until the
expiration of ,the curing period. Forms may be removed 48 hours after concrete placement.
B. Moist Curing:
I Provide for the removal of water without erosion or damage to the structure.
I
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-7
1
1
1
C. Ponding or Immersion:
I
Continually immersr the concrete throughout the curing period. Water temperature shall not be
higher than 20 degrees F more than the temperature of the concrete. For temperature between 40
and 50 degrees F, increase the curing period by 50 percent.
1
D. Fog Spraying or Sprinkling:
Provide uniform and continuous application of water throughout the curing period, Fur temperatures
between 40 and 50 degrees F, increase the curing period by 50 percent.
1
1
E. Pervious Sheeting:
1
Cover the entire surface of the concrete with two thicknesses of wet sheeting. Mats shall be at least as '
long as the width of the surface to be cured. During application, do not drag the mats over the
finished concrete or over mats already placed. Completely cover surface and edges of the concrete,
with a 6-inch overlap over adjacent mats. Wet mats thoroughly and keep continuously wet
throughout the curing period.
F.
Impervious-Sheeting Curing:
I
Wet the entire exposed surface thoroughly with a fine spray of water and cover with impervious
sheeting throughout the curing period, Lay sheeting directly on the concrete surface and overlap
edges 12 inches minimum. Provide sheeting not less than 18 inches wider than the concrete surface
to be cured. Secure edges and transverse laps to form closed joints. Repair torn or damaged sheeting
or provide n~w sheeting.
I'
1
G. Liquid Membrane-Forming Compound Curing:
1
Seal or cover joint openings prior to application of curing compound. Prevent curing compound from
entering the joint. Provide and maintain compound on the concrete surface throughout the curing
period. Provide a continuously wetted, permeable cover as specified in paragraph entitled, "Hot
Weather."
I
H. Application:
1
Unless the manufacturer recommends otherwise, apply compound immediately after the surface loses
its water sheen and has a dull appearance, and before joints are sawed. Mechanically agitate curing
compound thoroughly during use. Use approved power-spraying equipment to uniformly <lpply two I
coats of compound in a continuous operation. The total coverage for the two coats shall be 200
square feet maximum per gallon of undiluted compound, unless otherwise recommended by the
manufacturer's written instructions. The compound shall form a uniform, continuous, coherent film
that will not check, crack, or peel. Immediately apply an additional coat of compound to areas where
the film is defective. Respray concrete surfaces subjected to rainfall within 3 hours after the curing
compound application.
1
1
1
I.
Protection of Treated Surfaces:
I
Prohibit foot and vehicular traffic and other sources of abrasion for not less than 72 hours after
compound application. Maintain continuity of the coating for the entire curing period and
immediately repair any damage.
I
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-8
I
I
J.
Liquid Chemical Sealer-Hardener Curing:
I
Provide for interior floors that do not receive a floor covering, or in lieu of liquid membrane-forming
compound curing for other surfaces. Apply sealer-hardener in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations. Seal or cover joints and openings in which joint sealant is to be applied, as
required by the joint sealant manufacturer,
I
K.
Curing Periods:,
I
Allow 7 days.
I
3.6
Sampling and Testing
A. Sampling:
I
ASTM C172 - Collect samples of fresh concrete to perform tests specified.
B.
Testing:
I
1. Slump Tests: ASTM C143 - Take samples during concrete placement. The maximum slump
may be increased as specified with the addition of an approved admixture provided that the
water-cement ratio is not exceeded. Perform tests at commencement of concrete placement
and for each batch (minimum) or every 1'0 cubic yards (maximum) of concrete.
I
I
2. Air Content: ASTM C173 or ASTM C231 - Test air-entrained concrete for air content at the
same frequency as specified for slump tests.
I
3. Compressive Strength Tests: Make five test cylinders for each set of tests in accordance with
ASTM C31. Test two cylinders at 7 days, two cylinders at 28 days, and hold one cylinder in
reserve. Samples for strength tests shall be taken not less than once a day, or less than once for
each 50 cubic yards of concrete, nor less than once for each 5000 square feet of surface area
for slabs or walls. For the entire project, there shall be no less than five sets of samples taken
and strength tests performed for each mix design of concrete placed. Each strength test result
shall be the average of two cylinders from the same concrete sample tested at 28 days. If the
average of any three consecutive strength test results is less than 3000 psi, or if any strength fest
result falls below 3000 psi by more than 500 psi, take a minimum of three ASTM C42 core
samples from the in-place work represented by the low test cylinder results and test. Concrete
represented by core test shall be considered structurally adequate if the average of three cores
is equal to at least 2550 psi and if no single core is less than 2250 psi. Locations represented
by erratic core strengths shall be retested. Remove concrete not meeting strength criteria and
provide new acceptable concrete. Repair core holes with non-shrink grout. Match color and
finish of adjacent concrete.
I
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 03300
I
I
I
I
CAST-iN-PLACE CONCRETE
03300-9
..............
I
I
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
SECTION 04100 - MORTAR
I
01 - SUBMITI ALS
A - Shop Drawings and Samples
I
1. Shop drawings - none required.
I
2. Submit manufacturer's printed literature for mortar to be used.
3. Samples Required - Supplied as a part of masonry sample panel.
I
02-MANUFACTURERS
A - The following named manufacturers and products will be acceptable:
I
1. Santee - Mortamix, Type S and Type M Masonry Cement
I
2. Giant - Giant Mix, Type S and Type M Masonry Cement
3. Magnolia - Magnolia Masons Mix, Type S and Type M Masonry Cement
I
4. Lafarge - Type S and Type M Masonry Cement
03 - MA TERlALS
I
A _ Cementitious Materials - Prepared masonry cement will be used. Masonry cement shall meet the requirements of ASTM
C-9l and Federal Specifications SS-C-181E, Type II. Color to be selected by Architect.
I
B _ Sand - Sand shall conform to ASTM C-144, Specifications for Aggregate for Masonry Cement.
C - Water - Potable.
I
D _ Admixtures - No antifreeze liquids, or salts shall be used in the mortar in an attempt to lower the freezing point.
I
E _ Brands _ Brands of cementitious materials and the source of supply of sand shall remain the same throughout the entire job
and shall not be changed except by written pennission of the Architect.
I
F _ Storage of Materials - Cementitious materials and sand shall be stored in a manner to prevent deterioration or intrusion of
foreign material. Cement shall be stored with water-tight cover and elevated above ground. Do not use hardened or
partially set cement.
I
04 - PREP ARA nON
A - Proportions and Strength
I
1. Type S Mortar (1800 psi)
For concrete masonry units, face brick and other miscellaneous masonry above grade work:
I
1 Part Type S Mortar Mix (Masonry Cement)
2-1/4 to 3 parts damp, loose masonry sand
Mortar shall develop 1800 psi at 28 days
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
04100-1
Mortar
I
I
2. Type M Mortar (2500 psi)
I
For concrete masonry units, face brick and other miscellaneous masonry below grade work:
I
1 Part Type M Mortar Mix (Masonry Cement)
2-1/4 to 3 parts damp, loose, masonry sand
Mortar shall develop 2500 psi at 28 days
I
B - Water - Water shall be used in the quantity necessary to give workability.
C - Mixing
I
1. Mixing Equipment - Mortar mixers shall be of design and size to accommodate the mix without overloading and powered
to vigorously mix the ingredients. A measuring device to inake consistent volume measurements shall be used throughout
the project.
I
2. Consistency (workability) - Use the maximum amount of water compatible with workability. (Approximately 5 gallons per
cubic foot of cementitious material)
I
3. Mixing Procedures - Mortar shall be made by placing most of the water required for the batch into the mixer first; next add
approximately 1/3 the required amount of sand followed by the masonry cement. Allow time for these ingredients to work
into a slurry. Add the remainder of the sand required for the batch and small amounts of water to obtain desired
workability. Allow 5 minutes mixing time after all materials are added.
I
05 - USE
I
A - Retempering - Mortar may be retempered as often as required to maintain the required consistency up to 2-1/2 hours after
initial mixing. After that time, it shall not be used,
I
B - Protection - All newly laid masonry shall be protected by covering with waterproof materials that can be placed to overhang
and cover the work. No masonry construction shall be performed when temperatures are to fall below freezing unless
provisions are made to maintain an adequate temperature until the mortar has attained sufficient strength.
I
C - Pointing - Pointing of cracks and holes shall be done with a matching mortar, wetting surfaces to be pointed, to obtain
proper bond.
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
04100-2
Mortar
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
SECTION 04150 - MASONRY ACCESSORIES
01 - SUBMITTALS
A - Samples Required - Submit two of each of the following:
1. Joint Reinforcement, each type (4'-0" long).
2. Prefabricated Reinforcement corners and tees.
3. Expansion Joint Backing Rod.
B -Manufacturer's Literature - Approved manufacturer of Expansion Joint Backing Rod Material shall
submit to the Architect for his approval, their recommendations for the size and installation of their
material. Submit 5 copies showing conditions as detailed on the drawings.
02 - MATERIALS
A - Masonry Wall Reinforcement
1. Joint reinforcement shall be manufactured from cold drawn steel wire conforming to ASTM
A82-76, and shall consist of two deformed longitudinal side rods welded at 16-inch intervals
to a continuous diagonal cross rod forming a truss design.
2. Joint reinforcement shall be constructed of No.9 gauge cross and side rods, galvanized.
3. Width of joint reinforcement shall be 2" less than nominal wall of wythe thickness. Cavity walls
shall have a drip section in cross rod at center of air space.
4. Prefabricated corner and tee sections shall correspond to type and design of reinforcement
specified herein.
5. Lap joint reinforcement 8" at ends.
6. All interior and exterior masonry walls shall have horizontal joint reinforcement at 16" o.c. or
as indicated on the plans.
7. The following named manufacturers will be acceptable:
a. DUR-O-WALL TRUSS Type by Dur-O-Wall, Inc.
b. LOX-ALL TRUSS Type by Cumberland Corp.
c. TRUSS Type by National Wire Products Co.
B -
Thru-Wall Flashinq - Shall be 20 mil thickness, black PVC elastomeric flashing equal to NU-FLEX
as manufactured by Sandell Manufacturing Company, Cambridge, MASS. Some continuous metal
I
16 ga. galvanized sheet flashing required to be spot welded to steel beams - see drawings.
I
Expansion Joint Backinq Rod - Backing material shall be solid circular shape of non-absorbent,
closed cell polyethylene foam having flexible and compressible characteristics and compatibl~ with
approved caulking or sealant materials. Sizes of backing material shall be as recommended by
the approved manufacturer for the size of joint indicated on the drawings. I
C-
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
04150-1
Masonry Accessories
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D- Wall Ties: Vee tie, formed steel wire, 3/16 inch (4.8mm) thick, adjustable, prolonged leg type
anchor. Hot dipped galvanized to ASTM A 123 B2 steel finish.
E- WeeDs: preformed plastic tubes, manufactured by Hohmann and Barnard. No. 341, 3/8" OD x 4"
long.
F - Mortar Deflection Material: mortar stop polyethylene mesh manufactured by Polytite
Manufacturing Co., Cambridge, MA., or approved equal.
03 - MATERIAL STORAGE
A - Store and protect all metal items so they will be free of dirt, loose rust scale, or other coatings
which would destroy or reduce bond with mortar.
04 - INSTALLATION
A - Masonry Wall Reinforcement
1. All exterior and interior wall shall be reinforced. Reinforcement shall be installed in the first
and second bed joints, 8 inches apart immediately above lintels and below sills at openings
and in bed joints at 16-inch vertical intervals elsewhere. Reinforcement in the second bed joint
above or below openings shall extend two feet beyond the jambs.' All other reinforcement shall
be continuous except that it shall not pass through vertical masonry control joints. Side rods
shall be lapped at least 6 inches at splices. Reinforcement shall be so placed as to assure a
5/8" mortar cover on the exterior face of walls and 1/2" mortar cover on interior faces.
2. Provide extra ties at all openings in masonry walls by bending and hooking side rod or cross
rod of joint reinforcement.
3. Prefabricated corner and tee sections shall be used to form continuous reinforcement around
corners, and for anchoring abutting walls and partitions.
4. In addition to areas designated in (1) above, install reinforcement in all locations detailed on
the drawings.
B - Expansion Joint Backinq Rod - Install material in accordance with manufacturer's approved written
recommendations as per subparagraph 01.B, this section.
END OF SECTION
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
04150-2
Masonry Accessories
I
I
I
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
SECTION 04200 - UNIT MASONRY
Ol-GENERAL
I
A - Sample Wall Panel
1. Sample brick and concrete block wall panel approximately 4'-0" long X 8"-0" High showing workmanship, bond,
thickness, tooling of joints and color range of brick, Panel shall be laid up for approval of the Architect before
constructing any walls.
2. The finished work shall match the approved sample.
I 02 - MANUFACTURERS
I
I
A - The following named manufacturers will be acceptable:
I
1. Face Brick
Boral Bricks, Inc., Augusta, Georgia
Richtex Brick, Columbia, South Carolina
Cherokee Brick and Tile, Macon, Georgia
I
2. Concrete Masonry Units
Augusta Concrete Block Company, North Augusta, South Carolina
Lafarge Concrete, Augusta, Georgia
Equal
I
03 - MA TERlALS
I
A - Concrete Masonry Units - Lightweight Density
1. Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units shall conform to ASTM Specification C 90-85, Grade N, Type 1.
I
2. Solid Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units shall conform to ASTM Specification C 145-85, Grade N, Type 1.
3. Density: Concrete Masonry Units shall have a dry net density ofless than or equal to 105 lbs. per cubic fool.
I
4.
Lightweight Aggregates: Lightweight Aggregates shall conform to ASTM Specifications 331, "Lightweight Aggregates
for Concrete Masonry", and shall be expanded shale, clay or slate Aggregates manufactured by the Rotary Kiln
method, Cinder Aggregates or other waste or by-products used in any proportion will not be acceptable.
I
5.
All units shall not contain any organic impurities which will cause rusting, staining, pop outs and shall not contain any
combustible material.
I
6.
I
Size: Standard units shall have nominal face dimensions or 8" high and 16" long (7-5/8"x 15-5/8" actual) Jnless
otherwise shown. Other sizes, such as, 8" high x 8" long, nominal, as required. I
Special Shapes: Provide where shown and where required for Lintels, Comers, Jambs, Sash, Pilasters, Wing Walls,
Control Joints, Headers, Bonding and other special conditions. Bull Nose Block to be used at all outside 900 coiners.
I
7.
I
Block course at ceiling height receiving ceiling grid edge angle to be square edged, Block course at !loor level
receiving base to have bull nose.
I
8. All Concrete Masonry Units shall be supplied by a single manufacturer unless previously approved by the Architect.
I
acsb
(Mol l2/2003)
04200-1
Unit Masonry
I
I
9. Samples: Samples ofCMU proposed for use shall be approved by Architect.
I
B - Concrete Masonry Units - Fire Rated
I
1. Furnish and install rated C.M.U. where indicated on the drawings. One-hour and two-hour walls to be Design No. V- ,
905 rated in accordance with WNL 618 and to be Class D-2. Units shall be manufactured in accordance with
Underwriters Lab specifications. The manufacturer shall be approved by Underwriters Labs. U.L.Certificates for each
size and type shall be provided by the manufacturer.
I
2. Fire-rated concrete units shall be "coded" with an integral pigment which shall tint the units and make them easily
recognizable from standard units. Any other "coding" is to be approved by the architect
I
C - Face Brick
I
1. Face brick to be standard modular 22/3" H x 4" W x 8" L to meet ASTM C 216-70, grade SW Type FBS. Provide
solid brick, no cores with grain running same direction as adjacent bricks on all exposed surfaces.
The following are acceptable:
I
Brick Color and Style
a, Boral Bricks, Inc. -
b. Richtex Brick -
c. Cherokee Brick,
I
04 - WORKMANSHIP
I
A - General
I
1. Handling and Storage- Stack masonry units; store in manner that will protect them from contact with earth; exercise
care in handling units to void chipping and breakage.
I
2. All unfinished masonry shall be covered with a waterproof material to overhang the wall 2 feet and weighted
down. This requirement is extremely important-No Exceptions. No masonry shall be laid when the temperature
is below 32 degrees F on a rising thermometer or below 40 degrees F on a falling thermometer unless adequate
protection against freezing is provided. In cold weather, masonry shall be protected against freezing for 48 hours after
being laid with the temperature on both sides of the wall maintained above 40 degrees F.
I
3. Building In - Fill spaces around built-in items with mortar. Build in work including anchors, fmishings and accessories
as specified herein or noted on the Drawings. Fill hollow metal door frames solid with mortar.
I
B - Laving Brick
I
I.
Lay brick plumb, level and true to line with full mortar joints. Make joints uniform; 3 courses vertically to 8 iItches.
No chipped brick shall be laid in walls. I
Bond - Brick shall be laid with "Running Bond". Soldier course or rowlock where called for on the drawings.
I
Mortar Joints - Vertical and horizontal joints shall be raked 1/4" deep from wall surface and when partially set, shall
be compacted with pointing tool. I
All cutting shall be made with a masonry saw. I
I
2.
3,
I
4.
I
I
acsb
(hbo//2/2003)
04200-2
Unit Masonry
I
I
C - Laving Concrete Masonry Units
I
I. Do not wet concrete units before laying.
I
2. Layout concrete masonry units to confonn with coursing indicated on Drawings. Any deviation from that shown must
be approved by Architect.
I
3, Lay units in full beds of mortar, plumb, level and true to line with full head joints; join and bond with other connecting' ,
work. Place and strike off mortar in manner to avoid smearing faces of unit. Make joints unifonn with 3/8" face.
I
4. Cutting shall be made with ,masonry saw. .Do cutting to accommodate installation of electrical'outlets, conduits,
plumbing fixtures, pipes, brackets, bolts and accessories. Units with spalled or irregular cut surfaces will not be
accepted.
I
5. Bond - All concrete block shall be laid in "running bond".
6. Mortar Joints - Vertical and horizontal joints shall be 3/8" vee joint, compacted with vee shaped pointed tool when
partially set.
I
7. Weep Holes - Shall be provided at bottom of air space in all cavity walls. Weep shall be fonned by weep tubes and
located 4'_0" on center.
I
8, All block, regular, etc., are to have the same texture. Texture to be medium rough and to be approved by architect.
05 - DAMAGED WORK
I
A - Replace broken or damaged masonry units where exposed., Damaged masonry units, where concealed, may be repaired if'
approved by the architect. Defective mortar joints in exposed masonry shall be removed and replaced.
I
06 - CLEANING
I
A - Dry clean masonry of mortar stains and mortar spatter with wood scrappers on a daily basis.
B - Cutout all defective joints and re-point all holes in exposed masonry.
C - A commercial cleaner approved and recommended by the brick manufacturer shall be used. Do not use muriatic acid or any
other type of acid.
D - Cleaning shall be executed in accordance with Commercial Cleaner Manufacturer's printed instructions accompanying
material.
I
07 - MASONRY WALL REINFORCING
I
A - General
I
I. The following reinforcing is required for all masonry walls. Except masonry low partitions and floor to ceiling
walls occurring in renovated toilet rooms - These are to be reinforced as shown on the drawings
B - Vertical Reinforcing
I
I. Provide concrete filled cell with I - #4 rebar continuous from footing to bond beam at top of wall. Lap #4 bar with
#4 footing dowel and extend 4" minimum into bond beam. Break-out bottom of bond beam at filled cell locations and
pour top four courses with bond beam. Provide at the following locations: I
a. At all wall comers. I
b. At ends of all walls and each side of expansion or control joints.
c. At all door and window jambs.
d. Dowel vertical rebar into existing floor slabs.
I
I
I
acsb
(hbol/2/2003)
04200-3
Unit Masonry
I
I
I
2. Provide concrete cell with 1 - #4 rebar continuous from footing to bond beam at top of wall. Lap #4 bar with #4
footing dowel and extend 4" minimum into bond beam. Break-out bottom of bond beam at filled cell locations and
pour top four courses with bond beam. Space at 48" o.c. maximum along entire length of wall, unless design requires
a larger bar size or closer spacing. Plan will note walls requiring bars and spacings other than #4's at 48" O.c.
I
3. Vertical bar splices shall have a minimum lap of30 bar diameters.
I
4. Vertical filled cells shall be filled with concrete in 2'_8" max. lifts.
C - Horizontal Reinforcement
I
1. Provide 9 ga. trussed type masonry reinforcing at 16" o.c. along wall height, typical in all walls.
I
2. For stack bond, (where head joints in successive courses are horizontally offset less than one quarter of the unit length)
supply the following horizontal reinforcement in addition to the masonry reinforcing required by paragraph C.I:
I
6" and 8" CMU - I - #4 bar continuous in a concrete filled course at 48" o.c. maximum along wall height.
12" CMU - 1 - #4 continuous in a concrete filled course at 32" o.c. maximum along wall height.
I
3. Provide concrete filled bond beam with 2 - #5 rebars continuous where walls are structurally connected to roof and
floor levels and at the tops of all walls.
I
4. Provide concrete filled course with I - #4 rebar at door and window heads, and at all window sills. Extend 2'-0"
minimum beyond opening.
D - . Wall Bracing
I
I. All interior non-lead bearing partition walls, (full height and partial height) shall be braced to the structural steel
floor/roof framing at 8'-0" o.c. maximum along their entire length. See Typical Details for bracing required.
I
08-CONTROLJOfNTS
I
A - Provide control joints in CMU and brick walls where shown on drawings and in CMU walls at vertical roof drains where
they occur in exterior walls. Joint to be from finish floor to top of parapet walls. Install backer rod, caulk and install
expansion joint cover plate where exposed. See detail on drawings.
09 - FULL HEIGHT WALLS
I
A - The drawings indicate walls that are to extend from fmish floor to bottom of roof deck. In the event any discrepancy occurs
on the drawings, it is the intent of documents that all walls on the first floor are to extend to the bottom of the second floor deck;
exceptions are stairways, and elevator shaft.
I
10 - CLEANING UP
I
A - At completion, remove from premises all excess materials, debris, rubbish and remove sample panel from site when qirected
by Architect.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/ /2/2003)
04200-4
Unit Masonry
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 04810
SITE MASONRY
PART 1 -
SCOPE:
The work ofthis section comprises all masonry work, as shown on the site drawings
or specified herein, including the brick wall.
PART 2-
PRODUCTS:
2.1 MA TERlALS:
A. SAND: Best quality washed white sand, sharp, well screened and free from silt,
loam or clay.
B. WATER: Clean and free from injurious amounts of acids, alkalies, organic materials
or other harmful substances.
C. MORTAR MIX: Magnolia Mason Mix as manufactured by Southern Cement Co.,
Birmingham, Alabama or equal, meeting Federal Specification SS-C-18-C.
D. NON-SHRINK GROUT: Embeco pre-mixed non-metallic grout, as manufactured
by the Master Building Company, or equal.
2.2 BRICK:
A. Pavers: See Section "Brick Pavement."
B. Veneer and Wall: All brick veneer for concrete walls shall match brick pavers in
color and shall be 10-200 Flashed, Solid and 10-200 Flashed, Cored as manufactured
by Boral Brick Company, Augusta, Georgia. Size shall be modular.
C. CONCRETE BLOCK: All concrete masonry units shall meet ASTM Specification
C90 requirements for Grade A block. All exposed block shall have a uniformly
rough texture.
D. PARTITION TIES: ~ inch galvanized hardware cloth at cavity walls. Steel Strap
at structural steel bents shall be included.
E. WALL REINFORCING: Standard Dur-O- W al or equal turned reinforcement for 10"
or 12" cavity walls with drip cross rods, placed 16" o.c. For interior 8", 6", or 4"
walls for the respective thickness shall be used.
SITE MASONRY
04810- 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
F.
CLEANING SOLUTION: Sur-Klean No. 101 or equal, lime solvent mixed with
water in accordance with manufacturer's directions for cleaning all masonry
materials.
PART 3-
EXECUTION:
3.1 MORTAR:
A. All mortar shall be mixed by h and 0 r preferably in a mechanical mixer and in
quantities sufficient for the proper progress of the work. No retempered or mortar
that has started its initial set shall be used.
B. The mortar shall consist of one part masonry cement and not more than three parts
damp loose sand. The mortar shall contain as much water as it can possibly carry and
still provide satisfactory consistency for the laying of masonry units.
3.2 BRICK, CONCRETE BLOCK AND GLAZED TILE WORK:
A. All masonry shall be laid to a line, all work plumb and true and all contact joints,
both horizontal and vertical, shall be completely filled with mortar as the work
progresses. Masonry work shall be supervised at all times by the responsible
foreman.
B. All lintels, wood blocking, frames, flashing, expansion joints, anchors, etc. as
required shall be built-in, and chases shall be left in the walls for outlet boxes,
conduit and piping as required under electrical and mechanical work.
C. All concrete block, glazed tile, and brick shall be coursed together. Brick and block
shall be coursed to an 8" height with one course of block and three courses of brick.
Vertical joints in block and brick shall be the same as with the resulting horizontal
joint.
D. Joints in all brick shall be tooled raked 14 inch. Joints in concrete block shall be "V"
grooved unless otherwise noted.
E. All brick masonry shall be laid in a common running bond. When concrete block or
brick have to be cut, a motor driven carborundum diamond saw shall be used.
F. In warm weather, all brick shall be thoroughly wetted as necessary to reduce the rate
of absorption of water at the time of laying.
SITE MASONRY
04810- 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G. All holes and cracks in exposed joints shall be filled with additional fresh mortar and
jointed. If mortar has hardened, the defect shall be chiseled out and refilled with
fresh mortar and retooled.
3.3 FACE BRICK ATTACHMENT:
A. Face brick shall be attached to concrete walls where shown on the plans.
B. Dovetail inserts shall be set vertically in the concrete forms at intervals not exceeding
16 inches. Inserts shall be Heckmann No. 100 or equal.
C. Dovetail anchors shall be placed at intervals not exceeding 16 inches vertically;
anchors shall be Heckmann No. 105 or equal.
D. "Ladur" type single wythe Dur-O- Wal standard reinforcement shall be continuous in
the same joint at which anchors are placed.
3.4 CLEANING:
A. All exposed brickwork shall be thoroughly cleaned after completion. A cleaning
solution specified herein or a 10% solution of muriatic acid and water shall be used,
brushing it with a wire brush where necessary to remove mortar stains. Surfaces
shall be thoroughly wet from top to bottom before acid solution is applied and
thoroughly rinsed after with clean water, carefully protecting metals and other work
from staining. Cleaning shall not be attempted before mortar has set for at least
seven days.
B. Concrete block shall be pointed up, rubbed free of rough sp ots a nd thoroughly
cleaned in preparation for painting,
3.5 PROTECTION:
A. No masonry shall be laid when the temperature is below 320 F. on a nSlOg
thermometer or below 400 F. on a falling thermometer, unless adequate precaution
against freezing is provided. No frozen materials shall be used in the construction
of masonry work. All unfinished work shall be covered with waterproof paper or
canvas. All masonry units stored in the open or stacked near the mortar boards shall
be protected against excessive wetting when freezing may occur.
B. All masonry materials shall be shipped and stored in such a manner as to prevent
damage or intrusion of foreign matter.
SITE MASONRY
04810- 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Cement, mortar mix and other packaged materials shall be stored in tight sheds with
elevated floors.
D. Concrete units shall be stored under a cover that permits circulation of air and
prevents excess moisture absorption.
3.6 GROUTING:
A. All steel door frames, metal windows, and metal handrail shall be grouted with non-
metallic, non-shrink grout specified, used in accordance with the manufacturer's
directions.
SITE MASONRY
04810- 4
I
I
I
DIVISION 5 - METALS
SECTION 05100 - STRUCTURAL STEEL STUDS AND ACCESSORIES
01 - SUBMITTALS
I
A - Shop Drawings
1. Shop drawings not required.
I
2. Submit manufacturer's printed literature and specifications.
I
I
B - Samples
1, None required
02 - MANUFACTURERS
A - The following named manufacturers and products will be acceptable:
I
Wheeling Corrugating Company
United States Steel
Iruyco/Milcor, Inc.
Cee Studs
Super-C Steel Studs
"C" Studs
I
03 - MATERIALS
I
A - Studs
I
1. Shall be 16 gauge non-perforated cold formed steel "C" shaped studs meeting the requirements of ASTM A570-72, Grade
E, modified to a minimum yield point 50 KSI. Size and spacing as shown on drawings.
2. Perforated studs shaH be 14 gauge.
I
B - Track and Bridging
I
1. Shall be 16 gauge cold formed steel "channel" shaped framing meeting the requirements of ASTM-72, Grade E, modified
to a minimum yield point of 50 KSI. Size and location as shown on drawings.
C - Screws
I
1. Shall be self-tapping, self-drilling. Phillips slotted pan head cadmium coated screws as listed in the following
specifications. For attaching prefabricated metal studs to track, use No.8 shank pan head screws, length to suit
application.
I
D - Bridging Plate at Double Studs
I
1. Shall be 16 gauge cold steel sheet. Size and location as shown on drawings.
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
05100-1
Structural Steel Studs and Accessories
I
I
I
E - Welds
I
I. As alternate to screw attachment of stud to track: shall be plug, butt, seam, or fillet on both sides of stud top
and bottom.
F - Shop Painting
I
I. All steel studs, track and bridging shall be given a shop coat of rust resisting paint confonning to Federal
Specifications TT-P-664.
I
04 - INSTALLATION
I
A - Track Attachment - Align track in accordance with wall layout. Attach bottom track to concrete with 3/4"
concrete nails, power driven fasteners, or expansion bolts, 12" o.c. Attach top track to overhead steel with
bolts 12" o.c. or by welding.
I
B - Stud Layout and Spacing
1. See drawings for required stud spacing.
I
2. Layout of stud spacing at penthouse aggregate panels shall be coordinated with shop drawings of aggregate
panel layout.
I
3. Provide double studs with bridging plate at each aggregate panel joint.
I
c - Stud Attachment - Attach studs to prefabricated steel tracks with two self-tapping, self-drilling screws, each
side or with 1/16" fillet weld 1/2" long - both sides. Studs to be cut squarely and correct length to prevent
bowing. Stud splicing will not be pennitted.
D - Bridging
I
I. See drawings for required spacing of bridging.
I
2. Attach to steel studs with self-tapping, self-drilling screws or weld.
E - Field Painting - Abrasions and welds shall be field-painted with rust resisting paint.
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
acsb
(hboI12/2003)
05100-2
Structural Steel Studs and Accessories
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 5 - METALS
SECTION 05120 - STRUCTURAL STEEL
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1 References
I
A.
The publ ications I isted below form a part of th is specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
I
I
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM A36/
A36M-Ola
Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
I
ASTM A53/
A53M-0 1
Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-
Coated, Welded and Seamless
I
ASTM A 153/
A 153M-Ola
Standard Specification for Zinc-Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware
I
ASTM A307-00
Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,
60000 PSI Tensile Strength
I
ASTM A325-02a
Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat-Treated,
120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
I
ASTM A490-02
Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat-Treated,
150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
I
ASTM A500-0 1 a
Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon
Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes
I
ASTM A572/
A572M-Ol
Standard Specification for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-
Vanadium Structural Steel
I
I
I
ASTM 8695-00
Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on
Iron and Steel
ASTM C 150-02
Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C404-97
Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout
1.2
Subm ittals
I
A. This Section covers fabrication and erection of structural steel work, as shown on drawings
including schedules, notes, and details showing size and location of members, typical
connections, and types of steel required.
I
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-1
1
I
I
B.
General:
1
Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections,
c.
.Product Data or manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for the following
products. Include laboratory test reports and other data to show compliance with specifications
(including specified standards).
I
1. High-strength bolts (each type), including nuts and washers.
I
2. '", Structural steel primer paints.
I
3. Non-Shrink grout.
D.
Shop drawings shall include complete details and schedules for fabrication and assembly of
structural steel members, procedures, diagrams, and shall identify the specific product, list all
design criteria, list all material types and paint specifications,
I
1.
Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate
welds by standard AWS symbols and show size, length, and type of each weld.
,
I
2.
Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and
other anchorages to be installed by others.
I
3.
Shop drawings shall show all connection details. Connection details and design
calculations for all connections not specifically detailed on the drawings shall be
designed, signed and sealed by a registered professional engineer licensed by the State
of Georgia.
I
1
4.
Fabrication shall not commence until shop drawings have been marked reviewed by
the structural engineer.
I
5.
Welder's Certification:
I
Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily passed
AWS qualification tests within the previous 12 months,
6.
Bolting and Welding:
1
fnspection and test reports shall be reported in writing to the Architect, Structural
Engineer and Contractor.
I,
1.3
Quality Assurance
A. Codes and Standards:
I
Comply with provisions of the following, except as otherwise indicated:
I
1. American Institute of Steel Construction (AlSO "Code of Standard Practice for Steel
Buildings and Bridges."
2. AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings," including "Commentary."
I
STRUCTURAL STEEL
05120-2
I
I
B.
I
I
Qualifications for Welding Work:
1. Qualify welding procedures and welding operators III
"Qualification" requirements.
dccordance with AWS
2.
If re-certification of welders is required, retesting will be Conlrdctor's responsibility.
I
1.4
Delivery. Storage and HL1Ildling
A, Deliver materials to site at such intprvals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work.
I
I
c.
I
I
B.
Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place
concrete or masonry, in ample time to not delay work.
Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification, Keep steel members off
ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports, Protect steel members and packaged
materials from corrosion and deterioration. If bolts and nuts become dry or rusty, clean and
relubricate before use.
D.
Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage to
members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as
directed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
I
2.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
1
I
Materials
A,
Metal Surfaces, General:
For fabrication of work that will be exposed to view, use only materials that are smooth and free
of surface blemishes including pilling, rust and scale seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade
names, and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding, or by welding and grinding, prior
to cleaning, treating, and applying surface finishes.
B.
Structural Steel Shapes, Plates, and Bars:
ASTM A572, GR.50
c.
Steel Pipe:
ASTM AS3, Type 5, GR.B
D.
Hollow Steel Shapes:
ASTM ASOO, Grade B, FY = 46KSI
E.
Anchor Bolts:
ASTM A307, non-headed type unless otherwise indicated.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
OS 120-3
I
I
I
F.
I
G.
I
I
I
I
1
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
Unfinished Threaded Fasteners:
ASTM A307, Grade A, regular low-carbon steel bolts and nuts. Provide either hexagonal or
square heads and nuts, except use only hexagonal units for exposed connections.
High-Strength Threaded Fasteners:
Heavy hexagon structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardenpd washers, as follows:
1.
Quenched and tempered medium-carbon steel bolts, nuts, and washers, complying
with ASTM A325, Type-N.
2.
Where indicated as galvanized, provide units that are zinc coated, either mechanically
deposited complying with ASTM B695, Class 50, or hot-dip galvJnized complying with
ASTM A 153,
3. Use at Contractor's option.
H.
Electrodes for Welding:
Comply with AWS Code, E7018 Electrodes
I.
Structural Steel Primer Paint:
Fabricator's standard rust-inhibiting primer.
J.
Cement Grout:
Portland cement (ASTM C150, Type I or Type III) and clean, uniformly graded, natural sand
(ASTM t404, Size No.2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with
minimum water required for placement and hydration.
K.
Nonmetallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout:
Premixed, nonmetallic, non-corrosive, non-staining product containing selected siliGI sands,
"Portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents,
complying with CE-CRD-621.
L.
Products:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
Sure Grip Grout; Dayton Superior.
Euco N.S.; Euclid Chemical Co.
Sealtight 588 Grout; W. R. Meadows.
Propak; Protex Industries, Inc.
Five Star Grout; U.s. Grout Corp.
05120-4
I
I
2.2 Fabrication
I
A.
Shop Fabrication and Assembly:
Fabricate and assemble structural assemblies in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate items
of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final shop
. drawings. Provide camber in structural members where indicated. Properly mark and match-
mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery sequence that will expedite erection
and minimize field handling of materials
I
I
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
1
I
I
I
9.
1
I
STRUCTURAL STEEL
Connections:
1.
Weld or bolt shop connections, as indicated.
2.
Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are
indicated.
3.
Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for principal bolted connections, except where
unfinished bolts are indicated.
4.
All connections, bolt field and shop, shall be designed to support one-half the total
uniform load capacity shown in the tables of uniform load constants, Part 2 of the
Manual of Steel Construction, unless specific connections, additional forces or reactions
are shown on drawings.
5.
High-Strength Bolted Construction:
Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance with the turn-of-the-nut method
per AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."
6.
Welded Construction:
Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods
used in correcting welding work.
7.
Shear Connectors:
Prepare steel surfaces as recommended by manufacturer of shear connectors. Weld
"shear connectors in field, spaced as shown, to beams and girders in composite
construction. Use automatic end welding of headed stud shear connectors in
accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
8.
Holes for Other Work:
Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing ~lIld for
passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on final shop
drawings.
Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty items as indicated to
receive other work,
OS 120-S
I
I
I
10. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame-cut holes or
enlarge holes by burning. Drill holes in bearing plates.
2.3
Source Ouality Control
I
A.
General:
1 .
Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in mill, shop,
and field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency. Such inspections and tests will
not relieve Contractor of responsibility for providing materials and fabrication
procedures in compliance with specified requirements.
I
1
2.
Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated components that do not comply.
I
B.
Design of Members and Connections:
I
1. Details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise
indicated. Verify dimensions at site whenever possible without causing delay in the
work.
2,
Promptly notify the Structural Engineer whenever design of members and connections
for any portion of the structure are not clearly indicated,
1
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Erection
I
A.
Erector must examine areas and conditions under which structural steel work is to be installed,
and notify the Contractor, in \",riting, of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely
completion of work. Do not proceed with work until the unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to the erector.
I
B.
Temporary Shoring and Bracing:
I
Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear
" imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in
place and final connections are made. Provide temporary guy lines to achieve proper alignment
of structures as erection proceeds,
I
c.
Temporary Planking:
I
Provide temporary planking and working platforms as necessary to effectively complete work.
I
D.
Setting Bases and Bearing Plates:
I
1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen
surfaces prior to setting base and bearing plates, Clean bottom surface of base and
bearing plates.
2.
Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges
or other adjusting devices.
I
1
STRUCTURAL STEEL
os 120-6
1
I
,.. !
3.
Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do
not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or
bearing plate prior to packing with grout.
I
1
4.
Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids
remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow curing.
I
E.
Field Assembly:
I
Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various
members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean
bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform
necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.
I
F.
level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances.
G.
Splice members only where imlicated and accepted on shop drawings.
I
H.
Erection Bolts:
1.
On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds, and
grind smooth at exposed surfaces.
I
1
2. Comply with AISC Srecifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections,
alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.
I
3. 'Do not enlarge holes in members by burning or by using drift pins, except in secondary
bracing members, Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.
I.
Gas Cutting:
I
Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in primary structural
framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members that are not under stress, as
acceptable to the Structural Engineer. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared appearance
when permitted.
I
3.2
Quality Control
I
A.
Correct deficiencies in structural steel work that inspections and laboratory test reports have
indicated to be not in compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at Contraclor's
expense, as necessary to reconfirm any noncompliance of original work and to show
compliance of corrected work,
I
B.
Shop-Bolted and Field-Bolted Connections:
I
Inspect or test in accordance with AISC Specifications.
I
c.
Certify welders and conduct inspections and tests as required. Record types and locations of
defects found in work. Record work required and performed to correct deficiencies.
D. Perform visual inspection of all welds in accordance with AWS specifications.
1
END OF SECTION 05120
1
C::TRllrTIIRAI C::TI=I=I
n'i 170-7
,I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 5 - METALS
SECTION 05310 - STEEl DECK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 References
1
1
A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.
American Society (or Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ASTM A572/
A572M-OT
Standard Specific<ltion for High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-
Vanadium Structur<ll Steel
I
1
1
I
,I
I
ASTM A653/
A653M-O T a
Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Co<lted (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
ASTM AlBa-aT
, Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-
Dip Galvanized Coatings
1.2
Submittals
A. General:
Submit the following in accordance with conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification
Sections:
1. Shop Drawings showing gage, size, finish, support locations, length and width, layout
and types of deck units, connection details, and conditions requiring closure strips,
supplementary framing, openings and other accessories, Shop drawings shall identify
the specific project, shall list all design criteria, and show all details necessary for
proper erection.
I
2.
Product Data:
I
Submit manufacturer's specification, installation instructions, load tables for gravity
loads and diaphragm shear strength and stiffness in accordance with the "Steel Deck
Institute Design Manual" and the "Steel Deck Institute Diaphragm Manual."
I
1.3
Oualitv Assurance
A. Codes and Standards:
I
I
I
Comply with provisions of the following codes and standards, except as otherwise indicated:
1. American Iron and Steel Institute (AIS!), "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed
Steel Structural Members."
STEEL DECK
05310-1
I
1
I
I
I
2. Steel Deck Institute (SOil, "Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks and Roof
Decks."
B. Qualification of Field Welding:
Use qualified welding' processes and welding operators 'In accordance with "Welder
Qualification" procedures of AWS.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Manufacturers
I
I
2.1
A. Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:
I
I
Bowman Metal Deck Div., Cyclops Corp.
Consolidated Systems, Inc.
H.H. Robertson Co.
Roll Form Products, Inc.
Vulcraft Div., Nucor Corp.
2.2
Materials
I
I
A.
Steel deck shall be of size, gage, diaphragm shear strength and stiffness, and finish as indicated
on the contract documents.
B.
Steel for Galvanized Metal Deck Units:
I
I
ASTM A-653/653M, having a minimum yield strength of 33 ksi. Grade as required to comply
with 501 specifications. Properties shall conform to AISI "Specification for the Design of Cold
Formed Steel Structural Members."
c.
Miscellaneous Steel Shapes:
" ASTM A572, Grade 50
I
D.
Screws:
Self-drilling type, cad plated.
I
E.
Sheet Metal Accessories:
I
ASTM A653/653M, commercial quality, galvanized.
F.
FastelJers:
I
Powder actuated fasteners shall be ENKK Pin as manufactured by !-lilti, or approved equal.
G.
Galvanizing:
1
ASTM A653/653M
I
STEEL DECK
05310-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.3
H.
Galvanizing Repair:
Where galvanized surfaces are damaged, prepare surfaces and repair in accordance with
procedures specified in ASTM A780.
Fabrica.tion
A.
General: Form deck units in lengths to span three or more supports, with f1ush, telescoped, or
nested 2-inch laps at ends and interlocking or nested side laps, of metal thickness, depth, and
width as indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
.
STEEL DECK
Installation
A.
General:
Install deck units and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, shop
drawings, and as specified herein.
B.
Place deck units on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position with ends accurately
aligned and bearing on supporting members before being permanently faster;ed. Do not stretch
or contract side lap interlocks. Inaccuracies in alignment or leveling of supports shall be
cerrected before the deck is permanently fastened into place. Place deck units flat and square,
secured to adjacent framing without warp or deflection.
c.
End lap of units shall occur over supports only. Minimum lap shall be 2". The deck unit shall
extend over three or more supports, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
D.
Align deck units for entire length of run of cells and with close alignment between cells at ends
of abutting units.
E,
Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking bundles to prevent
overloading of structural members.
F.
Fastening Deck Units:
1. Fasten roof deck units to steel supporting members as indicated on drawings.
2.
Mechanical fasten side laps of adjacent deck units between supports as indicated on
drawings.
G.
Cutting and Fitting:
Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent
to the decking, as shown.
H.
Reinforcement at Openings:
Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces as required for strength, continuity of
decking, and support of other work shown. Openings through deck shall be reinforced and
framed for rigidity and load carrying capacity. Holes or other openings required for work of
05310-3
I
I
I
1
I.
I
I
I
J.
I
K.
I
I
other trades shall be drilled out or cut and adequately reinforced by the respective trade; such
holes or other openings larger than 12" square or diameter or over shall be scheduled or
detailed but in no case shall it be less than L 1 Y2 X 1 Y2 x 1/4 each side between supports with
L 1 Y2 x.1 Y2 x 1/4 headers at edges of openings. '
Joint Covers:
Provide metal joint covers at abutting ends and changes in direction of deck units. Covers shall
be formed from steel of the same quality as deck and gauge indicated on contract documents.
Covers shall have a minimum width of 9"and shall be bent to provide tight fitting closure with
deck units.
Closure Strips:
Provide steel closure strips at open uncovered ends and edges of roof decking and in voids'
between decking and other construction. Weld into position to provide a complete decking
installation.
Touch-Up Painting:
After decking installation, wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust spots on
top and bottom surfaces of decking units ,and supporting steel members.
Touch-up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied in accordance with
man ufacturer' s instructions.
END OF SECTION 05310
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
STEEL DECK
05310-4
I
I
I
DIVISION 5 - METALS
SECTION 05400 - PRE-ENGINEERED LIGHT GAGE STEEL TRUSS FRAMES
I
PART 1 - GENERAL
1 .1
I
I
I
Summary
A.
Section includes all work and supplementary items required to complete the proper
installation of the pre-engineered light gage roof trusses as shown on the contract documents
and specified herein including hearlers, outriggers, supplemental rafters and incidental
framing for a complete assembly within the extent shown on the drawings.
B.
Pre-engineered light gage steel trusses include planar structural units consisting of welded,
screwed or bolted connected members which are fabricated, cut and assembled prior to
delivery or at the job site.
1.2 Reference Standards
I
1
I
1
I
I
I
I
1.3
Qual i fications
A.
The following documents of the issue in effect on the date of material procurement, referred
to thereafter by basic designation only form a part of this specification to the extent indicated
by reference thereto.
1. American Iron and Steel Institute:
Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural tvlembers
2. '
American Society of Test Materials:
ASTM A446: "Specification for Sheet Steel, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-
Dip Process, Physical (Structural) Quality,"
Grade A, Fy - 33 ksi: 18 gage and lighter
Grade 0, Fy - 50 ksi: 16 gage and heavier
Galvanizing: G-60 Coating Class
J.
American Welding Society:
AWS 01.0 "Code for Welding in Building Construction"
ANSI Z49.1 "Safety in Welding and Cutting"
A. The I ight gage steel subcontractor shall have experience in fabrication and erection of light
gage steel truss and framing systems of scope and design similar to the required work,
I
1.4
Fabricator's Qualifications
I
A.
I
I
Trusses shall be designed, fabricated, and erected by a firm which has a record including a
minimum of five years of successfully designing, fabricating and erecting trussed assemblies
similar to scope required and which practices a quality control program which includes
inspection by an independent inspection and testing agency acceptable to architect and
authorities having jurisdiction.
PRE-ENGINEERED LIGHT GAGE STEEL TRUSS FRAMES
05400-1
I
I
I
I
1.5
I
I
I
1
I
I
1
I
1.6
I
A,
1
I
B.
Fabricators who wish to qualify for approval under this Section of the specification shall
submit evidence of compliance with this specification no later than ten (10) days prior to the
bid date. Only those fabricators approved in writing by the Architect prior to the bid date
will be accepted.
Submittals
A. Requirements: Submit Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
B.
Product Data: Submit fabricator's technical data covering materials, shapes, hardware,
faurication process, handling and erection.
c.
Submit certificate, signed by an officer of subcontractor or fabricating finn, indicating that
trusses to be supplied for project comply with indicated requirements.
D.
Shop Drawings: Submit engineered stamped and sealed shop drawings showing shapes and
dimensions of members to be used including pitch, span, camber configuration and spacing
for each type or configuration of truss required. Show all bearing and anchorage details.
Specify and detail all supplemental strapping, truss to truss connections, truss to structure
connections, including all bracing and bridging, structurally supporting hip and valley
plates, perimeter eave and ridge plates, bracing clips and other accessories required for
proper installation and support of composite roof decking. Shop drawings shall include all
placement sequences and instructions. '
E.
To the extent engineering design considerations are indicated as fabricator's responsibility,
submit design analysis and test reports indicating wind and gravity loading, section
properties, allowable stress, stress diagrams, calculations, connections between trusses,
connections to structure, and similar information needed for analysis and to insure trusses
comply with requirements. All designs shall bear the name and seal of a Structural Engineer
licensed to practice in the state where the trusses are to be erected.
F. Basis of Design: Basis of Design is indicated on drawings.
Delivery, Storage And Handling
Delivery, store and handle products in exact accordance with the manufacturer's latest
,published requirements and specifications to avoid damage frOIll bending, overturning, or
other cause for which truss is not designed to resist or endure. Storage shall be off-ground in
a dry ventilated space or protect with water proof coverings.
B.
Time'the fabrication and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid
delaying work of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses.
I
PART 2 - ASSEMBLY
I
2.1 Assembly Performance Requirements
A.
I
I
The pre-engineered light gage steel truss system shall exhibit the following performance
characteristics:
1 .
Uniform Total Load Capacity
200 Ibs./linear foot
PRE-ENGINEERED LIGHT GAGE STEEL TRUSS FRAMES
05400-2
I
I
I
2. Top Chord 140 Ibs./linear foot
3. Bottom Chord 60 Ibs./linear foot
4. Truss Spaci ng 4' - 0" O.c.
5. Assembly Weight 10.0 Ibs./sf. Maximum
6. Wind Uplift Rating 100 mph
7. Fire classification Non-combustible
8. Factory Mutual Classification FM Class I
9. Diaphragm Shear Strength 200 PLF in plane
10. Screwed Connections Yes
11. Interior Bearing Yes at Panel Points Only
12. Uplift 30 PSF
2.2 Components
1
I
1
1
I
I
I
A.
All caleulations and procedures pertaining to design, analysis, and computation of section
properties shall be in accordance with the Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel
Structural Members of the American Iron and Steel Institute,
I
B.
All Structural components shall be galvanized with a zinc coating conforming to Coating
Class G-60 and shall be manufactured from steel that conforms to the requirements of ASTM
A-446, Grade A (33 ksi min. yield) for 18 gage and lighter and ASTM A 446, Grade D (50 ksi
min, yield) for 16 gage and heavier.
1
2.3 Fasteners
I
A.
Framing components shall be field or shop fabricated and joined to one another by means of
welding of through the use of screws as recommended by the component provider.
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
1
3.1
Examination
A.
Visually examine and verify that receiving surfaces of the substructure have no apparent
defects or errors which would result in substandard workmanship. Additionally, the
following items shall be installed and inspected prior to roof truss installation,
I
I
Conditions of Surfaces.
1.
. Exterior bearing plates:
I
a.
b.
Properly positioned within bearing surface.
Installed so as to allow complete and adequate contact with truss
connection member.
I
PRE-ENGINEERED LIGHT GAGE STEEL TRUSS FRAMES
05400-3
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2
I
2.
Interior bearing plates:
a, Properly positioned wilhin bearing surface.
b. Installed so as to allow complete and adequate contact with truss
connection member.
3. Exterior and Interior Bearing PIClles installed in proper elevations so as 10 permit the
installation of the truss system without the use of shims or CldjustClbility.
B.
Report any unsatisfactory conditions to the Architect.
Preparation
A,
Structural Adequacy: Contractor shall prepare the structure 10 insure proper Clnd Cldequate
structural support for the materials specified.
3.3 Fabrication
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
1
A.
Light gage steel trusses may be fabricated either on the job site or <It the fabricator's shop.
B,
All trusses shall be fClbricated and erected in strict accordance with the current printed
instructions of the approved subcontractor or fabricCltor.
c.
All truss components shall be straight and true prior to f<lbrication. FIClttening or
straightening components, when necessary, shall be accomplished in a manner so as to not
damage the component.
D.
All truss components shall be cut neatly to fit snugly against adjacent members,
E.
No splices will be allowed in trusses except as authorized in writing by the Architect or as
shown on the approved shop drawings.
F.
Provide all clips, angles, gussets and other miscellaneous pieces necessary to attach light
gage steel trusses to the substructure or to attach other components within this section to one
another.
G.
All trusses shall be erected true and plumb and properly bridged and braced in accordance
with the approved shop drawings.
H.
All truss components shall be connected to one another by means of screw attachment or by
welding.
I.
Completed trusses shall be free from twists, bends or open joints with all members straight
and true to line.
J. If the truss components have been welded to one another then <111 welds must be thoroughly
cleaned and wire brushed and primed and painted with a high zinc content paint capClble of
providing an equal or greater degree of protection than the origin<ll G-60 galvanized coating,
I
3.4
Erection
1
A.
I
Prefabricated trusses shall be braced against racking, Lifting of trusses shall be done so as to
not cause local distortion in any member.
PRE-ENGINEERED LIGHT GAGE STEEL TRUSS FRAMES
05400-4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
J.
B,
All light gage steel framing shall be erected by approved methods using equipment of
adequate capacity to safely perform the work.
c.
The contractor is responsible for checking the dimensions and assuring the fit of all members
and trusses before erection begins.
D.
All work shall be erected plumb ;md level and to dimensions, spacings indicated on the
drawirigs.
E. Components shall be of the size and spacing shown on the approved shop drawings.
F.
Provide web stiffeners and reinforcement at reaction points where required by analysis or to
suit details.
G.
Hoist units in place by means of lifting pquipment suited to sizes and types of trusses
required, applied at designated lift points as recommended by fabricator, exercising care not
to damage truss members.
H.
Provide temporary bracing as required to rn<lintain trusses plumb, parallel and in location
indicated, until permanent bracing is installpc.l. '
I.
Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points to comply with methods and details indicated,
Install permanent bracing and related components to enable trusses to maintain design
spacing, withstand live and dead loads, and comply with other indicated requirements,
K. Do not CLlt or remove truss members.
I
L.
1
I
I
Prior Approved Truss Erectors are:
M.R.D.5., Inc.
610 W, Manning Street
Chattanooga, Tennessee 37405
423-266-0046 (F) 423-266-0049
Advantage Construction, Inc.
.4310 Courageous Wake
Alph~~e'tta, Georgia 30005
770-4'75-6059 (F) 77-569-2980
S.R.D., Inc.
P.O. Box 595
Birmingham, Alabama 35127
205-744-6110 (F) 205-744-9958
Beacon Contracting Group
5905 Macy Avenue
Jacksonville, Florida 32211
904-743-9770 (F) 904-743-9775
1
END OF SECTION 05400
1
1
1
1
PRE-ENGINEERED LIGHT GAGE STEEL TRUSS FRAMES
05400-5
I
I
DIVISION 5 - METALS
SECTION 05500 - MISCELLANEOUS METALS
I
01 - SUBMIITALS
I
A - The work covered by this section of the specifications includes furnishing all labor, equipment, appliances, and materials
and in performing all operations in connection with miscellaneous metals, complete in accordance with this section of the
specifications and the applicable drawings. Miscellaneous steel not furnished with the structural steel as dermed in Section
2 of the AISC Code of Standard Practice, Ninth Edition, Page 5-226, and items of other metals required to complete the
work as shown, unless otherwise particularly noted on the drawings or otherwise specified.
I
02 - SUBMIIT ALS
I
A - Shop Drawinli!s - Submit one sepia and one print for all items of work of this section, showing materials, thicknesses,
finishes, dimensions, construction, relation of adjoining construction, erection details, profiles, jointing and all other
drawings and details required to illustrate all items and details of the work of this section.
I
B - Loose Lintel Schedule - Submit, showing all locations.
I
03 - MATERIALS
I
A - Structural steel shapes, plates and bars, ASTM A36-73.
B - Threaded Fasteners - Low carbon steel, ASTM A307-68.
C - Ferrous Metal Primer - Rust inhibitive primer for ferrous metals.
I
04 - WORKMANSHIP
A - All metal work shall be fabricated in a thorough and workmanlike manner by mechanics skilled in their line of work. Insofar
as possible, work shall be fitted and shop assembled, read for erection. All joints shall be of such character and so
assembled that they will be as strong and rigid as the adjoining sections. All exposed joints shall be close fitting and all
bolts, screws, etc., shall be cut off flush with nuts or other adjacent metal. All metal work shall be cut, punched, drilled and
tapped as required for the attachment of other work.
I
I
B - Shop Assemblv - Fitting and assembly of work shall be done in shop. Work that cannot be permanently shop-assembled
shall be completely assembled, marked and disassembled in shop before shipment to insure proper assembly in field.
I
C - Cutting - Cut metal by sawing, shearing, or blanking. Flame cutting will be permitted only if cut edges are ground back
clean, smooth edges, Make cuts accurate, clean, sharp, and free of burrs, without deforming adjacent surfaces or metals.
D - Holes - Drill or punch holes, do not burn.
I
E - Connections - Make connections with tight joints, capable of developing full strength of member, flush unless indicated
otherwise. Locate joints where least conspicuous. Unless indicated otherwise, weld or bolt shop connections; bolt or screw
field connections.
1
I
I. Welding - Welding shall be in accordance with "Standard Code for Welding in Building Construction" of the American
Welding Society and shall be done with electrodes and methods reconunended by the manufacturers of the metals being
welded. Welds shall be continuous, except where spot welding is permitted. Welds exposed to view shall be ground
flush and dressed smooth with and to match fmish ofadjoining surfaces; undercut metal edges where welds are required
to be flush. All welds on or behind surfaces which will be exposed to view shall be done without a distortion of fmished
surface. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from all welded surfaces.
I
05 - PAINTING
I
A - Clean ferrous metal of scale, rust, oil, moisture, and dirt before applying paint. Cleaning shall be in accordance with
SSPC-SP2.
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
05500-1
Miscellaneous Metals
I
I
I
I
B - Apply one shop coat to ferrous metals after fabrication except metals that will be encased in concrete, and except surfaces
that will be adjacent to field welds. Use asphalt paint on metals anchored into masonry.
C - Apply two shop coats to ferrous metals that will be inaccessible after erection.
I
D - Retouch, in field, any scraped, abraded, and unpainted surfaces in accordance with specification for shop coats.
1
E - Painting specified here does not count as coat for finish painting.
06 - INSTALLATION
1
1
A - All metal work shall be installed in conformity with the approved shop drawings and shall be securely fastened in place.
07 - ITEMS OF MISCELLANEOUS METALS
A - Loose Steel Lintels
I
1. Provide loose steel lintels of structural hot rolled shapes over all openings wider than 18" in masonry walls, partitions,
and furring, except where door heads are reinforced to act as lintels, or where lintels are provided under other Sections.
2. Lintels shall have a minimum bearing of 4 inches at each end for spans up to 4'-0", and shall be increased 1/2" for each
additional foot of span.
3. All lintels on exterior or where exposed to the weather shall be hot-dipped galvanized.
4. Unless otherwise shown on drawings, lintels shall conform to the following:
5. Loose Lintel Schedule (angle sizes, inches)
I
I
Opening Width Wall Thickness
(Max) 4 in. 6 in. 8 in.
2'0" 3-1/2 x 3-1/2 x 1/4 6 x 4 x 5/16 3-1/2 x 3-1/2x 1/4
3'0" 3-1/2 x 3-1/2 x 5/16 6 x 4 x 5/16 3-1/2 x 3-1/2 x 5/16
4'0"
5'0" 4 x 3-1/2 x 3/8 6 x 4 x 3/8 4 x 3-1/2 x 5/16
6'0" 5 x 3-1/2 x 3/8 " 5 x 3-1/2 x 5/16
7'0" " 5 x 5 x 1/2 5 x 3-1/2 x 3/8
8'0" " 5 x 5 x 5/8 "
9'0" 6 x 3-1/2 x 3/8 6 x 3-1/2 x 3/8 6 x 3-1/2 x 3/8
I
1
I
I
*Two angles at all opening in 8 in. walls.
Three angles at all openings in 12" walls.
B - Ductile Iron Trench Drain Gratin~ and Frame
I
1. NEENAH FOUNDRY COMPANY - No, R-4991-D, Type C Cover, Type L Frame with end frame sections.
I
2. MCKINNEY IRON WORKS - Type TGLB/TCLD, grating opening shall run parallel with drain, (Comply with
drawings and (1) above)
I
3. FLOCKHART FOUNDRY COMPANY - Type 672/679, grating openings shall run parallel with drain. (Comply with
drawings and (1) above)
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
05500-2
Miscellaneous Metals
I
I
C-
Miscellaneous Pipe Sleeves, Hangers and Supports
I
1. Fabricate from structural steel in sizes and shapes with connects as sho\\'Il on drawings. They shall not be subject to the
requirements of those to be installed for use with mechanical and electrical work.
I
2. After fabrication apply one coat rust resisting paint to all surfaces.
3. Install true and level.
I
D - Wallrails and Post/Wallrail Brackets (wall-mounted in stairways)and Handrails
I
1) Wallrail - I 1/2" diameter Schedule 40 aluminum pipe with clear anodized aluminum finish. Railing system shall be
designed and constructed to withstand a concentrated 300 lbs. load applied in any direction. Wall-mounted rails shall
be not less than 30 inches or more than 34 inches when measured form the tread nose to the top surface of the rail.
Wall-mounted rails shall not project into the travel area more than 3 1/2 inches. Wall-mounted rails shall have side
finger clearance of at least 1 1/2 inches. All corners to have a radius. All welds and surface area shall be smooth and
free of obstructions. Furnish and install where and as shown on drawings.
I
I
2) Wall rail Brackets - R & B Wagner, Inc. 1767 aluminum, or Julius Blum & Co. No. 4396 aluminum, clear anodized
fmish. Use wall bracket filler by bracket manufacturer for mounting at gypsum wall locations. Provide blocking for
all mounting locations. Furnish and install where and as shown on drawings.
I
3) Handrails and Post (freestanding in dining room) - Handrail and post system shall be designed to withstand a
concentrated 300 Ibs. load applied in any direction. Fabricate rails and post from anodized aluminum pipe with nominal
size of 1 1/2 inches outside diameter. Pipe shall be Schedule 40 with clear anodized finish, vertical post to be 3' - 0"
O.c. All joints to be welded, ground smooth, and polished to match pipe finish. Railing to be set in floor sleevesnsee
drawings for detail.
I
I
4) Fabrication:
I
a) Form rail-to-end post connections and all changes in rail direction by welded connections. All corners to have a
radius.
b) Cut material square and remove burrs from all exposed edges, with no chamfer.
c) Furnish matching sleeves of inserts not less than 5 inches long for setting post in concrete with formulated non-
shrinking hydraulic anchoring cement (POR-ROK type). Coat cement with industrial coating.
d) Locate intermediate rails midway between top rail and finished floor.
e) Verify dimensions on site prior to shop fabrication.
I
I
5) Installation:
I
a) Install in accordance with approved shop drawings.
b) Erect work square and level, free from distortion or defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
c) Expansion joints shall be provided as needed to allow for thermal expansion or contraction.
4) Cleaning:
I
a) As installation is completed, wash thoroughly using clean water and soap. Rinse with clean water.
b) Do not use acid solution, steel wool, or other harsh abrasives.
c) If stain remains after washing, remove finish and restore in accordance with NAAMM Metal Finishes Manual. Finish
must not be removed from anodized aluminum. Re-anodizing can only be done by removing railing and returning
it to the anodizer.
I
I
1
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
05500-3
Miscellaneous Metals
I
I
I
5) Repair of Defective 'York: Remove stained or otherwise defective work and replace with material that meets
specification requirements.
E-
Metal Ladders and Safety Cages
I
1. Shall be fabricated of structural steel shapes as shown on drawings with welded connections. See drawings for pipe
handrails required. See drawings for floor to ceiling dimension required for ladders and safety cages.
I
F - Downspout Shoes
I
1. Shall be cast iron, field painted, and coordinated to fit a round 4" copper downspout. Downspout and shoe shall be
protected from electrolysis with a butyl paint or tape. Model R-4926 G 1 by Neenah Foundry company
G - Guard Pipe Posts (Bollards)
I
1. Shall be 6" standard weight galvanized steel pipe set in concrete footing and filled with concrete, and painted yellow. See
drawings for length and locations.
I
H - Hanging Rod:
1. Hanging Rod for closets shall be 1" o.d. 20 gauge chrome plated steel tubing with chrome plated wall plates..
I
- Wall and Control Joint Covers
I
1. Wall and control joint covers shall be as follows (required at all interior thru-wall expansion and control joints, both sides
of wall to include walls at comer. Snap-on joints not acceptable):
I
a. MM Systems Series X-MIM 45/16 (wall in field)
b, MM Systems Series X-NIM 35/16 (wall at comer).
J - Steel Pipe
I
1. Steel pipe and fittings shall be manufactured standard galvanized steel, formed in sizes and shapes as shown.
K-
Security Mesh
I
1. Security mesh shall be flattened mesh diamond size ASM ,75-9F as manufactured by Alabama Metal Industries Corp.
- see drawings for locations (railings and loading dock).
I
08 - MISCELLANEOUS STRUCTURAL SHAPES
I
A - The contractor shall furnish and install all items of structural steel not covered under Structural Steel, and all items of
miscellaneous steel and miscellaneous metals, which are shown on the drawings, or as required to properly erect and
complete the structure consistent with the best practice of the trade.
1
09 - PROTECTION FROM ELECTROLYSIS
I
A - In all cases where dissimilar metals, such as aluminum, steel, copper, etc., would joint or be in contact, the metals shall be
kept separated by suitable non-conducting gasket or tape or by painting he contact surface with Kopper's Bitumastic No.
50 or approved insulating coating. Care shall be taken to prevent the Bitumastic from showing on permanently exposed
surfaces.
I
I
acsb
(hboI12/2003)
05500-4
Miscellaneous Metals
I
I
10 - SOFFIT VENTS
I
A - Natural aluminum #28 anodized aluminum soffit vent with screen shall be 3" diameter regular series with standard collar
by Midget Louvers, Sunvent Industries, by Sylro Corp" Pelham, NH. One required at the center of each concrete slab soffit
at all windows; one centered over each exterior door at stucco soffits; ten at the bus canopy; and eight at the auto canopy
- to be located by the architect.
I
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
05500-5
Miscellaneous Metals
I
I
I
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
SECTION 06200 - CARPENTRY AND MILLWORK
I
OI-GENERAL
I
A - Shop Drawinl]:s and Samples
I
I. Submit shop drawings of all millwork items. Drawings shalI be from actual field measurements. (I sepia and I print to
Architect)
2, Submit samples of: Plastic Laminate
I
B - Product Delivery. Storage and Handling
1. Upon delivery to site, place materials in area protected from weather.
I
02 - MATERIALS
I
A - Lumber
I. Lumber for wood plates, nailers, curbs furring strips, rough work blocking and grounds shall be No.2 KD Southern
Yellow Pine.
I
2. Lumber for all exposed interior and exterior trim and woodwork, including frames, shelving, cabinets and counters, unless
otherwise shown on the drawings or specified, shall be B and better Douglas Fir.
I
B - Ph'wood
I
1. Unless otherwise sho\';TI on the plans or specified herein, plywood shall be grade-stamped Douglas Fir plywood in grades
and types as follows: '
a. For exterior use Grade EXT-DFPA, A-C
b. Plywood for shelving shall be Grade INTERIOR A-A
c. Plywood for counter tops and backsplashes shall be 3/4" thick Grade EXT-DFPA, A-C.
I
I
C - Plastic Laminate - Shall be: Formica, Micarta, Wilson Art, or Consoweld. 1/16" thick high pressure laminate, general
purpose grade, NEMA Standard LDl-1964. Colors to be selected by architect.
D - Rou1?:h Hardware
I
I.General - AII items of hardware exposed to weather or embedded in or in contact with masonry or concrete shall be
zinc-coated. Bolt heads and nuts bearing on wood shall be provided with standard steel washers.
I
2.Nails - Comply with Federal Specification FF-N-IOl.
3. Screws - Wood screws; conform to "Standards of American Institute of Bolt, Nut and Rivet Manufacturers". Furnish sizes.
types, and quantities to complete work.
I
4. Sleeve Anchor Bolts (for attaching units to concrete masonry walIs) - PhilIips DrilI Company Red Head sleeve anchors, 3/8"
x length required, round head. Where concealed, used cut steel washers, countersink heads.
1
5.
Tite-Joint Fasteners (for fastening component units counter tops together) - No. 516 Tite-Joint Fastener as manufactured
by Knape & V ogt Manufacturing Company, Grand Rapids, Michigan.
I
acsb
(hbol - 12/2003)
06200-1
Carpentry and MilIwork
I
I
I
E - Pressure Treatment of Lumber
I
1.
All wood in contact with concrete, steel, stucco, masonry, roof deck or as noted on the drawings shall be pressured treated
by one of the following methods:
a. 5% by weight Pentachlorophonal, by vacuum
b, Osmose K-33
c. Wolmanized, treated to 19% maximum moisture content, stamped "Dry"
I
I
03 - WORKMANSHIP - ROUGH & FINISH HARDWARE
I
A - Install framing, blocking, furring, nailers, and grounds, as shown on the drawings and attach to building structure with bolts,
Bolts shall be drawn up tight and countersunk where shown on drawings.
I
B - Install trim and millwork as shown on the drawings. Joints in trim shall be butt-type. Sand joint edges to make tight fits
and apply glue. Use fmishing nails and screws which shall be set for puttying.
04 - FINISH HARDWARE INST ALLA TION
I
A - Cut and fit materials to receive hardware. Install all hardware in accordance with the manufacturer's templates.
B - After installation check all hardware for ease of operation. Apply oil and graphite for lubrication.
I
05 - MILLWORK
A - All millwork shall be constructed to follow designs shown and described using the materials shown on the drawings and
specified herein.
I
B - All joints shall be fitted using specified joining methods with blocking, screws and glue.
I
C - All wood members over 12" wide shall be glued-up and joined using no material wider than 12".
D - All millwork when delivered shall have all joints filled, and exposed and usable surfaces sanded and smooth ready for
finishing.
I
E - Install all millwork plumb, level, fitted and joined and attached to building structure.
I
F - Plywood shelving shall have hardwood edge, 1/2" thick, tongue and grooved to shelf.
06 - DOOR GRILLES
I
A - Door grilles furnished by Mechanical Division shall be installed under Carpentry and Millwork.
07 - FIRE RETARDANT TREATED LUMBER AND PLYWOOD
I
I
A - All lumber and plywood material in interior construction with the exception of millwork and casework, shall be impregnated
with a fire-retardant monomeric resin solution, Hoover "Pyro-Guard" fire retardant treated wood. Pyro-Guard fire-
retardant treated wood materials have an Underwriters' Laboratories designated rating of FRS, which means that the material
has a fire hazard classification of 25 or less for flame spread, fuel contributed and smoke developed, and shows no sign of
progressive combustion when the 10-minute fire hazard classification test is continued for an additional 30 minutes. After
impregnation, the wood is kiln-dried to cure the chemicals in the wood. Refer to moisture content requirements above.
All treated wood shall meet ASTM E-84 and D-320 1 Standards, Type A requirements in A WP A, Standard C-lO for lumber
and C-27 for plywood.
I
I
END OF SECTION
acsb
(Mol- 12/2003)
06200-2
Carpentry and Millwork
I
I
I
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
SECTION 06400 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
I
OI-GENERAL
A - Shop Drawings
I
1. Submit copies of shop drawings to Architect for approval of all items of carpentry and millwork where so
required herein. Submit drawings in accordance with requirements described in General Conditions. Obtain
approval of drawings prior to proceeding with fabrication.
I
2. Shop drawings shall indicate the materials and species, matching of panels, arrangement, full size profiles of
moldings, thicknesses, size of parts, construction, fastenings, blocking, clearance, assembly and erection
details, applied finishes and surfacing, built-in hardware, and connections to work of other trades.
I
B - Samples
I
1. Submit samples of plastic laminate.
C - Product Delivery, Storage and Handling
I
I. Upon delivery to site, place materials in area protected from weather.
I
02 - COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARD AND INDUSTRY SPECIFICATIONS
I
A - Any materials or operation specified by reference to the published specifications of a manufacturer, The
Architectural Woodwork Institute (A WI), National Woodwork Manufacturer's Association (NWMA), Southern
Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB), Douglas Fir Plywood Association (DFPA), Hardwood Plywood Institute (BPI),
West Coast Lumberman's Association (WCLA), Southern Cypress Manufacturer's Association (SCMA), National
Door Manufacturer's Association (NDMA), California Redwood Association (CRA), Commercial Standards (CS),
National Oak Flooring Manufacturer's Association (NOFMA), Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc, (UL), National
Wood Preservers Association (NWPA), or other published standards, shall comply with the requirements of the
standard listed.
I
I
1. In case of conflict between the referenced specifications and project specifications, the project specifications
shall govern.
I
2. In case of conflict among the referenced specifications or standards, the one having the more stringent
requirements shall govern.
03 - MATERIALS
I
A - Lumber
I
1. Lumber for wood plates, studs, nailers, curbs, furring strips, rough work, blocking and grounds shall be No,
2 KD Southern Yellow Pine. Lumber shall conform to Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber as
published by Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (fire-retardant treated).
I
2. Lumber for all exposed interior trim and finished millwork and woodwork not called for to be covered in
plastic laminate including frames, interior cabinet shelving, cabinets and counters otherwise shown on the
drawings or specified herein shall be Alder Grade F AS and better.
I
3. Nominal lumber dimensions shall conform to minimum established by the American Lumber Standard of the
US Department of Conunerce.
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003
06400-1
Architectural Woodwork
I
I
B - Plywood
I. All plywood for millwork cabinetry shall be grade stamped.
I
2. All plywood for countertops and back splashes shall be 3/4" thick grade exterior grade EXT -DFP A A-C.
I
3. All plywood for backs of cabinets to be 1/4" and 3/4" as shown on drawings. Interior grade INT-DFP A A-B.
4. All other plywood for cabinetry shall be 3/4" thick interior grade INT-A-B to include tops, sides, shelving
partitions, bottoms, doors, drawer fronts, etc.
I
5. All drawer fronts to be 3/4" thick plywood interior grade INT-A-8. All drawer bottoms to be 1/4" thick
plywood interior grade INT-A-B. All drawer sides and back to be 1/2" hardwood.
1
I
D - Plastic Laminate
I. All horizontal surfaces, countertops, backsplashes, end splashes, and edges, shall be covered with: Nevamar,
Micarta, Fonnica or Wilson Art. 1/16" thick high pressure laminate. General purpose grade, NEMA Standard
Publication No. LP3-1975, 6P50 Abrasion Class One.
I
2. All vertical surfaces, doors, drawers, open cabinets and all horizontal surfaces of shelving (top and bottom)
shall be covered with: Neva Mar, Micarta or Wilson Art. 1/32" thick high pressure laminate, vertical surface
grade, NEMA Standard Publication No. LD3-1975.
I
3. Interior of cabinet doors and drawers to be covered with melamine grade plastic laminate.
I
4. All edges of cabinet doors, shelving, cabinets and drawer fronts, and divider partitions shall be covered with
.7mrn continuous P.Y.C.
I
5. Plastic laminate shall be applied with contact cement adhesive. All edges shall be routed with 30 degree
bevel. All joints shall be tight butt joints.
I
6. Teacher storage cabinets, upright storage cabinet doors, base cabinet and wall cabinet doors shall be 3/4" INT-
A-B plywood with 1/32" high pressure plastic laminate covered exterior and melamine grade plastic laminate
interior. Edges shall be 1/32" high pressure laminate.
I
7. See drawings for shelving types 13, 14, 15,22, 22A, and 22B, which are not to be covered in plastic laminate
but are to be finished under Section 9E.
E - Edge Strips - .7mrn continuous P.Y.c. edge banding with spline that fits into slot cut in edges - edging to be hot
glue applied. Color to match cabinet.
I
F - Rough Hardware
I
1. General - All items of hardware exposed to weather or embedded in or in contact with masonry or concrete
shall be zinc-coated, Bolt heads and nuts bearing on wood shall be provided with standard steel washers.
I
2. Nails - Comply with Federal Specification FF-N-I01.
3. Screws - Wood screws; conform to "Standards of American Institute of Bolt, Nut and Rivet Manufacturers".
Furnish size, types and quantities to complete work.
I
4. Sleeve Anchor Bolts (for attaching units to concrete masonry walls) - Phillips Drill Company Red Head Sleeve
Anchors, 3/8" x 1-1/4" round head. Where concealed, use cut steel washers, countersink heads.
I
5. All bolt heads bearing on wood shall have standard washers. Where members are connected to provide a flush
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003
06400-2
Architectural Woodwork
I
I
surface, the bolt head and washer shall be countersunk, and where the surface is exposed as a finished piece,
the countersunk bolt hole shall be plugged and sanded smooth.
I
6. Angle clips, expansion bolts, screws, toggle bolts, metal nailer plugs or inserts shall be used. The contractor
shall not use wood plugs, nailing blocks or plastic inserts for connecting wood to masonry to concrete.
I
G - Cabinet Finishes - Cabinets and shelving where not called for to be covered with plastic laminate, shall be painted
under PAINTING: SECTION 9E.
04 - WORKMANSHIP
I
A - Install framing, blocking, furring, nailers and grounds as shown on the drawings and attach to building structure
with bolts. Bolts shall be drawn up tight and countersunk where shown on the drawings.
I
B - Install trim and millwork as shown on the drawings. Joints in trim shall be butt-type. Sand joint edges to make
tight fits and apply glue. Use finishing nails and screws which shall be set for puttying.
I
C - Workmanship shall be of the best customarily done on work of this type. The intent is that joints be neatly and
carefully made, surfaces straight and clean, work sanded with the grain, all machine marks removed by sanding,
except on exterior materials which shall be cleanly machined. All across scratches shall be eliminated. Shop
assembled surfaces shall be glued and shall be glue blocked at concealed locations. All connections shall be made
by best approved practice of the cabinet-making trade, including dadoes for shelves and mortises and tenon.
I
D - Countertops to be manufactured with as few joints as possible. 12'-0" minimum laminate lengths.
I
05 - GLUING
I
A - All gluing shall be done with urea formaldehyde resin glue for exterior or damp conditions. Type 1 waterproof
glue shall be used for extreme conditions. where widths or thicknesses are not available in hardwood, gluing may
be used on widths over 5-1/4" or thicknesses over 1"
I
06 - CABINET HARDWARE INST ALLA nON
I
A - Cut and fit materials to receive hardware. Install all hardware in accordance with the manufacturer's templates.
B - After installation check all hardware for ease of operation. Apply oil to hinges and graphite to locks for
lubrication.
07 - CABINETRY
I
A - All cabinetry shall be constructed to follow designs shown and described on the drawings using the materials
shown on the drawings and specified herein. Cabinetry shall conform to American Woodwork Institute custom
grade.
I
B - All joints shall be fitted using joining methods with blocking, screws, and glue as specified in American
Woodwork Institute custom grade,
I
C - All cabinetry not covered in plastic laminate when delivered shall have all joints finished and exposed and usable
surfaces sanded and smooth ready for finishing.
I
D - Install all cabinetry plumb, level, fitted and joined and attached to building structure. Rear of cabinets shall be
screw attached into rear wall with bolts and shields directly to masonry wall or with wood screws where blocking
is used behind cabinet. Install minimum of four connections per cabinet.
I
E - Interior of cabinet doors and drawer fronts shall be laminated with melamine grade plastic laminate.
I
F - Countertops shall have KY 516 Tite Joint Fasteners with two at each joint.
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003
06400-3
Architectural Woodwork
I
I
G - All surfaces not covered in plastic laminate shall be finished under Painting Section 9E.
I
08 - CABINET HARDWARE
H - Provide cutout in center vertical divider for operation of the elbow catch at cabinets 6, 7, 8, and 9,
Set 1 - Adiustable Shelves
I
Standards
Supports
K&V 255
K&V 256
I
Set 2 - Storage Cabinet Door
I
I
1-1/2 pair hinges
1 Pull
Pair under 36" high
Pair over 36" high
Stanley 6783
Stanley 6785
Hager 1250
Hager 1256
US26D
US26D
Catch
2 surface
Stanley 1592
Hafele 151.36.222
Baldwin 0322-3"
Set 3 - Base or Wall Cabinet Door
(Base Overlay)
I
1 pair hinges
1 pull
I
Set 4 - Stora~e Cabinet Door
1 lock
1 elbow catch
I
Set 5 - Each Drawer
I
1 set drawer slides
1 pull
US26D
US26D
Stanley 1592
Hafele 151.36.222
US26D
Ives No.2
Corbin 0370Bx7S
K&V 1300
US26D Hafele 151.36.222
Equivalent acceptable metal hinges - Grass, Hafele and Mepla.
I
08 - ALLOWANCE FOR ADDITIONAL CABINETRY
I
A - Include in the base bid an allowance of twelve thousand dollars to be used in the event additional cabinetry beyond
that shown on drawings is added. If no additional cabinetry is required, this allowance will be used for
contingencies or credit.
I
I
I
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003
END OF SECTION
06400-4
Architectural Woodwork
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
SECTION 06670
CELLULAR (pVC) FABRICATIONS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cellular PVC Trim Boards for corner boards, soffits, fascias, battens, door
pilasters, frieze boards, rake boards, architectural millwork and door/window trim.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06445 - Simulated Wood Ornaments: Fluted Pilasters, Columns.
B. Section 06455 - Simulated Wood Trim: Standing and Running Trim.
C. Section 07460 - Plastic Siding: Composite material used on exterior wall or soffit.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D792 - Density and Specific Gravity of Plastics by Displacement.
B. ASTM D570 - Water Absorption of Plastics.
C. ASTM D638 - Tensile Properties of Plastics.
D. ASTM D790 - Flexural Properties of Unrein forced and Reinforced Plastics and
Electrical Insulating Materials.
E. ASTM D1761 - Mechanical Fasteners in Wood.
F. ASTM D5420 - Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Flat, Rigid Plastic
Specimen by means of a Striker Impacted by a FaIling Weight.
G. ASTM D256 - Determining the Pendulum Impact Resistance of Plastics.
H. ASTM D696 - Coefficient of Linear Thermal Expansion of Plastics Between -30oC
and 300C with a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer.
I. ASTM D635 - Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a
Horizontal Position.
J. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
K. ASTM D648 - Deflection Temperature of Plastics Under Flexural Load in
the Edgewise Position.
06670-1
Cellular PVC Fabrications
acsb
(hbol/2/2003)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
L. ASTM D3679 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Siding.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and
Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section.
B. Product Data: Submit product data, manufacturer's catalogs, SPEC-DATA@ product
Sheet, for specified products.
C. Samples: Submit three material samples representative of the texture, thickness
and widths shown and specified herein.
1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Check with Local Building Code for installation
requirements.
B. Allowable Tolerances:
1. Variation in com ponent length: -0.00 / + 1.00"
2. Variation in component width: :I:: 1/16"
3. Variation in component thickness: :I:: 1/16"
4. Variation in component edge cut: :I:: 20
5. Variation in Density -0% + 10%
C. Workmanship, Finish, and Appearance:
1. Cellular PVC that is homogeneous and free of voids, holes, cracks,
and foreign inclusions and other defects. Edges must be square, and top and
bottom surfaces shall be flat with no convex or concave deviation.
2. Uniform surface free from cupping, warping, and twisting.
1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Trim materials should be stored on a flat and level surface on a full shipping pallet.
Handle materials to prevent damage to product edges and corners. Store materials
under a protective covering to prevent jobsite dirt and residue from collecting on the
boards.
1.07 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer's 25 year warranty against defects in manufacturing that cause
the products to rot, corrode, delaminate, or excessively swell from moisture.
06670-2
Cellular PVC Fabrications
acsb
(hboI12/2003)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART II PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Acceptable products: AZEJ(TM Trimboards manufactured by Vycom Corporation,
801 Corey Street, Moosic, PA 18507.
B. Material: Expanded rigid poly vinyl chloride material with a small-cell
microstructure and density of .55 grams/cm3.
1. Material shall have a minimum physical and performance properties specified
in the following Section C.
C. Performance and physical characteristic requirements:
ASTM
Property Units Value Method
PHYSICAL
Density g/cm3 0.55 0792
Water Absorption % 0,15 0570
MECHANICAL
Tensile Strength psi 2256 0638
Tensile Modulus psi 144,000 0638
Flexural Strength psi 3329 0790
Flexural Modulus psi 144,219 0790
Lbf/in of
Nail Hold penetration 35 o 1761
Lbf/in of
Screw Hold penetration 680 01761
Lbf/in of
Staple Hold penetration 180 o 1761
Gardner Impact in-Ibs 103 05420
Charpy Impact (@23OC) ft-Ibs 4.5 0256
THERMAL
Coefficient of Linear
Expansion in/inrF 3,2 x 10-5 D 696
No burn when flame
Burning Rate in/min removed 0635
Flame Spread Index -- 20 E 84
Heat Deflection Temp 264
psi of 150 0648
Oil Canning (@1400F) of Passed D 648
2.02 ACCESSORY PRODUCTS
A. Fasteners: All types of fasteners that work well with wood will work as well or better
with AZEJ(TM. Durable fasteners such as stainless steel and / or hot dipped galvanized
are preferred. Fasteners from a nail gun work well. Standard box nails with a full
round head are preferred.
B. Adhesives:
06670-3
Cellular rvc Fabrications
acsb
(hboI12/2003)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. Bonding AZEI(TM to AZEI(TM, solvent based adhesive systems used for
rigid PVC pipe work very well. Latex adhesives provide more working time.
2. Bonding AZEI(TM to Various Substrates, numerous standard construction
adhesives work well. In general, contact cement, epoxy, rubber based and
urethane adhesives are acceptable. Test a particular adhesive for suitability.
C. Sealants:
1. Use urethane, polyurethane or acrylic based sealants without silicone.
2.03 FINISHES
A. Preparation:
1. Clean, Dry surface
2. Nail holes may be finished with a poly urethane or acrylic based caulk, or
painted over.
3. Apply 100% Acrylic Latex paint in strict accordance with paint manufacturers
instructions.
Note to specifier: Painting is not required for protection, warranty is valid painted
or unpainted. Sanding is not necessary for paint adhesion.
PART III EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
A. Manufacturers instructions: Comply with manufacturers product catalog installation
instructions and product technical bulletin instructions.
B. Cutting: Sheets and boards can be cut using standard saws and carbide blades used
for wood.
c. Drilling: Drilling can be accomplished using twist drills recommended for metals.
D. Milling: Milling can be accomplished using standard milling machines of various
types. Relief Angle 200 to 300; Cutting speed to be optimized with the number of
knives and feed rate.
E. Routing: Routing can be accomplished using standard carbide tipped routers used in
woodworking.
F. Edge Finishing: Various sanding, grinding or filing tools. Do not allow excessive
frictional heat to build up.
G. Nail Location: Standard nailing patterns are recommended. You can fasten closer to
the edge than with wood.
H. Linear Thermal Expansion and Contraction: When properly fastened, allow for 1/8"
movement for each 18' board. When butting boards together it is recommended that the butt
06670-4
Cellular rvc Fabrications
acsb
(hboI12/2003)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
joint is glued with PVC cement. This will eliminate any separation at the joint. The gap can be
accommodated at the ends of the run.
END OF SECTION
06670-5
Cellular PVC Fabrications
acsc
(hboI12/2003)
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07 I 50 - DAMP PROOFING
I
01 - SUBMITI ALS
I
A - Submit manufacturer's specifications and descriptive literature of each item for approval.
1
02 - MA TERlALS
A - Wall Dampproofing - Spray applied
I
I
I. Acceptable manufacturers:
a. Standard Dry Wall Products - Thoroseal Foundation Coating
b. Sonneborn Contech - Hydrocide 600
c. Kannak Chemical Corporation - Kannak 100
I
03 - MATERIAL HANDLING
A - All materials shall be delivered to job site in sealed containers bearing manufacturers original labels.
I
B - Storage of materials shall be in dry location and protected against moisture and damage.
I
04 - INST ALLA nON
I
A - Wall dampproofmg shall be applied on all surfaces ofC.M.U. occurring inside cavity walls. Dampproofing shall extend from
finished floor to top of parapet bond beam. Apply dampproofing inside all surfaces of brick cavities that are to receive
concrete fill.. Application rate and procedure shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
1
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
07150-1
Dampproofing
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07190 - PRE-MOLDED MEMBRANE VAPOR BARRIER
1
01 - SUBMIITALS
A - Submit manufacturer's specifications and descriptive literature of each item for approval.
I
02 - MATERIALS
I
A - Pre-molded membrane to be reinforced 100% glass matts - inorganic waterproof-non-absorbent _ flexible and will not decay
or rot. Membrane to have a WVT Rating of 0.000 grains/hr.lsq.ft. Membrane to have polyethylene anti-stick film on both
top and bottom.
I
B - Pre-molded membrane to be 48" wide 8'-0" long and to weigh a minimum of75 pounds per 100 square feet.
C - Acceptable manufacturers:
I
1.
2.
3.
W. R. Meadows, Inc. - Vapor Seal
Celotex 1/8" Asphalt Elastiboard
Asphalt Products Oil Corporation APOC 1/8" asphalt impenneable 4' x 8' panels.
I
03 - MATERIAL HANDLING
I
A - All materials shall be delivered to job site in sealed containers bearing manufacturers original labels.
B - Storage of materials shall be in dry location and protected against moisture and damage.
I
04 - INST ALLA TION
I
A - Pre-molded membrane is to be placed in position in a "Dutch-lap" method and the joints sealed with a catalytic asphalt to
provide a flexible, pennanent monolithic vapor seal without voids or open seams. Catalytic asphalt shall consist of a
cut-back bonding asphalt or non-setting bitumen that provides a seal that will expand and contract without breaking bond.
Use to seal horizontal overlap joints and as a grout around soil piper, water inlets and steel rods. Application rates and
procedures shall be in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
1
B - Install pre-molded membrane under elevator pit slab and along elevator pit walls below grade.
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
1
I
I
acsb
(hbol- 11/2003)
07190-1
Pre-molded Membrane Vapor Barrier
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07210 - BUILDING INSULATION
OI-GENERAL
I
A - Shop Drawings and Samples
I
1. Shop drawings not required
2. Submit manufacturer's printed literature.
3. Samples required.
I
02 - MANUFACTURERS
A - The following named manufacturers and products will be acceptable:
I
1. Rigid Board Insulation (for cavity walls):
I
a) Styrofoam (Type SM) - Dow Chemical
b) Foamular - U C Industries, Inc.
c) Amofoam - Amoco Foam Products Co.
I
2. Insulating Blankets:
I
a) Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation
Flame-Resistant Foil-Faced Building Insulation
b) United States Gypsum
Thermafiber Flame-Resistant Blanket
I
3. Sound Attenuation Blankets:
a) Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation, Quiet Zone acoustical blankets
b) Certainteed Corp., fiberglass acoustical blankets
I
03 - MATERIALS
I
A - Cavity Wall Insulation - Shall be a closed cell polystyrene extruded foam Type SM insulation meeting Federal Specification
HH-I-524b, Type II, Class B, size 8'-0" x 1'-4" xl" thick. Insulation to have a minimum of 5.4 thermal resistance at 400
F. - 5.0 @ 750 F.
I
B - Insulating Blankets - Thermal and mineral fiber 6 1/4" thick unfaced minimum R Value R-I9, flame spread 10, smoke
developed lO, meet ASTM C665, Type 1 and ASTM EI36 (furnish and install above all ceilings, 24" wide x 96" long.
1
C - Acoustical Blankets - inorganic fiber glass batts, faced or unfaced, 3 1/2" thick X cavity height X stud spacing. Comply
with ASTM C 665 type II class C. furnish where shown on plans vertically in interior wall cavities.
04 - INST ALLA nON
I
A - Cavity Wall Insulation
1
1. At exterior cavity walls, install cavity wall insulation in cavity as shown on drawings. Install in accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions. Cut and fit boards for tight fitting joints with no gaps or holes. Broken pieces shall not be
installed
I
acsb
(hbo/12j2003)
07210-1
Building Insulation
1
I
I
I
B - Insulating Blankets (locations - above ceilings, both horizontal and vertical in walls and expansion joints - see drawings)
1. Install blanket insulation perpendicular to main tees of suspension system.
I
2. Install insulation with vapor barrier to room side. Lay in place with butted joints.
I
C - Acoustical Blankets-
I
1. Install blankets in vertical wall stud cavities continuous. Install in accordance with manufacturers printed instructions
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
07210-2
Building Insulation
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07250 - FIRESTOP CEMENT AND SAFING INSULATION
01 - SUBMITTALS
I
1
A - SHOP DRAWINGS - Not required
B - SAMPLES - Not required
C - MANUFACTURER'S LITERATURE - Submit literature showing conformance to specification, fire rating and installation
details.
I
02 - MANUFACTURERS
A - For the purpose of establishing type and quality of work under this subdivision, materials specified are based on United
States Gypsum, 101 South Wacker Drive, Chicago, Illinois 60606.
I
B - Equivalent products of the following manufacturers wiII be accepted.
I
1. G.E. Silicones, General Electric Company as marked by S.T. 1.
2. 3M Systems Corporation
3. Nelson Fire Stop
I
03 - MATERIAL
I
A - Firestop Cement for all holes or cracks shall be USG Firecode Durabond 90,
B - Safing Insulation shall be USG Thennafiber Safing Insulation, 4 PCF density mineral fiber semi-rigid,
04 - INSTALLATION
I
A - Firestop cement shall be installed in direct accordance with manufacturer's instructions enclosed with material.
B - All surfaces shall be clean and free of debris to insure bond to surface,
I
C - Firestop cement shall be used to seal floor and wall penetrations. Safing insulation shall be packed securely in opening or
crack before application ofFirestop Cement.
I
D - Size of hole for filler shall not exceed manufacturer's recommendations. Thickness of Firestop Cement shall be 1/2"
nummum.
I
E - Multiple pipes and conduit shall be separated to insure that cement will flow between making a complete seal.
05 - LOCATION
I
A - Seal all holes at all penetrations in rated walls, ceilings and floors with safing insulation and firestopping material for full
thickness of walls, ceilings or floors. Expansion joints to be filled with safing insulation and caulked with fire sealant at
the following:
I
I
END OF SECTION
1
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
07250-1
Firestop Cement and Safing Insulation
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 074 10- METAL ROOFING/GUTTERS AND DOWNSPOUTS/SOFFIT AND INSULATION
I
ai-GENERAL
I
A - Furnish all material, labor and equipment to complete installation of the metal roofmg system as shown on the drawings
and herein specified, include all insulation specified under this section, all copings, gutters, downspouts, soffits and
flashings contiguous with the roofing system Base metal must be certified, "MADE IN USA" (Note: some metal roof
required inside building in mall area, at administration area, and media center area).
I
B - Shop Drawings and Samples:
I
1. Furnish for approval submittal list and certificate of compliance for each material. List shall include brand name and
manufacturer of each material.
2. Manufacturer must submit letter stating that roofer is currently approved for the application of the roofing material
specified herein.
I
3. Submit manufacturer's printed specifications, literature and sample form of guarantee which will be issued at
completion of the project.
I
4. Submit shop drawings showing roof plans profiles, width details of forming, joining, fastening method for clips, trim-
flashing and accessories. Show details of weatherproofing at edges, tenninations and penetrations of metal roofing
work, gutter and downspout system, soffits, insulation, and continuous venting ridge.
I
5, Submit two 12" long by 24" wide sections of roof panels, with standard connection between panels indicating
complete standing seam panel with finished leg on each side with one clip on each leg attached to plywood. Show
color and finish as specified. Submit section of gutter, downspout, soffit, and ridge vent to show size, thickness and
color.
I
I
C - Warrantv:
I
1. A two-year unlimited warranty will be required from subcontractor installing metal roofing system, covering
installation and workmanship of metal roofing system, gutter and downspout system as well as related trim installed
by this subcontractor, from date of acceptance by architect.
I
2. A twenty-year "No Leak, No Dollar Limit" warranty, covering materials, finish and workmanship, will be required
from manufacturer of panel system approved by architect. A sample copy will be required with bid.
I
3. To be acceptable to architect, roof panel supplier must review plans and details prior to bid, and submit letter to
accompany bid of approval or required changes to obtain approval for twenty-year warranty. In addition, panel
manufactured must have a representative onjob site for at least one day when subcontractor startin!!, installation,
and one day at half-way point, and after completion, to do a final "walkdown" inspection with a letter stating
any problems or corrective actions needed for issuance ofrequired warranty.
I
4. Metal roofmg subcontractor must submit with his bid, a letter from metal roofmg manufacturer whose system he is
quoting, stating this subcontractor is approved to install that manufacturer's approved system requiring the twenty-
year "No Leak, No Dollar Limit" warranty.
I
5. Guarantees shall state that in no way does it nullify the protection available under the Federal UCC (Uniform
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
07410-1
Metal Roofmg/Gutters and Downspouts/Soffit and Insulation
I
I
I
Commercial Code).
1
6. Finish on metal roof shall be a twenty-year Kynar 500, with a twenty-year warranty from materials system
manufacturer. Color to match selected from mfg standard Kynar 500 finishes
I
7. Where Galvalume or galvanized is furnished, it is to have a twent)'-year substrate warranty that will COver the
materials against rupture, perforations and deterioration under normal atmospheric conditions.
I
D - Pre-Roofin!!: Conference:
I
1. A pre-roofing conference shall be held at the job side BEFORE roofing operations have begun. The architect,
roofing manufacturer's representative, general contractor and roofing contractor shall be present.
I
2. The roofing contractor shall state in writing, after the completion of preparation of the roof surface required
under this contract and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, he has accepted the deck
surface upon which to do his work.
02 - APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
I
A - Fabral - stand N seam with factol)' installed sealant.
B - AEP-SP AN-Span-Iok with factol)' installed sealant.
C - MBCI (Metal Building Components, Inc.) Battonlock with factol)' installed sealant.
I
03 - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
I
A - The metal roofing system shall meet U.L. 90 on 48" open spans.
B - All metal roofing trim,shall be 24 gauge steel or Galvalume sheet with same manufacturer and color as roofing system
covered under roof warranty.
C - Soffit panels shall be vented .032 aluminum color to be Kynar 500 (selected from standard colors), installed mechanically
in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. Attach panels to blocking a minimum of 12" O.c.
0- The Anchorage System shall be concealed. The panels will have a minimum 2" high seam. The panel width shall be a
minimum of 16" to a maximum of 18" wide, Soffit panel shall be a minimum of 12" wide.
E - System shall be mechanically seamed.
F - Panels to be flat between seams, Panels to be single unit design; no separate battens, single length.
G - Flashing, closure, trim, etc. - fabricate of same material, gauge and finish as panels.
H - Clips - clips to be concealed hold down and shall, in combination with panels, resist upward lift of200 lbs. per lineal foot
in any direction. '
I - Soffit Panels - Panels to be flush ventilated .032 aluminum, 12" wide and 3/8" deep minimum,
J - Soffit - Trim framing members to be standard aluminum wall mold, Selected from standard colors,
K - Sheet Materials - Base metal shall be 24 gauge, G-90 hot dipped galvanized, 40,000 PSI minimum yield strength, metal
certified as manufactured in USA or Galvalume coated with 55% aluminum, 43.4% zinc and 1.6% silicon hot dipped,
40,000 PSI minimum yield strength, metal certified as manufactured in USA.
L - Gutters, Downspouts, and leaderheads. System to include but not limited to
I. gutters shall be 200z. Copper, 8" half round and shall include all hardware and accessories for a complete
functioning system
2. Gutter end caps. 20 oz. Copper compatible with gutter
3. outlet. 20 oz. Copper size to gutter with 4" outlet to match downspout.
4. hanger hardware. Clip And Rod For Half Round Copper Gutter Includes .060 stainless steel clip, 5/16" stainless
steel rod and stainless steel nuts
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
07410-2
Metal Roofing/Gutters and DOWTlspouts/Soffit and Insulation
I
I
I
M - Accessories-
I
1. Fasteners, clips and trim metal to be furnished by approved panel manufacturer.
I
2. Roof Insulation:
a) rigid board insulation to be applied over entire metal deck and vapor barrier and shall be 1-1/2" min., FM class-l
poly-isosyanurate foam with non-asphaltic glass facing with a thermal resistance of not less than 10.0. insulation
shall meet federal spec 1972/1.2. products shall be approved by the metal roofmg manufacturer. 30# felt vapor
barrier shall be approved by the metal roofmg manufacturer.
1. 15095 Isocyanurate 1-1/2" r-1O RM class 1 meeting federal specification 1972/1.2. rigid board insulation
to have a minimum density of2 PCF and shall be installed in accordance with manufacturers written
instructions.
2. Clips and bearing plates to be installed simultaneously with fastener # 15into the metal deck. Legth to
be determined by the thickness of the insulation and depth of the metal deck. Fasteners shall extend
1/2" below metal deck.
I
I
I
b) The insulation shall be applied over the metal deck and under the roof panels with the vapor barrier facing
toward the interior of the building. All joints shall be tightly sealed in accordance with the building
manufacturer's standard recommendations.
I
c) To be installed by subcontractor of metal roofing.
I
3. bearing plates- provide as recommended by the manufacturer.
I
4. Fasteners - All self-tapping/ self-drilling fasteners, bolts, nuts, selflocking rivets, and other suitable fasteners shall
be designed to withstand specified wind loads.
a) use long-life fasteners for all interior and exterior metal roof system applications.
b) provide fasteners with a factory applied coating in a color to match metal roof system.
c) provide neoprene washers under heads of exposed fasteners.
d) locate and space all exposed in a true vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper torque settings to obtain
controlled uniform compression for a positive seal without rupturing the neoprene washer.
I
I
N - Fabrication:
I
1. Panel shall be continuous length with no splices or end laps.
2. All trim edges shall be hemmed - no bare or raw exposed edges are acceptable.
I
0- Finishes - Finish shall be a twenty-year Kynar 500, I-mill thick PYF 2 formulated with resistance to ultraviolet radiation
and chemical degradation with a twenty-year warranty on paint. Panel shall be striated. Color to match standard MBCI
300/Kynar 500 "Everglade".
04 - QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A - Manufacturer Qualifications:
I
1. Minimum of seven (7) years in manufacturing of Architectural Metal Roofmg/Siding/ Fascia/Gutters and Downspout
Systems.
B - Installer Qualifications:
I
1. Minimum offive (5) years experience in the installation of metal siding/fascia/gutters and downspout systems of
similar size and scope as envisioned by plans.
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
07410-3
Metal Roofing/Gutters and DO'WTISpouts/Soffit and Insulation
I
I
I
I
C - Installed in strict accordance with panel manufacturer's directions, instructions and approved shop drawings for meeting
U/L-90 on designed opened spans.
I
05 - PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A - Delivery of material shall be made only after suitable facilities for its storage and protection are available on the site.
I
B - Upon receipt of preformed metal panels, flat sheets, flashings and panel accessories, gutters and downspouts; installer shall
examine each shipment of damage and for completeness of the consignment.
I
C - Store material out of the weather in a clean, dry place. Qne end of each container should be slightly elevated to allow any
moisture to run off.
I
D - Panels and/or flashings with strippable film must not be stored in areas exposed to sunlight.
E - Care should be taken to prevent contact with any substance which may cause a discoloration in the finish during storage.
I
F - Store materials to provide ventilation and prevent bending, abrasion, or twisting.
G - Care should be taken to avoid gouging, scratching or denting.
I
H - Do not allow traffic on completed roof. Ifrequired, provide cushioned walk boards.
I
I - Protect installed products from damage caused by foreign objects and adjacent construction until completion of project.
J - Delivery, handling, and storage will be the responsibility of the contractor installing the metal roofing system.
I
K - Protect roofing from other trades.
L - All panels, gutters and downspouts shall be manufactured at plant of supplier. Job site forming is not acceptable.
I
06 - PREPARATION
A - Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work or ordering panels.
I
B - Install starters, edge strips, and any cleats before installing panels.
C-
Protect work in this section from damage.
I
NOTE: THIS METAL RQQF SYSTEM IS NOT DESIGNED TO SUPPQRT TRAFFIC, WHICH WOULD RESULT
IN DAMAGE TO THE ROOF PANELS AND EFFECT THE APPEARANCE OF THE SYSTEM. ANY DAMAGED
ROOF PANELS, TRIM, GUTTERS, DOWNSPOUTS OR SOFFITS, WILL BE REPLACED BEFORE ACCEPTANCE.
I
I
07 - EXECUTION
A - Connecting Work:
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
1. The applicator shall examine surfaces on which his work is to be applied, and shall notify the architect in writing if
not suitable to receive his work. Work on any surface shall constitute acceptance of this surface by the installer.
07410-4
Metal Roofing/Gutters and DownspoutslSoffit and Insulation
I
I
I
I
2. It will be the responsibility of the metal roofing subcontractor to inspect and accept the structural framing
andlor deck system, assuring it is free of rises or depressions which will cause distortions or excessive "oil
canning" of the roofing panels, and assuring it is evenly sloped.
I
3. Verify any roof openings, curbs, pipes, ducts or vents thru roof are solidly set and attached for proper flashing.
I
B - Field Measurements - Take field measurements to verify or supplement dimensions indicated prior to fabrication of metal
panels.
C - Installation:
I
1. Workmanship shall conform to standards set forth in the architectural sheet metal manual as published by SMACNA.
I
2. Panels should be installed in such a manner that, horizontal lines are true and level, and vertical lines are plumb.
3. All starter and edge flashings should be installed prior to panels.
I
4. Do not allow panels or trim to come into contact with dissimilar materials.
Any dissimilar metals in contact MUST be protected from galvanic action and covered under the roof warranty.
I
5. Install in strict accordance with approved manufacturer's directions and instructions of comply with and meet U/L-90
and a twenty-year "Leak Proof' warranty.
6. Standing Seam Roof - All trim and panels shall be installed using concealed fasteners.
I
7. Flashings:
I
a) Fit flashings tight in place with square corners.
b) Seal all metal joints.
c) All fasteners to be concealed unless exposed fasteners where necessary, have prior approval of architect.
d) All ridges shall be vented.
I
D - Touch Up - Only minor scratches and abrasions will be allowed to be touched up. Any other damaged material shall be
replaced.
I
E - Clean Up:
I
1. Leave work areas clean, free from grease, finger marks and stains.
2. Remove scrap and debris from surrounding areas and grounds.
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
07410-5
Metal Roofing/Gutters and DownspoutslSoffit and Insulation
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07600 - ALUMINUM COPING
01 - SUBMITTALS
A - Shop Drawings - Submit sepia and one print showing coping joint layout, details and manufacturer's literature.
B - Samples - Submit physical sample of coping section and joint cover assembly 1 '_0" long. Submit samples of
enamel finish.
02-MANUFACTURERS
A - Products of the following named manufacturers will be acceptable (custom widths to fit all parapet wall
conditions [NOTE: Guarantee requirement under 07410]):
1. W.P. Hickman Company - Perma Snap Coping
2. Peterson Aluminum Corp. Pac-Loc Coping
3. Construction Specialties - Colortrim "Snap Lok" Coping
4. Architectural Products - Snap Tight Coping
03 - MATERIALS
A - Aluminum Coping and Components
1. Aluminum Coping - Coping shall be .050 smooth finish aluminum of 505-H 14 Alloy.
2. Anchor plate shall be galvanized steel. Anchor to wall using Lok-Grip (expansion type) anchors.
3. Finish - Finish shall be 20 year fluoropolymer enamel equal to Kynar 500. Color to match custom sheet metal
roof color.
4. Prefabricated comer sections shall be used for all exterior and interior comers.
04 - WARRANTY
A - IS-year written umbrella warranty which states the coping cap will not blow off, leak or cause membrane failure,
even in wind conditions up to 110 miles per hour or the materials will be replaced or repaired no with dollar limit.
05 - INSTALLATION
A - Coping shall be installed with butt type joints 12'.0" o.C. with a cover plate at each joint. Hold.down anchoring
to be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to meet coping and roof Total Systems warranties
and shall be a minimum of 6'-0" o.c. Coping joints shall be laid out in a symmetrical pattern with cut sections
of varying lengths used where required for symmetry. All coping comers shall be mitered and continuously
heliarc welded prior to in-plant finishing. All coping cap to be manufactured to fit actual size of walls, whether
standard or not.
END OF SECTION
acsb
(hbol /2/2003)
07600-1
Aluminum Coping
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07650 - PLASTIC WALL FLASHING
I
01 - SUBMITTALS
I
A - Submit manufacturer's printed specifications and descriptive literature for approval.
I
I
I
02 - MATERIALS
A - Plastic wall flashing shall be 20 mil black PVC elastomeric flashing.
B - Mastic shall be furnished by manufacturer of plastic wall flashing for use with flashing.
03 - INSTALLATION
A - Install where indicated by details on drawings and where noted on drawings.
I
I
I
B - All surfaces to receive flashing shall be smooth. Flashing shall be laid in either a fresh bed of mortar above and below or
a trowel coat of mastic.
04 - MANUFACTURERS
A - Shall be one of the following:
I
I
I
1. Sandell - Nu-Flex Flashing (20 mil)
2. Wasco - Wascoseal (20 mil)
3. Nerva - Flex - Nervastral HD (20 mil)
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
07650-1
Plastic Wall Flashing
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
SECTION 07900 - CAULKING AND SEALANTS
OI-GENERAL
A - Shop Drawings and Samples
1. Shop drawings not required.
2. Submit manufacturer's printed literature for each type caulking or sealant.
3. Samples Required - Color cards of manufacturer's standard colors for color selection.
02 - MANUFACTURERS
A - The following named manufacturers and products conforming to Federal Specifications TT-C-00598C and TT-S-230a will
be acceptable:
Caulk
Sealant Sealant Firestop Sealant
1 Part 2 Part
Mono Dymeric X-Femo Fyre-Shield
Dynatrol I Dynatrol II AC-20 FTR
230
Polysulfide Polysulfide
3000
CS-240
1. Tremco
2. Pecora Corp
3. DAP
4. Dow Corning
5. Geocel
6. Hilti
03 - MA TERlALS
AC-20
ACR/Latex
with Silicone
1200
A - Caulking Compound - Shall be a non-staining compound composed of fillers, treated oil, pigments, and fibers which will
remain resilient, tough and elastic; will not become gwnmy to sticky; is resistant to oxidation, sun's rays, heat and weather.
B - Sealant - Shall be a non-staining material conforming to or exceeding Federal Specifications TT-S-230a with all container
labels bearing Federal Specification Identification Number.
C - Primer - Type as manufactured by manufacturer of sealant or caulking material for compound used.
D - Backing - Backing material shall be a non-absorbent, closed- cell polyethylene foam of high flexible and compressible
characteristics and compatible with either approved caulking or sealant materials.
E - Acoustical Sealant - Shall be higWy elastic for sound-rated partition and ceiling system. Sealant shall be non-hardening,
non-drying, non-bleeding. It shall be synthetic rubber based and of a consistency to conform to ASTM-D-217 with a brass
cone penetration equal to 290 to 310 tenths of a millimeter a 75 degree F., 150 grams total moving load in five seconds.
Sealant shall retain a firm but rubbery set after 52 days conditioning at 158 degrees F. Sealant shall have been acoustically
tested in a drywall or thick plaster partition system and shall have easy gunning characteristics at 20 degrees F.
F - Fire Sealant - Sealant shall be non-hardening, non-sag, paintable, non-drying, and non-bleeding. It shall have zero flame
spread, smoke contribution and fuel consumption high temperature smoke and fire resistant shield meeting ASTM E-8l4
(ULl479) IEEE 634 ASTM-84.
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
07900-1
Caulking and Sealants
I
I
G - Fire Rated Backing Materials - Backing shall have zero flame spread and smoke contribution and shall be expandable,
fireproof fibrous joint backing material to provide a complete 1 and 2 hour rated system when used in conjunction with
Firestop sealant.
I
04 - DELIVERY AND STQRAGE
I
A - Deliver materials to job site in their original unbroken containers, bearing manufacturer's name and brand designation and
date of manufacture.
B - Materials more than six (6) months old shall not be delivered to job site and none shall be used in the work.
I
C - Handle and store materials to prevent inclusion of foreign materials, or subjection to temperature exceeding 90 degrees F.
I
05 - PREP ARA nON OF SURFACES
I
A - Clean all openings or joints to be caulked or sealed making sure that they are dry before installing backing material, caulking
or sealant. All openings or joints shall be 3/4" deep unless shown otherwise on the drawings.
B - Pack all openings or joints 3/4" deep with above specified backing material. Install backing material so that depth of joint
will not exceed width of joint being caulked or sealed.
I
06 - APPLICATION
I
A - All joints 1/64" or greater in width or elsewhere shown on the drawings shall be caulked or sealed.
1. Caulking Compound - Use on interior work only. Fill all joints with caulking compound by use of pressure gun with
surfaces of joint tooled.
I
2. Sealant - For all exterior locations. Apply sealant under supervision and direction of a representative of approved
manufacturer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Apply sealant by gun with nozzle diameter to match
width of joint, making a smooth convex bead. All joints over 1/2" in width shall be sealed with 2-part sealant.
I
3. Sealing around all openings in masonry shall include entire perimeter of each opening, including exterior sills and
thresholds at door openings.
I
4. Sealant at exterior door thresholds shall be installed under interior edge of threshold. This will allow water entering
screw holes to weep out exterior edge.
I
5. Sealant shall be applied as it comes from container when temperature is between 75 and 120 degrees F. When working
in lower temperatures, product shall be warmed to 75 degrees F., or higher. Sealants shall not be done when temperature
is below 40 degrees F.
I
6. Acoustical Sealant Application (Equal to Tremco non-drying acoustical sealant - non-hardening, non-drying, and non-
bleeding to be used in Band, Choral, Auditorium, Technology Lab, Special Education Rooms, Gymnasium, and Media
Center to include all associated spaces and rooms):
I
a) Sealant can be hand or power gun applied.
I
b) A full bead of sealant shall be gunned into the joint or opening. A skin bead will not be tolerated.
c) The acoustical sealant may be gunned, or buttered, onto the metal or wood runner prior to their installation.
I
d) The backs of electrical boxes, pipes, etc. shall be buttered with acoustical sealant and the perimeter sealed.
I
e) Any excess sealant or smears shall be removed as work progresses.
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
07900-2
Caulking and Sealants
I
I
f) Use and apply acoustical sealant strictly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
g) Do not paint acoustical sealant.
I
7. Fire Sealant (equal to Tremco X-Ferno Fire Sealant Fyre-Shield, furnish Letter of Certification of Use):
a) Sealant can be hand or power-gun applied.
I
b) A full bead of sealant gunned into expansion joint or opening. No skin bead allowed.
c) Use in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
I
d) To be applied over safing material in both sides of all expansion and control joints occurring in corridors, lobby,
janitors' closets, electrical closets, storage rooms, mechanical rooms, and smoke and fire walls.
I
07 - COLORS
A - Caulking color shall be the following manufacturers standard color:
I
1. Off-white at all painted surfaces.
I
2. Color to match anodized aluminum windows.
B - Sealant color shall be the manufacturers standard color matching as close as possible to brick and anodized aluminum:
I
1. Color to match anodized aluminum and aluminum-colored painted surfaces.
2. Color to match three colors of face brick.
I
3. Aluminum at natural aluminum surfaces.
I
4. Color to match mortar.
08 - CLEANING
I
A - Clean all surfaces adjoining caulking or sealant joints of smears or other soiling resulting from operations.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
07900-3
Caulking and Sealants
I
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS. WINDOWS AND GLASS
SECTION 08100- METAL DOORS AND TRANSOM PANELS
01 - SUBMITTALS
I
A - Shop Drawings and Schedules - Submit 1 sepia and 1 print for all work of this section to Architect.
B - Samples - Submit: Hollow metal door and transom panel - section of typical door of sufficient size to show edge, top and
bottom construction, insulation, hinge reinforcement, face stiffening, comer of vision opening construction, glazing beads.
I
02 - MANUFACTURERS
I
A - Hollow Metal Doors; The following named manufacturers will be acceptable:
1. Steelcraft.- CE series
2. The Ceco Corporation - imperial series
3. Mesker Industries Inc
I
B - Hollow Metal 6 panel doors
1. Steelcraft- CE Series
2. The Ceco Corporation - imperial series
3. Mesker Industries Inc.
I
I
03 - MATERIALS
I
A - Sheet Steel - Best quality, stretcher leveled, cold rolled carbon steel conforming to ASTM A366, having clean, smooth
surface free of scale, pitting or other surface defects. Use hot-dipped galvanized (1.25 coating class), sheet steel, mill
phosphatized, for hollow metal work at exterior openings. Gauges shown or specified for sheet are "Manufacturer's
Standard" of the AISI.
I
B - Steel Plate Reinforcement - ASTM A283, Grade C.
I
C - Prime Paint - Rust inhibitive, alkali and acid resistant, prime paint conforming to Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
Paint Specifications No. 2-64 or No. 3-64.
04 - WORKMANSHIP
I
A - Finished work shall be uniform profile, rigid and strong, square and true, neat in appearance, smooth and free from dents,
waves, warps, buckles, open joints, tool marks and other defects.
I
B - Construction joints shall be flush, tight and welded their full length and ground off flush and smooth on exposed surfaces.
C - Lines and molded members shall be straight and true, arises and angles as sharp as practical for thickness involved, surfaces
flat, fastenings concealed, bends formed on press brake.
I
05 - HOLLOW METAL DOQRS AND TRANSOM PANELS
I
A - Door and Transom Panel Construction -
1. Hollow metal, full flush, 1-3/4" thick, with solid or cellular composite core material bonded to the face sheets.
2. hollow metal transom frames. Non-operable. 1-3/4" thick with solid core material. By door mfg. Glazing as shown
on plans
..
B - Face Sheet Minimum Gauges
Interior Doors over 36" wide
Interior Doors up to 36" wide
All exterior doors and transom panels
16 gauge sheet steel
18 gauge sheet steel
16 gauge sheet steel
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
08100-1
Metal Doors and Transom Panels
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C - Core Insulation - Sound deaden and insulate entire core of door, full height, width and thickness of door, with rigid inorganic
non-combustible material (solid). Urethane, polystyrene, honeycomb, or steel rib cores not acceptable.
D - Door Edges - No seams shall occur on the door face, but shall exist on the vertical door edge. Reinforce door comers to
prevent sagging or twisting of door. Close top and bottom edges of doors with continuous 16 gauge flush closing channel
at top and bottom edges; continuously welded. Provide openings in bottom closure of exterior doors to permit escape of
entrapped moisture.
E - Profiles of Edges of Doors - Single-acting swing doors - bevel both vertical edges 118" in 2".
F - Hardware Reinforcements
1. Reinforce, drill and tap doors at factory for fully templated hardware, in accord with approved hardware schedule and
templates provided by the hardware subcontractor. Where surface-mounted hardware is to be applied, doors shall have
reinforcing only; all drilling and tapping shall be done in the field by trade installing doors and finish hardware. All
reinforcements shall be concealed. Mortise lock edge doors not permitted for use with panic hardware.
2. Minimum thickness for hardware reinforcing shall be as follows:
a. For butt hinges, continuous hinges, push and pulls and exit bolts: 3/16" steel plate. At least 6" longer than butt or
continuous at butt and continuous hinges. Provide tubular stiffener between reinforcing plates for push and pulls.
b. For closers: 3/16" steel channel, at least 14" long.
c. For lock face, latch face and flush bolts: 12 gauge sheet steel (interior doors), 11 gauge sheet steel (exterior doors).
Lock and latch reinforcement at least 1-1/2" x 3".
d. For all other surface-mounted hardware: 12 gauge sheet steel
e. all exterior doors to receive full length continuous hinge
G - Labeled Doors and Transom Panels - Where shown on drawings, provide labeled doors and transom panels having
fIfe-resistance rating shown, constructed as tested and approved by Underwriters' Laboratories, with same fmish appearance
as specified for non-labeled doors. All doors occuning in I-hour rated walls to have 20-minute UL label attached. All doors
occuning in 2-hour rated walls to have "B" label (label attached). All smoke doors to have "C" label attached except where
occurring in 2-hour wall to be "B" label. See drawings for exact locations.
I. Underwriters' Laboratories
2. Factory Mutual
3. Wamock Hershey
H - Glazing - Metal glazing stops are to be mounted on the outside of exterior doors and on the secure side of interior doors,
and shall be non-removable. Doors shall be furnished with formed glazing stripes of the snap-in type (no screws allowed).
Glazing arrangements shall accommodate 114" thick glass or double glazed glass, see drawings.
06 - WOOD DOORS AND TRANSOM PANELS
See Section 08200
07 - PRIME PAINTING
A - Apply shop applied baked-on prime finish on all doors and transoms.
I. After assembly clean metal to remove all rust and scale, grease, oil, and rough spots. Fill all tool marks, surface
imperfections and other irregularities with metallic filler and sand to smooth even surface.
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
08100-2
Metal Doors and Transom Panels
I
I
2. Chemically treat all metal surfaces with phosphate compound to assure maximum paint adherence.
I
3. Apply two coats of specified primer (subparagraph 02, c) baked-on, on all metal surfaces 1 dry mil coat for a total dry
film thickness of 2.0 mils minimum.
I
4. Apply each coat evenly; bake at proper temperatures for time cycle recommended by paint manufacturer to secure
maximum protection.
07 - DELIVERY AND STORAGE
I
A - Deliver doors and other items of work of this section tagged and identified.
I
I
B - Store doors upright (not stacked flat) in area protected from weather and construction activities. The use of non-vented
plastic or canvas shelters which create a humidity chamber shall be avoided. To promote air circulation, a 1/4" space shall
be provided between the doors.
08 - INSTALLATION
A - Install doors in locations indicate.d complete with hardware. Check doors for proper tolerances and make adjustment.
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
08100-3
Metal Doors and Transom Panels
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS
SECTION 08110 - METAL DOOR FRAMES
OI-GENERAL
A - Shop Drawings and Samples
1. Submit shop drawings - 1 sepia and 1 print to Architect. Buck elevations are to identify all applicable doors.
2. Submit schedule and details for each frame required.
3. Samples - Submit: Hollow metal frame, comer section of typical frame of sufficient size to show corner joint, hinge
reinforcements, dust cover boxes, jamb anchors and floor anchors.
02 - MANUFACTURERS
A - The following named manufacturers and products will be acceptable:
1. Ceco Steel Products Corporation
2. Amweld
3. Fenestra, Inc.
4. Pioneer
5. Fire Door Corporation of Florida
6. Habersham Metal Products Co.
7. Mesker Industries, Inc.
8. Acme Steel Door Corp.
9. Republic Building Products
10. D & D Specialties, Inc.
11. HMMA A Division ofNAAMM
12. Bymoco Metal Fabricators, Inc.
13. Palmetto Metal Products Co.
03 - MATERIALS
A - Sheet Steel- Best quality, stretcher level, cold rolled carbon steel conforming to ASTM A366, having c1ean;smooth surface
free of scale, pitting or other surface defects. Use hot-dipped galvanized (1.25 coating class), sheet steel, mill phosphatized,
for hollow metal work at exterior openings. Gauges shown or specified for sheet steel are "Manufacturer's Standard" of the
AISI.
B - Steel Plate Reinforcement - ASTM A283, Grade C.
C - Prime Paint - Rust inhibitive, alkali and acid resistant, prime paint conforming to Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC)
Paint Specifications No. 2-64 or No. 3-64.
04 - WORKMANSHIP
A - Finished work shall be of uniform profile, rigid and strong, square and true, neat in appearance, smooth and free foml dents,
waves, warps buckles, open joints, tool marks and other defects.
B - Construction joints shall be flush, tight and welded their full length and ground off flush and smooth on exposed surfaces.
C - Lines and molded members shall be straight and true, arises and angles as sharp as practical for thickness involved, surfaces
flat, fastenings concealed, bends formed on press brake.
05 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A - Frame Construction - Welded combination type with integral trim, formed to profiles and sizes shown on drawings. Miter
and continuously weld comers of frames, grind welds smooth and flush.
acsb
hbo/12/2003)
08110-1
Metal Door Frames
I
I
IMetal Gauges of Frames - Thicknesses indicated are minimum.
Interior door frames up to 4' wide 16 ga. sheet steel
Ilnterior door frames wider than 4' 14 ga. sheet steel
All exterior door frames 14 ga. sheet steel
Vision opening frames up to 4' wide 16 ga. sheet steel
IVision opening frames wider than 4' 14 ga. sheet steel
Mullion & transom members of frame Same gauge as frame
Closures for frames Same gauge as frame
Sub-Frame Same gauge as frame
IAll Sound Door Frames 14 ga. sheet steel
- Floor Anchors - 14 gauge minimum sheet steel, welded inside each jamb, with two holes in anchor at each jamb for 3/8"
I floor anchorage fasteners. Where required, provide adjustable floor anchors, providing at least 2" height adjustment.
,_ Jamb Anchors - Adjustable jamb anchors, "Stirrup-and-Strap" type, 16 gauge minimum sheet steel, stirrups securely welded
I inside each jamb, straps corrugated and 2-112" x 10" minimum size. Space jamb anchors 24" o.C. with minimum number
on each jamb as follows:
Frames up to 7'-6" height
I Frames 7'-6" to 8'-0" height
Frames over 8'-0" height
3 anchors
4 anchors
4 anchors plus one additional anchor for each 2' or fraction thereof over 8'-0"
I Temporary Spreader - Provide removable temporary steel angle spreader attached to feet of both jambs to serve as a brace
during shipping and handling. Spreaders to be removed after frames are anchored and built into adjacent work.
- Head Reinforcing - Reinforce heads of frame wider than 3'-6" with 12 gauge minimum steel angles or channel, full width
I of frame, factory welded inside frame. Reinforcing not to act as lintel or load-carrying member.
I - Hardware Reinforcements
11.
Reinforce, drill and tap frames at the factory for fully templated hardware, in accord with approved hardware schedule
and templates provided by the hardware subcontractor. Where surface-mounted hardware is to be applied, frames shall
have reinforcing only; all drilling and tapping shall be done in the field by trade installing doors and finish hardware.
All reinforcements shall be concealed.
I
Minimum thickness for hardware reinforcing shall be as follows:
2.
I a.
For butt and continuous hinges - 3/16" steel plate, 1-1/4" x 10" minimum size for butt hinges and same size as continuous
hinges.
lb. For closers & stops - 3/16" steel plate (on both sides of frame so closers, holders or stops can be applied to either side
of frame)
c. For strikes - 12 gauge sheet steel
d. For flush bolts - 12 gauge sheet steel
Ie. Dust cover boxes or mortar guards - 24 gauge sheet steel
f. For all other surface mounted hardware - 12 gauge sheet steel
I
Door Stops - Minimum depth of 5/8". Provide holes in door stops for silencers and install plastic plugs in silencer holes
to keep holes clear during installation.
Mullions and Transom Bars - Closed tubular shapes having no visible seams or joints, same gauge as frame. Reinforce
I mullions and transom bars with 12 gauge minimum steel channels, factory welded inside mullion or transom bar. All joints
uL
.~u
L~ 12/2003)
I' ,
08110-2
Metal Door Frames
I
I
I
between faces of abutting members shall be continuously welded, ground and finished smooth.
I
J - Glass Moldings and Stops - Fixed moldings integrally formed as part of frame. Loose stops, 18 gauge minimum sheet steel,
with mitered corners, on non-security side of frame, secured to frame with countersunk cadmium or zinc-coated Jackson
head machine screws uniformly spaced 9" o.c. maximum.
I
K - Labeled Frames - Where frre-rated openings shown on drawings, provide labeled frames having frre-resistance rating shown,
constructed as tested and approved by Underwriters Laboratories, with same finished appearance as specified for
non-labeled hollow metal frames, with label affixed to frame. All corridor and lobby door and transom panels occurring
in I-hour rated walls are to have a 20-minute label attached. All door and transom frames occurring in 2-hour rated walls
to have a "B" label attached. All door frames occurring in smoke/frre walls to have "c" label attached unless they occur
in 2-hour walls then they are to have "B" label attached. See drawings for frame label requirements for all door and transom
frames. The following labels are acceptable:
I
I
1. Underwriters' Laboratories
2. Factory Mutual
3. Warnock Hershey
I
06 - PRIME PAINTING
I
A - Apply shop applied baked-on prime fmish on all frames.
I
1. After assembly clean metal to remove all rust and scale, grease, oil, and rough spots. Fill all tool marks, surface
imperfections and other irregularities with metallic filler and sand to smooth, even surfaces.
2. Chemically treat all metal surfaces with phosphate compound to assure maximum paint adherence.
3. Apply two coats of specified primer (subparagraph 02) baked-on, on all metal surfaces 1 dry mil coat for a total dry film
thickness of 2.0 mils minimum.
4. Apply each coat evenly; bake at proper temperatures for time cycle recommended by paint manufacturer to secure
maximum protection.
I
07 - DELIVERY AND STORAGE
I
A - Delivery - Deliver frames and other items of work of this section tagged and identified.
B - Stora!!,e - Store frames upright (not stacked flat) in area protected from weather and construction activities.
I
08 - INST ALLA nON OF HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
I
A - Set hollow metal frames in locations indicated, plumb, true and in proper relation to floors, walls and partitions. Brace
frames until adjacent masonry work is complete.
B - Frames shall be set so that clearances between door and frames and between door and floor shall be unifonn, in accordance
with drawings, specifications and approved shop drawings.
C - Frames shall be set on concrete slab (unless noted otherwise on drawings) anchor frame to floor slab with expansion bolts.
D _ Check and adjust each frame for proper position, plumbness, trueness, clearances, etc. before frames are built into place.
Remove temporary braces and temporary spreaders when adjacent masonry work is complete.
E _ Immediately after installation, repair and touch-up all damaged or rusted areas of factory primed frames with approved
rust-inhibitive primer.
F - Frames in masonry walls shall be filled with mortar as the wall is laid up.
I
I
I
G - Frames shall be erected in accordance with SID-I05 Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.
END OF SECTION
I
I
acsb
hbo/12/2003)
08110-3
Metal Door Frames
I
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS
SECTION 08200 - WOOD DOORS AND TRANSOM PANELS
I
01 - SUBMITTALS
A - Shop Drawings and Samples
I
1. Submit shop drawings on: Wood Doors and Panels - 1 sepia and 1 print to architect.
B - Samples Required - None
I
C - Guarantee - Wood doors, wood transom panels, and wood panels shall be e:uaranteed for life of installation from date
of the installation of the project against defects in material and workmanship that will render the doors as unsuitable for the
purpose for which they were manufactured. If any door proved defective in material or workmanship within the guaranteed
period, to include:
I
I
I. De-lamination in any degree.
2. Warp or twist of 1/4" or more in any 3'-6" x 7'-0" section ofa door.
3. Telegraphing of any part of core assembly through face to cause surface variation of 1/1 00" or more in a 3" span.
4. Any defect which may, in any way, impair or affect performance of the door for the purpose which it is intended. Door
shall be replaced under this warranty and shall include hanging, installation of hardware and finishing without any
additional charges to the Owner.
I
02 - MANUFACTURERS
I
A - The following named manufacturers and products are subject to meeting the requirements for door construction procedures
and warranties set forth in this specification, will be acceptable:
I
1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc., Algoma, Wisconsin
2. Egger Industries, Two Rivers, Wisconsin
3. Fenestra, Inc.
4. Ideal Wood Products, Inc.
I
03 - MATERIALS
I
A - Particle Core Wood Doors, Wood Transoms, Wood Panels
I
1. General Requirements:
I
a. All wood doors, wood transom panels, wood panels, and wood sound doors shall meet or exceed NWMA Industry
Standard I.S. 1-83 series and the requirements of AWl Quality Standards for Premium Grade doors, Section 1300.
b. The doors and panels final thickness shall be 1 3/4", as covered in above standards.
c. Wood used in the construction of the doors and panels shall be thoroughly seasoned, kiln-dried wood with a
moisture content not less than 5% and not greater than 8%.
d. Construction for all transoms and wood panels shall be the same as for doors.
e. Construction for all doors and panels as shown on the drawings required to be rated shall meet UL requirements
and shall have appropriate label affixed thereto.
I
I
2. Core Construction: Solid core shall be Timblend, Novoply or equal core meeting ANSI 208.1-1 L 1.
I
3. Edge Bands: The stile edge bands shall be a 2-ply edge band laminated to the core on four (4) sides per SWI l300-G-3
Spec. Symbol PC-5, PC-7 or PC-HPL with Type II highly water-resistant glue, using the high frequency method. The
outer stile shall be a species compatible with the face. Two-ply rails of mill-option hardwoods shall be used. Stiles and
rails must measure a minimum of 1 3/8" after trimming.
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
08200-1
Wood Doors and Transom Panels
I
I
I
4. Cross Bands: Cross bands shall be thoroughly over-dried hardwoods, 1/16" minimum thickness extending the full ",;dth
of the door and laid with the grain at right angles to the face veneers.
5. Adhesives: Cross bands and faces shall be laminated to the cores with Type I, Melamine fortified urea glue, by the hot
plate method.
I
6. Cutouts for Lights and Louvers:
I
a. Edge of opening shall be no nearer than 5" to any edge or top of the door, and no nearer than 8" above the bottom
of the door. where kick plates occur, bottom of opening shall be 2" above kickplate.
b. There shall not be less than 5" between any light and/or louver, cutouts for locks, closers, or other hardware
cutouts.
c. Cutout areas (louver area and/or glass area) shall not exceed 40% of the area of the door, and neither shall the
cutouts exceed one-half the height of the door.
I
I
7. Face Veneers:
I
a. Interior Wood Door, and Wood Panels - Face veneer for all doors shall be premium grade rotary cut, white birch
of uniform color and shall have a minimum thickness of 1/50 after factory sanding.
b. Face veneers shall meet specifications per AWl 200-S-7 or ANSVHPMA HP 1983 Table 2.
I
B - Transom Panels - Wood transom panels on the drawings shall be 1 3/4" thick face veneer to match door Provide UL label
attached where called for on the drawings on doors, transom panels, and wall panels.
I
C - Labeled Doors and Wood Panels - Where shown on drawings, provide labeled doors and panels having fire resistance rating
shown, constructed as tested and approved by Underwriters Laboratories with same fmish appearance as non-labeled doors.
All corridor doors and panels to be U.L. rated with labels attached to doors, panels and door frames. The following labels
are acceptable:
I
1. Underwriters Laboratory
2. Warnock Hersey
3. Factory Mutual
I
04 - STORAGE
I
A - Doors must be stored, finished, hung and maintained per manufacturer's recommendations set forth in their warranty.
I
B - Contractor shall use all means necessary to protect doors from damage prior to, during, and after installation. All damaged
doors shall be repaired or replaced by the contractor at no cost to the Owner.
I
C - Doors shaU be paUetized at factory in stacks of no more than 30 doors per pallet. Door edges shall be protected with heavy
corner guards.
05 - INSTALLATION
I
A - Accurately fit and install doors in locations shown; provide sufficient tolerances to prevent binding or excessive margins
during temperature change. Ease edges of doors on 1/8" radius. Fit doors with hardware specified in Division 8; install in
accordance with requirements therein. See drawings for doors requiring special sound seals and drop seals.
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
08200-2
Wood Doors and Transom Panels
I
I
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS, WINDOWS AND GLASS
SECTION 08305 - METAL ACCESS PANELS
I
01-GENERAL
A - Shop Drawings - not required.
I
B - Samples - not required.
C - Manufacturer's literature - submit for all items.
I
02 - MANUFACTURERS
I
I
A - The following manufacturers are approved:
1. J&L
2. Milcor
3. Nystrom
4. Larsen
I
03 - MATERIALS
I
A - Metal ceiling access panels to be flush-mounted HGFD steel 14 gauge steel frame and door - continuous hinge with lock,
automatic closing. Gray baked enamel prime coat. Paint under painting section of the specifications. Furnish two keys, size
of access panels to be 18" x 18" and 24" x 24". Where access panel is called for to be fire rated type, they are to be 1 1/2
hour "B" U.L. label (see drawings for size, location, and types.
I
B - Metal wall access panels to be flush-mounted 14 ga. steel trim being 1 1/2" wide. Return frame 18 ga. having a depth of I
3/4". Hinges to be fully concealed piano type. Latch to be flush steel cam operated. Finish to be electrostatically applied
baked gray prime coat. Provide four masonry anchor straps each door. Provide cylinder locks - keyed alike, two keys per
lock. Size to be 12" x 18", see drawings for locations. Where panels are called for to be fire rated, they are to be I 112 hour
"B" U.L. label (see drawings for locations).
I
I
04 - INSTALLATION
A - Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at locations shown on drawings. Provide all above ceiling necessary
furring required to install ceiling access panels.
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
08305-1
Metal Access Panels
I
I
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS. WINDOWS AND GLASS
SECTIQN 08351 - FQLDING DOORS
I
01 - SUBMITTALS
I
A - Shop Drawings - I sepia and I print to Architect.
B - Samples - Fabric samples and color selection chart required to be submitted.
C - Manufacturer's Literature - Submit manufacturer's printed instructions of all materials used in this section.
02 - MANUFACTURERS
I
A - For the purpose of designating type and quality of work under this subdivision, materials specified are based on Modernfold
Soundmaster Door 8.
I
B - Equivalent products of the following manufacturers will be acceptable:
I
1. Holcomb & Hoke - Folddoor Soundguard x 16
2. Won-Door Corporation
3. Rampart Partitions, Inc.
03 - MATERIALS
I
A - Soundmaster 8 (Door No. 167 between Home EconomicslFood Room 164 and Home EconomicslClothing Room 165;
Door No. 405 between Media Center Conference Room No.1 and 2; Room 280, Door 194A between Rooms 194 and
195; Door 202A between Rooms 202 and 203; Doors 274A between Rooms 273 and 274; Door 272A between Rooms 271
and 272 (see drawings for sizes).
I
I
1. Sound Transmission Class - STC of 39 obtained per ASTM E413-70T.
I
2. Construction - True pantograph action consisting of steel hinge plates connected vertically by 3/16" steel rods welded
in place. Over 10'-0" double-truss row 8-112" x 4-3/4" at top, single row at bottom, and intermediate rows
approximately 42" on center.
I
3. Sound Insulation - 22 gauge V-grooved steel panels and heavy vinyl flame-resistant acoustical membrane. Each panel
attached to frame with 4 steel leaf fasteners.
4. Perimeter Seal - Pairs of flexible sealing sweep strips at top and bottom. Vertical male lead post molding to seal into
polyurethane foam-lined female sound channel.
I
5. Hardware - Satin chrome blade-type hand pulls with latches, shall be an integral part of the pull. Hook bolts shall not
protrude from lead post. Operable walls over 5'-11" wide and over 8'-0" high shall have pull-in latches with retracting
hookbolt to effect final closure.
I
6. Track and Trolley System - Partitions to 33'-2" wide x 10'-0" high shall have Number 5, 1-1/4" x 1-114" aluminum track
with nylon-tired ball-bearing trolleys. Partitions to 33'-2" wide and between 10'-0" and 14'-0" high shall have Number
6, 1-112" x 1-3/4" x 14 gauge roll-formed steel track with flanged ball-bearing trolleys. Partitions over 33'-2" wide or
14'-0" high shall have Number 7,2" x 2-3/4" x 11 gauge roll-formed steel track with 4-wheel steel-flanged ball-bearing
trolleys. All tracks shall be self-cleaning and have positive splice alignment feature.
I
I
7. Ceiling Contract Guard - Shall be furnished to protect fmished ceiling. Installation shall be flush with ceilings line,
with no exposed fastenings.
I
8. Lead and Back Posts - 16 gauge steel up to 10'-0" high; 14 gauge 10'-0" to 17'-0".
I
9. Air Release System - Air trapped within the operable wall to be release during entire stacking operation through 3/8"
diameter holes, which comprise a minimum of 5% of lead post face area.
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
I
08351-1
Folding Doors
I
I
10. Stacking Space - Approximately 2-1/8" per lineal foot plus posts, straight doors only. Consult factory for exact
dimensions.
I
11. Cover Assembly
I
a. Tedlar-Clad Glass-Mesh: 36 ounces per lineal yard 54" wide, consisting of polyvinyl chloride polymer on woven glass
fabric backing, wear surface shall be a laminate of DuPont "Tedlar" for stain resistance.
b. Tear Strength: Shall exceed maximum capacity of test instnunent, when tested per Federal Standard 191 Method 5132.
I
c. Tensile Strength: Shall be no less than 311 pounds x 251 pounds (warp x fill) when tested according to Federal
Standard 191 Method 5100.
I
d. Shrinkage: Negligible.
I
e. Color Stability: There shall be no appreciable discoloration or stiffening of the material when exposed in a standard
Atlas Fade-O-Meter for 200 hours at 110 degrees F., per Federal Standard 191 Method 5660.
I
f. Abrasion: No base fabric will be exposed when the material is subjected to 10,000 cycles on the Taber Abrasion
Machine using CS 10 wheels with a 1000 gram load on each ann, per Federal Standard 191 Method 5306.
g. Cold Cracking: The fabric shall not show any evidence of cracking when exposed to 20 degrees F. for 4 hours per
Federal Standard 191 Method 5874.
I
h. Flame Resistance: The fabric shall have a Flame Spread Rate no greater than 15 when tested per ASTM E84.
Glass-Mesh shall further comply with the following: New York Board of Standards and Appeals; Rules for Flameproof
Materials, Fire Department, City of Boston; National Fire Protection Association; Ohio Building Code Section
1203.34. Provide Certificate of Compliance.
I
I
12. Guarantee - The installation shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year against defects in material and
workmanship.
04 - INST ALLA TION
I
A - Partition shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions by manufacturer's representative
experienced in the erection of folding partitions. Support for track shall be inspected prior to installation. Starting of
installation indicates acceptance of superstructure.
I
B - Partition shall be installed plumb and true. All seals shall fit tight to wall, floor and ceiling when partition is in the closed
position.
I
C - Guarantee - The installation shall be guaranteed for a period of one year against defects in materials and workmanship.
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
I
08351-2
Folding Doors
I
I
SECTION 08575
CLAD WOOD DOUBLE HUNG WINDOW
I
PART 1 GENERAL
I
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Clad wood double hung window complete with hardware, glazing, weather strip, insect screen, muntin
grills, jamb extension, and standard or specified anchors, trim, attachments, and accessories.
I
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
I
I
A. Section 0133o-Submittal Procedures: Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.
B. Section 0 1 63o-Product Substitution Procedures.
C. Section OI65o-Product Delivery.
I
D. Section 01 660-Storage and Handling Requirements.
E. Section 0620o-Millwork: Wood trim other than furnished by window manufacture.
I
F. Section 0990o-Paints and Coatings: Paint or stain other than factory applied finish.
1.3 REFERENCES
I
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. E 283-91: Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
and Doors.
2. E 330-90: Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtains Walls, and
Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.
3. E 547-93: Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and
Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential.
4. E 774-92: Specification for Sealed Insulated Glass Units.
5. C 1036-91: Standard Specification for Flat Glass.
I
I
I
B. American National Standards Institute I National Wood Window and Door Association (ANSI /NWWDA):
1. I.S.2-93: Industry Standard for Wood Windows.
2. LS.4-94: Industry Standard for Water Repellent Preservative Treatment for Millwork.
I
I
C. Window and Door Manufacturers Association (WMDA): 101 I LS.2-93 WDMA Hallmark Certification
Program.
D. Insulating Glass Manufactures Association I Insulating Glass Certification Council (SIGMA IIGCC).
I
E. American Architectural Manufactures Association (AAMA): 613-97 Voluntary Performance
Requirements and Test Procedures for Organic Coatings on Plastic Profiles.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
I
I
A. Design and Performance Requirements:
1. Window Units shall be designed to comply with ANSI I NWWDA I.S.2-93, DP30.
2. Air leakage shall not exceed the following when tested at 1.57 psf according to ASTM E 283-91: 0.25
cfrn per square foot of frame].
I
acsb
(hbo//2/2003)
08575 - 1
Clad Wood Double-hung Window
I
I
3. No water penetration shall occur when units are tested at the following pressure according to ASTM E
547-93: 4.5 psf.
4. Window assembly shall withstand the following positive or negative uniform static air pressure
difference without damage when tested according to ASTM E 330-90: 45 psf.
I
I
1.5 SUBMITTALS
I
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01330.
8. Product Data: Submit catalog data under provisions of Section 01330.
I
C. Samples:
1. Submit corner section under provisions of Section 01330.
2. Include glazing system, quality of construction, and specified finish.
I
D. Quality Control Submittals: Certificates: Submit manufacture's certifications indicating compliance with
specified performance and design requirements under provisions of Section 01330.
I
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A. Regulatory Requirements: Emergency Egress or Rescue: Comply with requirements for sleeping units of
[BOCA Basic Building Code] [Southern Building Code] [Uniform Building Code] [ ].
1.7 DELIVERY
I
A. Comply with provisions of Section 01650.
B. Deliver in original packaging and protect from weather.
I
1.8 STORAGE AND HANDLING
I
A. Prime or seal wood surfaces, including surface to be concealed by wall construction, if more than thirty (30)
days will expire between delivery and installation.
I
B. Store window units in an upright position in a clean and dry storage area above ground and protect from
weather under provisions of Section 01660.
1.9 WARRANTY
I
A. Windows shall be warranted to be free from defects in manufacturing, materials, and workmanship for a
period of ten (10) years from purchase date.
I
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
I
A. Description: Ultrex™ Double Hung [and related stationary units] as manufactured by Integrity Windows
and Doors, Fargo, North Dakota. Sash tilt to interior for cleaning or removal.
I
B. Acceptable manufacturers:
1. Andersen Series 400 Double Hung
2. Pella Clad Architectural Series Double Hung
I
2.2 ULTREX CLAD WOOD DOUBLE HUNG MATERIALS
I
acsb
(hboI12/2003
08575-2
Clad Wood Double-hung Window
I
I
A. Frame: Interior: Clear pine interior surfaces, kiln dried to a moisture content no greater than twelve (12)
percent at the time of fabrication. Water repellent preservative treated in accordance with ANSI I
NWWDA I.SA-94. Exterior: Fiberglass reinforced plastic, 0.080 inch (2 mm) thick. Frame width: 4-9/16
inches (116 mm).
I
I
B. Sash: Clear pine interior surfaces, kiln dried to a moisture content no greater than twelve (12) percent at the
time of fabrication. Water repellent preservative treated in accordance with ANSI I NWWDA I.SA-94.
Exterior: Pultruded reinforced fiberglass, 0.070 inch (1.8 mm) thick. Composite sash thickness: 1-9/16
inches (40 mm).
I
C. Glazing: Select quality complying with ASTM C 1036-91. Insulating glass SIGMNIGCC certified to
performance level CBA when tested in accordance with ASTM E 774-92.
1. Glazing method: 3/4 inch (19 mm) Insulated glass.
2. Glass type: Low E II - Argon gas.
3. Glazing seal: Silicone bedding at exterior and interior.
I
I
D. Finish:
1. Exterior: Factory baked on acrylic urethane. Color: [White] [Pebble gray].
2. Interior: Treated bare wood.
I
I
E. Hardware:
1. Balance System: Coil spring block and tackle with nylon cord and glass filled nylon shoe and steel
locking clutch.
2. Jamb Track: Vinyl extrusion. Color: Beige.
3. Lock: High pressure zinc die-cast cam lock and keeper. Finish: Phosphate coated and electrostatically
painted. Color: Almond frost.
4. Tilt latches: Spring loaded latches for release of sash located at checkrail. Color: Almond frost.
I
I
F. Weather strip: Frame, sash stiles, and meeting rails, sealed with flexible bulb gasket. Bottom and top rails
sealed with flexible leaf gasket.
I
G. Jamb Extension: Furnish jamb extension [6-9/16 (167 mm) factory installed [loose]] [[5-5/16 (135 mm)] [6-
13/16 (160 mm)] loose]). Finish: Bare wood.
I
H. Head I Seat Board: Factory installed [head board] [seat board] for wall thickness indicated or required.
Finish: Match interior finish.
I
I. Insect Screens: Factory installed full screen. Screen mesh, 18 by 16: Charcoal fiberglass. Aluminum frame
finish: [White] [Pebble gray).
I
J. Removable Grilles: 3/4 by 15/32 inch (19 mm by 12 mm) pine. Pattem: Rectangular. Finish: Treated bare
wood.
K. Grilles between the glass: 11/16 by 7/32 inch (17 mm by 6 mm) profiled aluminum spacer between glass
panes. Pattern: Rectangular. Finish: White.
I
2.3 ACCESSORIES AND TRIM
I
A. Installation Accessories:
1. Factory installed vinyl nailing fin I drip cap at head and side jambs.
2. Installation brackets: Brackets for [4-9/16 inch (116 mm)] [6-9/16 inch 167 mm) jambs.
3. Mullion kit: Mullion kit for field assembly of units. Kit includes: Instructions, aluminum pins, filler
blocks, wood mullion tie, sealant foam tape, interior mullion trim, steel mull tee, #7x 1-5/8" screws,
and nailing fin connectors.
I
I
acsb
(hbol 12/2003
08575-3
Clad Wood Double-hung Window
I
I
PART 3 EXECUTION
I
3.1 EXAMINATION
I
A. Verification of Conditions: Before Installation, verify openings are plumb, square, and of proper dimension
as required in Section 01710. Report frame defects or unsuitable conditions to the General Contractor
before proceeding.
I
B. Acceptance of Conditions: Beginning of installation confirms acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
I
A. Comply with Section 01730.
B. Assemble and install window unit according to manufacturer's instructions and reviewed shop drawings.
I
C. Install sealant and related backing materials at perimeter of unit or assembly in accordance with Section
07920 Joint Sealants. Do not use expansive foam sealant.
I
D. Install accessory items as required.
I
3.3 CLEANING
A. Remove visible labels and adhesive residue according to manufactme's instructions.
I
B. Leave windows and glass in a clean condition. Final cleaning as required in Section 01740.
I
3.4 PRQTECTING INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION
A. Comply with Section 01760.
I
B. Protect windows from damage by chemicals, solvents, paint, or other construction operations that may
cause damage.
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
acsb
(hbol/2/2003
08575-4
Clad Wood Double-hung Window
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 08710
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Hardware for flush wood doors.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06410 - Custom Casework: Cabinet hardware.
B. Section 08112 - Steel Frames.
C. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors.
D. Section 10440 - Signs.
1.03 REFERENCES
A. A WI (Architectural Woodwork Institute) - Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards.
B. BHMA (Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association) - A 156 series.
C. D HI (Door and Hardware Institute) - A 115 series.
D. DHI (Door and Hardware Institute) - WDHSJ - Architectural Hardware for Wood
Flush Doors.
E. NFP A 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
F. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
G. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
H. UL lOB - Safety Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
1.04 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW
A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, schedules,
catalog cuts, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.
2. Submit manufacturer's templates to door and frame manufacturers.
1.05 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION
A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.
B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter
conditions requiring special attention.
1.06 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Procedures for submittals.
acsb
(hbol 12/2003
08710-1
Door Hardware
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of installed cylinders and their
master key code.
C. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and
inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.
D. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from
hardware supplier.
E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in
Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.
1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with the following requirements:
1. AWL
2. BHMA Al56 series.
3. DHI - AIlS series.
4. DHI - WDHS.3.
5. NFPA 80.
6. NFPA 101.
7. NFPA 252.
8. UL lOB.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products
specified in this section with minimum three years experience.
C. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial
door hardware with three years experience
D. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC)
to assist in the work of this section.
1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Transport, handle, store, and protect
products.
B. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door
opening code to match hardware schedule.
1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings.
B. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or
fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware and recessed items.
acsb
(hbo//2/2003
08710-2
Door Hardware
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and
expeditious manner.
D. Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during the course of the Work.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for door closers.
1.11 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS
A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
B. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware
component.
C. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component
manufacturer.
1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout.
B. Provide ten extra key lock cylinders for each master keyed group.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. Butt Hinges: Hager, Stanley (ST), and McKinney.
B. Continuous Hinges: Roton (RO).
C. Mortise Locks: Falcon (only).
D. Rim, Mortise Cylinders: Falcon (only).
E. Electric Strikes: Von Duprin (VON), and Folger Adams.
F. Exit Devices: Von Duprin (VON), and Precision.
G. Closers: LCN, Norton.
H. Weatherstripping: Pemko (P), Hager, and National Guard.
1. Kick Plates, Wall Stops, etc.: Rockwood (RW), Trimco, and Hager.
J. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment.
2.02 KEYING
A. Door Locks: Master keyed to the existing Falcon key system.
B. Supply keys in the following quantities:
1. 6 master keys.
2. 3 change keys for each lock.
acsb
(Mot/l/l003
08710-3
Door Hardware
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.03 KEY CABINET
A. Cabinet Construction: Sheet steel construction, piano hinged door with lock.
B. Cabinet Size: Size for project keys plus 10 percent growth.
C. Horizontal metal strips for key hook labeling with clear plastic strip cover over labels.
D. Finish: Baked enamel, finish, color as selected.
E. Surface mount key cabinet as directed by architect.
2.04 FINISHES
A. Finishes: Identified in Schedule at end of section.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions before
starting work.
B. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated
on shop drawings.
c. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and is of the correct
characteristics.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item,
refer to:
1. Section 08111.
2. DHI WDMS.3.
3. DHI AIlS Series.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01400 - Quality: Field inspection, testing, and adjusting.
B. Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect installation and certify that hardware
and installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and as specified.
3.04 ADJUSTING
A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Adjusting installed work.
B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.
acsb
(hboI12/2003
08710-4
Door Hardware
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Protecting installed work.
B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.
Door Hardware Schedule:
acsb
(Mol /2/2003
08710-5
Door Hardware
I
I
DIVISION 8 - DOORS. WINDOWS AND GLASS
SECTION 08800 - GLASS AND GLAZING
01 - SUBMITTALS
I
A - Shop Drawings and Samples
I
1. Shop drawings not required.
2. Submit manufacturer's printed literature for each glass type to be used.
3. Submit samples of each glass type to be used.
I
02 - MANUFACTURERS
A - Products of the following named manufacturers will be acceptable:
I
1. PPG Industries
2. Mississippi Glass Company
3. Libby-Owens Ford
4. General Electric Company
I
03 - MATERIALS
I
A - Glass - All glass shall have labels indicating manufacturer and grade; do not remove until approved. Type, grade, color,
thickness and location for all glass shall be as noted on the drawings or specified herein.
I
~ - Insulating Glass shall be used for all exterior frames and exterior wall panels above door level. Insulating glass
shall consist of two layers of clear I;''' plate glass separated by an air space and utilizing desiccant metal spaces, all meeting
the requirements of ASTM E-773 and E-774 certified to level CBA.
I
~ - 114" Misco Polished Clear Wire Glass by Mississippi Glass Company, Pittsburgh Plate Glass Company or
Libby-Owens Ford.
I
~ - 1/4" clear polished Lexan Marguard by General Electric Company.
I
~ - 114" tempered herculite clear polished plate by Pittsburgh Plate Glass Company, Mississippi Glass Company or
Libby-Owens Ford.
04 - GLAZING AND SEALING MATERIALS
I
A - Glazing Clips - Stainless steel and as recommended by manufacturers of glass, framing and glazing compounds or sealants.
I
B - Setting Blocks - Neoprene blocks, 70 to 90 Shore A Durometer hardness.
C - Spacers - Neoprene blocks, 40 to 50 Shore A Durometer hardness, 3" long, self-adhesive on one face only.
I
D - Glazing Gaskets - Extruded neoprene glazing gaskets meeting ASTM G502.
E - Glazing Compound - Comply with Federal Specifications TTP-78 1.
I
05 - INSTALLATION
A - General
I
1. Conform to recommendations of Flat Glass Jobbers Association's "Glazing Manual" and to recommendations of
manufacturers of glass, glazing, and sealing materials.
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
I
08800-1
Glass and Glazing
I
I
2. Take field dimensions when openings and frames are ready for glazing, and accurately factory cut glass and
polycarbonate accordingly. Do not field cut glazing materials. Edges of glazing materials shall be clean cut; do not
install with spalled, chipped, rough or damaged edges. Tong marks on tempered glass shall be concealed in glazing
rabbet.
I
3. Remove glazing molds or stops. Set glass on neoprene setting blocks or proper size to support glass, at quarter points
of sill but no closer than 6" to corners of glass. provide neoprene spacers on each face of glass, spaced 36" o.c.
maximum, with a minimum of 2 spacers per edge of glass. Position glass in center of rabbets; maintain required
clearances on all four sides.
I
I
4. Seal glass with glazing and sealing materials as specified herein. Use masking tape to avoid soiling adjacent surfaces.
Clean the sealing surfaces using only approved solvents and cleaning agents recommended by the manufacturers of the
glazing and sealing materials.
I
5. Where a combination of glazing materials are required for glazing in the same location, the manufacturer or
manufacturers of the materials shall certify that all the materials are compatible with one another.
I
6. After installation of glazing materials and inspection by Architect remove factory labels and mark glazed opening with
streamers or other approved means. Do not mark glass.
I
7. Leave all glass clean and whole, without cracks or scratches or other defects. All glass shall be left in perfect condition.
Exterior glazing shall be weathertight.
8. Remove and replace broken, damaged and imperfect glass and all improperly glazed glass.
I
9. Install transparent mirror glass with mirror coating toward subject side.
I
B - Exterior Glass - Glazing in aluminum window frames and storefront entrances shall be Dry-Set Extruded Neoprene Glazing
Gaskets.
I
C - Interior Glass - Glazing in metal frames shall be with glazing compound and application of metal stops. Neatly tool
compound to sight line.
06 - CLEANING AND PROTECTION
I
A - The Contractor shall protect all work of this Section from damage after installation has been completed. Work which is
scratched, imperfect or damaged in any way will not be accepted by Owner, and shall be replaced with perfect work. Work
shall also be protected against soiling or other contamination. This work shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner.
I
B - Just prior to occupancy, the Contractor shall examine all work of this Section. The Contractor shall be responsible for all
breakage of glass whatever the cause until the building is tumed over to the Owner. He shall replace all broken glazing
material and deliver the entire building with all glazing intact and clean.
I
C - Acceptance of building by the Owner shall not take place until all glass is washed and polished, both sides, by a window
cleaner specializing in such work.
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
I
08800-2
Glass and Glazing
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
SECTION 09100 - METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS
I
01-GENERAL
A _ Metal support system shall be used for installation of all drywall ceilings. See reflected ceiling plan for locations of drywall
ceilings. See related specification section 092550 Gypsum drywall
I
B _ Shop Drawings - Submit layout showing suspension system locations of all expansion joints, control joints, beads, and
openings for all suspended lath ceilings.
I
C - Samples - Submit for approval:
I
1. Hangers
2. Channels
3. Control Joint Beads
4. Casing Beads
5. Expansion Joint Beads
I
D-
Referenced Standards - Submit a copy of all Referenced Standards referred to in this section.
I
02-MANUFACTURERS
I
A - Approved Manufacturers -
1. metal support system materials listed herein shall be manufactured by
a. US Gypsum Company
b. National Gypsum Company
c. Milcor of Inland Ryerson Construction Product Company
d. Penn Metal Division of Keene Corporation
I
03 - MATERlALS
I
A - Hangers - Minimum No.8, US standard gauge galvanized annealed steel wire.
I
B _ Channels _ Hot-rolled or cold-rolled steel channels, protected with rust-inhibitive paint. Channels of size indicated in
articles herein and shall weight as follows:
I
Channel
Size
Hot-Rolled
(lbs/LF)
Cold-Rolled
(lbsILF)
1-1/2 "
1.12
0.475
I
3/4"
0.30
0.30
I
C _ Tie Wires _ Galvanized soft-annealed steel; 18 US standard gauge for attaching metal furring to main runners.
D _ Wire Clips _ Galvanized copper bearing steel, 8 US standard gauge hairpin clips, for attaching metal lath to supports.
I
E _ Self-Tapping Sheet Metal Screws - Galvanized steel, with galvanized steel washers, for securing self-furring diamond mesh
metal lath to metal decking. Other fastening devices, if approved by Architect, will be acceptable.
I
F _ Casing Beads _ 24 US standard gauge, galvanized steel for interior work, zinc for exterior work, 260 lbs., minimum per
1,000 linear feet with square edge having 3/16 inch minimum return, with expanded metal wing not less than 3 inches wide,
depth to suite plaster thickness. Approved manufacturers: USG No. 66, National Gypsum No. 66, Milcor No. 66, or Penn
Metal No. 66.
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
09100-1
Metal Support Systems
I
I
G - Control Joint Beads and Expansion Joint Beads - Two casing beads back-to-back, same type and manufacturer as specified
for casing beads. Space between casing beads shall be as indicated on drawings or as herein specified.
H-
Protective Coatings
I
1. Rust Inhibitive Paint - Asphalt based paint.
I
2. Galvanizing - ASTM A-I23 or A-525, hot dip method, 1.25 oz.lsq. ft.
3. Touch Up - Paint abraded or cut surfaces of metal furring and lathing materials with rust-inhibitive paint at the Project
Site.
I
I
04 - INSTALLATION
A - General
I
1. Install work of this section so that gypsum board surfaces will be fmished true to required lines, level, plumb, square
and rigid, with required thicknesses.
I
2. Provide bracing and stiffening members as required. Drill and punch channels and metal decking as required for
fastening; attach and tie channels and lath securely. Provide concrete and masonry anchors, as approved by Architect.
Cut and drill concrete or masonry as required for attachment of furring as approved by Architect.
I
3. Repair furring and disturbed or damaged due to installation work of other trades.
B-
Metal Furring Installation
I
1. Hangers - Install hangers as required for main runner channel spacing and not to exceed 4 feet on center. Locate a
hanger within 6 inches of ends of main runner channels. Tie wire hangers to inserts to develop full strength of hangers.
I
2. Main Runner Channels - Use 1-1/2" cold-rolled main runner channels set to proper levels for finished stucco. Space
main runner channels 4" o.c. for hanger spacing of 3'-6" along channels, or 3' o.c. for hanger spacing of 4' along
channels. Locate a main runner channel within 6 inches of walls to support ends of cross furring channels. Saddle tie
wire hangers to main runners to develop full strength of hangers.
I
I
3. Cross Furring Channels - Use 3/4" cold-rolled cross furring channels, spaced as required for metal lath, but not more
than 16" apart for 4' span, 19" for 3'-6" span, and 24" for 3' span. Locate a cross furring channel within 2 inches of
parallel walls or partitions. Saddle tie cross furring to main runners with double tie wire at each intersection. Tie
channels with 3 wraps and secure with 3 turns. .
I
4. Coves, Recesses and Curved Ceilings - Furnish and install all metal furring, bent to required shapes, reinforced and
securely and rigidly wired in place to accommodate profiles of all coves, recesses and curves.
I
5. Interferences - When interferences require greater spacing of hangers than specified, provide special hangers and main
runners as required by referenced Metal Lath Association specifications to suit the conditions and provide adequate
support. Submit details for Architect's approval. Hangers and suspension system shall not be fastened to or abut ducts
or pipes.
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
09100-2
Metal Support Systems
I
I
I
6. Corner Beads and Casing Beads - Set vertical members plumb and horizontal members level. Form true arises and neat
miters. Use longest lengths so as to minimize joints between members. Wedge beads as necessary to provide proper
ground for stucco fInish. Secure beads to metallath with tie wire to masonry with masonry nails, at ends and 12" maximum
apart. Install casing beads where stucco terminates or abuts dissimilar surfaces.
I
I
7. Control and Expansion Joint Beads - Form two ceiling beads, back-to-back, as space between typically for control joints,
1/4" between for expansion joints. Install at locations indicated on drawings. If not shown on drawings space control joint
beads at approximately 1 0'- 0" o.c. in both directions at exact locations as directed by Architect. Do not extend main
runners, cross furring, or metal lath across joints. Secure control joint beads to metal lath.
I
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
09100-3
Metal Support Systems
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
SECTION 09250 - GYPSUM DRYWALL
01 - SUBMITTALS
I
A - Shop Drawings and Samples
I
1. Shop drawings not required.
2. Submit manufacturer's printed literature for each type drywall, trim and accessory proposed for use.
3. Samples not required.
I
02 - MANUFACTURERS
I
I
A- For the purpose of designating type and quality for work under this subdivision, materials specified are based on products
manufactured by United States Gypsum Company.
B - Equivalent products of the following named manufacturers will be acceptable for bidding:
I
1. United States Gypsum Company
2. National Gypsum Company
3. Celotex Corporation
4. Inland-Ryerson Construction Products
5. Georgia-Pacific
I
03 - MATERIALS
I
A - Fire code gypsum board 5/8" thick, 48" wide in standard lengths as required, tapered edges - see drawings for locations.
Partition and ceiilng construction shall have a one-hour rating where fire code is specified.
B - Water resistant gypsum board meeting Federal Specifications SS-L-30D and ASTM C-630, 5/8" thick, 48" wide in standard
lengths as required, tapered edges to be used on all ceilings where drywall is called for in fmish schedule.
I
C - Suspension Channels - Cold-rolled metal channels 1-112" 4'-0" and 2'-0" o.c. at ceilings. See drawings for locations.
I
D - RC-l Resilient Channels Horizontal - 2'_0" o.c. vertically.
E - Metal Furring Channels 12" - 16" - 24" o.c. See drawings.
I
F - Metal hat channels - 7/8" x 29/16 DWC-25 ASTM C645, see drawings.
G - Metal Studs - 25 US standard gauge galvanized steel - see drawings for size and spacing required.
I
H - Sound Attenuation Blankets - Semi-rigid mineral fiber blankets complying with Federal Specification HH-I-521 D, Type
1 (1" layers required) for a total of 4", see drawings for locations.
I
I - Screws
I
1. Gypsum panels to metal studs - USG 7/8", Type S Bugle Head.
2. Gypsum panels to metal resilient channels - USG brand screws Type S Bugle Head.
3. Gypsum panels to metal furring channels - USG brand screws Type 2 Bugle Head
J - Accessories
I
1. Casing Beads - USG No. 200-A for 5/8" single layer wallboard.
2. RC-l Resilient Channels.
3. Metal Furring Channels.
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
09250-1
Gypsum Drywall
I
I
I
K - Joint Treatment
1. Joint Tape - "Perf-A-Tape" joint reinforcing tape.
2. Ready-Mixed Joint Compound - all purpose.
I
04 - DELIVERY AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS
I
A - Manufactured materials to be delivered in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing manufacturer's name and brand.
B - Store plaster and cementious materials off ground under water-tight cover away from sweating walls and other damp surfaces;
keep dry until ready to use.
I
C - Protect metal goods against rusting.
I
05 - DRYWALL INSTALLATION
A - General
I
1. Install drywall work in accordance with drywall manufacturer's printed instructions accompanying material and as indicated
on drawings and specified herein.
I
2. Neatly cut gypsum board to fit around outlets, switch boxes, framed openings, piping, ducts, and other items which penetrate
wall boards.
I
3. Screw fasten wall board with power-driven electric screw drivers, screw heads to slightly depress surface of wall board
without cutting paper, screws not closer than 3/8" from edges and ends of wallboard.
I
B - Metal Trim - Install securely and finish with 3 coats of joint compound, feathered and finish sanded smooth with adjacent
wallboard surface, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions accompanying material.
I
1. Casing Beads - Install specified edge beads in single lengths at all tenninating edges of wallboard exposed to view, where
edges abut dissimilar materials, where edges would be exposed to view, and elsewhere where shown on drawings.
I
2. Sound Attenuation Blankets - Install where indicated on drawings. Total thickness of sound blanket shall be completely fill
wall cavity (four layers of 1" required with joints staggered) 4" total thickness.
I
C - Joint Treatment and Spackling - Joints between face wallboards in the same plane, joints at intemal corners of intersections
between ceilings and walls or partitions shall be filled with joint compound, reinforced with reinforcing tape, and finished
with joint compound. Screw heads and other depressions shall be filled with joint compound. Joint compound shall be
applied in three coats, feathered and finish surface sanded smooth with adjacent wallboard surface, in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions accompanying material.
I
06 - METAL RESILIENT FURRING INSTALLATION
I
A - Run metal resilient channel framing members to run horizontally, spaced 24'-0" o.c. maximum. Furring channels shall be
shimmed to provide a plumb and level backing for wallboard. Furring channel and splices shall be provided by nesting
channels at least 8" and securely anchoring to wood furring strips with two fasteners in each wing.
I
07 - INSTALLATION - METAL STUD DRYWALL
A - Runner Installation - Use channel type. Align accurately at top of metal frame and deck above. Anchor runners securely
16 inches o.c. maximum with power driven anchors.
I
B - Stud Installation - Use channel type. Position vertically in runners, spaced not more than 16 inches on centers except as
noted. Anchor studs at partition intersections, at partition corners and where partition abuts other construction to runners
with sheet metal screws through each stud flange and runner flange except as specified for expansion joints. Install metal
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
09250-2
Gypsum Drywall
I
I
I
stud horizontal bracing wherever vertical studs are out or wallboard is cut for passage of pipes, ducts or other penetrations,
and anchor horizontal bracing to vertical studs with sheet metal screws.
I
c - Wallboard Installation - Single Laver Application - Install wallboard with long dimension parallel to framing member and
with abutting edge joints over web of framing member. Joints on opposite sides of wall shall be arranged so as to Occur on
different studs. Fasten wallboard to framing member with 1" screws spaced 8" O.c. along vertical abutting edges and 12"
o.c. in field.
I
D - Drywall Ceiling Grillage Installation - Single Layer Application
I
1. Space 10 gauge hanger wires 48" o.c. along carrying channels and within 6" of ends of carrying-channel runs. For steel
construction, wrap hanger around or through beams or joists.
I
2. Install 1-112" carrying channels 48" o.c. and within 6" of walls. Position channels for proper ceiling height, level and
secure with hanger wire saddle-tied along channel. Provide 1" clearance between runners and abutting walls and
partitions. At channel splices, interlock flanges, overlap ends 12" and secure each end with double-strand I8-gauge tie
wire.
I
3. Erect metal furring channels at right angles to 1-1/2" carry channels or main support members. Space furring (16") o.c.
and within 6" of walls. Provide 1" clearance between furring ends and abutting walls and partitions. Secure furring to
carrying channels with clips or saddle-tie to supports with double-strand 16 gauge tie wire. At splices, nest furring
channels at least 8" and securely wire-tie each end with double strand 16 gauge tie wire.
I
4. At any openings that interrupt the carrying or furring channels, install additional cross reinforcing to restore lateral
stability of grillage.
I
E - Ceiling Gypsum Panel Erection - Single Layer Application
I
1. Apply gypsum panels of maximum practical length with long dimension at right angles to furring channels. Position end
joints over channel web and stagger in adjacent rows.
I
2. Fit ends and edges closely, but not forced together. Fasten panels to channels with 1" type S screws spaced 12" O.c.
in field of panels and along abutting ends and edges.
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
09250-3
Gypsum Drywall
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
SECTION 09310 - CERAMIC TILE
I
01 - General
I
A - Samples - Submit samples in duplicate of the following materials to Architect for approval. Approval must be obtained prior
to delivery.
1. Samples of each type of trim shape and each type of accessory specified.
I
B - Certificates - Furnish Architect with master grade certificate stating grade, kind of tile, identification marks for tile packages,
and the name and location of the job.
I
1. Certificate shall be signed by the manufacturer and issued before shipment of tile is made.
02 - ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
I
A - The following are acceptable manufacturers:
I
1. Dal- Tile Corporation
2. Florida Tile
3. American Olean Tile Company
4. Summitville Tiles, Inc.
5. United States Ceramic Tile Company
6. Monarch Tile Manufacturing, Inc
I
03 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
I
A - Quality, Grade and Certificate: Tile shall comply with requirements of US Department of Commerce and National Bureau
of Standards "Simplified Practice Recommendation R61-6I" and with modifications as specified herein. Tile shall be of
grade specified and all containers grade-sealed in accordance with minimum grade specifications described in SPR-R61-61.
Deliver containers to site with seals unbroken. All tile shall comply with ANSI A 137.1-1988 Specifications for ceramic tile.
I
04 - TYPES OF TILE
I
A - Floor tile shall be ceramic mosaiclstock patterns. Tile colors selected by Architect from mfg. Standard colors. Tile shall
be unglazed porcelain type.
1. Type: Porcelain
2. Wearing Surface: Without abrasive content.
3. Nominal Facial Dimensions: 2" x 2".
4. Nominal Thickness: W'.
5. Face: Plain with cushion or square edges.
6. Pattem: Manufacturer's standard
B - Glazed Wall Tile: Provide flat tile complying with following requirements: colors selected from mfg. Standard colors
1. Type: Porcelain
2. Size: 4Y.i" x 4Y.i".
3. Nominal Thickness: 5/16".
4. Face: Plain with square edge, modified square edge, or cushion edge.
I
I
I
I
C - Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply with following requirements:
1. Size: As indicated, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile, where applicable.
a. Ifno adjoining flat tile, 4Yz" x 4Yz" base, and where wainscot occurs, 4Yz" x 2" cap, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:
b. Base: Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Coved.
c. Wainscot Cap Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bullnose Cap.
d. External Corners: Portland Cement Mortar Installations: Bullnose shape with radius min. of '\1.," unless
otherwise indicated.
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
09310-1
Ceramic Tile
I
I
I
Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners, except use coved base and cap angle pieces designed to member with
stretcher shapes.
I
B - Base tile shall be coved in width aligning with and matching wall tile 4-1/4" x 4-114" nominal size. Finish shall match wall
tile.
05 - MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION
I
A - Base tile on interior walls and exterior walls shall be set by the cement mortar bonded method. Materials and installation
shall comply with Tile Council of America, Inc., Detail No. W2ll-89, ANSI Al 08.1 and ANSI A 108.1 O.
I
B - Floor tile shall be set by the latex Portland cement mortar method. Materials and installation shall comply with Tile Council
of America, Inc., detail No. FI13-89, ANSI Spec. No. AI08.5, ANSI AI08.IO.
I
06 - LAYING OUT WORK
I
A - Layout work so that no tile less than half size occurs. Align joints in tile at right angles to each other. Tile shall be cut and
fitted at all accessories (e.g. switches, grab bars, toilet accessories) such that exposed cuts on the face of tile do not occur.
B- All fmish tile work shall be installed at right angles for all interior and exterior corners. The setting bed may vary in excess
of the specified minimum thickness. No angular or tapered cuts will be accepted.
I
07 - GROUTING MATERIAL
I
A - Shall be commercial, white color, sanded Portland cement type. Portland cement shall comply with ASTM C-I50-1969a,
Type 1.
B - Approved Manufacturers:
I
L & M - Surco
Upco Hydroment
Kaiser
Custom
I
C - Bonding Additive - L & M - CRF
I
08 - ACCESSORIES
I
A - Mortar for setting bed shall be composed of 1 part Portland cement and 2-1/2 parts sand by volume. Not over 10 percent
lime may be added. No mortar setting bed shall be less than 3/8 inch thick.
09-CONTROLJOINTS
I
A - Sealant Materials
I
1. Joint Backing - Preformed, compressible, resilient, non-extruding, non-staining strips of foam neoprene, form
polyethylene or other material recommended by sealant manufacturer.
2. Bond Breaker - Polyethylene tape, 3 mils thick, or other material recommended by sealant manufacturer.
I
3. Sealant Primer - Colorless, non-staining, of type to suit substrate surface, as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
I
4. Sealant - One part silicone base sealant. Sealant hardness upon full cure shall be between 20-30 Shore Durometer. Color
of sealant to blend with or match adjacent materials, and as selected by Architect. Approved manufacturers:
Dow-Corning Corp. or General Electric.
I
B - Control Joints - Provide control join as joints between ceramic tile floor and base and between ceramic tile and metal door
frames. Control joints 1/8" wide in ceramic tile floor and 3/32" at metal door frames. Fill all control joints with specified
acsb
(hbo/12/2003) 09310-2
Ceramic Tile
I
I
I
backing and sealant. Use bond breaker where sufficient space for joint backing does not exist.
10 - ACCEPTANCE OF SURFACES TO RECEIVE TILE
I
A - Prior to installing any tile the Contractor shall inspect surfaces which are to receive tile covering; he shall notify the
Architect in writing of any serious defects or conditions that will interfere with, or prevent a satisfactory tile installation; he
shall not proceed with installation until such defects or conditions have been corrected. The starting of installation work in
a room or space shall imply acceptance of the surfaces to receive the tile in that space.
I
12 - MARBLE THRESHOLDS
I
A - Shall fumish and install at door openings where ceramic tile abuts another floor material. Thresholds shall be of Georgia
White Cherokee Marble and ends notched to fit door jambs. Finish shall be "honed". Threshold shall have beveled nosing.
Threshold width shall be 2" and thickness 1/2" and is to be total length of opening (piecing not acceptable).
I
l2-CLEANING
I
A - Clean tile surfaces on completion of grouting.
B - Remove all grout haze, observing tile manufacturer's recommendations as to use of chemical cleaners. No muriatic acid shall
be used.
I
C - Rinse tilework with clean water before and after using chemical cleaners.
13 - PROTECTION
I
A - Apply to all clean, completed tile floors a protective coat of neutral cleaner solution, 1 part cleaner to I part water.
I
B - In addition, cover all tile floors with heavy duty, non-staining construction paper, masked in place.
C - Prohibit all foot and wheel traffic from using tiled floor for a minimum of three (3) days.
I
D - Just before final acceptance of tilework, remove paper and rinse protective coat of neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.
14 - CAULKING
I
A - Where wall and floor tile meet wall mounted fixtures including built-in counters and cabinets, caulk the joints with a white
resin type adhesive equal to Miracle or Dicks-Pontius, to be applied with a neat, inconspicuous, but waterproof joint.
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
09310-3
Ceramic Tile
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
SECTION 09510 - ACOUSTICAL AND METAL CEILING SYSTEMS
I
01 - SUBMITTALS
A - Shop Drawings - Submit sepia and one print showing reflected ceiling plans of all areas to receive acoustical ceiling
systems.
I
B - Samples Required - Submit two each of the following:
I
1. Components of suspension system
2. Each type of acoustical or ceiling panel
C-
Extra Materials - In addition to product data for each type of acoustical panel and suspension system submit the following:
I
I
1) Provide extra ceiling panels to Owner at the completion of the project - two ceiling panels per 1000 S.F. minimum, in
an unopened carton.
2) Set of 12-inch (300mm) long samples of exposed suspension system members, including moldings, for each color and
system type required.
I
3) Acoustical panel ceilings indicated are identical in materials and construction to those tested for fire resistance per
ASTM EI19.
I
01.1 REFERENCES
I
1. ASTM A 366
2. ASTM A 641
3. ASTM C 423
4. ASTM C 635
5. ASTM C 636
6. ASTM E 84
7. ASTM E 1414
8. ASTM E 1264
I
I
02 - CEILING TILES
A - Acoustical panel products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide of the following:
I
Type A - Wet-formed mineral fiber acoustical panel. Factory-applied vinyl latex paint. Type Ill, Form 1.
Pattern: EI.
Color: White
Light Reflectance: White-Actual LR .83 SS-S-118B and ASTM E1264
Weight: 1.05 lbs./S.F.
Size: 24" x 24" x 3/4"
Edge Detail: Square-cut lay-in
NRC: 0.65
CAC: Minimum .33
I
I
I
Surface burning characteristics: Class A per ASTM E 1264
Flame Spread 25 or under, UL labeled
I
I
Approved Manufacturer;
Armstrong - Cirrus sqaure lay-in 532
Celotex - equal
USG - equal
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
I
09510-1
Acoustical and Metal Ceiling Systems
I
I
Type B - Wet-formed mineral fiber acoustical panel. Factory-applied vinyl latex paint. Type III, Form 1.
Pattern: EI.
Color: White
Light Reflectance: White-Actual LR .83 SS-S-lI88 and ASTM E1264
Weight: 1.05 lbs./S.F.
Size: 24" x 24" x 3/4"
Edge Detail: Square-cut lay-in
NRC: 0.65
CAC: Minimum .35
I
I
I
Surface buming characteristics: Class A per ASTM E 1264
Flame Spread 25 or under, UL labeled
I
I
Approved Manufacturer:
Armstrong - Cirrus angled tegular 549
Celotex - equal
USG - equal
Tegular ceiling tiles shall be used in rooms 202 and 203 only.
I
03 - SUSPENSION SYSTEMS
I
A _ Suspension System Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, direct hung
unless otherwise indicated.
I
1) Powder-actuated fasteners in concrete: Fastener system fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other
accessory devices for attachment of hangers, and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that
imposed by ceiling construction as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190, conducted by a qualified testing agency.
I
B - Wire hangers, braces, and ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:
1) Zinc-coated Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A 641 (ASTM A 641M), Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. Size: Select wire
diameter so that its stress at 3 times the hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, Direct Hung) will be less than the
yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106 inch (2.69-mm-) diameter wire.
I
C _ Non-Fire Resistance Rated, Direct Hung Suspension Systems: Provide manufacturer's standard metal suspension systems
of types, structural classifications and finishes indicated that comply with applicable ASTM C 635 requirements.
I
1) Hot Dipped Galvanized Prelude XL 15/16" exposed tee system as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
conforming to ASTM C635, intermediate duty, exposed tee: components die cut and interlocking, color to match
ceilings, rotary stitched.
I
2) Commercial quality cold rolled steel with hot dipped galvanized coating.
I
3) Hot Dipped Galvanized Suprafme XL 9/16" exposed tee system as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
conforming to ASTM C635, intermediate duty, exposed tee: components die cut and interlocking, color to match
ceilings, rotary stitched.
I
4) Structural Classification: Intermediate Duty. Four foot tees shall carry a minimum of 12 lbs. Per linear foot and also
be rated intermediate duty.
I
5) All 4" tees shall be rotary stitched to increase durability and add column strength to the system.
6) Main Beam HD-7200 shall have a web height of 1 Yz" and the 4 ft. And 2 ft. Cross tees, HD 7240 and HD 7228 shall
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
09510-2
Acoustical and Metal Ceiling Systems
I
I
I
7) have a web height of 1 W'. Each flange shall be 15/16" pre-finished aluminum capping, and the system will have
removable and reusable cross tees.
I
8) Wall moldings shall be 15/16" x 15/16" (HD 7831).
D - Finish: All steel roll-formed parts, including cap, shall be cleansed and hot-dipped galvanized with override cross tees. All
exposed surfaces shall then receive a baked polyester paint finish.
I
1) Color shall be white and match the actual color of the selected tile unless otherwise specified. Off-white is not
acceptable.
2) Ceiling panels around kitchen exhaust hood shall be stainless steel (min. 2'-0" distance). Provide hold down clips all
panels.
I
I
E - Execution: General: install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with publications referenced below per manufacturer's
instructions and CISCA "Ceiling Systems Handbook."
I
1) Standard for ceiling suspension system installations comply with ASTM C636.
2) Suspend ceiling hangers as follows:
a) Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to support above. Connect hangers either directly to
structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure, that are appropriate for substrate, and that will
not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.
I
b) Space hangers not more than 48 inches (1200 mm) o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless
otherwise shown, and provide hangers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) form ends of each member.
I
c) Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to
conceal edges of acoustical panels.
I
d) Install suspension system nmners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace
dented, bent, or kinked members.
I
e) Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fitted accurately into suspension system runners and edge
moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide neat, precise fit.
I
F - Provide additional 12 gauge soft annealed steel galvanized wire hangers where light fixtures occur as follows: One (1) \\ire
hanger at each comer of recessed light fixtures and two (2) wire hangers above each surface mounted light fixture (provided
by ceiling subcontractor).
I
04 - PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
I
A - Deliver materials in original, unopened, protective packaging, with manufacturer's labels indicating brand name, pattem,
size, thickness as applicable, legible and intact.
B - Store materials above ground in original protective packaging to prevent damage.
I
05 - INSTALLATION
I
A - The suspension system shall be installed according to ASTM C 635, for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and
Lay-In Panel Ceilings.
I
B _ Maintain humidity of65% - 75% in area where acoustical materials are to be installed, 24 hours before, during, and 24 hours
after installation.
C _ Maintain a uniform temperature in tPe range of 55 degrees F. to 70 degrees F. prior to and during installation of materials.
I
D _ Coordinate with other trades to facilitate and allow for the installation of all recessed lights, lay-in fluorescent lights,
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
09510-3
Acoustical and Metal Ceiling Systems
I
I
I
mechanical grilles, and skylight panels; conform to reflected ceiling plan.
I
E _ The main T-runner shall be installed on 48" centers supported every 48" by 12 gauge galvanized wire hangers. To complete
a 24" x 24" grid, 48" cross T-splines shall be installed at right angles to the main T-runners at 24" o.c., and 24" cross T-
splines at right angles to the 48" tees.
I
F _ T-spline intersecting moldings shall be locked in place. All main T-runner and cross T-splines shall be straight, in alignment
and flush at intersections. The assembled grid shall be leveled to within 118" in 12'. A metal edge molding finished to
match the T-splines shall be installed wherever the suspended grid abuts walls, columns,and vertical surfaces. Include
hold-down clips for all panels in fue rated suspension system plus cement fiber lay in panels in non-rated suspension system.
I
G _ Install wall moldings at intersection of suspended ceiling and all vertical surfaces.
H - Miter corners where wall moldings intersect or install comer caps.
I
I _ All members shall be aligned for true, level surface and straight lines.
I
J _ Provide additional 12 gauge galvanized wire hangers where light fixtures occur as follows: One (1) wire hanger at each
corner of recessed light fixtures and two (2) wire hangers above each surface mounted light fixture. .
I
K _ In areas to receive fire-rated ceiling systems, provide fire protection around fluorescent light fixtures with fire rated
acoustical panels as detailed on the drawings and specified in paragraph 07 of this section.
06 - INST ALLA TlON OF LIGHTS. MECHANICAL GRILLES AND SPRINKLER SYSTEM
I
A _ The ceiling tile installer will coordinate with other trades, especially the Mechanical and Electrical requirements, to facilitate
and allow for the installation of all recessed lights, lay in fluorescent lights, mechanical grilles and sprinkler system.
I
07 - LIGHT FIXTURE PROTECTION
I
A _ Acoustical unit shall be installed in the pattem shown on the drawings in accordance with Manufacturer's Laboratories
Design No. P-255.
I
1. Fixture Protection _ Acoustical Material - 5/8" thick cut into pieces to form a five sided enclosure, trapezoidal in cross
section, approximately lr'2" longer and wider than the fixture with sufficient depth to provide at least 1-1/2" clearance
between fixture and the enclosure. The pieces shall be held together by 8d nails spaced 6" o.c. minimum. Provide 2"
x 10" slot in each end for return air.
I
08 - CLEANING
A - Clean soiled or discolored unit surfaces after installation.
I
B _ Touch up scratched, abrasions, voids, and other defects in painted surfaces.
I
C _ Remove and replace damaged or improperly installed units.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
09510-4
Acoustical and Metal Ceiling Systems
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
SECTION 09650 - RESILIENT FLOORING
I
01 - SUBMITTALS
A - Samples Required - If same as shown on the FINISH AND COLOR SCHEDULES, submit two samples of each color
selected; otherwise submit two samples each of manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, designs of series specified.
I
1. Resilient Flooring (Vinyl composition tile)
2. Resilient Base (Rubber)
3. Tile Reducer Strip
4. Stair Nosing and Risers (Rubber)
I
B - Manufacturer's Literature
I
I
1. Approved Tile And Base - manufacturer shall submit data for underlayment and adhesives they propose to use. Data
shall include instructions for handling storage and installation.
2. Maintenance Data and Instruction: Upon completion and prior to acceptance of work fumish two (2) copies of a list
of recommended maintenance methods, products and recommended maintenance methods and procedures.
I
C - Maintenance Materials - Furnish to Qwner additional vinyl composition tile of each color included in the work at the rate
of 1 carton for each 2,000 square feet or fraction thereof and store in area designated by the Architect.
I
02 - MATERIALS AND MANUFACTURERS
I
A - Vinyl Composition Floor Tile - Conform to Federal Specifications L-T-00345 and ASTM FI066 Class 2 Through Pattem;
12" x 12" x 1/8" - anyone of the following:
I
1. Mannington - Essentials
2. Kentile Floors, Inc. - Architectural Criterion
3. Armstrong Tile Company - Exelon Imperial Series
4. Azrock - Custom Cortina
5. Tarkett - Basic Architectural thru Chip
I
B - Rubber Base - Conform to Federal Specifications SS-W-40a. Molded cove rubber base in 4" heights except where noted
otherwise. Use pre-molded external and intemal comers which match base with the exception of bull nose comers. Base
to be in 120'-0" lengths. Anyone of the following:
I
1. Johnsonite
2. Roppe Rubber Corporation
3. R. C. Musson Rubber Company
I
C - Stair Nosing and Risers - Rubber stair nosing - raised circular design 0.210" tapering to 0.113" square nose - shall conform
to Federal Specifications RRT-650D. 1/8" coved rubber riser to be of matching color.
1. Johnsonite
2. Equal
I
I
D - Underlavrnent - Anyone of the following:
I
1. Mannington Embossing Leveler
2. Ken Patch No. 14 Latex Underlayment
3. Armstrong S-180 Underlayment
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
09650-1
Resilient Flooring
I
I
E - Adhesives for Floor Tiles - Anyone of the following:
1. Mannington VII
2. Kentile Adhesive No.4
3. Armstrong S-90
F - Base Adhesive - Anyone of the following:
I
I
1. Johnsonite Cove Base Adhesive applied as recommended in instructions accompanying material.
2. Roppe Cove Base Adhesive applied as recommended in the instructions accompanying the material.
3. R. C. Musson Cove Base Adhesive applied as recommended in the instructions accompanying the material.
I
G - Stair Nosing and Riser Adhesive - Anyone of the following:
I
1. Johnsonite Rubber & Vinyl Stair Tread and Nosing Adhesive
2. Roppe Rubber Stair Tread Adhesive
3. R. C. Musson #TT-70 Non-Flammable Adhesive
03 - DELIVERY AND CONDITIONING OF MATERIALS FOR INSTALLATION
I
A - Deliver all materials during 48 hour period specified below and allow to condition 24 hours before installation. Adhesives
and underlayment shall be delivered in sealed containers bearing manufacturer's labels and applied in accordance with
manufacturer's installation instructions.
I
B - Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 degrees F., in all locations for a minimum of 48 hours before and after tile and
base installation.
I
04 - INST ALLA TION
I
A - Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 degrees F., in all locations for a minimum of 48 hours before and after installation
of vinyl composition tile and base.
I
B - Deliver all materials during the 48 hour period specified and allow to condition at least 24 hours before installation.
Adhesives and primers shall be delivered in sealed containers bearing approved manufacturer's labels and applied in
accordance with manufacturer's strict directions.
I
C - Prime all floor surfaces after they have been cleaned and dried. Fill cracks, joints and depressions with underlayment
recommended by approved tile manufacturer. Mix underlayment and apply in accordance with approved manufacturer's
directions to required thickness. It shall be compacted, troweled smooth, and allowed to become hard and dry before tile
is laid.
I
D - Lay tile flooring in accordance with approved manufacturer's printed instructions to true, straight lines, level and smooth
surface. Layout tile for each space to be symmetrical about center lines of room or space, and so spaced that edge or border
tiles are one-half tile or greater in size. Make up any irregularities at perimeter of spaces. Place tiles squarely against each
other and press into cement to insure complete contact and adhesion. Cement shall not extrude onto face of any tile. Press
tile into place before cement has set and not later than one hour after tiles are laid. All tile shall be laid with "grain" or
pattern in same direction. No "checkerboard" pattern will be accepted.
I
I
E - Defer laying tile until all other work that may cause damage to same is complete.
I
F - Perform calcium chloride moisture test in at least two areas of each major concrete slab pour as well as one in each
classroom. Moisture test results are to be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Written copy of the test
results are to be submitted to the architect.
I
G - Dusty, chalky or flaky concrete surfaces shall be swept with a wire brush to remove all loose particles. Remove all sealers,
existing tile and carpet adhesives, coatings, oil, dirt on exposed surfaces.
I
H - Fill cracks, joints and depressions with underlayment. Mix underlayment and apply in accordance with directions on the
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
09650-2
Resilient Flooring
I
I
container. It shall be compacted, troweled smooth and allowed to become hard and dry before tile is laid.
I - Installation of tile will be construed to mean that floors are satisfactory to produce a smooth and level tile floor covering.
I
J - Install tile reducer strips at all exposed edges of tile with top surface finishing flush with tile.
K - Install pre-molded cove base in standard lengths, including pre-molded external and intemal comers. Set base straight and
level in adhesive with close, flush joints hermetically sealed by adhesive. Remove all traces of adhesive, stains and dirt
from face of base.
I
L - Install accent tile areas where called for on the drawings or color finish schedule.
I
M - See drawings for special designs and patterns required in floor.
N - Fumish and install rubber base at all walls and cabinet toe space.
I
05 - FINISHING AND CLEANING
I
A - Upon completion of the installation of floor covering and adjacent work, and after materials have set, clean surfaces as
recommended by the manufacturer for the type of floor covering material installed.
B - Apply one thin coat of good grade buffable type floor finish and buff.
I
C - Protect with undyed, untreated building paper to keep completed work from traffic and damage until final inspection.
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
09650-3
Resilient Flooring
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
SECTION 09680 - CARPET
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.01 SUMMARY
I
I
I
I
A. Extent, location and details of each type of carpeting are indicated on drawings, carpet data sheets and in
schedules.
B. Work includes furnishing, installing carpeting and accessories.
1. Carpet roll goods
2. Installation materials
C. Commercial Carpet: Carpet intended for use in commercial and public spaces, with construction, fire ratings,
static control and appearance appropriate for this use.
D. Related Documents Specified Elsewhere:
1. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division-I Specification sections, apply to work of this Section.
2. Resilient base at carpeted areas: Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. . Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's literature, installation instructions for each type carpeting material, installation
accessory required.
2. Methods of installation, each type of substrate.
3. Written data on physical characteristics, durability, resistance to fading, flame resistance characteristics
4. Technical data on adhesive; certify adhesive meets manufacturer's recommendations.
5. Size, type trowel to apply adhesive; certify trowel meets manufacturers recommendations.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1. Carpet layout, seaming diagrams, clearly indicating carpet direction, types of edge strips.
2. Indicate columns, doorways, enclosing wallslpartitions, built-in cabinets, locations where cutouts
required.
3. Installation details at special conditions.
C.
Samples:
1. Initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard size samples, each type carpet scheduled.
2. Verification;
a. 18" square, each type carpet required.
b. 12" long, each type exposed edge stripping, accessory items.
c. Prepare samples from same material for use on Project.
D.
Manufacturer's Written Certification:
1. Installer trained, approved to install manufacturer's carpet.
2. Materials furnished meet specified fire performance requirements.
3. Supporting certified laboratory testing data that material meets test requirements.
a. Fire Performance Characteristics:
(1) Test by method indicated, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
(2) Flammability:
a) Rating: Pass (Methenamine Pill Test).
b) Test Method: ASTM D 2859.
(3) Critical Radiant Flux:
a) Rating: Min. 0.45 watts/sq. cm.
b) Test Method: ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253.
(4) Smoke Density:
a) Rating: Max. 450.
b) Test Method: ASTM E 662.
4. Ship no fabric to project until Owner approves manufacturer's certificates.
acsb
(hboI12/2003)
09680-1
Carpet
I
I
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Min. 3 years production experience
2. Clearly indicate, in published literature, product compliance with specified requirements.
B. Installer Qualifications:
1. Specializing in carpet installation.
2. Min. 2 years experience in installation of carpeting similar to that required. for Project.
I
I
C. Carpet manufacturer and installer jointly responsible for proper adhesive, proper installation.
1. Manufacturer provide technical representative at jobsite at beginning of installation, advise, assist
installer in use of adhesives, methods of installation.
I
D. Single Source Responsibility: Material produced by single manufacturer, each carpet type.
E. Carpet Data: Manufacturers, products listed establish type, quality of material; others considered only if
approved prior to bid date.
I
1.04 TESTING
I
A. Manufacturer submit test reports and certification verifying specified carpet meets requirements.
I
B. Physical Properties:
1. Meet specified requirements.
2. Tests performed by method indicated.
a. Fade Resistance: AA TCC 16E max. grey scale factor, 40 hours.
b. Static Resistance Rating: AA TCC 134; tested at 20% RH/70oF.
I
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
I
A. Deliver in original factory wrappings, containers; clearly label:
1. Manufacturer's identification
2. Brand name
3. Quality or grade
4. Fire hazard classification
5. Lot number.
I
B. Store materials in original undamaged packages, containers.
1. Inside well-ventilated area.
2. Protect from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity.
3. Lay flat, blocked off ground to prevent sagging and warping.
4. Maintain temperature in storage area above 40oF.
I
I
C. Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for special delivery, storage, and handling
requirements.
1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
I
A. Sequence with other work to minimize damage, soiling during construction period.
1.07 WARRANTY
I
A. Special Project Product Warranty:
1. Full term non-prorated warranty by Carpet Manufacturer in favor of Owner, at no cost to Qwner,
against:
a. Surface wear more than 15% by weight.
b. Edge ravel and seam separation, and curling (including direct contact with chair caster
action); repair or replace affected areas upon request by Qwner.
c. Delamination (separation of face from backing) at all areas of use including those in direct
contact with chair caster action.
d. Deterioration of closed-cell cushion; remain resilient for life of product.
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo//2/2003)
09680-2
Carpet
I
I
I
2.
3.
4.
5.
Replacement if actions above occur.
Period: Beginning on date of Final Acceptance, 15 years
Warranty in writing, signed by official of Carpet Manufacturer's corporation.
Warranty in addition to, not limitation of, other rights Owner has against Contractor under Contract
Documents.
I
B. Special Project Installation Warranty:
1. Manufacturer and installer jointly warrant installation against:
a. Lack of adhesion between backing and substrate.
b. Openmg of seams.
c. Imperfections due installation methods, procedures.
2. Repair or replace if actions above occur.
3. Period: Beginning on date of Final Acceptance, 10 years
4. Warranty in writing, signed by official of Carpet Manufacturer's corporation and official ofInstaller'
company.
5. Warranty in addition to, not limitation of, other rights Owner has against Contractor under Contract
Documents.
I
I
I
1.08 MAINTENANCE
I
A. Maintenance Instructions:
1. Manufacturer's printed instructions for installed work, including methods, frequency to maintain
optimum condition under anticipated traffic, use conditions.
2. Precautions against materials, methods detrimental to finishes, performance.
I
B. Replacement Materials:
1. Min. 2% each type, color, and pattem of carpeting, exclusive of material required for complete
installation.
2. Min 2% accessory components.
3. Furnish replacement materials from same production run as installed materials.
4. Package replacement materials with protective covering; identify with appropriate labels.
I
I
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.0 1 MATERIALS
I
A. General: Detailed carpet construction for each carpet type required, specified in carpet data at end of Section.
I
B. Fiber:
1. Nylon:
a. Approved nylon fibers manufacturers:
(1) Type 6,6 (Cationic):
a) Dupont Antron Lumina
b) Monsanto Untron SD
c) Shaw Industries Supra Solution Q
(2) Type 6,6 (Ionic):
a) Dupont Antron Legacy
b. Unbranded nylon fibers not permitted.
c. For other fiber materials, Contractor request Architect's approval prior to bid date, submit:
(1) Manufacturer's name
(2) Trade name
(3) Complete technical data
I
I
I
C. Carpet Color, Pattern, and Texture:
1. Provide materials in colors and pattems (if applicable) as selected by Architect from manufacturer's
standard colors and patterns.
I
2.02 ACCESSORIES
I
A. Carpet Edge Guard, Non-metallic:
1. Extruded or molded heavy-duty vinyl or rubber; size, profile indicated; min. 2" wide anchorage flange.
2. Colors selected by Architect from standard colors.
I
acsb
(hboI12/2003)
09680-3
Carpet
I
I
I
B. Installation Adhesive: Water-resistant, non-staining, recommended by carpet manufacturer, comply with
flammability requirements for installed carpet.
C. Miscellaneous Materials: Manufacturer's (carpet, cushions, and other carpeting products) recommendations;
Installer select to meet project circumstances, requirements.
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
I
A. Test substrates for moisture content, other conditions of installation.
1. Notify Contractor in writing of major conditions detrimental to proper completion of work.
2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions corrected.
I
B. Do not install carpet until space enclosed, permanent temperature/humidity control in operation.
C. Before installing, unroll, allow carpet to acclimate, relax twenty-four hours.
I
3.02 PREPARATION
I
A. Clear away debris, scrape up cementitious deposits from substrate; vacuum clean immediately before
installation.
1. Check concrete surface for "dusting" through installed carpet; apply sealer if needed to prevent
dusting.
I
B. Repair minor holes, cracks, depressions, rough areas; use material recommended by carpet or adhesive
manufacturer.
C. Sequence Carpeting with other work; minimize damage, soiling during remainder of construction period.
I
3.03 INSTALLATION
I
A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for seam locations, carpet direction; maintain carpet location
uniformity, lay of pile.
1. Follow approved seaming diagram.
2. Center seams under doors; do not place seams in traffic direction.
B. Extend carpet under open-bottomed obstructions, under removable flanges, under furnishings, into alcoves,
into closets.
I
C. Provide cut-outs where required, properly bind cut edges not concealed by edge guards, overlapping flanges.
I
D. Install carpet edge guard if carpet edge exposed; anchor guards to substrate.
E. Do not bridge building expansion joints with continuous carpeting; provide for movement.
I
F. Glue-Down Installation:
1. Fit carpet sections in each space before applying adhesive.
2. Trim edges, butt cuts with seaming cement.
3. Apply adhesive uniformly in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
4. Butt carpet edges tightly; form seams without gaps.
5. Roll carpet area lightly, eliminate air pockets, ensure uniform bond.
6. Remove any adhesive on face promptly without damaging carpet.
7. Allow no foot or construction traffic until adhesive completely dry; maintain temperature/humidity
control during drying period.
I
I
3.04 CLEANING
I
A. Remove, dispose of debris, unusable scraps.
1. Vacuum with commercial machine with face-beater element.
2. Remove spots, replace carpet if spots not removed.
3. Cut protruding face yarn with sharp scissors.
I
acsb
(hboI12/2003)
09680-4
Carpet
I
I
I
3.05
A.
3.06
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
acsb
(hbott2/2003)
PROTECTION
Use protective methods, materials to ensure carpeting without deterioration, damage at Final Acceptance.
CARPET DATA
Carpet:
1.
2.
Products: Based on Shaw Industries "Vanguard II"; meet following min. characteristics:
a. Approved manufacturers subject to conformance with specified carpet, following
requirements:
(1) Colins and Aikman "Mentor".
(2) Dimension Carpets ( Cambridge Commercial Carpets)
(3) Lees CarpetlDivision Burlington Industries, "Campus DW709"
Product Requirements:
a. Carpet Fiber: 100% Shaw Solution
Q BCF Nylon
Construction: Tufted.
Style: Multilevel Loop
Stitches: 12/in.
Gauge: 1110"
Pile Height: .125"
Pile Face Weight (oz./s.y.): 20.0
Density (oz/c.y.): 7058.
Dye Method: Solution dyed
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
1.
END OF SECTION 09680
09680-5
Carpet
J.
k.
1.
Backing: Vinyl
Back Coating: Polypropylene
Total Weight (oz.ls.y.): 148
Width: 6'
Flammability: Pass
Radiant Panel: Min. .45w/sq. cm.
Smoke Contribution Factor: Max.
450.
Static: Max. 3.5kv.
m.
n.
o.
p.
q.
I
I
I
DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
SECTION 09900 - PAINTS AND COATINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
I
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
I
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-l
Specification sections, apply to work of this Section.
1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
I
A. Extent of painting work indicated on drawings and schedules, and herein specified.
I
B. Work includes painting and finishing of interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces throughout Project, except as
otherwise indicated.
1. Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatment
specified under other sections of work.
I
C. "Paint" used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers,
and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats.
D. Surfaces to be Painted:
1. Except where natural finish of material specifically noted as surface not painted, paint exposed surfaces whether
or not colors designated in "schedules".
2. Where items or surfaces not specifically mentioned, paint same as similar adjacent materials or areas.
3. If color or fmish not designated, Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available.
4. Following categories of work not included as part of field-applied finish work.
a. Pre-Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory-finishing or
installer-finishing specified for such items as (but not limited to) follows:
(1) Acoustic materials
(2) Architectural woodwork and casework.
(3) Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.
(4) Light fixtures.
(5) Switchgear and distribution cabinets.
b. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting not required on surfaces such as follows:
(1) Walls or ceilings in concealed areas.
(2) Generally inaccessible areas.
(3) Furred areas.
(4) Pipe spaces.
(5) Duct shafts.
c. Finished Metal Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, similar fmished metal surfaces listed below do
not require painting:
(1) Anodized aluminum.
(2) Stainless steel.
(3) Chromium plate.
d. Operating Parts: Unless otherwise indicated, moving parts of operating units, mechanical and
electrical parts, such as follows, do not require painting:
(1) Valve and damper operators.
(2) Linkages.
(3) Sensing devices.
(4) Motor and fan shafts.
5. Following categories of work included under other Sections.
a. Shop Primers: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming ferrous metal items included under various
Sections for structural steel, metal fabrications, hollow metal work and similar items.
b. Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of fabricated components such as architectural woodwork,
wood casework and shop fabricated or factory-built mechanical and electrical equipment or accessories
included under other Sections.
6. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work specified in Divisions 15 and 16,
respectively.
E. Do not paint over any code-required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment
identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
09900-1
Paints and Coatings
I
I
I 1.03
A.
I B.
I
1.04
I A.
I B.
I
I
I
I
1.05
I A.
I
I
I
I
I
1.06
A.
I
I
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats;
use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits.
Coordination of Work:
1. Review other Sections in which prime paints provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for
various substrates.
2. Upon request from other trades, furnish information/characteristics of finish materials provided for use, to
ensure use of compatible prime coats.
SUBMITTALS
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information including Paint label analysis and application instructions
for each material used.
Samples:
1. Prior to beginning work, Architect will furnish color chips for surfaces to be painted.
2. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review.
3. Submit samples for Architect's review of color and texture only.
4. Provide listing of material and application for each coat of each finish sample.
a. On 12" x 12" hardboard, provide two samples of each color and material, with texture to simulate
actual conditions; resubmit samples requested by Architect until acceptable sheen, color, and texture
achieved.
b. On actual wood surfaces, provide two 4" x 8" samples of natural and stained wood finish; label and
identify each location and application.
c. On concrete masonry, provide two 4" square samples of masonry for each type of finish and color,
defining filler, prime and finish coat.
d. On actual wall surfaces and other exterior and interior building components, duplicate painted finishes
of prepared samples.
(1) Provide full-coat finish samples on min. 100 sq. ft. of surface, as directed, until required
sheen, color and texture obtained.
(2) Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work.
5. Final acceptance of colors from samples applied on job.
DELIVERY AND STORAGE
Deliver materials to site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's label and
following information:
1. Name or title of material.
2. Fed. Spec. number, if applicable.
3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture.
4. Manufacturer's name.
5. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents.
6. Thinning instructions.
7. Application instructions.
8. Color name and number.
B.
Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers.
1. Maintain containers used for storage of paint in clean condition, free offoreign materials and residue.
2. Protect from freezing where necessary.
3. Keep storage area neat and orderly.
4. Remove oily rags and waste daily.
5. Take all precautions to ensure that workmen and work areas adequately protected from fire hazards and health
hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application of paints.
COLOR SELECTION
Architect will select colors from manufacturer's standard or custom formulations for shades and tints required.
B.
Individual elements (columns, furring, frames, changes in surface level or plane) may require change of hue or color at
the discretion of Architect.
acsb
(Mol J 2/2003)
09900-2
Paints and Coatings
1
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I.
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C. Interior public or functional spaces (commons, offices, classrooms, etc.) will generally require that one wall be an "accent
wall".
1. Accent walls defmed as change in color, tint or hue from that of other walls.
2. Cut comers. or other locations where change between colors occur, straight, true and even.
D. Contractor provide graphics in following forms:
1. Horizontal stripes continuous for the length of Corridors, interrupted only by openings, min. of three each wall,
8" wide.
2. Design graphics for selected locations, size and design established by Architect at time of color selection, min
of three, 100 s.f. each.
1.07 EXTRA MA TERlALS
A. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
B. Furnish Owner list of all colors utilized on project along with manufacturer's name, product name and, if custom color,
formulation.
C. Furnish extra materials consisting of one full gallon of each paint product listed in paint schedule and utilized in Project,
with lids sealed tightly for storage and identified with appropriate labels matching list of colors required above and
including application instructions.
1.08 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Apply water-base paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between
50DF (lODC) and 90DF (32DC), unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces painted and surrounding air temperatures are between
45DF (7DC) and 95DF (35DC), unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
C. Do not paint in snow, rain, fog or rnist, or when relative humidity exceeds 85%, or to damp or wet surfaces, unless
otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.
1. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas and surfaces to be painted enclosed and heated
within temperature limits specified by paint manufacturer during application and drying periods.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of following:
1. Coronado Paint Company (Coronado).
2. Devoe and Raynolds Co. (Devoe).
3. Duron Paint and Wall coverings (Duron).
4. Flame Control Coatings, Inc. (FCC)
5. Glidden Coatings and Resins, Division of SCM Corporation (Glidden).
6. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore).
7. PPG Industries, Pittsburgh Paints (PPG).
8. Pratt and Lambert (P & L).
2.02 MA TERlALS
A. Material Quality:
1. Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials
manufacturers.
2. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as standard, best-grade product not acceptable.
B. Proprietary names used to designate color or materials not intended to imply that products of named manufacturers
required to exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers.
C. Color Pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated.
D. Lead content in pigment limited to contain not more than 0.06% lead, as lead metal based on total non-volatile (dry-film)
of paint by weight.
acsb
(hboI12/2003)
09900-3
Paints and Coatings
I
I
I PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
I
A. Applicator examine areas and conditions under which painting work applied and notify Contractor in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work.
1. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions corrected in manner acceptable to Applicator.
2. Starting of painting work construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within any particular
area.
I
B.
Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation
of durable paint film.
I
3.02
SURFACE PREP ARA nON
I
A. General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions and herein
specified, for each particular substrate condition.
1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required; notify Architect in writing
of any anticipated problems in using specified coating systems with substrates primed by others.
2. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place
and not to be finish-painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting
operations.
a. Remove, if necessary, for complete painting of items and adjacent surfaces.
b. Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall removed items.
3. Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments.
a. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning.
b. Program cleaning and painting so contaminants from cleaning process will not fall on wet,
newly-painted surfaces.
I
I
I
I
B. Cementitious Materials:
1. Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete block, cement plaster and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement
panels for paint by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as required to
remove glaze.
2. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests.
3. If surfaces found sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of fmish paint, correct condition before
application of paint.
4. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions.
5. Clean concrete floor surfaces scheduled with commercial solution or muriatic acid, or other etching cleaner
before painting.
6. Flush floor with clean water to neutralize acid, and allow to dry before painting.
I
I
c.
Wood:
1.
2.
Clean wood surfaces of dirt, oil, or other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as
required.
a. Sand smooth those finished surfaces exposed to view, and dust off.
b. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply thin coat of white shellac or other recommended
knot sealer, before application of priming coat.
c. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood-filler.
d. Sand smooth when dried.
Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job-painted immediately upon delivery to job.
a. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of such wood, including cabinets, counters, cases,
paneling.
b. When transparent finish required, use spar varnish for back-priming.
c. Backprime paneling on interior partitions only where masonry, plaster, or other wet wall construction
occurs on backside.
d. Seal tops, bottoms, and cut-outs of unprirned wood doors with heavy coat of vamish or equivalent
sealer immediately upon delivery to job.
I
I
I
I
I
D. Ferrous Metals:
1. Clean ferrous surfaces not galvanized or shop-coated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign
substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning.
I
acsb
(hbol/2/2003)
09900-4
Paints and Coatings
I
I
I
2. Touch-up shop-applied prime coats wherever damaged or bare, where required by other Sections; clean and
touch-up with same type shop primer.
Galvanized Surfaces:
1. Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with non-petroleum based solvent.
E.
I
3.03
MATERIALS PREPARATION
A. Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
I
B. Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
I
C. Stir materials before application to produce mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during application.
1. Do not stir surface film into material.
2. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using.
3.04 APPLICATION
I
A. General:
1. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions; use applicators and techniques best suited for
substrate and type of material being applied.
a. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes, indicated in "schedules" of Contract Documents.
b. Provide finish coats compatible with prime paints used.
2. Apply first finish coat with light tint of second finish coat color.
a. First finish coat must contrast with prime coat and second finish coat to identify it as such.
3. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.
a. Paint surfaces behind permanently-fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final
installation of equipment.
4. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with flat, non-specular black paint.
5. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as exterior faces, unless otherwise indicated.
6. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
7. Omit first coat (primer) on shop primed metal surfaces and touch-up painted, unless otherwise indicated.
8. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through fmal coat of paint, until paint
film ofunifornl finish, color and appearance.
a. Give special attention to insure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed
fasteners receive dry f1lm thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
I
I
I
I
I
B. Scheduling Painting:
1. Apply frrst-coat material to surfaces cleaned, pretreated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable
after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.
2. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying.
3. Do not recoat until paint dried so it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb
pressure, and application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of undercoat.
I
I
C. Minimum Coating Thickness:
1. Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to establish total dry film thickness
indicated or, if not indicated, recommended by coating manufacturer.
I
D. Prime Coats:
1. Apply prime coat to material required to be painted or finished, and not prime coated by others.
2. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure
finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.
I
E. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes:
1. Completely cover to provide opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage.
2. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections not
acceptable.
I
F. Transparent (Clear) finish:
1. Use multiple coats to produce glass-smooth surface f1lm of even luster.
2. Provide finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other
surface imperfections.
3. Provide satin finish for final coats, unless otherwise indicated.
I
I
acsb
(hbol/2/2003)
09900-5
Paints and Coatings
I
I
I
I
3.05
A.
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
3.06
A.
I
I
I
I
3.07
I
I
I
I
G.
Completed Work:
1. Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage.
2. Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
Owner reserves right to invoke following material testing procedure at any time, and any number of times during field
painting:
1. Engage services of an independent testing laboratory to sample paint being used.
2. Samples of materials delivered to project site taken, identified and sealed, and certified in presence of
Contractor.
3. Testing laboratory perform appropriate tests for any or all of following characteristics:
a. Abrasion resistance.
b. Apparent reflectivity.
c. Flexibility.
d. Washability.
e. Absorption.
f. Accelerated weathering.
g. Dry opacity.
h. Accelerated yellowness.
i. Recoating.
J. Skinning.
k. Color retention.
1. Alkali resistance.
m. Quantitative materials analysis.
B.
If test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements, Contractor directed to stop painting
work, and:
1. Remove non-complying paint.
2. Pay for testing.
3. Repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint.
4. Remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint, two coatings
are non-compatible.
CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION
Clean-Up:
1. As work Progresses, remove discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags from site at end of each work day.
2. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint spattered surfaces.
3. Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or otherwise
damage finished surfaces.
B.
Protection:
1. Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work.
2. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect.
3. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly-painted finishes.
4. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of
painting operations.
5. At completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces.
EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A.
B.
General: Provide the following Paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated.
Ferrous Metal: Primer not required on shop-primed items.
1. Full Gloss Alkyd Enamel: 2 finish coats over primer.
a. Primer: Synthetic Rust-Inhibitive Primer.
(1) Devoe: 41820 Shop and Field Alkyd Primer.
b. First and Second Coats: Gloss Alkyd Enamel.
(1) Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac Alkyd Gloss Enamel.
C.
Zinc-Coated Metal: Primer not required on shop-primed items.
1. High Gloss Alkyd Enamel: 2 finish coats over primer.
a. Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer.
(1) Devoe: 13201 Mirrolac Galvanized Metal Primer.
acsb
(hbol/212003)
09900-6
Paints and Coatings
I
I
I
3.08
I
I
-
I
I
I
I
g
g
a
g
I
I
o
u
I
b. First and Second Coats: High Gloss Alkyd Enamel.
(1) Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac InteriorlExterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel.
INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE
A.
General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated.
B.
Concrete Masonry Units:
1. Eggshell Alkyd Enamel Finish: 2 coats over filled surface with min. total dry film thickness of 3.5 mils,
excluding filler coat.
a. Block Filler: High-Performance Latex Block Filler. Apply filler coat at a rate to ensure complete
coverage with pores filled.
(1) Devoe: 52901 Bloxfil Acrylic Flat Latex Block Filler.
b. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat.
(1) Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.
c. Finish Coat: Interior, Eggshell, Odorless, Alkyd Enamel.
(1) Devoe: 23XX Velour Alkyd Eggshell Enamel.
2. High-Gloss Polyester Epoxy: Two coat high-gloss polyester epoxy coating filled surface with min. total dry
film thickness of 8 mils, excluding filler coal.
a. Filler: Pigmented sealers over concrete under high performance polyester epoxy coatings:
(1) Devoe: 124XX Tru-Glaze 4 Epoxy Gloss.
b. First and Second Coat: High-Gloss Polyester Epoxy.
(1) Devoe: 124XX Tru-Glaze 4 Epoxy Gloss.
Gypsum Drywall Systems:
1. Lusterless (Flat) Emulsion Finish: 2 coats.
a. Primer: White, Interior, Latex-Based Primer.
(1) Devoe: 50801 Wonder-Tones Latex Primer and Sealer
b. Finish Coat: Interior, Flat, Latex-Based Paint.
(1) Devoe: 36XX Wonder-Tones Latex Flat Wall Paint.
2. Odorless Eggshell Alkyd Enamel Finish: 3 coats with min. total dry film thickness of2.5 mils.
a. Primer: White, Interior, Latex-Based Primer.
(1) Devoe: 50801 Wonder-Tones Latex Primer and Sealer.
b. First and Second Coats: Interior, Eggshell, Odorless, Alkyd Enamel.
(1) Devoe: 23XX Velour Alkyd Eggshell Enamel.
c.
D. Plaster
1. Eggshell Enamel Finish: 3 coats with min. total dry film thickness of2.5 mils.
a. Primer: Interior, Flat, Latex-Based Paint.
(1) Devoe: 36XX Wonder-Tones Interior Latex Flat Wall Paint.
b. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat.
(1) Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.
c. Finish Coat: Interior, Eggshell, Odorless, Alkyd Enamel.
(I) Devoe: 23XX Velour Alkyd Eggshell Enamel.
E. Woodwork and Hardboard:
1. Full Gloss Enamel: Finish: 3 coats.
a. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat.
(1) Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.
b. First and Second Coats: Gloss Alkyd Enamel.
(1) Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac InteriorlExterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel.
F. Stained Woodwork:
1. Stained - Varnish Rubbed Finish: 3 finish coats over stain plus filler on open grain wood. Wipe filler before
applying first varnish coat.
a. Stain Coat: Oil-Type Interior Wood Stain.
(1) Devoe: 96XX Wonder Woodstain Alkyd Stain.
b. First Coat: Cut Shellac.
(1) Devoe: 4900 Wonder Woodsealer Quick-Dry Sealer.
c. Filler Coat: Paste Wood Filler.
(1) Devoe: 4800 Wonder Woodstain Interior Paste Wood Filler.
d. Second and Third Coats: Oil Rubbing Vamish.
(1) Devoe: 4600 Wonder Wood Satin Alkyd Varnish.
acsb
(hbol/2/2003)
09900- 7
Paints and Coatings
I
I
I
-
-
-
-
-
I.
I
I
I
I
-
-
m
-
I
-
G. Ferrous Metal: Primer not required on shop-primed items.
1. Full Gloss Enamel Finish: 2 coats over primer with min. total dry film thickness of2.5 mils.
a. Primer: Synthetic, Quick-Drying, Rust Inhibitive Primer.
(1) Devoe: 41820 Shop and Field Alkyd Primer.
b. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat.
(1) Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.
c. Finish Coat: Exterior, Gloss, Alkyd Enamel.
(1) Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac InteriorlExterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel.
H. Zinc-Coated Metal: Primer not required on shop-primed items.
1. Full Gloss Enamel Finish: 2 coats over primer with min. total dry film thickness of 2.5 mils.
a. Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer.
(1) Devoe: 13201 Mirrolac Galvanized Metal Primer.
b. Undercoat: Interior Enamel Undercoat.
(1) Devoe: 8801 Velour Alkyd Enamel Undercoat.
c. Finish Coat: Exterior, Gloss, Alkyd Enamel.
(I) Devoe: 70XX Mirrolac InteriorlExterior Alkyd Gloss Enamel.
END OF SECTION 09900
acsb
(hboI12/2003)
09900-8
Paints and Coatings
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a.
I
I
o
I
D
D
I
D
U
U
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10110 - MARKERBOARDS
01 - GENERAL
A - Shop Drawings and Samples
1. Shop drawings - submit 1 sepia and 1 print to architect for approval.
2. Samples - Submit 6" x 6" physical sample.
02 - MANUFACTURERS
A - The following manufacturers will be acceptable PROVIDED their products meet these specifications:
1. Greensteel, Inc.
2. Claridge
3. American Chalkboard Co., Inc.
4. Carolina Chalk Board Co.
03 - SUBMITTALS
A - Product Data - Submit manufacturer's technical date, product specifications, installation instructions, and
other pertinent information as applicable for each product or material specified.
B - Test Reports - Submit certified laboratory test reports as necessary to show compliance with specified
requirements.
C - Shop Drawings - Shop drawings shall meet requirements of applicable portions of General and
Supplemental Conditions. Shop drawings shall show gauges, profiles, sections of materials, details of
construction, hardware, methods of attachment and/or anchoring, all as applicable for specified materials.
04 - SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY
A . Porcelain Enamel Markerboards Warranty - Furnish the manufacturer's written warranty, agreeing to
replace, for the lifetime of the building, porcelain steel enamel marker boards which do not retain their original
writing and erasing qualities, become slick and shiny, or exhibit crazing, cracking or flaking; provided
manufacturer's instructions with regard to handling, installation, protection and maintenance have been followed.
Replacement is limited to material replacement only; labor for removal and reinstallation is not included.
05 - MATERIALS
B - Drymarker Boards:
1. Drymarker boards shall be 4'- 0" x 8'- 0" porcelain enamel steel manufactured to exceed the performance
specifications for porcelain enamel S 104 of the Porcelain Institute. The drymarker boards shall be capable of
supporting papers by means of magnets. The writing surfaces shall resist wear and damage from shock and
abrasion and shall not dent, shatter or crack. The surfaces shall retain their original color, writing, and erasing
qualities and shall not become glossy or shiny in normal classroom use. The reflectance factor shall not be less
than 15% nor more than 20% as recommended by the American Illuminating Engineering Society and the
American Institute of Architects, in their report. American Standard Practice for School Lighting, A.IA No 32F28
(see drawings for some smaller lengths required).
2. Steel - Base metal shall be special quality "Enameling Iron or Steel" of low metalloid and copper content,
especially manufactured and processed for temperatures over 1400 degrees used in coating porcelain on steel
units for architectural purposes, and shall be of minimum 24 gauge.
a) Base metals not acceptable:
1) Aluminum
2) Aluminized cold rolled steel
3) Metal less than specified thickness
3. Facing Surfaces - (Dry Markerboard)
a) Board surfaces shall consist of the following:
ACSB 10110-1
(HBOL 12/2003) Markerboards
I
-
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1) A custom ground primer coat of .0025" minimum thickness.
2) A vitreous-porcelain writing surface coating of .0025" minimum thickness.
3) The reverse side of the steel base sheet shall receive a ground coat of .0025" and a spray
coat of silica for better lamination adhesion.
4) The panel edges at butt joints shall be porcelain enamel.
5) Fuse cover and ground coats to the steel at the manufacturers' standard firing
temperature, but not less than 1200 degrees F. (649 degrees C).
6) The following Drymarker Board surfaces are not acceptable:
(7) Low fired organic (paint) coatings
(8) Porcelain coatings less than .005" minimum thickness on writing side and .0025" on
reverse side.
(9) Porcelain coating on one side only.
4. The manufacturer shall, if requested, furnish the architect with a magnetic layer thickness gauge,
O'Hommel Model M894A or equal, to ascertain that vitreous-porcelain coating meets specified thickness.
5. The drymarker board surfaced steel shall be factory laminated to 7/16" thick particle board core. The
backing sheet is to be aluminum sheet of .005" thickness.
6. Lamination - The surface facing and the backing shall be bonded to the core material by means of a
special flexible adhesive developed for this purpose with no un-bonded area. The face and back shall not
be removable without rupturing the core material nor shall the panel delaminate under normal school room
use.
7. Joints - Where vertical joints occur, a fourteen (14) gauge continuous concealed steel spline shall be fitted
tightly into grooves in the core material. All rabbeting to be done at the factory so as to give a smooth butt
joint. Exposed metal joint covers will not be acceptable.
c
Trim:
1.
All exposed aluminum shall be No. 6063-T5 anodized satin finish in extruded shapes of approved
design and thickness.
Trim Type - equal to Greensteel AX Series
2.
o - Accessories:
1. Chalktray - Furnish manufacturer's standard continuous box type aluminum chalktray with slanted front
and cast plastic end closures for each markerboard.
a) Extend chalktray to end of both vertical edges of the board and provide :y." radius on corners and
polish all edges. A 900 edge cut is not acceptable.
b) End cap shall be plastic and contoured to match chalktray.
2. Map Rail - Furnish map rail at the top of each unit, complete with the following accessories:
a) Display Rail - Provide continuous cork display rail 1" wide, as indicated, integral with the map rail.
Extend display rail to end of both vertical edges.
b) End Stops - Provide one end stop at each end of the map rail.
c) Map Hooks - Provide four (4) map hooks with flexible metal clips for each 1 0' of map rail or
fraction thereof.
d) Flagholder - Provide one flagholder for each 10' of map rail.
f) Colors - Colors for chalk and tack material shall be as selected by the architect from
manufacturer's standard color line.
06 - PREPARATION
A - Field Measurements - Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication to
ensure proper fitting of the work. Allow for trimming and fitting wherever taking of field measurements before
fabrication might delay work.
07 -INSTALLATION
A - Deliver factory-built markerboard and tackboard units completely assembled in one piece without joints,
ACS8
(H80L 12/2003)
10110-2
Markerboards
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
whenever possible. Where dimensions exceed panel size, provide 2 or more pieces of equal length as acceptable
to the architect. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, pre-fit components at the factory,
disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site. Use splines at joints to maintain surface alignment.
B - Install units in locations and mounting heights indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. Keep perimeter liens straight, plumb, and level. Provide all grounds, clips, backing materials,
adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim and accessories necessary for a complete installation. Mount 33" from finished
floor to top of chalk tray.
1. Anchor all components securely using tamper-proof fasteners, where accessible or with
completely concealed continuous hangers.
C - Coordinate job-site assembled units with grounds, trim, and accessories. Join all parts with a neat,
precision fit.
D - Bottom edge of tackboards terminating at bases shall be protected with a "J" aluminum molding. Set
molding horizontally prior to installing tackboards.
08 - ADJUST AND CLEAN
A - Verify that accessories required for each unit have been properly installed and that operating units function
properly.
B - Clean units in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Break-in markerboards only as
recommended by the manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
ACSB
(HBOL 12/2003)
10110-3
Markerboards
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 10155
TOILET PARTITIONS (SOLID PHENOLIC)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A. All toilet partitions, plasters, stall doors, hardware, and complete installation.
1.02 RELATED WQRK
A. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: Wall Construction
B. Section 04300 - Unit Masonry System: Masonry Walls
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01300 Submittals: submittal procedure
B. Submit six (6) sets of shop drawings, including details and a sample of each item of hardware for architect's
approval.
C. Provide drawings showing locations for adequate steel reinforcements or wood blocking in walls to be
provided by others for proper securement of the finished work.
D. Furnish 1" x 4" sample of solid plastic material showing color face and finished edges.
E. Furnish documentation on hardware, headrail, continuous wall bracket to meet specification as outlined, as
well as one each of stainless steel fasteners, door hardware, mounting hardware, and aluminum headrail.
1.04 MANUFACTURERS
A. The following are acceptable manufacturers (when modified to specification):
1. Santana Polymar HDPE Solid Plastic School Specification.
2. Comtec HDPE Solid Plastic
3. Melpar HP Solid Phenolic
4. Other manufacturers that meet or exceed written specifications may submit for prior approval, listing any
deviations from specifications.
5. Rockville Partitions, Inc., solid phenolic
1.05 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturers standard ten (10) year Commercial Warranty against breakage, delamination or rust.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Toilet partitions shall be floor mounted, overhead braced where not connected to CMU partitions overhead
braced and non-overhead braced shall have non-corrosive panels and pilasters.
B. Panels, doors and pilasters shall be fabricated from Polymer resins under high pressure forming a single
component section which is waterproof, non-absorbent and has a self-lubricating surface that resists marking
with pens, pencils or other writing utensils. All panels, doors and pilasters to arrive at job site with special
protective plastic covering.
Acsb
(Mott2/2003
10155-1
Toilet Partitions (Solid Phenolic)
I
I
I
C. Construction
1. Single component construction of solid Poly-Mar HD in colors that extend from the surface throughout
the entire thickness of the panels, doors and pilasters.
I
2. Doors, panels and pilasters shall be I" thick and all edges machined to a radius of .250" and all exposed
surfaces to be free of saw marks.
I
3. Dividing panels shall be 55" high and mounted at 14" above fmished floor. Aluminum edging strips shall
be fastened to the bottom edge of all panels full length. Panel at the end of layout shall extend up and
fasten into headrail.
I
I
4. Doors shall be 55" high and mounted at 14" above finished floor. Aluminum edging strips shall be
fastened to the bottom edge of all doors full width.
5. Pilasters shall be 82" high and fastened to 3" high, 20 gauge stainless steel shoes with theft-proof sex
bolts.
I
6. Color: to be selected by the architect.
D. Door Hardware shall be as follows:
I
1. Continuous hinge full height of door. Type 304 satin finish stainless steel, extra heavy-duty 16 gauge
(1.6mm). Through bolt to door and style with 12 theft-resistant, one-way screws fastened into threaded
metal inserts.
I
2. Each door shall be furnished with one (1) coat hook/bumper of heavy chrome plated Zamac with rubber
bumper. (Handicapped doors also include: one (1) door pull and one (1) wall stop).
I
3. Door latch shall have shock-resistant nylon track with I" (25mm) wide keeper formed from one piece
118" 11 gauge (3mm) stainless steel. Through-bolted to stile with theft-resistant one-way screws fastened
into threaded metal inserts. Latch to comply with ADA at handicap stalls.
I
4. Pilaster shoes shall be anchored to finish floor with No.5 plastic anchors and No. 14 stainless steel
phillips head screws.
I
5. Brackets shall be natural anodized aluminum 1/8" thick minimum continuous double ear and are to be
located at panel to wall connections full height of panel, are to be thru-bolted connections 8" O.c. with
No. 14 5/8" tamper-proof stainless steel A Torx@ screws both ears of brackets. Continuous natural
anodized aluminum 1/8" thick minimum as shown on drawings are to be used at all other panels to CMU
divider connections with 5/8" tamper-proof stainless steel thru-bolts, four per jamb.
I
I
6. Headrail shall be heavy aluminum extrusion (6063-T6 Alloy) with bright dip finish in anti-grip
configuration weighing not less than 1.199 lbs. per linear foot. Headrail shall be fastened to tops of
pilasters and headrail brackets by thru-bolting with one-way sex bolts.
I
7. Headrail bracket shall be of 16 gauge stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.01 INSTALLATION
I
Acsb
(Mol 12/2003
I
10155-2
Toilet Partitions (Solid Phenolic)
I
I
I
1
1
I
1
1
I.
1
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
A - Erection of partitions, etc. shall be in accordance with the manufacturers standard recommendations.
B - All parts shall be erected in a substantial manner, straight, level and plumb.
C - No evidence of drilling, cutting or patching shall be visible in the finished work.
D - Clearance at vertical edges of doors shall be uniform top to bottom and shall not exceed 3/16".
E - Finished surfaces shall be cleaned after installation and left free of imperfections.
F - Adjust hardware for proper operation after installation.
G - Clean exposed surfaces of partitions, hardware, fittings, and accessories.
END OF SECTION
'Acsb
(hboI12/2003
10155-3
Toilet Partitions (Solid Phenolic)
I
I
DIVISION 10 - METALS
SECTION 10200 - METAL LOUVERS
01 - SUBMITTALS
I
A - Shop Drawings and Schedule - Submit 1 sepia and 1 print for all work of this section to architect.
I
B - Samples - Sub-section of louver to show sill, louvers and color.
02 - MANUFACTURERS
I
A - The following manufacturers are acceptable:
I
I
1. Airolite
2. Airstream
3. All-Lite
03 - MATERIALS
A - Stationary extruded rectangular arched aluminum louvers 6" deep with 450 straight louvers - wall thickness to be .125,
louvers to have extruded extended .125 sills in accordance with shape and size shown on the drawings (two required).
I
B - Louvers to be assembled entirely by welding. Blades shall be supported and aligned by concealed extruded aluminum
blade braces and vertical!" supports located at each vertical mullion and maximum 72" intermediate intervals. Louvers shall
be fitted with 1/2" mesh .063" aluminum bird screen in a removable extruded aluminum frame. Aluminum sill flashings shall
be fabricated and installed to prevent water infiltration at each invisible mullion.
I
I
C - All louvers shall be factory finished after assembly with Kynar 500 coating to match MBCI Signature 300/Kynar 500,
standard color to be chosen by architect.
04 - STORAGE AND INST ALLA TION
I
A - Store louvers in a protected dry enclosed area. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in a water-tight
manner.
I
05 - LOCATION
I
A - See drawings for locations of gable end and side wall louvers.
B - See mechanical drawings for louvers specified under those sections.
END OF SECTION
I
I
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
10200-1
Metal Louvers
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A - Fumish and inst awning-type canopies in the kitchen food court area - inc Cling all labor and material.
Canopy to be over c ier's station and entrance to each serving line a skirts over food serving lines.
Include all material an ame work
B - Shop drawings shall be submitte of design by architect - e sepia and one print for all work of this
section to the architect for approval.
C - Samples: submit samples of material to inc
02 - MATERIALS
A - Fabric to be flame retardant mee' g the standards of the
NFPA-70I, CPAI-84, MUSS- 2, UL-214 classified.
e Fire Marshal ASTM-E-84, Class A,
A - Contractor to a weight thousand dollars in base bid for purchase of all awning 'n kitchen food court
to include 1 or and material. Design to be provided by architect, colors to be se ted by architect.
Submit eakdown of actual cost for approval, any credit difference will be used for
END OF SECTION
;J. J:". C.
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
10530-1
Awnings
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 10800
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Toilet accessories.
B. Grab bars.
C. Attachment hardware.
1.03 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: In wall framing and plates for support
of accessories.
B. Section 10160 - Toilet Partitions (Solid Phenolic).
1.04 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A 117.1 - Safety Standards for the Handicapped.
B. ASTM AI23 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel products.
C. ASTM A 165 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet,
and Strip.
D. ASTM A269 - Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General
Service.
1.05 SUBMITI ALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.
B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, and attachment
methods.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and
perimeter conditions requiring special attention.
1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to ANSI A 117.1 code for access for the handicapped.
1.07 FIELD MEASUREMENTS
A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039.
B. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement to
receive anchor attachments.
acsb
(hbol 12/2003
10800-1
Toilet and Bath Accessories
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.01 MANUFACTURERS
A. American Specialties, Inc.
B. Other acceptable manufacturers offering equivalent products.
1. Bobrick Washroom Equipment
2. Bradley Corporation
3. McKinney/Parker
C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM AI67, Type 304.
B. Tubing: ASTM A269, stainless steel.
C. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized.
2.03 F ABRICA TrON
A. Weld and grind joints offabricated components, smooth.
B. Form exposed surfaces from single sheet of stock, free of joints. Form surfaces
flat without distortion. Maintain surfaces without scratches or dents.
C. Fabricate grab bars of tubing, free of visible joints, return to wall with end
attachment flanges. Form bar with 1-1/2 inches (38 rnm) clear of wall surface.
Knurl grip surfaces.
D. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.
E. Provide steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.
2.04 KEYING
A. Supply 3 keys for each accessory to owner.
B. Master key all accessories.
2.05 FINISHES
A. Galvanized: ASTM AI23 to 1.25 oZ.sq yd (380 gisq m). Galvanize ferrous metal
and fastening devices.
B. Stainless steel: No.4 satin luster finish.
acsb
(!lbo/ /2/2003
10800-2
Toilet and Bath Accessories
I
I
PART 3 EXECUTION
I
3.01
EXAMINATION
A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039.
I
B. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and dimensions are as
instructed by the manufacturer.
I
C. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.
I
I
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.
B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.
3.03 INSTALLATION
I
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ANSI
AII7.1.
I
B - Toilet accessories shall include complete finish hardware and accessories for Installation
of each item.
I
C - Install accessories at locations indicated.
I
D - Install work of this section plumb, level, clean and free of defects.
I
E - Unless otherwise specified, make attachments to masonry with non-corrosive expansion
shields or toggle bolts, and to stud type partitions with toggle bolts.
F - All stainless steel mirrors to be installed with tamper-proof screws at each comer.
I
G - Do not remove factory labels on mirrors until after mirrors have been installed.
I
H- Coordinate with mechanical, electrical and other trades to avoid pipes, vents, and conduit
in the wall.
3.04 ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE
I
A. The following specifications for T A-3 through T A-8 accessories are taken from Bobrick
or equal products from Bradley and American Dispenser and are acceptable if approved
by the architect:
I
Item TA-l - Toilet Tissue Dispenser (one each water closet)
Bobrick B-2888
I
I
Item T A-2 - Towel Dispenser (one for each lavatory and sink)
Bobrick B-236
acsb
(hbol /2/2003
I
10800-3
Toilet and Bath Accessories
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Item T A-3 - Towel Receptacle (one each second floor toilet, two each gang toilet)
Bobrick B3644
Item T A-4 - Mirror
Bobrick B290-8 16" x 20"
Item T A-5 - HC Mirror (over each lavatory for handicapped)
Bobrick B293 16" x 30"
Item T A-SA - Horizontal Grab Bar (at handicap toilets)
Bobrick B-62061 x 42" 1 1/2" O.D.
Item T A-5B - Horizontal Grab Bar (at handicap toilets)
Bobrick B-62061 x 36 1 1/2" O.D.
Item T A-5C - Horizontal Grab Bar (at Handicap toilets)
Bobrick B-62061 x 24 1 Y2 O.D.
Item T A-6 - Feminine Napkin Disposal (one each faculty women's toilet, one each
unisex toilet)
Bobrick B-254
Item T A-7 - not used
Item T A-8 - Liquid Soap Dispenser
Bobrick B-2112
Item T A-9 - Not Used
Item T A-tO - Not Used
Item TA-II - Not Used
Item TA-12 - Mirror - Stainless Steel (located as shown on drawings)
Provide one in each gang toilet
Bobrick B-I666, 24" x 48"
Mounting Heights for Handicap Accessories:
See Drawings for mounting heights. .
END OF SECTION
acsb
(hbol 12/2003
10800-4
Toilet and Bath Accessories
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 10- SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10811- BABY CHANGrNG STATIONS
1 - SUBMITTALS
A - Provide in accordance with section 01330 - Submittal Procedures:
1. product data for changing stations, materials, finishes, mounting hardware, and accessories
2. test reports from independent company showing compliance with paragraph 1.1 C
3. shop drawings showing dimensions, mounting heights, and installation details.
4. Installation and maintenance instructions.
5. certificate of product liability insurance required by paragraph 1.1 B
6. copy of warranty required by paragraph 3.3 for review.
1.1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE
A - Changing station shall be provided and installed in compliance with ICCIANSI A117.1
B _ Provide liability insurance coverage to protect owner from financial loss due to accident or injury during the life
of changing stations, Minimum coverage shall be $1,000,000 general liability and $10,000,000 excess liability.
C - Changing station shall have been performance tested by an independent testing company
1.2 - REFERENCES
A - ASTM A167 - stainless and heat resisting chromium-nickel steel plate, sheet and strip
B - ANSI 535.3 - criteria for safety symbols
C - ANSI Z535.4 - product safety signs and labels
D _ ICCI ANSI A 117.1 - International Code Council! American National Standards Institute on accessible and usable buildings
and facilities.
2 - MANUFACTURERS
A _ Brocar Products, Inc: 4335 River Road, Cincinnati, Ohio (basis of specification)
Koala Corporation
Equal
3 - MATERIALS
A - Stainless Steel - ASTM A 167 Type 304, commercial grade, brushed finish, 16 gage minimum
3.1 - PRODUCTS - STAINLESS STEEL CHANGING STATION
A - Brocar Model 100 SSR--SM (basis for Specification)
B _ Type: Horizontal, surface mounted, fold down, stainless steel baby diaper changing station with concave changing bed.
C - Construction:
1. Body: 16 gage stainless steel with seamless welds, softened edges, and rounded plastic comers.
2. replaceable tray liner: Insulating polystyrene.
D _ Nominal Size: 36" wide X 23.25" high X 4" (when closed) or 21 "(when open).
E - Rated load capacity: 400 pounds
F _ Operation: opens and closes with pneumatic gas spring mechanism in concealed cylinder and stainless steel hinges.
G _ equip with child protection safety strap with cam buckle adjustable with one hand.
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
10811-1
Baby Changing Stations
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.2 ACCESSORIES
A - Mounting Hardware: provide all changing stations with fasteners and other hardware of type of type and size recommended
by manufacturer for type of installation and substrate for complete secure installation.
3.3 WARRANTY
1. provide 1 year warranty to cover repair or replacement of defective product. Warranty period to begin at date of
substantial completion.
4 - EXECUTION
A - Preparation:
1. coordinate any blocking requirements
2. provide templates and rough-in measurements as required
B - Installation
1. changing stations and other accessories shall be installed to comply with requirements for accessible mounting heights,
protrusion into accessible routes, and other requirements ofICCIANSI AI17.1
2. install units level, plumb, and secure.
3. after installation, open and close unit a minimum of three time. Verify unites operate smoothly and properly latch. Adjust
as required for proper safe use.
4. wash exposed surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft clean cloths. Do not use
abrasives. Take care to remove all dirt from comers
END OF SECTION
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
10811-2
Baby Changing Stations
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
SECTION 10900 - FIREFIGHTING DEVICES
01 - SUBMITTALS
A - Shop Drawings and Samples
1. Shop Drawings - Not Required
2. Submit manufacturer's printed specifications and installation instructions for all fire fighting devices required.
3. Samples Required - None
02 - MANUFACTURERS
A - For the purpose of designating type and quality for work under this subdivision, materials specified are based on product
manufacturers as listed:
Potter-Roemer, Inc.
J. L. Industries, Division of 1. N. Johnson Company
Elkhart Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc.
General Fire Extinguisher Corporation
W. C. Allen Manufacturing Company
Larsens Manufacturing Company
Kidde
03 - PRODUCTS
A - Provide wall mounted fire extinguishers. Provide only new fire extinguishers which are approved and labeled by
Underwriters' Laboratories.
B-
Provide manufacturer's standard mounting brackets. Secure to mounting surface in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
C-
Provide the following type at locations as shown on drawings:
1. Type FE-I
Fire Extinguisher Cabinet - Academy Fire-Fx rated tub; flush vertical duo; A.D.A. compliance;
semi-recessed 4" return trim; flush cup pull, #180 clear anodized aluminum frame rolled edge;
clear acrylic glazing, as manufactured by J.L. Industries. Provide one-hour rating in one-hour
rated walls and two-hour rating in two-hour rated walls.
a.
b.
Fire Extinguisher -Cosmic E Model 10 capacity 10#, Mark II series bracket, cabinet mounted,
pressure indicating gauge, Class A, B, C extinguisher as manufactured by 1. L. Industries.
2. Type FE-2
a. Wall Bracket - Mark II series.
b. Fire Extinguisher - Cosmic E Modell 0 capacity 10# bracket mounted pressure indicating gauge,
Class A, B, C extinguisher as manufactured by J. L. Industries.
04 - EXECUTION
A _ Installer must examine the substratum and conditions under which the fire fighting devices are to be installed, and notify
the Contractor of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
B - Mounting Height of Cabinet: Bottom 48" above floor.
END OF SECTION
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
10900-1
Firefighting Devices
I
.1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
DIVISION 11 - FURNISHINGS
SECTION 11130 - TV WALL-MOUNTED BRACKETS
01- SUBMITTALS
A - Shop Drawing - not required.
B _ Manufacturer's Literature - submit showing conformance to specifications.
C _ Samples - submit one (1) physical sample for examination of quality.
02 - MANUFACTURERS
A _ Manufacturer of TV wall mount shall have been in business at least five (5) years and can exhibit full product
performance with no failures.
03 - MATERIALS
A - Description:
Wall mount for 25" TV monitor
Load capacity 150 Ibs.
Swivel 360 degrees/tilt 0 to 10 degrees
Shelf width _ adjustable 24" to 31": 16 gauge cold-rolled steel, MIG welded, height 20" to 26"
Mounting arm 12 gauge cold-rolled steel, MIG welded at 90 degree angle
Interior wall mount support plate of 12 gauge cold-rolled steel per type of wall construction
All mounting hardware must be included to match type of wall construction
Complete installation required
Shelf located under TV for VCR
All ETV brackets are to be thru-wall bolted in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
04 - LOCATION
A _ Provide at all ETV wall mount location where a TV outlet is located at 66" A.F.F. Refer to architectural
floor plan and electrical drawings for outlet locations. Architect to give mounting height in the field.
05 - INSTALLATION
A _ Installation shall be in accordance with approved submittals, contract drawings and specifications and
manufacturer's installation instructions accompanying materials to job site.
END OF SECTION
acsb
(hbol J 212003)
11130
TV Wall-Mounted Brackets
I
I
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
SECTION 12500 - VENETIAN BLINDS
01 - SUBMITTALS
I
A - Shop Drawings - Sepia and one print to Architect showing all sizes and method of installation.
I
B - Samples - Submit manufacturer's color samples for Architect's selection.
C - Manufacturer's Literature - Submit for Architect's approval.
I
02 - MANUFACTURERS
I
I
A - For the purpose of establishing type and quality, Venetian blinds shall be one of the following:
1. "Mark II" by Alcan Building Products, Warren, Ohio.
2. "Contract Blind" by Levolor Lorentzen, Inc., Atlanta, Georgia.
3. "Bali-CustoMiser Mini Blind" by Marathan Carrey McFall Company, Birmingham, Alabama.
I
03 - VENETIAN BLINDS
I
A - Slats - 1" wide, .010 thick virgin aluminum with baked enamel fmish in standard color as selected by Architect.
B - Bottom Rail - Manufacturer's standard finish as selected by Architect.
I
C - Head Rail - .025 sheet steel galvanized, bonderized with baked enamel fInish as selected by Architect.
I
D - Braided Ladder - Synthetic yam equally spaced rungs minimum 14 slats per foot.
E - Liftcords - Braided synthetic fiber .070" diameter.
I
F - Slat Tilter - Clear lucite.
I
04 - INSTALLA nON
I
A - Manufacturer's standard installation brackets in fInish to match headrail shall be installed to suit job condition by methods
as recommended by manufacturer.
B - Locations - All exterior windows and fIxed openings serving as windows. None required in dormers or stairwells.
I
C - Tilters shall be located at outside edge of each pair of blinds. Tilters shall be located on left side of individual blinds except
as noted for pairs above.
I
END OF SECTION
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
12500-1
Venetian Blinds
I
I
I
I
SECTION 14240
HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS
PART 1 GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Section includes hydraulic passenger elevators as shown and specified. Elevator work includes:
1. Commercial, standard pre-engineered hydraulic passenger elevators.
2. Elevator car enclosures, hoistway entrances and signal equipment.
3. Jacks.
4. Operation and control systems.
5. Accessibility provisions for physically disabled persons.
6. Equipment, machines, controls, systems and devices as required for safely operating the specified
elevators at their rated speed and capacity.
7. Materials and accessories as required to complete the elevator installation.
B.
Related Sections:
1. Division 3 Sections: Installing inserts, sleeves and anchors in concrete.
2. Division 4 Sections: Installing inserts, sleeves and anchors in masonry.
3. Division 5 Sections:
a. Providing hoist beams, pit ladders, steel framing, auxiliary support steel and divider beams
for supporting guide-rail brackets.
b. Providing steel angle sill supports and grouting hoistway entrance sills and frames.
4. Division 9 Sections: Providing elevator car fmish flooring and field painting unfmished and shop
primed ferrous materials.
5. Division 15 Sections:
a. Sump pit and oil interceptor.
b. Heating and ventilating hoistways and machine rooms.
6. Division 16 Sections:
a. Providing electrical service to elevators, including fused disconnect switches.
b. Emergency power supply, transfer s\vitch and auxiliary contacts.
c. Heat and smoke sensing devices.
d. Convenience outlets and illumination in machine room, hoistway and pit.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
I
I
I
I
I
I
acsb
(hboI12/2003)
I
A.
Product data: When requested, submit product data for the follo\ving:
I. Elevator car enclosures and hoislway entrances.
2. Operation, control, and signal systems.
B.
Shop drawings:
1. Show equipment arrangement in the machine room, pit and hoistway. Provide plans, elevations,
sections and details of assembly, erection, anchorage, and equipment location.
2. Indicate elevator system capacities, sizes, performances, safety features, fmishes and other pertinent
information.
3. Show floors served, travel distances, maximum loads imposed on the building structure at points of
support and all similar considerations of the elevator work.
4. Indicate electrical power requirements and branch circuit protection device reconunendations.
C.
Color selection: Submit color charts of exposed fmishes and materials for color selection.
1. When requested, submit samples of exposed ftnishes and materials selected for the elevator system
materials and components.
14240-1
Hydraulic Elevators
I
I
I
D.
Certificates: Inspection and acceptance certificates of elevator system installation.
E.
Operation and maintenance data. Include the following:
1. Operation and maintenance instructions.
2. Parts list, with recommended parts inventory.
I
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: An approved manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing, installing,
and servicing elevators of the type required for the project.
1. The manufacturer of the machine, controller, signal fixtures, door operators cab, entrances, and all
other major parts of the elevator operating equipment.
a. The major parts of the elevator equipment shall be manufactured in the United States, and
not be an assembled system.
2. The manufacturer shall have a documented, on-going quality assurance program.
B.
Installer Qualifications: The manufacturer or an authorized agent of the manufacturer with not less than
five years of satisfactory experience installing elevators equal in character and performance to the project
elevators.
c.
Regulatory Requirements:
1. ASME A 17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators, latest edition or as required by the local
building code.
2. IBC Building Code.
3. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code.
4. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows.
5. Americans with Disabilities Act - Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).
D.
Fire-rated entrance assemblies: Opening protective assemblies including frames, hardware, and
operation shall comply with ASTM E2074, CAN4-SI04 (ULC-SI04), ULlO(b), and NFPA Standard
80. Provide entrance assembly units bearing Class B or 1 1/2 hour label by a Nationally Recognized
Testing Laboratory (2 hour label in Canada).
E. Inspection and testing: Elevator Installer shall obtain and pay for all required inspections, tests, permits and
fees for elevator installation.
1. Arrange for inspections and make required tests.
2. Deliver to the Owner upon completion and acceptance of elevator work.
1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
I
I
A.
Deliver elevator materials, components and equipment in manufacturer's protective packaging.
B. Store materials in a dry protected area provided by others. Protect and handle materials in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations to prevent damage, soiling, or deterioration.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
I
I
A. Prohibited Use: Elevators shall not be used for any purpose during the construction period before
Substantial Completion.
B. Painting:
1. Except as otherwise specified, paint all metal work provided by the elevator manufacturer and
installer.
2. Provide all ferrous metals installed in the hoistway shop primed with a rust inhibitive primer.
I
acsb
(hbol/2/2003)
I
14240-2
Hydraulic Elevators
I
I
I
I
I
I
c.
Provide the hole for the jack unit if required by the type of jack provided, based on excavation through
normal soil or clay which can be removed by manual digging or by standard truck-mounted regular drilling
unit. Provide a casing if required to retain the walls of the hole. General contractor shall remove
excavation spoils deposited in the elevator pit.
1. If a physical obstruction or hindrance is encountered below the ground surface, including boulders,
rock, gravel, wood, metal, pilings, sand, water, quick sand, caves, public utilities or any other
foreign material, obtain written authorization to proceed with excavating using special excavation
equipment.
2. Maintain a daily log of time and material costs involved.
3. Elevator contractor will be compensated on a tin1e and material basis for additional costs incurred
after encountering the physical obstruction or hindrance, including the cost of the special excavation
equipment.
1.06 WARRANTY
I
I
A. Warranty: Submit elevator manufacturer's standard written warranty agreeing to repair, restore or replace
defects in elevator work materials and workmanship not due to ordinary wear and tear or improper use or
care for 12 months from date of Substantial Completion.
1.07 MAINTENANCE
I
I
I
A.
Furnish maintenance and call back service for a period of 3 months for each elevator from date of
Substantial Completion. Service shall consist of periodic examination of the equipment, adjustment,
lubrication, cleaning, supplies and parts to keep the elevators in proper operation.
1. Maintenance work, including emergency call back repair service, shall be performed by trained
employees of the elevator contractor during regular working hours.
2. Submit parts catalog and show evidence oflocal parts inventory with complete list of recommended
spare parts. Parts shall be produced by manufacturer of original equipment.
3. Manufacturer shall have a service office and full time service personnel within a 50 mile radius of
the project site.
I
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.0 1 MANUFACTURERS
I
I
A.
Manufacturer: ThyssenKrupp Elevator, Memphis, TN or equal conforming products by one of the
following:
I. Westinghouse
2. Montgomery KONE
3. Otis
I
2.02 MATERIALS, GENERAL
I
I
I
acsb
(hboI12/2003)
I
A. Colors, patterns, and fmishes: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard
colors, patterns, and finishes.
B.
Steel:
1.
2.
Shapes and bars: ASTM A 36.
Sheet: ASTM A 366, cold-rolled steel sheet, commercial quality, Class I, matte fmish, stretcher
leveled.
Finish: Factory-applied baked enamel.
3.
14240-3
Hydraulic Elevators
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
c.
Stainless steel:
1. Shapes and bars: ASTM A 276, Type 300 (18-8).
2. Tubing: ASTM A 269, Type 300 (18-8).
D.
Bronze:
1. Drawn pipe: ASTM B 43, alloy UNS C23000, red brass.
2. Sheet: ASTM B 36, alloy UNS C28000, muntz metal.
3. Extrusions: ASTM B 455, alloy UNS C38500, architectural bronze.
E.
Aluminum:
1. Sheet and plate: ASTM B 209, alloy 6063-T52.
2. Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy 6063- T52.
F.
Nickel silver: ASTM B 151 extrusions, alloy UNS No. C74500, polished fInish.
G.
Plastic laminate: Decorative high-pressure type, complying with NEMA LD3, Type GP-50 General
Purpose Grade, nominal 0.050" thickness.
H.
Wood:
1.
Glass: Clear laminated safety glass, complying with ANSI 297.1, nominal 9/16" thickness.
J. Carpet: Manufacturer's standard Herculon IV color fast, stain and soil resistant, jute-backed carpet. Class
B fIre-resistance rating when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Available in four colors.
2.03 HOISTW A Y EQUIPMENT
I
I
I
I
I
I
G.
I
I
I
acsb
(hbol/2/2003)
I
A.
Platform: Fabricated frame of formed or structural steel shapes, gusseted and rigidly welded with a wood
subfloor. Underside of the platform shall be fIreproofed.
B.
Sling: Steel stiles affixed to a steel crosshead and bolstered with bracing members to remove strain from
the car enclosure.
C.
Guide Rails: Steel, omega shaped, fastened to the building with steel brackets.
D.
Guide Shoes: Slide guides shall be mounted on top and bottom of the car.
E.
Guide Rail Lubricators: Provide a leakproof reservoir on top of upper guide shoes. Wool felt wiper shall
apply an even, uniform flow of lubricant which shall thorougWy cover face of guide rail.
F.
Buffers: Provide substantial buffers in the elevator pit. Mount buffers on continuous channels fastened to
the elevator guide rail or securely anchored to the pit floor. Provide extensions if required by project
conditions.
Telescoping Jack: Jack units shall be of sufficient size to lift the gross load the height specified. Factory
test jack to insure adequate strength and freedom from leakage. Brittle material, such as gray cast iron, is
prohibited in the jack construction. Jack unit shall consist of the following components:
1. Heavy seamless steel tubing plungers accurately turned and polished.
2. Stop ring shall be electrically welded to the plunger to positively prevent plunger leaving the cylinder.
3. Intemal guide bearing.
4. Packing or seal of suitable design and quality.
5. Drip ring around cylinder top.
6. Cylinder made of steel pipe and provided with a pipe connection and air bleeder.
14240-4
Hydraulic Elevators
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
7.
Weld brackets to the jack cylinder for supporting the elevator on pit channels. An auxiliary safety
bulkhead shall be provided in the lower end of the cylinder.
Jack synchronization: The two plungers shall resynchronize periodically by microprocessor based
controls to ensure smooth, accurate performance.
8.
H.
Automatic Terminal Limits: Place electric limit switches in the hoistway near the terminal landings. Limit
switches shall be designed to cut off the electric current and stop the car if it runs beyond either terminal
landing.
1.
Automatic Self-Leveling: Provide each elevator car with a self-leveling feature to automatically bring the
car to the floor landings and correct for overtravel or undertravel. Self-leveling shall, within its zone, be
automatic and independent of the operating device. The car shall be maintained approximately level with
the landing irrespective of its load.
J.
Failure Protection: Design electrical control circuit so if a malfunction occurs, due to motor starter failure,
oil becoming low in the system, or the car failing to reach a landing in the up direction within a pre- .
determined time, the elevator car will automatically descend to the lowest terminal landing. If power
operated doors are used, the doors will automatically open when the car reaches that landing to allow
passengers to depart. The doors will then automatically close and all control buttons, except the "door
open" button in the car station, shall be made inoperative.
K.
Wiring, Piping, and Oil: Provide all necessary hoistway wiring in accordance with the National Electrical
Code. All necessary pipe and fittings shall connect the power unit to the jack unit. Provide proper grade
oil.
L.
Emergency Terminal Stopping Device: Provide emergency terminal stopping devices for speeds over 100
FPM. The emergency terminal stopping device shall operate independently of the normal terminal
stopping device if it fails to slow down the car at the terminal as intended. Stopping devices shall not be
prevented from functioning by a single short circuit caused by a combination of grounds or by other
conditions.
1. Normal and emergency terminal stopping devices shall not control the same controller switches
unless two or more separate and independent switches are furnished, two or which shall be closed in
either direction of travel to complete the circuit to the control valve solenoids in the down direction
and to complete the circuit to the pump motor for the up direction of travel.
I
2.04 POWER UNIT
A.
A self-contained unit consisting of the following
I
I
I
B.
I
c.
I
acsb
(hbo//2/2003)
I
Power Unit (Oil Pumping and Control Mechanism):
items:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Oil reservoir with tank cover and controller compartment with cover.
An oil hydraulic pump.
An electric motor.
Qil control unit with the following components built into single housing; high pressure relief valve,
check valve, automatic unloading up start valve, lowering and leveling valve, and magnetic
controller.
Pump: Positive displacement type pump specifically manufactured for oil-hydraulic elevator service.
Pump shall be designed for steady discharge with minimum pulsation to give smooth and quiet operation.
Output of pump shall not vary more than 10 percent between no load and full load on the elevator car.
Drive: Drive shall be by direct coupling with the pump and motor submerged in the oil reservoir or by
multiple V-belts and sheaves of number and size to insure maximum factor of safety. Drive type shall be
determined based primarily on the load on the car, travel, and speed.
14240-5
Hydraulic Elevators
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
Motor: Standard manufacture motor specifically designed for oil-hydraulic elevator service. Duty rating
shall comply with specified speeds and loads.
E.
Oil Control Unit: The following components shall be built into a single housing. Welded manifolds with
separate valves to accomplish each nmction are not acceptable. Adjustments shall be accessible and be
made without removing the assembly from the oil line.
1. Relief valve shall be externally adjustable and be capable of bypassing the total oil flow without
increasing back pressure more than 10 percent above that required to barely open the valve.
2. Up start and stop valve shall be extemally adjustable and designed to bypass oil flow during start
and stop of motor pump assembly. Valve shall close slowly, gradually diverting oil to or from the
jack unit, ensuring smooth up starts and up stops.
3. Check valve shall be designed to close quietly without permitting any perceptible reverse flow.
4. Lowering valve and leveling valve shall be externally adjustable for drop-away speed, lowering
speed, leveling speed and stopping speed to ensure smooth "down" starts and stops. The leveling
valve shall be designed to level the car to the floor in the direction the car is traveling when
slowdown is initiated.
F.
Power controller shall contain electrical contactors, electro-mechanical switches and thermal overload
relays. Mount components in a NEMA 1 enclosure. Logic control system shall be microprocessor based
and protected from environmental extremes and excessive vibrations.
2.05 HOISTW A Y ENTRANCES
G. Starting: Provide solid state.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
I
acsb
(hbol 12/2003)
I
A.
Doors and Frames: Provide complete hollow metal type hoistway entrances at each hoistway opening.
1. Manufacturer's standard entrance design consisting of 14 gauge frames with 2 inch (50 mm) profile,
16 gauge doors, hangers, hanger supports, hanger covers, fascia plates, sight guards, and necessary
hardware.
2. Elevator wall interface with hoistway entrance assembly shall comply with elevator manufacturer's
requirements .
3. Doors: Flush construction
a. Steel: ASTM A 366 steel panels, factory-applied baked enamel fmish.
4. Frames: Formed construction.
a. Steel: ASTM A 366 formed steel, factory-applied baked enamel fmish (factory-applied rust-
inhibitive prime coat finish).
5. Transom: No transom.
B.
Interlocks: Equip each hoistway entrance with an approved type interlock tested as required by code.
Interlock shall be designed to prevent operation of the car away from the landing until the doors are locked
in the closed position as defmed by code and shall prevent opening the doors at any landing from the
corridor side unless the car is at rest at that landing or is in the leveling zone and stopping at that landing.
c.
Door Hanger and Tracks: Provide sheave type two point suspension hangers and tracks for each hoistway
sliding door.
1. Sheaves: Polyurethane tires with ball bearings properly sealed to retain grease.
2. Hangers: Provide an adjustable slide to accommodate the up-thrust of the doors.
3. Tracks: Drawn steel shapes, smooth surface and shaped to conform to the hanger sheaves.
Hoistway Sills: Extruded, with grooved surface, 114 inch (6.4 mm) thickness
1. Aluminum: ASTM B 221 aluminum, mill fmish.
14240-6
Hydraulic Elevators
I
I
2.06 CAR ENCLOSURE
I
I
4.
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. Car Enclosure:
1. Walls: Cab type DLP, durable wood core finished on both sides with high pressure plastic laminate
2. Canopy: Reinforced 14 gauge cold-rolled Steel \vith hinged exit. Finish: Tv,;o coats factory applied
reflective baked enamel.
3. Ceiling: Suspended type, fluorescent lighting with translucent diffuser mounted in a metal baked
enamel frame at 7'-4" (2235 mm) above the finished floor.
a. Metal finish: Steel, factory applied baked enamel finish.
Cab Columns, Front, and Transom: Stainless steel: ASTM A 167, Type 300 stainless steel panels, No.4 satin
finish.
5. Doors: Horizontal sliding car doors reinforced with steel for panel rigidity. Hang doors on sheave
type hangers with polyurethane tires that roll on a polished steel track and are guided at the bottom
by non-metallic shoes sliding in a smooth threshold groove.
a. Door Finish: Steel: ASTM A 366 steel panels, factory-applied baked enamel finish.
b. Cab Sills: Extruded, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thickness.
I) Aluminum: ASTM B 221 aluminum, mill finish.
6. Handrail: metal bar, 2" wide, stainless steel no. 4. Provide at rear wall only.
7. Ventilation: Two speed exhaust fan mounted on the car top.
8. Pad Buttons: Provide pad buttons on cab front(s) and walls.
a. Provide one set of vinyl protection pads for the project.
9. Base: no base
10. Finished Floor: Finished floor by others
B.
Car Top Inspection: Provide a car top inspection station with an "emergency stop" switch and constant
pressure "up-down" direction buttons to make the nonnal operating devices inoperative and give the
inspector complete control of the elevator. MOlmt the car top inspection station in the door operator
assembly.
2.07 DOOR OPERATION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
acsb
(hboI12/2003)
I
A.
Door Operation: Provide a direct current motor driven heavy duty operator designed to operate the car and
hoistway doors simultaneously. Door movements shall be electrically cushioned at both limits of travel and
the door operating mechanism shall be arranged for manual operation in event of power failure. Doors
shall automatically open when the car arrives at the landing and automatically close after an adjustable time
interval or when the car is dispatched to another landing. Direct drive geared operators, AC controlled
units with oil checks, or other deviations are not acceptable.
1. No Un-Necessary Door Operation: Car door shall open only if the car is stopping for a car or hall
call, answering a car or hall call at the present position or selected as the next car up.
2. Door Qpen Time Saver: If a car is stopping in response to a car call assignment only (no coincident
hall call), the current door hold open time is changed to a shorter field programmable time when the
electronic door protection device is activated.
3. Double Door Operation: When a car stops at a landing with concurrent up and down hall calls, no
car calls, and no other hall call assignments, the car door opens to answer the hall call in the
direction of the car's current travel. If an onward car call is not registered before the door closes to
within 6 inches of fully closed, the travel will reverse and the door will reopen to answer the other
call.
4. Nudging Operation: The doors shall remain open as long as the electronic detector senses the
presence of a passenger or object in the door opening. If door movement is obstructed for a field
programmable time, a buzzer will sound and the doors will close at reduced speed. If the infra-red
door protection system detects a person or object while closing, the doors will stop and resume
closing after the obstruction has been removed.
5. Limited Door Reversal: If the doors are closing and an infra-red beam is interrupted, the doors will
reverse and reopen partially. After the obstruction is cleared, the doors will begin to close.
14240-7
Hydraulic Elevators
I
I
I
I
I
6. Door Open Sentinel: If the doors are opening, but do not fully open after a field adjustable time, the
doors will recycle closed then open six times to try and correct the fault.
7. Door Close Sentinel: If the doors are closing, but do not fully close after a field adjustable time, the
doors will recycle open then close six times to try and correct the fault.
8. Door Close Assist: When the doors have failed to fully close and are in the recycle mode, the door
drive motor shall have increased torque applied to possibly overcome mechanical resistance or
differential air pressure and allow the door to close.
B.
Door Protection Devices: Provide a door protection system using 40 microprocessor controlled infra-red
light beams. The beams shall project across the car opening detecting the presence of a passenger or object.
If door movement is obstructed, the doors shall immediately reopen. A mechanical reopening device is not
acceptable.
I
2.08 CAR OPERATING STATION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/ J 2/2003)
I
A. Car Operating Station, General: The main car control in each car shall contain the devices required for
specific operation mounted in stainless steel no. 4 integral swing return panel requiring no applied
faceplate. The panel shall consist of a series of modules, inclined 20 degrees from vertical for optimum
viewing and accessibility.
1. The lowest module shall contain the "door open," "door close," "alarm" buttons and a keyed
"emergency stop" switch.
2. Intermediate modules shall contain floor buttons which illuminate when a call is registered and
remain illuminated until the call is answered. Raised floor indications and handicap symbols shall
be located immediately adjacent to the floor buttons and be fully integrated in the module design.
No applied symbols or floor indications or symbols on the buttons shall be permitted.
3. The next module shall contain required switches.
4. The top module shall contain fire service features in accordance with ASME AI7.I, Rule 211.3,
including operating instructions.
B.
Position Indicator: An electronic dot matrix position indicator inclined 20 degrees from vertical and
mounted in a module matching the control panel for optimum viewing. As the car travels, its position in the
hoistway shall be indicated by the illumination of the alpha/numeric character corresponding to the landing
which the elevator is stopped or passing.
C.
Emergency Light: An emergency light and capacity plate shall be integrated into a module inclined 20
degrees from vertical. Emergency light shall illuminate automatically upon loss of the building's normal
power supply.
D.
Emergency Communications System: Provide an emergency communications device mounted in the swing
return. Emergency communications device shall comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
requirements.
E.
Auxiliary Operating Panel: not applicable in this application.
F.
Column Mounted Car Riding Lantem: A car riding lantern shall be installed in the elevator cab and located
in the entrance. The lantern, when illuminated, will indicate the intended direction of travel. The lantern
will illuminate and a signal will sound when the car arrives at a floor where it will stop. The lantern shall
remain illuminated until the door(s) begin to close.
G. Special Accessories:
1. Independent service switch.
2. Inspection switch.
3. Two speed fan/light switch.
4. Telephone jack.
14240-8
Hydraulic Elevators
I
I
5.
Certificate frame.
2.09 CONTROL SYSTEM
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Controller: The elevator control system shall be microprocessor based and software oriented and be linked
together for purposes of communication by a serial communications link. Control of the elevator shall be
automatic in operation by means of push buttons in the car numbered to correspond to floors served, for
registering car stops, and by "up-down" push buttons at each intermediate landing and "call" push buttons
at terminal landings.
1. Momentary pressing of one or more buttons shall dispatch the car to the designated landings in the
order in which the landings are reached by the car, irrespective of the sequence in which the buttons
are pressed. Each landing call shall be canceled when answered.
2. When the car is traveling in the up direction, it shall stop at all floors for which car buttons or "up"
hall buttons have been pressed. The car shall not stop at floors where "down" buttons have been
pressed, unless the stop for that floor has been registered by a car button or unless the down call is at
the highest floor for which any buttons have been pressed. Pressing the "up" button when the car is
traveling in the down direction shall not intercept the travel unless the stop for that floor has been
registered by a car button or unless the up call is the lowest for which any button has been pressed.
3. When the car has responded to its highest or lowest stop, and stops are registered for the opposite
direction, its direction of travel shall reverse automatically and it shall then answer the calls
registered for that direction. If both up and down calls are registered at an intermediate floor, only
the call corresponding to the direction of car travel shall be canceled upon the stopping of the car at
the landing.
B.
Microprocessor: Locate the main microprocessor and car controller in the elevator machine room.
1. Microprocessor door operator shall reside in the door operator and control all functions of the
elevator door(s).
2. Electronic selector shall reside on the car top and contain hall effect transducers that detect magnetic
fields. Magnets, corresponding to floor positions and toplbottom of hoistway are mounted on a
perforated metal tape that runs the length of the hoistway.
c.
Group Operation: Not applicable in this application.
D.
Provide a key operated switch in the elevator for the purpose of removing the car from normal operation.
When the switch is in the "independent service" position, the elevator will bypass all landing calls and
answer only car calls. The operator will have complete control over the operation of the car.
E. Emergency Power IOD-OC: In the event of a normal power supply failure, the elevator system shall be
arranged to lower from an emergency power supply. The emergency power supply shall consist of a battery
furnished by the elevator contractor. The elevator contractor shall provide circuitry so after normal power
failure and establishment of emergency power, each elevator shall lower to a field adjustable return landing
and park with the doors closed. If the designated return landing is above the current position, the elevator
shall run down to the next lower landing and park with the doors closed.
2.10 HALL STATIONS
I
I
I
acsb
(hbo/12/2003)
I
A.
Hall Stations, General: Buttons shall illuminate to indicate call has been registered at that floor for the
indicated direction. Faceplates shall be stainless steel no. 4. Provide one set of risers.
I. Each terminal station shall contain one illuminating push button.
2. Each intermediate station shall consist of two illuminating pushbuttons, one for the up direction and
one for the down position.
3. Phase 1 firefighters service key switch, with instructions, shall be incorporated into the hall station
at the designated level.
14240-9
Hydraulic Elevators
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
Floor Identification Pads: Provide door jamb pads at each floor. Jamb pads shall comply with Americans
with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.
c.
Hall Position Indicator: A dot matrix position indicator shall be provided and inclined 20 degrees trom
vertical and mounted in a module for optimum viewing. As the car travels, its' position in the hoistway
shall be indicated by the illumination of the alpha/numeric character corresponding to the landing which the
elevator is stopped or passing. When hall lanterns are provided, the position indicator shall be combined
with the hall lanterns in the same faceplate.
1. Hall Position Indicator: column.
2. Faceplates shall match hall stations.
D.
Hall Lanterns: Not applicable in this application
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS ELEVATOR COMPONENTS
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Oil Hydraulic Silencer: Install an oil hydraulic silencer (muffler device) at the power tmit location.
Silencer shall contain pulsation absorbing material inserted in a blowout proof housing arranged for
inspecting interior parts without removing unit from oil line. Rubber hose without blowout proof features
will not be acceptable.
B.
Vibration Pads: Mount vibration pads under the power unit assembly to isolate the unit from the building
structure.
c.
Sound Insulating Panels: When pump and motor are not submerged, provide panels manufactured of
reinforced 14 gauge steel with 1 inch (25 mm) thick 1-1/2 pound fiberglass core attached to interior and
mounted on all four open sides of the power unit trame.
D.
Sound Isolating Couplings: When pump and motor are not submerged, install a minimunl of two couplings
in the oil line in the machine room between pump and jack.
PART 3 EXECUTION
I
3.01 EXAMINATION
I
A.
Before starting elevator installation, inspect hoistway, hoistway openings, pits and machine rooms, as
constructed, verify all critical dimensions, and examine supporting structures and all other conditions under
which elevator work is to be installed. Do not proceed with elevator installation until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer.
I
B. Installation constitutes acceptance of existing conditions and responsibility for satisfactory performance.
3.02 INSTALLATIQN
I
A.
I
B.
I
c.
I
acsb
(hboI12/2003)
I
Install elevator systems components and coordinate installation ofhoistway \vall construction.
1. Work shall be performed by competent elevator installation personnel in accordance with ASME
A 17.1, manufacturer's installation instructions and approved shop drawings.
2. Comply with the National Electrical Code for electrical work required during installation.
Perform work with competent, skilled workmen under the direct control and supervision of the elevator
manufacturer's experienced foreman.
Supply in ample time for installation by other trades, inserts, anchors, bearing plates, brackets, supports,
and bracing including all setting templates and diagrams for placement.
14240-10
Hydraulic Elevators
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
D.
Jack unit excavation: Drill or otherwise excavate below elevator pit construction as required to install the
jack unit.
1. Install casing for jack unit.
2. Set casing for jack unit assembly plumb, and fill water-settled sand, eliminating voids.
E.
Set jack unit-cylinder assembly plumb, centered accurately and shimmed to proper elevation, using
centering lugs to prevent dislocation during filling. Fill space between casing and cylinder with clean, dry,
compacted sand.
F.
Welded construction: Provide welded connections for installation of elevator work where bolted
connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection,
maintenance, and replacement of worn Parts. Comply with A WS standards for workmanship and for
qualification of welding operators.
G.
Coordination: Coordinate elevator work with the work of other trades, for proper time and sequence to
avoid construction delays. Use benchmarks, lines, and levels designated by the Contractor, to ensure
dimensional coordination of the work.
H.
Install machinery, guides, controls, car and all equipment and accessories to provide a quiet, smoothly
operating installation, free from side sway, oscillation or vibration.
I.
Sound isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating elevator equipment and components on vibration-absorption
mounts, designed to effectively prevent the transmission of vibrations to the structure, and eliminate sources
of structure-bome noise from the elevator system.
1.
Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoislway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for
accurate alignment of entrances with cars. Where possible, delay final adjustment of sills and doors until
car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum safe, workable dimensions at each landing.
K.
Erect hoistway sills, headers, and frames before erection of rough walls and doors; erect fascias and toe
guards after rough walls fmished. Set sill units accurately aligned and slightly above fmish floor at
landings.
L.
Lubricate operating parts of system, including ropes, as recommended by manufacturer.
I
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Acceptance testing: Upon completion of the elevator installation and before permitting use of elevator,
perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by Code and governing regulations or agencies.
Perform other tests, if any, as required by goveming regulations or agencies.
I
B.
I
Advise Owner, Contractor, Architect, and governing authorities in advance of dates and times tests are to
be performed on the elevator.
3.04 ADJUSTING
I
A.
I
I
acsb
(hbo//2/2003)
I
Make necessary adjustments of operating devices and equipment to ensure elevator operates smoothly and
accurately.
14240-11
Hydraulic Elevators
I
I
3.05 CLEANING
I
I
A.
Before fmal acceptance, remove protection from fmished surfaces and clean and polish surfaces in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for type of material and fmish provided.
B.
At completion of elevator work, remove tools, equipment, and surplus materials from site. Clean
equipment rooms and hoistway. Remove trash and debris.
3.06 PROTECTION
I
I
A. At time of Substantial Completion of elevator work, or portion thereof, provide suitable protective
coverings, barriers, devices, signs, or other such methods or procedures to protect elevator work from
damage or deterioration. Maintain protective measures throughout remainder of construction period.
3.07 DEMONSTRATION
I
I
I
A.
Instruct Owner's personnel in proper use, operations, and daily maintenance of elevators. Review
emergency provisions, including emergency access and procedures to be followed at time of failure in
operation and other building emergencies. Train Owner's personnel in normal procedures to be followed in
checking for sources of operational failures or malfunctions.
B. Make a fmal check of each elevator operation, with Owner's personnel present, immediately before date of
substantial completion. Determine that control systems and operating devices are functioning properly.
3.08 ELEVATOR SCHEDULE
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
acsb
(!lbol 12/2003)
I
A.
Elevator Qty. 1.
1. Elevator Model: Cimarron 20
2. Rated Capacity: 2000 LBS.
3. Rated Speed: 100 feet per minute.
4. Operation System: ThyssenKrupp Elevator TAC20
5. Travel: 12 ft
6. Openings:
a. Front: 1
b. Rear: 0
7. Clear Car Inside: 5'-8" wide x 4'-3"
8. Cab Height: Nominal 8'-0"
9. Hoistway Entrance Size: 7'-0" high x 3' -0" wide.
10. Door Type: One speed single slide
11. Door Operation: Automatic, direct current powered.
12. Power Characteristics: 460 volts, 3 Phase, 60 Hz.
13. Seismic requirements for zone 1
14. Special Features:
a.
b.
c.
d.
END OF SECTION
14240-12
Hydraulic Elevators
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09/02
Augusta, Georgia
I
SECTION 15050
GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.01
GENERAL
I
A. This Sectio'n'tovers the following:
1. Plumbing system complete to a point 5'-0" outside each building, including connections to water
and sanitary systems.
2. Heating, ventilating and air conditioning system, complete.
3. Alternates: Refer to Bid Form and other Sections of the specifications for alternates.
I
I
B. Contractor Qualifications:
1. The Plumbing Subcontractor shall have demonstrated proficiency in the installation of plumbing
systems by the successful operation of systems of the type specified herein. Such systems shall
have been installed in commercial or institutional buildings having a minimum of 50 plumbing
fixtures (in a single building). The Subcontractor shall have been in business as described above
for a minimum period of five years.
a. A master or journeyman plumber shall be present at the site during the installation of all
plumbing related work. The master or journeyman plumber shall be certified in the state
in which the constmction is being perfomled and shall have his license present at the site
or on file during constmction.
2. The HV AC Sub-Contractors shall have minimum qualifications as follows:
a. Current Class II Conditioned Air Contractor License for State of Georgia.
b. Have as part of the Firm a Qualified Service Department on 24 hour call or have a
written Agreement with such a Service Agency.
I
I
I
1.02 DEFINITIONS
I
A. The following definitions of terms are applicable to Division 15.
1. "Provide" shall mean "Furnish, Install and Connect."
2. "Piping" shall mean "pipe installed with all specified fittings, valves, and accessories, and forming
a complete system."
3. "HV AC" shall mean "Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning".
I
1.03 CONTRACT DRAWINGS
I
A. Arrangement of Mechanical Work shall be as shown. Drawings are not intended to indicate all offsets and
. fittings. ExafIline Drawings, investigate conditions to be encountered, and arrange work accordingly;
furnish all fittings and offsets.
I
B. Drawings an:: not intended to show in detail exact locations and connections for fixtures, equipment and
accessories: . Final connections shall be as shown on approved shop drawings.
I
C. Measurement of drawings by scale shall not be used as dimensions for fabrication. Measurements for
locating fixtures, equipment, ductwork, piping, and accessories shall be made on the site and shall be based
on actual job conditions. The Contractor shall be responsible for all measurements.
1.04 CQORDINA TION
I
A.
B.
The Mechanical Work shall be coordinated with the work of other trades to avoid conflict.
I
The Contractor shall study all plans and specifications for this project and shall notify the Architect of any
conflict between work under this Division and work under other Divisions ofthe Specifications. Particular
attention shall be noted to interference between piping, electrical, structural work, building openings ami
ductwork.
I
1.05
OR EQUAL CLAUSE AND PRIOR APPROVAL:
A.
When reference is made to trade names or the names of manufacturers, such reference, unless noted, is
made to designate and identify the quality of materials or equipment to be furnished and is not intended
to restrict competitive bidding. If it is desired to use materials or equipment different from those
mentioned, written request for approval must reach the hands of the Architect at least TEN DAYS prior
to the date set for the opening of bids (send copy directly to Engineer). The request for approval of the
proposed substitute must be accompanied by complete teclmical data in support of the application.
I
I
15050-1
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09/02
Augusta, Georgia
I
1.06
A.
I
I
1.07
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.08
A.
I
I
B.
Request for Prior Approval by Facsimile Mail (FAX) will not be considered. Request shall be "hard copy"
descriptive catalog data or electrostatic copies via U.S. Mail, U.P.S. or Federal Express.
LAYOUT BASIS
Equipment listed on the drawings has been used for the physical arrangement. When equipment listed as
acceptable, equal or equipment which has received "prior approval" is used, it shall be the Contractor's
responsibility to provide structural, ductwork, electrical, service clearances or other changes required.
Chapges shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. Submit list of changes required along with Shop
Drawings.
SUBMITTALS
B.
Submittals shall be in accordance with the following: Submit shop drawings and data sheets for approval
on all items of equipment, materials, and accessories furnished under this Division. Shop drawings and
specification data sheets shall show complete product information, installation requirements, details and
instructio.n~, .~\1d shall be marked to indicate compliance with requirements of contract documents.
Shop drawlhgs shall be scaled or dimensioned drawings prepared by the Contractor or manufacturers'
specifically for this project.
C.
See Electrical drawings for voltage, phase and ampacity of the power supply for mechanical equipment.
Manufacturer's model numbers ShO\\11 in the Mechanical Specifications or on the Mechanical Drawings
are not indicative of the power supply required. The responsibility for providing mechanical equipment
that is compatible with the characteristics shown on the electrical drawings is the sole responsibility of the
contractor.
D.
Submittals for all mechanical equipment reqn iring dectrical services shall be accompanied by a letter from
the Electrical Subcontractor certifying that the electrical characteristics of the mechanical equipment are
compatible with electrical power services which will be supplied for the equipment.
E.
Provide Plumbing Fixture and Equipment Sunmlary Sheet as the 1st page in the Plumbing Submittal
Brochure. Fornlat for Plumbing Submittal shall be as follows:
. PROJECT NAME
PLUMBING FIXTURE SUMMARY SHEET
FOR
DATE
ITEM
P-2
Lavatory
DESCRIPTION
Kohler K-7404-2A
Strainer: McGuire l55-A
Supplies: McGuire 170
Traps: McGuire 8872
Nibco S 134
Grinnell CT99
ACTION TAKEN
NOTES
Gate Valves
Hangers
F.
Submit seven (7) copies of Shop Drawings in accordance with requirements of the General Conditions.
Submit clearly marked Shop Drawings on all items of equipment, fixtures, materials and accessories
furnished under this Division. Each item shall be identified by the Synlbol used on the Drawings.
When Shop Drawings are reviewed, some errors will be detected but others may be overlooked. This does
not grant the Contractor permission to proceed in error. Regardless of any information contained in the
Shop Drawings, the requirements of the Drawings and the Specifications shall be followed and are not
waived or superseded in any way by the Shop Drawing review.
G.
PROTECTION OF WORK DURING CONSTRUCTION
Provide protective covers, skids, plugs, caps and coating to protect equipment and materials from damage '
or deterioration during construction. Covers will not be required for coated cast iron pipe and fittings. Any
pipe, hangers, or equipment that rust during construction shall be replaced or repaired to like new
condition.
B.
Store equipment and material under cover and off the ground.
15050-2
I
!.
I
Augusta Commons, 09/02
Augusta, Georgia
I
I
I
I
I
C. For outdoor storage, protective covers of sheet plastic shall be filled. Covers shall be reinforced to
withstand wind and precipitation. Set equipment and material on skids or platfomlS to avoid deterioration
from spattering and ground water.
D. Plug ends of pipes when work is stopped to prevent debris from entering the pipes.
E.
Close open ends of ductwork with temporary closures using sheet plastic taped in place on horizontal ducts
and 26 gauge sheet metal on vertical ducts.
F.
No air handling system shall be operated during the construction period without filters in place to filter air
entering the fan.
G.
Protect rotating parts of rotating eqllipment by sheet plastic taped in place. After installation is completed
dust and debris shall be brushed, swept, or vacuum cleaned, then the protective covers shall be removed.
Should the protection be broken and bearings or shaft seals be contaminated with foreign particles, such
bearings and shafts shall be removed for cleaning. The apparatus shall not be started until the rotating parts
are free of particles.
Fiberglass insulation shall not be illstalled until permanent roof is installed or other suitable means of
moisture protection is in place.
H.
I
1.09 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING, BACKFILLING AND W ARNING TAPES
A.
Contractor shall provide protective system in trenching and excavation in accordance with OSHA
EXCA V A nON AND TRENCHING STANDARD 54FR45894.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
Generally there are four basic options:
1. Slope the excavation at no more than 1-1/2 horizontal to 1 vertical (34 degrees);
2. Use OSHA's appendices A & B for soil classification and supports, shields or other systenlS;
3. Use other tabulated data prepared by or approved by a registered professional engineer.
4. Have the system designed by a registered professional engineer.
Operations at the Site: The Contractor shall locate and identify all underground utilities (sewer, water, fuel,
telephone, etc.) before begilming work. Structural ramps and runways for equipment and means of egress
for personnel (ladder, stairway or ramp) shall be provided. Potentially oxygen-deficient and hazardous
atmospheric contaminants shall be monitored, and where these conditions may exist, rescue equipment
must be standing by. Employees in bell-bottom holes or other confined or deep excavations shall wear a
hamess with a lifeline attached.
c.
D.
Water accumulation and soil saturation shall be watched carefully. Inspections by a "competent person"
shall be carried out daily to observe this and other conditions. Soil shall be placed at least two feet back
from the edge of the excavation. And physical barrier protection shall be placed at the perimeter of all
trenches, pits, shafts, wells, etc.
E.
General. The Contractor shall perfonn all excavation to install piping, structures and equipment specified
in this Division of the Specifications. During excavation, materials for backfilling shall be piled back from
the banks of the trench to avoid over-loading and to prevent slides and cave-ins. All excavated materials
not to be used for backfill shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor. Grading shall be done to
prevent surface water from flowing into trenches and other excavations and water accumulating therein
shall be removed by pumping. All excavations shall be made by open cut. No tunneling shall be done.
All requirements of OSHA shall be complied with.
F.
Trench Excavation. The bottom of the trenches shall be graded to provide unifoml bearing and support
for each section of the pipe on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length except that bell-holes
shall be dug after trench bottom has been graded. Overdepths shall be backfilled with loose, granular,
moist earth and tamped to a compaction at least equal to that of the surrounding undisturbed earth.
Remove unstable soil that is not capable of supporting the pipe and replace with specified material for a
minimum depth of 12" below invert of pipe.
G.
Backfilling. The trenches shall not be backfilled until all specified pressure tests are performed. The
trenches shall be backfilled with the excavated materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam,
sandy clay, and gravel or soft shale, free from large clods of earth or stones, deposited in 6" layers and
tamped until the pipe has a cover of not less than the adjacent existing ground but not greater than 2" above
existing ground. The backfilling shall be carried on simultaneously on both sides of the trench so that pipe
is not displaced. The compaction of the filled trench shall be at least equal to that of the surrounding
15050-3
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09/02
Augusta, Georgia
I
I
I
I
1.10
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.11
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
undisturbed material, except that trenches occurring under paved areas or in areas to be filled shall be
backfilled in 6" maximum layers and each layer compacted to 95% maximum density. Settling the backfill
with water, will not be pennitted. Any trenches not meeting compaction requirements or where settlement
occurs shall have backfill removed down to the top of the pipe then backfill with approved materials as
specified hereinbefore.
H.
Underground Warning Tapes:
1. Provide polyethylene marking tapes to warn excavators orunderground pipe lines. Marking tape
shall be located approximately 12-inches above the underground piping.
2. Marking tape for non-metallic piping shall be 6-inch wide Seton 6PIP-G Yellow .035" Metallic
Detection Tape with wording "CAUTION - Pipeline Buried Below".
3. Marking tape for metallic piping shall be 2-inch wide Seton 210 PIP-G Yellow .004" tape with
wording "CAUTION - Pipeline Buried Below".
4. Equal products by Brady, Craftmark or Emed will be acceptable.
CLEANING AND PAINTING
General.
1. Surfaces of metal, pipe, pipe supports, insulation, and other materials and equipment furnished
and installed under this Section, where exposed and unpainted, shall be cleaned of all grease,
loose scale, dirt, rust and other foreign matter in preparation for painting.
2. Unpainted or prime coated piping, pipe supports and equipment located outside the building and
in each Equipment Room, Boiler Room, Penthouse, etc. shall be painted under this section
(Section 15).
3. Factory painted equipment (not prime coat) may be touch-up painted if touch-up will not exceed
1 % of the surface. Paint shall be brush applied.
Materials and Application. Paints, accessories, and methods of application shall conform to requirements
of Division - FINISHES. All nameplates and controls shall be covered and protected during painting.
Provide one (1) primer coat and two (2) finish coats enamel paint as follows:
1. Galvanized Surfaces: Machinery Gray
2. Insulated Surfaces: White, Semi-Gloss
3. Steel Supports and Hangers, Exposed Steel Piping: Machinery Gray
4. Equipment (Interior Locations): Touch up to match factory finish
5. Equipment (Exposed to Weather): Selected by Architect
C. Galvanized surfaces shall be primed with primer coat material conforming to Fed. Spec. TT-P-641.
B.
. '1,",'
LABELS!:-;"
Provide label for all equipment, fire dampers, smoke dampers, switches, starters and controls (except space
wall mounted thernlostats) furnished under this Section with engraved bakelite labels indicating the name
and/or function of each. Multi-position switches shall have each function indicated on a single plate.
Example: EXH FAN - HIGH, LOW, OFF.
B.
Labels shall be secured with a minimum of 2 brass machine screws or aluminum Pop Rivets. Contact
cement is not acceptable. Labels shall have white letters on black background. Letters for equipment
labels shall be 114" minimum height. Where two or more pieces of equipment of the same model, type,
and capacity are fumished, each piece shall be identified as No.1 of No.2, in addition to the equipment
symbol used in the Schedule or Summary shown on the Drawings. Bakelite labels for equipment shall be
a minimum of 3/4" high. Submit list of equipment labels.
All valves and equipment above ceiling shall have black bakelite locator plate with white letters attached
to tee bar with pop rivets. Tag shall be 5" x I" with 3/4" high letters, shall describe valve (i.e. water, gas,
etc.) and shall have an arrow. Label shall be oriented to show which ceiling panel should be removed to
reach valve.
C.
D.
Fire and Smoke damper labels shall be located on the ceiling below the damper. Label shall be same size
as described for valves and shall be marked "Fire (Smoke) Damper Above".
All access doors for fire dampers, smoke dampers and smoke detectors shall be identified with labels.
Label shall be same size and type described for valves and shall be marked to indicate the location of the
fire protection device within (i.e., "Access Door - Fire Damper").
E.
15050-4
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09/02
Augusta, Georgia
I
I
F. Filter List:
1. Provide, on each air handling unit or device containing air filters, the number, size and type filters
required for the unit i.e. 3-16" x 20" x 2". InfonnatiOll shall be indicated on Bakelite label and
allached to filter access door or adjacent to filter access door. Refer to 15050-11 A for Label
Requirements.
2. Provide a typed Equipment List showing all Units with filter number, size and type required for
each unit. .
1.12 ON~SITE COpy OF INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
A.
Provide two (2) 3-ring hard-back binders containing a copy of the Manufacturer's Installation Instructions
for each device or piece of equipment that is to be installed on this Project.
1. One binder shall be kept at the Site in the General Contractor's Office and shall be in good order
and available to the Architect and to his representatives.
2. TI.le other binder shall be submitted to the Engineer as soon as Submittal Data has been accepted
by the Architect.
I
I
1.13 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS:
I
I
I
1.14
A.
I
I
I
I
1.15
I
I
1.16
A.
I
I
I
I
A.
Arrange formal instmction sessions for the operating persOlmel, designated by the Using Agency covering:
1. General familiarization and operating procedures for the entire mechanical installation.
2. Routine maintenance procedure for all mechanical equipment.
3. Specific operating and maintenance procedures for individual mechanical equipment and fixtures.
4. Specific operating and maintenance procedures for the Automatic Controls Systems.
The operating instructions shall be given after the systems have been given the performance tests and
balancing as specified hereinafter and the performance tests have been approved by the Architect.
B.
OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
Fumish and deliver to the Architect for approval three manuals in hardback binders covering details of
operation and maintenance for all apparatus requiring service including:
I. Manufacturer's operating and maintenance manuals, including parts lists, for each piece of
equipment and accessory requiring service or maintenance and the name, address and phone
number of the nearest sales and service organization for each item.
2. Step-by-step procedure for starting and stopping each system.
3. Temperature control diagrams.
4. Approved Shop Drawings
B.
A copy of the diagrams and start-stop procedure shall also be framed under acrylic and mounted in each
Mechanical Room.
MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES
A.
Certificates of Manufacturers shall be provided for major components of air conditioning systems (i.e.,
Automatic Temperature Control).
B.
Certificates of the manufacturers shall be on the letterheads of the manufacturers and shall certify that "the
equipment has been installed in strict compliance with the recommendations of the manufacturers and is
operating p.roper! y".
SYSTEMS PERfORMANCE TESTS AND BALANCING
B.
After testing and cleaning and after equipment has been checked out as outlined under
MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES, and all motors requiring lubrication have been lubricated, each
system including all equipment and component parts of the system shall be given a performance test to
determine compliance with the specifications. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect for approval
the test procedure to be followed for each system, including test data sheets to be used. The Architect shall
approve the results of the equipment performance tests. The Contractor shall repeat performance tests
which are not approved by the Architect. The Contractor shall schedule the time of the performance tests
with the Architect. The performance tests shall be for a period of not less than six (6) consecutive hours.
The Contractor shall obtain the services of an independent Test and Balance Agency that specializes in and
whose business is limited to Testing and Balancing of mechanical systems. Agenr.y shall have current
certification by Associated Air Balance Council or National Environmental l1alancing Bureau.
15050-5
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09/02
Augusta, Georgia
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.17
A.
B.
I
I
I
I
C. Acceptable Test & Balance agents are as follows:
1. Alpha Air Balance, Atlanta, GA
2. Environmental Balance - Jacksonville, FL
3. Hilton Service Company - White Rock, SC
4. Holistic Test and Balance - Jacksonville, FL
5. Hydro Air Assoc. Inc. - Atlanta, GA
6. Tab Services, Inc. - Atlanta. GA
7. Test & Balance Corp. - Tampa, FL & Atlanta, GA
8. Thomas Balancing Service - Bolingbroke, GA
9. Research Air Flow, Inc. - Atlanta, GA
10. Preferred Test and Balance - Snellville, GA
a. PRIOR APPROVAL is required for other fimls.
Testing and Balancing shall be perfomled in complete accordance with the National Standards for Testing
and Balancing Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems, 5th Edition No., 1989 as published by
the Associate Air Balance Councilor Procedural Standards .for Testing - Balancing - Adjusting of
Environmental Systems as published by National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) First Edition.
D.
E.
Instruments used for testing and balancing of air and hydronic systems shall have been calibrated within
a period of six months prior to balancing. All final tests analysis reports shall include letter of certification
listing instrumentation used and last date of calibration.
F.
The latest Edition of the Approved Associated Air Balance Council Specifications for Air Systems and Air
Distribution Test and Balance and Chilled and Hot Water Systems Balance, and Procedural Standards for
Testing - Balancing - Adjusting ofEnvirOlIDlental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), are hereby written out in full
unless othervise required by project specifications.
Testing and Balancing for cooling portions of the system shall be performed at ambient temperatures above
850 F. and for heating portions of system at ambient temperatures below 400 F.
Six copies of complete test reports shall be submitted to the Architect prior to Final Inspection of project.
G.
H.
1.
The tests shall be witnessed by and approved by the Architect.
J.
K.
Submit to Engineer, a list of discrepancies noted during test's balance phase of work.
The following items shall be measured and adjusted:
1. Entering and leaving air temperature (WB and DB) within 12 inches of coil or heater inlet and
fan outlet at each air handling unit.
2. Coincident outside air temperature (WB and DB).
3. Outside air quantity at each unit.
4. Compressor nameplate and actual mnning voltage and amperage of each phase (heating and
cooling cycle) at each compressor.
5. Nameplate volts and amps and actual mIming volts and amps of each phase at each motor 3/4 HP
and larger. (Data from equipment on job and not submittal data.)
6. Air quantity at each supply, retum and exhaust air device. Air volume adjustment shall be made
at volume dampers serving branch ducts - not at dampers in grilles and registers.
7. Refrigerant suction and discharge pressures of each compressor having gauge taps.
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
The Contractor shall comply with OSHA requirements as it applies to the project and to the Contractor.
Provide guards shielding the perimeter and face of all belt drives, shafts, and couplings. The guards shall
be furnished as part of the equipment and shall be removable.
1. Provide openings in guards opposite drive and driven shafts to permit use of revolution counter.
c.
All rough andjagged edges of equipment, ductwork, and piping shall be ground smooth. All sharp or knife
edges shall be rounded. Where sharp or knife edges CalIDot be rounded, a U-channel constructed of 22
gauge galvanized sheet steel shall be secured over the edge.
All pressure ~~ssels unless noted otherwise, shall be ASME constructed and stamped for workin~ pressures
as specified hereinafter for each vessel or as shown on the drawings. All water heaters whIch exceed
200,000 btuh heat input, store water at temperatures in excess of 21 0 degrees F. or exceed 120 gallons
water storage capacity shall be ASME constructed and stamped.
D.
15050-6
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.18
A.
I
. . \
Each pressu're vessel shall be provided with an ASME stamped reliefvalve for the working pressure of the
vessel exc'~pt as otherwise specified herein or shown on the drawings (combination pressure and
temperature rated relief valve on water heaters). Each relief valve shall be located in openings provided
on the vessel, or where openings are not provided on the vessel, in the pipe line between the vessel and any
shut-off valve. Discharge pipe shall be full size of the relief device and shall be piped separately to outside
the building or to other terminal approved by the Architect but in no case shall the discharge from a relief
valve be trapped.
F. Qther safety devices shall be specified with equipment hereinafter.
E.
G.
The Contractor shall be responsible for checking all safety controls on each Pressure vessel before placing
the equipment in operation. All relief valves and relief Jines shall be installed, checked for specified
operation, and determined to be free and clear of any obstructions.
During performance tests all safety devices for each system (including alarms and devices which are for
the safety protection of equipment) shall be checked for specified perfom1ance. The set point and
operating point for each device shall be recorded and approved by the Architect.
H.
I.
NQ PRODUCTS SHALL BE INSTALLED WHICH CONTAINS ASBESTQS.
J. NO REFRIGERANT SYSTEMS or components which utilize Refrigerant R-II or R-12 shall be used.
K.
The Contractor shall submit to the Architect five (5) copies of performance data on all safety devices. The
data shall include the fmal setting of each device and the setting at which the device operates. The safety
devices shall be identified as to system, equipment and function.
FLQQR, WALL AND CEILING PLATES
Where exposed piping, bare or insulated, passes through floors, walls and ceilings, escutcheons shall be
provided. Escutcheons shall be chromium-plated steel plates, hinged type with set screw, Bea-Cor, F &
S, or Grilmell. Escutcheons for chrome plated connections at plumbing fixtures sha 11 be as specified under
the plumbing fixture.
I
1.19 DIELECTRIC ADAPTERS
A.
Dielectric adapters shall be provided between copper and iron pipe connections and between any ferrous
and non-ferrous piping or equipment. Adapters shall have union ends up to and including 2" in size and
flanges over 2".
I
I
1.20
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
The adapters shall control the galvanic corrosion not exceeding I % of the short circuit current. The
working pressure shall be rated at 250 psig for unions and 175 psi for cast iron flanged unions. The gaskets
for flanged union shall be rated for the full temperature range from 40 degrees F. to 250 degrees F.
SLEEVES
A.
Sleeves through fire rated and smoke barrier walls, floors or partitions shall be constructed, installed and
sealed in a manner that is acceptable to the Fire Marshal.
Pipes and ducts passing through masonry and concrete construction (except concrete floor slabs on grade)
shall be fitted with sleeves. Sleeve shall extend through the construction and shall be cut flush with each
surface of the construction. EXCEPTION: Pipe sleeves through all floors except slab-on-grade floors
shall extend 2-inches above the finish floor. Insulation, unless noted, shall be continuous through sleeves
in non-rated walls, partitions, floors, etc. Sleeves shall be concentric with the pipes or ducts and shall be
large enough to provide clearance (1/4 inch minimum, 3/4 inch maximum) between the insulation (or bare
metal if not insulated) and the inside of the sleeve, except as otherwise noted on the drawings.
Duct penetrations through all floors except slab-on-grade floors shall be titted with a 16 gauge galvallize~l,
3 inch by 3 inch sheet metal angle frame, having a hemmed edge at the top. Bottom flange sha.lI be set III
a heavy bed (1116 inch minimum bed of plastic roof cement) and shall be fastened to the floor with powder
actuated fasteners on 8 inch centers. Wipe up excess roof cement when installation is complete.
EXCEPTION: Where concrete curbs are provided the sheet metal angle frame will not be required.
Sleeves shall be installed no later than the time of installation of the pipe or duct.
B.
C.
D.
15050-7
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
E.
Pipe sleeves for poured concrete shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel with anchor lugs for securing to
forms.
I
F.
Pipe sleeves for masonry construction other than poured concrete shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel
and grouted in place.
I
Duct penetrations of concrete block or poured concrete walls or floors shall be accurately located in
advance of erection or pouring. Provide sturdy wood or metal forms.
Duct sleeves shall be 16 gauge (min.) galvanized steel welded with clips for securing to form. The inside
of the sleeves for poured concrete shall be filled with compacted sand to retain the shape of the sleeve.
I. Sleeves shali be installed with 3" (min.) clearance between sleeves.
G.
I
H.
I
J. The space between the inside of each sleeve and the pipe or duct shall be sealed as detailed on the
drawings. Sleeves through fire rated walls, partitions or floors, shall be sealed in a maImer and with
materials acceptable to the Fire Marshal and as described in Section 15060 FlRESTOPPING.
I
K. Refer to drawings for other details of sleeves.
I
L. Piping thru concrete slabs on grade shall have 3/4" thick Armaflex collar around the pipe for the full depth
of the penetration.
M. Penetrations of pipe through rated walls or floors shall be installed in accordance with U. L. Building
Material Directory. Through-Penetration Firestop Devices (XHCR) and Section 15060 FIRESTOPPING.
When penetrating a fire resistive wall or floor, the wall or floor must be sealed back to its original fire
integrity with a material or product tested under a nationally recognized test standard and at an independent
test agency. Intumescent fires top material (expands when heated) must be used for plastic pipe
penetrations offire rated walls. Such material is available from 3M Fire Protection Products, Division of
3M, GE Silicones (Pensil) or Hilti.
I
I
1.21 ELECTRICAL WQRK
I
A. Electrical equipment furnished under tltis Section of the Specifications shall comply with the electrical
system characteristics indicated on the Electrical Drawings.
I
B. Motors furnished with mechanical equipment shall comply with NEMA Standards regarding satisfactory
operation within plus or minus ten percent of motor nameplate voltage without adversely affecting motor
. performance or motor life. Nameplate voltage shall be considered the electrical system voltage indicated
on the plans. All motors shall be sized not to exceed 90% their full load rating when operating under
design conditions. Motors located outside the building, unless provided with factory weather proofing,
shall be TEFC (Totally Enclosed Fall Cooled).
C. Motor control components furnished as an integral part of mechanical equipment shall contain overload
deviCes, sensitive to motor current in each ungrounded leg of the power supply.
D. All startersfor,motors furnished under Division 15 - MECHANICAL shall be provided under this Division
15. lEe type starters are not acceptable. Holding coils, contacts, overload elements and auxiliary
contacts shall be field replaceable on starters. Unless otherwise noted starters shall be, Non-Reversing,
magnetic, across-the-line with red n1n pilot light and melting alloy overload relay in each current carrying
conductor. Provide NEMA I enclosure for interior location and NEMA 3R enclosure in exterior
locations. Where motors are electrically interlocked with other equipment, auxiliary contacts shall be
provided. Manually started motors shall have heavy duty push button stations. Provide remote push button
station where starter is not at the controlling location.
1. Automatically started motors shall have Hand-Qff-Auto switch in cover. Starters for equipment
operating above 250 volts shall be furnished with transformers and holding coils for 120 volts.
2. Exception: Starters included as a component part of factory assembled equipment.
I
I
I
I
I
E. Starters for single phase motors that are not automatically started shall be manual type with themlal
protection.
F. Overload heaters for each motor starter shall be selected to match nameplate amp rating of respective motor
in accordance with National Electric Code, 1990.
I
I
15050-8
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09/02
Augusta, Georgia
I
I
I
1.22
I
I
I
1.23
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
G.
Each starter and push button station shall be identified with engraved laminated bakelite nameplate with
1/4" high white cut letters. Nameplates shall be secured with 2 brass screws or aluminum pop rivets.
Embossed plastic tape is not acceptable.
H.
All power wiring for motors and slarters will be provided under Division Electrical. All Control and
Interlock Wiring shall be provided under Division Mechanical as specified hereinafter.
Starters shall be as manufactured by Cutler-Hammer, G.E., Westinghouse, Challenger, Furnas,
Allf<n-Bradley, Joslyn Clark, Square D or Siemens. Manufacturers shall have a Stocking Distributor
within a 50 mile radius of the job sile.
I.
RECORD DRAWINGS
A.
Contractor shall provide "Record" drawings showing location, size and pipeline material of all new
underground utility lines, structures and devices installed under this Section of the work.
B.
Utility lines shall be located horizontally by a minimum of two measurements taken from pemmnent
structures (building corners, back of concrete curbs, fire hydrants, etc.). Measurements shall be horizontal.
(not slope distances). Location point of utility line shall show depth relative to a fixed datum or the
elevation of an permanent building floor level.
C.
Drawings shall be prepared on a reproducible Mylar Velum, shall be prepared by a professional drafter and
shall show date, name of the contractor and the drafter.
INSTALL.\. nON
B.
All piping and ductwork shall be concealed unles~ noted otherwise.
Contractor shall install ducts, piping, fixtures, and equipment in a neat and workmanlike manner as
approved by the Architect, and shall avoid conl1ict with other work. Service clearance reconm1ended in
the manufacturers printed instructions shall be provided.
Equipment shall be so arranged and fitted into available spaces that working parts are accessible for service
without damage to building structure or finishes. Where building openings are provided, equipment shall
be so arranged for coil and/or tube removal through openings.
C.
D.
Before construction starts, check locations of proposed equipment, pipe and ducts. Review drawings,
verify grades, elevations, locations of structural elements, locations and sizes of chases and walls, methods
and type of construction of floors, walls and partitions. Before start of construction report any
unsatisfactory condition, error in drawings or specifications or conl1ict between mechanical and other
trades.
E.
Establish location of foundations, walls, and chases affecting location and layout of mechanical work.
Locate sleeves, inserts and supports for mechanical installations. Plan and co.ordinate the work in advance
of installation by other trades to avoid cutting and patching of walls, floors and ceilings.
F.
Check space limitations and verify electric requirements before ordering any equipment. Set large pieces
of equipment inside building before walls are erected where equipment is too large to enter finished
building.
G.
Equipment and fixtures shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's templates and printed
instructions, except in cases ofconl1ict with these specifications or contract drawings. In such cases, confer
with the Architect for decision.
H.
Contractor's attention is directed to invert elevations of existing sewers and sewers installed under another
Division. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying invert elevations of existing sewers prior to
installing any piping to assure minimum grades as specified hereinafter. If invert elevations shown are
incorre~t the Contractor shall not install any new piping but shall transmit written notice ofthe discrepancy
to the Architect for correction. Costs incurred for changes in the work in place as a result of failure to
notify the Architect before any piping is installed shall be borne by the Contractor.
I.
Piping in the vicinity of electrical equipment: Do not run piping or locate equipment, with respect to
switchboards, panelboards, power panels, motor control centers, or dry type transfom1ers:
15050-9
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09/02
Augusta, Georgia
I
I
1.24
A.
B.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
..' .
1. Within 42" in front of service access area of equipment.
2. Within 36" of sides of equipment.
3. Do not run piping through or above electrical equipment rooms.
4. Clearances apply vertically from floor to ceiling structures.
GUARANTY
See the General Conditions.
In addition to guaranty required by the General Conditions, the compressors for the air conditioning units
shall be provided with an additional 4-year guaranty which shall cover replacement compressor
(Replacement Compressor Exchange).
C.
Refrigerated water coolers shall be provided with 5-Year Limited Warranty on compressor and
refrigeration system.
END OF SECTION 15050
15050-10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09/02
Augusta, Georgia
.
1.01
A.
1.02
A.
1.03
A.
SECTION 15051
CODES, PERMITS AND INSPECTION
CODES
The requirements appearing in the latest edition with all amendments of the following codes in effect as
of the date of the opening of bids shall apply to work perfom1ed under this Section:
1. International Building Code
2. International Fire Prevention Code
3. Intemlltional Plumbing Code with Georgia Amendments
4. International Mechanical Code
5. Georgia State Energy Code for Buildings
6. NFPA 13, Sprinkler System Installation
7. NFPA 70 National Electric Code
8. NFPA 90A Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems
9. NFPA 91 Blower and Exhaust System
10. AMCA Publication 303, Application of Sound Power Level Ratings
11. AMCA Publication 302, Application of Sone Ratings
12. AMCA Publication 201, Fans & Codes
13. ANSI B9.1 Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration
14. 36 CFR Part 1191 Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings
and Facilities
PERMITS
Qbtain all necessary Permits and Inspections required for the installation of this work and pay all charges
incident thereto. Deliver to the Architect all certificates of inspection issued by authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Sewer tap fees, water tap fees, meter fees, Dept. of Labor Fees for Boilers and Pressure Vessels and all
other charges for work under Division 15, including charges for excess service by the Gas Company or any
other Utilities shall be paid by the Contractor.
WORKMANSH,IP AND MATERIALS
The workmanship and materials covered by these specifications shall conform to all ordinances,
requirements and regulations of the City, County and/or other authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
C.
Codes and Standards for piping materials shall be as specified hereinafter.
The above Codes & Standard Requirements are minimum. Where Contract drawings and specifications
exceed the above Codes and Standard Requirements then the Contract drawings and specifications shall
govern.
"...1'
.' /..
END OF SECTION 15051
15051-1
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09/02
Augusta, Georgia
I
1.01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.02
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15060
FlRESTOPPING
GENERAL
A.
References: The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The
publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.
1.. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MA TERJALS (ASTM)
a. ASTM E84: Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
b. ASTM E814:Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops
2. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSN. (NFPA)
a. NFP A 70: National Electrical Code
3. UNDERWRITERS LABORATORJES, INC. (UL)
a. UL-O I: Building Materials Directory
b. UL-1479: Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops
Submittals: The following shall be submitted in accordance with SECTION: 15050.7 SUBMITTALS:
1. Detail Drawings: Detail drawings of all types of penetrations for rated assemblies shall be
submitted and shall include manufacturer's descriptive data, typical details, installation
instructions and the fire test data and/or report as appropriate for the time-rated con~truction and
la,cation. The fire test data shall include a certification by a nationally recognized testing authority
acceptable to standard building code.
2. Certificates of Compliance: Where materials or equipment are specified to comply with
requirements of a particular agency, proof of such compliance shall be submitted. The label or
listing of the specified agency will be acceptable evidence. A copy of approved suhmittals shall
be kept on jobsite.
B.
C.
General Requirements: Firestopping shall consist of furnishing and installing a material or a combination
of materials to fonn an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke and gases, and to maintain the
integrity of the time-rated construction.
D.
Storage and Delivery: Materials shall be delivered in the original unopened packages or containers
showing name of the manufacturer and the brand name. Materials shall be stored off the ground and shall
be protected from damage and exposure to elements. Damaged or deteriorated materials sha II be removed
from the site.
PRODUCTS
Firestopping Materials: Firestopping materials shall consist of commercially manufactured products
complying with the following minimum requirements:
I. Fire Hazard Classification: Material shall have a flame spread of25 or less, a smoke developed
rating of 50 or less, and a fuel contribution of 50 or less when tested in accordance with ASTM
E 84 or UL 723.
2. Nontoxicity: Material shall be nontoxic to human beings and Non-corrosive at all stages of
application and during fire conditions.
3. Fire Resistance and Hose Stream Tests: Firestopping materials shall be rated "r" and "1''' in
accordance with ASTM E814 or UL 1479 except that the "1''' rating may be based on
thermocouple placed one inch from a penetrating item in lieu of direct attaclm1ent to penetrating
items. Rating periods shall conform to the following:
a. Time-rated floor or wall assemblies: 1,2,3, hours as applicable.
b. Openings between floor slabs and curtain walls: 1,2,3, hours as applicable.
c. Minimum 1 hour "T" rating on all floor penetrations outside of a shaft wa 11 enclosure.
4. Combustibility: Material shall be non-combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136.
5. Control and Expansion Joints: Firestopping materials used to impede the passage of smoke and
gases through control and expansion joints shall be a type that will not interfere with .the
expansion/contraction movement requirement ofthejoints. When installed, firestopping matenals
sllall provide the same time-rated protection at the joints as the adjacent wall ceiling, of floor
construction.
15060-1
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09/02
Augusta, Georgia
I
I
6.
Approved Products:
a. Rectorseal Metacaulk
b. Flame Stop V Putty/Caulk
c. 3M Fire Protection Products
d. Hilti
e. G.E. silicones
f. Dow Coming
1.03 EXECUTION
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Firestopping shall be installed at locations shown or specified in accordance with manufacturer's written
instruction. Cutting and patching of construction and providing sleeves, where required, shall be provided
under this section. Firestopping shall be provided in the following locations:
1. Duct and pipe penetrations through above grade floor slabs and through time-rated partitions and
fire walls.
2. Penetrations of vertical shafts such as pipe chases, elevator shafts and utility chutes.
B.
Filling of Voids:
1. Surface Preparation: Surfaces to be in contact with firestopping material shall be free of dirt,
grease or loose material or other substances that may affect proper fitting or the required fire
resistance. Firestopping material shall completely fill void spaces regardless of geometric
configuration, subject to tolerances established by the mai1Ufacturer. Firestopping for filling voids
in floors in which the smallest dimension of the void is 4 inches or more, shall support the same
load as the floor is designed to support or shall be protected by a permanent barrier to prevent
loading or traffic in the firestopped area.
Pipe and Ductwork: ,
I. Ductwork: Ductwork penetrating 1 hour assemblies without a fire damper, insulated or
uninsulated, shall have the voids between the ductwork or insulation and the prepared opening
filled with firestopping material. The material shall be installecl as recommended by the
manufacturer.
2. Pipe: Pipes penetrating I hour or greater assemblies, insulated or uninsulated, shall have the
voids between the pipe or insulation and the prepared opening filled with firestopping material.
The material shall be installed as recommended by the manufacturer and tested by an approved
testing laboratory.
C.
D.
Fire Dampers: Fire dampers in ducts and penetrations of time-rated construction shall be furnished and
installed in accordance with the requirements of SECTION: 15840 - AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
E.
Inspection:
1. Firestopped areas should be immediately inspectable.
2. Firestopping shall precede gypsum board finishing.
3. Firestopped areas shall not be covered or enclosed until inspection is complete and approved.
END OF SECTION 15060
15060-2
....: .
I
I
I
I
I
I
,.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09/02
Augusta, Georgia
1.01
A.
SECTION 15090
MECHANICAL SUPPORTING DEVICES
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
Horizontal Piping: Hangers and supports shall be installed at locations not more than 3 feet from
equipment served, not more than 1 foot from each change in direction of piping and on straight runs as
herei.n specified. Hangers shall be provided with hanger rods and nuts.
B.
Hangers shall be sized to be in direct contact with the pipe except that hangers on cold lines shall be sized
to fit around pipe insulation and shall include pipe, insulation, and pipe covering protection shield. Cold
lines are defined as lines transporting mediums below 55 Deg. F and shall include domestic cold water
lines.
1.
2.
3.
Hangers for copper tubing shall be PVC coated swivel loop hanger Grirmell Fig. 97C, Eleen
Fig. 91 or M-CO No. 102.
Hangers for steel pipe shall be galvanized steel clevis type, Grinnell Fig. 260, Eleen Fig. 12 or
M-CO 400.
Upper attachments for hangers (for cormection to steel beams and joist) shall be C-clamps with
retaining clips and shall be Grirmell Fig 86, Eleen Fig. 25L, or M-CO Fig 255L. Provide Grirmell
Fig. 281, Eleen Fig. 86 or M-CO Fig. 355 concrete insert in concrete structure. Hanger rod shall
be machine threaded of same size as hanger tapping. Upper attaclmlent for connection to wood
joists shall be coach screw rod and shall be Grinnell Fig. 142, Eleen rig. 74 or M-CO Fig 41.
Where piping runs parallel to joists or steel, provide steel angle iron between stmctural members.
Angle iron shall be selected for loaded deflection not to exceed 1/360th of span.
Roller supports shall be M-CO No. 615 or equivalent by GrilUlell or Elcen
Hangers and supports shall be spaced as follows:
a. Copper Tubing shall be supported at not more than 6' intervals for tubing up to 1-1/2"
in size and not more than 8' intervals for tubing 2" and larger.
Support steel pipes as follows:
Nominal Distance
Pipe Between
Size Supports
1/2" 6 ft.
3/4"-1-1/2" 8ft.
2"-2-1/2" 10ft.
3"-4" 12ft.
6"-12" 14 ft.
PVC piping shall be supported at intervals of not more than four (4) feet. Pipe shall also
be supported at all branch ends and at all changes of direction. Support trap arms as
close as possible to the trap.
Piping underground shall be laid on firm bed for its entire length.
4.
5.
6.
b.
c.
d.
c.
Vertical Piping: Piping shall be supported by riser clamps and shall be Grinnell Fig. 261, Eleen Fig. 39
or M~CO Fig. 510. Supports for copper tubing shall be same as above but tubing shall receive two wraps
of 2-1/2" wide 4 lb. sheet lead at support point before clamp bolts are tightened. Riser clamps shall be
supported by the structure.
Piping supported by UniStmt type supports and clamps in direct contact with the pipe shall receive two
(2) wraps of 2-1/2-inch wide 4-lb. sheet lead at support points before the clamp is tightened.
D.
E.
Insulation Protection Shields:
I. Saddles shall be installed at each hanger point where hanger fits around insulated piping.
2. Saddles shall be 22 gauge galvanized steel. Shields shall be 12" long.
a. Horizontal piping supported from hangers with vertical hanger rods shall have shields
encircling the bottom 1800 of the pipe insulation.
b. Horizontal or vertical piping supported by UniStmt type supports and clamps shall have
shields encircling 3150 of the pipe insulation.
F.
Vibration Isolation Hangers:
I. See Specification Section VIBRA nON AND SOUND CONTROL.
15090-1
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09/02
Augusta, Georgia
1.02 DUCTWORK
I
A.
Ductwork. Ducts shall be supported as specified under AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM.
1.03 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATIONS AND SUPPORTS
I
A.
Concrete pads and structural steel supports for. equipment shall be as shown on the drawings or as outlined
below. The Contractor shall be responsible for detemuningthe final exact dimensions of equipment
foundations in accordance with the manufacturer's approved shop drawings. Concrete shall be 6 inch
minimum thickness 3000 PSI with 6" x 6" - 10 ga. steel wire mesh in the center of the pour of each pad.
Edges of concrete pads shall be chamfered. Top of pad sha 11 be 4" minimum above surrounding finished
grade. Edges of pad shall extend a minimum of 4" below surrounding finished grade.
I
I
B.
C.
Submit equi~pment foundation drawings for approval as specified hereinbefore SUBMITTALS.
Equipment foundations or supports shall be as follows:
I. 6" (minimum) Concrete Pad: Outside air to air heat pumps and all other outside equipment.
2. Angle Iron Frame: Heat Pumps.
I
END OF SECTION 15090
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
'.'.il:';l
I
I
I
I
15090-2
I
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09/02
Augusta, Georgia
I
SECTION 15100
VALVES
I
1.01
A.
GENERAL
All valves shall be installed to be accessible for operation or service.
I
B. Valv.es shall have back seat allowing repacking under pressure.
C. Wherever possible, valve stems and handles shall be placed at an angle above the horizontal to avoid dirt
collection.
I
I
D. Valves shall be provided at each piece of equipment requiring water or air (gate valves) or gas (cocks).
1.02 PLUMBING
I
A. Gate Valves
I. For Copper Tubing: Valves shall be B62 bronze body, rising stem, solid wedge, inside screw
bonnet with solder joint ends and rated at 125 WSP, 200 WOG. Valves shall be Hammond
18635, Kitz 44, Milwaukee 149, Nibco S-111 or Stockham B-1 08 or Watts B31 0 I. (Hammond
IB647, Kitz 41, Milwaukee 115, Nibco S-113, Stockham B-I04 or Watts 83001 non-rising stem
for underground valves.)
B. Check Valves:
I. Fat copper tubing valves shall be B62 bronze body, bronze disc, horizontal swing type with
solder-joint ends and rated at 125 WSP, 200 WOG. Valves shall be Crane 1342, Hammond
18912, Kitz 23, Milwaukee 1509, Nibco S-413B, Stockham B-309, or Watts CVS.
I
I
C. Relief Valves:
I. General: All relief valves shall be ASME stamped and shall be set as shown on drawings. See
also Section WATER HEATERS AND ACCESSORIES.
2. Water: Bronze body, 125 psig wwp (unless otherwise specified) with bronze trim, stainless steel
spring, screwed end 1-1/4 inch size and be provided with operating lever. Valves shall be as
manufactured by Kunkle, Lonergan, Leslie, Mipco, B&G, Watts or McDonald-Miller.
3. Equipment relief valves shall be furnished by the equipment manufacturer.
4. Other relief valves shaH be of the same construction as for water.
I
I
D. . Globe Valves (All Systems):
1. 2-1/2" and smaller shaH be B62 bronze body, union bonnet with plug-type stainless steel disc and
seat, screwed end and be rated at ISO WSP, 300 WOG. Valves shall be Crane 14-I!2P,
HammondlB434, Kitz 17S, Milwaukee 591A, NibcoT-25GAP, StockhamB-29 or Watts B4020-
SS.
2. 3" and larger shall be A 126, Class B cast iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, flanged end and
rated at 125 WSP, 200 WOG. Valves shall be Crane 351, Hammond IR116, Kitz 76, Milwaukee
F-2981-M, Nibco F718-B, Stockham G512 or Watts F501.
E. Ball valve (2" and smaller) shall be Full Port, 2-piece bronze body with Teflon seats and seals and S.S. ball
and trim, screwed ends, rated at 150 WSP, 600 WOG. Valves shall be ApoHo 77-140-01, Crane 9302-S,
Hammond 8303, Kitz 68M, Nibco T-585-70-66 or Watts B-6080-SS.
I
I
I
1.03 FOR REFRIGERANT SERVICE
I
A. See Section PIPING FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.
END OF SECTION 15100
I
I':
I
15100-1
I
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09/02
Augusta, Georgia
I
I
1.01
A.
I
1.02
A.
I
I
";' 1\
; ,
.','
SECTION 15140
PUMPS
GENERAL
Pumps shall be selected so that the specified operating point falls on or to the left ofa curve drawn through
the maximum efficiency points on the pump characteristics curve.
DOMESTIC HOT WATER RECIRCULATING PUMP
The pump shall be the in-the-Iine centrifugal bronze construction, oil lubricated type designed for 125 psig
working pressure. Pump shall have mechanical seal. Pump body and impeller shall be bronze and the shaft
shall be steel. Pump motor shall be of the open, drip-proof, sleeve bearing construction with built-in
thermal overload protectors. Motor shall operate at 1750 RPM and shall be non-overloading at any point
on its characteristic curve.
B.
The pump shall be controlled by a strap-on ^quastat equal to Honeywell L6006C. Aquastat shall be
Honeywell, Jolmson, Robertshaw, Powers or Barber Coleman. Pump shall be Bell and Gossett Booster
Pump, Taco Circulator or Grundfos.
I
1.03 SUMP PUMP
A.
Provide in locations indicated on the drawings a Sump Pump assembly. Pump shall be of capacity as
indicated on the drawings.
Sump pump shall be submersible type with hemletically sealed motor operating in dielectric oil. Oil shall
cool motor windings and lubricate the bearings and the shaft seal. Shaft seal shall be ceramic-carbon. All
fasteners and external parts shall be stainless steel. Impeller shall be of the non-clog design. Pump
discharge shall pass 5/8 inch solids.
I
I
C.
D.
E.
1.04
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B.
Sump pump shall have integral mercury float switch.
Provide unicheck valve on discharge piping.
Pump arid ~cc'~ssories shall be as manufactured by Zoeller, Myers or Penberthy.
~.~
SUMP PUMP BASIN
Provide 36" x 36" duplex .1875" fiberglass basin. Basin shall be gasketcd 1/4 inch thick lid with vent
flange, 2-discharge flanges, 3-neoprene seals for cord seals, 2 pump access plates and an inspection plate.
Basin shall have a cast iron inlet hub and fiberglass basin extension to allow lid to be flush with floor and
an inlet to match the inlet invert elevation. See drawings and schedule for inlet, outlet and vent sizes.
END OF SECTION 15140
15140-1
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09/02
Augusta, Georgia
I
SECTION 15200
VIBRATION AND SOUND CONTROL
1.01
GENERAL
I
A. Refer to Section 15050, GENERAL PROVISIONS, for additional requirements.
I
B. Vibration isolation shall consist of equipment isolation with flexible connections of piping and duct
cOlU1ec!,ion. to .equipment.
I
,','
e. Isolation ni~terials manufacturer shall select springs to accomplish srecified minimum static deflection,
for spring and pad type isolators, based on weight distribution and frequency of equipment to be isolated.
All isolation shall be by one manufacturer.
D. All isolation deflections shall be based on ASHRAE 1991 Handbook-HV AC Systems and Applications
Chapter 42 Table 34. The isolation of any mechanical equipment included in these plans that is not
specifically covered by these specifications shall be isolated in accordance with Chapter 42, Table 34 as
described above.
I
E. The Contractor shall submit for approval calculations from the isolation materials manufacturer which shall
include operating weights, rpm, weight distribution, and calculations for selection of springs.
F. Vibration Isolation material shall be as specified and as manufactured by Kinetics Noise and Vibration
Control, Vibration Mountings and Control or material by Amber Booth meeting the material specification,
natural frequency and deflection of the specified model.
I
I
1.02 SPRING ISOLATION HANGERS
I
A. Type 3: Model SFH Combination Spring and Fiber glass Hangers, incorporating precompressed molded
fiber glass noise and vibration pads, coated with a moisture impervious elastomeric membrane in series
with springs, all encased in welded steel brackets. Isolators shall be designed for 50% overload capacity,
and shall accommodate rod misaliglID1ent over a 30 degree arc.' Brackets shall be designed to carry 500%
overload without failure.
I
1.03 FIBER GLASS ISOLATION PADS
I
A. Type 9: Model KIP Procompressed Molded Fiber glass Noise and Vibration Isolation Pads, individually
,coated with a flexible moisture impervious elastomeric membrane. Pads shall be fine (.00027" diameter)
bonded alU1ealed glass fibers which have been stabilized during manufacture by overloading the material
ten times. Pads shall have a constant natural frequency over the operating load range, and the stiffness shall
increase proportionately with load applied. Pads shall be no taller than the shortest horizontal dimension.
Where the equipment base does not provide a unifomlload surface, steel plates shall be bonded to the top
of th~ pads.
I
I
. . , .
1.04 INSTALLATION OF ISOLATION AND ISOLATED EQUIPMENT
',I"
!',
I
A. Installation of all vibration isolation equipment specified in this section shall be made using manufacturer's
written instructions. On completion of installation of all isolation materials and before start-up of isolated
equipment, all debris shall be cleared from around and beneath equipment leaving equipment free to move
on the isolation supports.
B. Unitary Heat Pump Units shall be supported by Type 9 mounts for floor mounted.
C. Inline fans shall be mounted with Type 3 isolators.
I
1.05 INSTALLATION OF SOUND CONTROL EQUIPMENT
I
A. Flexible Duct Connections: Shall be provided for connections to equipment in locations shown and on all
isolated equipment where it cOlU1ects to unisolated duct or plenum. Flexible duct connections shall be
furnished with the duct work as specified under Section AIR DISTR.IBUTION.
I
END OF SECTION 15200
15200-1
I
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09/02
Augusta, Georgia
I
SECTION 15250
MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATION
1.01
GENERAL
I
A. All insulation material shall have a pemmnent composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive) fire
and smoke hazard rating as tested by procedure ASTM-E84, NFP A 255 and UL 723 not exceeding:
1. Flame Spread 25
2. Smoke Developed 50
B. Coatings, adhesives and sealants shall be Childers, H.B. Fuller, Epolux, Marathon or Mon-Eco.
I
I
C. No PVC fitting covers, foamed elastomeric insulation or other smoke and fume producing insulation or
components except those having published 25/50 ratings shall be allowed in return air plenums.
D. Insulation (except where built into exterior walls) shall not be installed until the permanent roofis in place.
Exception: Flexible closed cell plastic pipe insulation.
I
E. Insulation shall be applied on clean, dry surfaces. All insulation except through fire or smoke rated walls,
partitions or floors, shall be continuous through wall and ceiling openings and sleeves. Insulation on all
cold surfaces shall be applied with continuous unbroken vapor seal. Supports that are secured to cold
surfaces shall be insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation.
I
F. Inserts shall be provided for fiberglass or flexible closed cell plastic pipe insulation on copper piping above
2-inches and steel piping above 1-l/2-inches. Inserts and sheet metal saddles shall be installed at pipe
hangers where hangers are sized to fit around pipe and insulation. Inserts between the pipe and pipe
hangers and shields shall consist of rigid cellular glass pipe insulation (Foamglas). Inserts shall extend I"
beyond on each end of the pipe covering protection shield and shall cover 180 degrees around bottom of
pipe covering 3600 when UniStrut supports are used.
I
I
G. Unions and flanges on cold piping shall be insulated the same as adjoining piping. Unions and flanges on
hot piping will not be insulated except for persoilllel protection.
H. All flexible closed cell plastic pipe insulation shall be installed under compression so that joints will not
separate when piping expands and contracts. Insulation shall be installed without splitting. EXCEPTION:
Valves and fittings shall be insulated with mitered sections of insulation. All butt joints and seams shall
be sealed with Contact Adhesive. Whole sections shall be slipped onto piping before joints are made. Pull
. insulation back from joint to prevent burning during soldering or brazing operations.
I
I
I. The following shall be insulated:
I. Aboveground and/or underslab domestic hot and cold water piping and hot water recirculating
water piping.
2. Air conditioning supply and return ducts (lined and unlined) and transfer ducts. Exception:
a. Pre-insulated flexible ducts wiIl not be insulated.
3. Unlined heating and ventilating supply ducts and all unlined outside air ducts. Exception: Lined
ducts in finished areas wiIl not be insulated externaIly. (Mechanical Equipment Rooms are not
finished areas.)
4. Hot water risers and drain piping exposed under Handicapped lavatories.
5. Range hood supply ductwork.
6. Above slab plumbing waste lines, P-trap and horizontal pipe runs to vertical drops receiving
discharge from heat pump or air conditioning unit drains or ice machine drains.
7. Air conditioning condensate drain piping.
8. Refrigerant suction/vapor piping.
I
I
I
I
J. Pipe insulation exposed in Mechanical Rooms and in other locations noted in the drawings shall be covered
with 20 mi.1 UV-resistant polyvinyl chloride covering. Jacketing shall be installed in accordance with the
manufactur7-fsprinted instructions using solvent welding adhesive to seal all lap joints.
I
I
15250-1
I
I
I
Augusta Comm?ns, 09/02
Augusta, GeorgIa .:'
1.02 PLUMBING SYSTEM
I
A. Plumbing system piping unless otherwise noted shall be insulated with 3 pound per cubic foot-density
preformed fiberglass with vapor barrier and white foil scrim craft (AS]) jacket with glass fiber threads.
EXCEPTION FOR MASONRY WALLS: Piping in exterior walls and interior walls that do not have a
chase space shall be insulated With 3/4 inch thick flexible closed-cell insulation (Armaflex or Rubatex) and
shall be installed before masonry walls are erected.
B. Fittings and valves shall be covered with PVC fitting covers having double thickness .75 lb. density
fiberglass inserts.
I
I
C. Insulation shall be Schuller, CertainTeed, Knauf, Owens-Corning or Pittsburgh Plate Glass.
D.. Adhesive and mastic shall be Bei1jamin Foster, Childers, Apolux, Insul-Coustic, Lion Oil, Owens-Coming,
Vimasco or Am1Strong.
I
I
E. Insulating cements shall be Eagle-Pitcher, 48 Insulation, Schuller, or Phillip Carey.
F. Systen1S shall be insulated as follows:
I. Aboveground domestic cold, hot and hot water circulation piping. Thickness = 1"
2. Install insulation with jackets drawn tight and jacket sidelaps and end joint butt strips secured
with adhesive. End joint butt strips shall be not less than 3" wide and of identical material to
jacket.
3. Do not insulate chromium plated brass connections to fixtures, or exposed piping to kitchen
equipment.
4. Handicapped Lavatory traps and hot water risers: See Section PLUMBING FIXTURES AND
ACCESSORIES.
5. Ice Machine drains or P-traps receiving water below 55 Deg. F.: 3/8" Annaflex, Imcoa or
Rubatex tubing insulation.
I
I
I
1.03 AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING
I
A. Insulate all air conditioning condensate drain piping. Exception: Insulation is not required on condensate
drain piping installed outside the building.\
B. Insulation shall be:
I. Armstrong Armaflex with Armstrong 520 Adhesive.
2. Rubatex with Rubatex 373 Adhesive.
.3. Imcoa with Adhesive.
I
C. Insulation thickness shall be Yz".
I
D. Insulation shall be slipped 011 the pipe without splilling the insulation prior to erection and the bull joints
shall be sealed with adhesive.
I
E. Fitting insulation shall be fabricated and installed according to the manu facturer's recommended
procedures. Pipe fittings shall be insulated with miter cut pieces of pipe insulation the same size as on
adjacent piping. All joints and miter cut pieces shall be sealed with adhesive.
1.04 DUCTWORK.
I
A.
Insulate ductwork, except as noted with blanket type insulation.
1. Insulation to have an average themla 1 conductivity not to exceed .27 BTU-in. per square foot per
hour at a mean temperature of 75 degrees F. Insulation shall have a minimum density of 3/4
lb. cu. ft. Insulation shall be:
Schuller Microlite rlexible I3bnket-FSK
Owens-Coming Fiberglass Faced Duct Wrap Type IV
CertainTeed Standard Duct Wrap
Knauf Ductwrap
2. Insulation thickness shall be 2".
I
I
I
15250-2
I
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
I
I
I
1.05
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
3.
Insulation shall be wrapped around ductwork with all circumferential joints butted and
longitudinal joints overlapped a minimum of 2 inches. All joints shall be lapped, stapled and
sealed with a 3" wide strip ofGlasfab embedded in heavy bed of mastic equal to Childers CP-50A
or CP-50AHV-2. Insulation on bottom of ducts wider than 24" shall be supported by Stik-Clips
and washers 16" on center.
Insulation shall not be compressed beyond a maximum of 5% at any point.
Insulation shall completely cover that part of ceiling diffusers exposed above ceilings. Provide
glassfab and mastic seal at junction of blanket insulation and pre-insulated flexible ductwork.
4.
5.
. )'('..:
REFRIGERANT SUCTION (VAPOR) LINES
Refrigerant suction (vapor) lines shall be insulated with 3/4" thick flexible closed cell insulation. Insulation
exposed outside building shall be painted with two coats of best-quality Exterior Water-Based Latex paint.
Color shall be as selected by the Architect.
END OF SECTION 15250
~~ '
15250-3
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
I
SECTION 15401
DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS
1.01
DESCRIPTION
I
A. Refer to Section 15050 GENERAL PROVISIONS, Excavation, Trenching, Backfilling and Warning
Tapes. Provide underground Warning Tapes for all underground pipelines outside the building.
B. Provide complete systems of cold and hot water piping and accessories from a point 5' -0" outside the
building and as noted on drawings, to each fixture and piece of water-using equipment including fixtures
or equipment furnished by the Owner or under another Section of the Specifications.
C. Kitchen Equipment: Refer to Section Food Service Equipment for equipment to be fumished and
instructions for setting of equipment. Under this Section (Mechanical) the contractor shall install all fixture
trim, faucets, hose reels, water supply piping, steam piping and all drain and blowoffpipmg associated with
the Food Service equipment.
I
I
I
1.02 PIPING SYSTEM
I
A. PipiIfg, sol~er or flux used on domestic water systems provided for this Project shall be "lead free". Lead
free IS defined as less than 0.2 percent lead in solder and flux and less than 8.0 percent in pipes and fittings.
1.03 PIPE AND FITTINGS
I
A. Pipe and fittings shall be as listed herein and shall be used on the services indicated.
B. Underground water supply 1-1/4" and larger: Type "K" hard drawn, Fed. Spec. No. WW-T-799 copper
tubing with wrought copper fittings for sweat type joints.
C. Underground water supply I" and smaller: Type "K" soft temper without joints where underslab piping
"loops" from fixture to fixture.
I
I
D. Aboveground water supply: Type "L" hard drawn, Fed. Spec. No. WW- T-700 copper tubing with wrought
copper fittings for sweat type joints.
1.04 JOINTS
I
A. . Copper tubing and fittings shall be cleaned bright with sand cloth and tubing brush, tubing coated with non-
corosive flux and inserted fully into fitting. Aboveground joints shall be made with Bridgit solder.
Underground joint shall be made with Sil-Fos or equal high temperature 1200 degrees F. melting point
brazing compound. Use copper to screw pipe adapters at screwed valves or fittings.
1. All flux shall be compatible with the alloy used for joints.
I
1.05 ACCESSORIES
I
A. Wall Hydrants and Hose Bibbs: Shall be as scheduled on the Drawings.
I. Equal products by Josam, Woodford, Smith, Wade or Zurn will be acceptable.
B. Loose Key Handles: Provide I additional loose key handle for every 5 wall hydrants and/or hose bibbs
or a fraction thereof.
I
C. Vacuum Breakers: Vacuum breakers shall be chrome plated for hose bibbs. Watts No. SA, Zum or Nidel
No. 3/4 RD. Vacuum breakers for wall hydrants shaIl be non-freeze, vandal-proof type.
I
D. Vacuum Relief Valves: Provide Watts No. N36, Zurn or Nidel or equal for bottom feed water heaters.
,',
I
E. Double check valve type backflow preventer:
I. Install unit at locations indicated on the Drawings. A double check valve assembly shall be
provided at referenced cross connections to prevent the backflow of poIluted water into the
potable water supply. The cross connections shall be deternlined by local inspection authority
for use where a high hazard situation does not exist. It shall be a complete assembly including
four ball-type test cocks and shut-offvalves. A strainer upstream of the device shall be provided.
I
15401-1
I
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.06
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2. The device shall meet the requirements of A.S.S.E. Std. 1015; A WW A Std. C506 and shall be
Watts Regulator Company Series 007.
3. Equal products manufactured by Febco or Zurn Wilkins will be acceptable.
F. Pressure Reducing Valve: Shall be of the diaphragm-actuated type, self-contained, single seated, direct
acting and spring loaded. Valve body and all other parts normally in contact with water shall be bronze.
Valves shall be furnished with a thread seal around to adjusting screw to prevent leakage. Outlet pressure
shall be 60 psi. Provide pressure gauge downstream of P.R.V. Provide wye strainer upstream of P.R.V.
Unit.shall be Cash-Acme Type "E", Series 3, Watts No. 223S, Wilkins 500 Series, or McAlean No. 348
with separate strainer.
Strainer;
1. Shall be of the Y -pattern type with cast bronze body, stainless steel screen and tlu"eaded
connections (WWP 125 lbs. at 4000 F, 400 WOG at 2100 F). 2-1/2 inch and smaller sizes shall
have a #20 mesh screen, 3" sizes shall have a 3/64" perforated screen and 4" sizes shall have a
1/8" perforated screen. Strainers shall be manufactured by Watts, Febco and Wilkins.
2. Strainers 1-1/2" and smaller shall have a removable bronze plug in the blowoff outlet.
3. Strainers 2" and larger shall have a full port ball valve installed in the blowoffoutlet. Valve shall
be full size of the blowoff tapping. Install a pipe plug in the outlet of the valve.
G.
H.
Them10meters: Shall be the red-reading mercury-filled adjustable angle type. Thermometers shall be
adjustable to any angle through a 180-degree arc and shall be provided with a locking device. Final
positioning of thermometer shall be such that it is readable from the floor and it shall be locked in that
position. Thermometers shall have V-Cast aluminum case with baked enamel finish and 9-inch scale.
Them10meters shall be provided with separable sockets and where installed on insulated pipes, sockets
shall be extension neck type. Thermometer scale range shall be 30 to 240 degrees F. Thermometers shall
be Ashcroft, Marsh, Moeller, Weksler, Trerice or Weiss.
Pressure Gauges: Shall be connected to the piping system with brass pipe and fittings. Gauges shall be
the flangeless type and shall have 4-1/2" dials, except as hereinafter specified, stainless steel cases and
bayonet rings, bronze bushed heavy duty rotary gear movement, phosphor bronze bourdon tubs, forged
brass rod sdckets and tips, I % accuracy of sca Ie range, glass dial covers, and 1/4" lower connections. Each
gauge shall be complete with Snubber (pulsation damper). Each gauge shall be provided with brass gauge
cock. Pressure range shall be 0 - ISO psi. Gauges shall be Ashcroft, Marsh, Marshalltown, Weksler,
Trerice or Weiss.
I.
INSTALLATION
Piping:
1. "
2.
Changes in direction and sizes shall be made with standard fittings.
Unions: Install 125 lb. sweat pattern unions where shown and at connection to each fixture or
piece of equipment. Install dielectric unions or insulating flange sets where copper piping systems
connects to ferrous piping systems.
Provide gate valve at each piece of equipment requiring water service. Provide fixture stops,
risers, fixture traps and setting material, for fixtures and equipment furnished under this Section
(Domestic Water System) and equipment provided by others.
Joints: Ends of pipe shall be reamed; pipe and fittings shall be cleaned. Aboveground sweat
joints shall be made using Bridgit solder. Use non-corrosive flux. Underground joints shall be
made using high temperature silver solder.
Where pipe penetrates floor slab on grade, install 1/2 in. thick foam plastic insulation extending
3 inches beyond concrete, top and bottom.
Runouts to wall hydrants, hose bibbs, gate valves, and fixture stops, shall be securely anchored
in place at the fixture stop to prevent pipe movement at this point.
All underground piping outside the building shall have a minimum of 30 inches of cover unless
otherwise noted. Interior piping shall have a minimum of 18 inches of cover.
Clearance betwe"en sewer and water lines shall be in accordance with the Recommended
Standards for Sewage Works (Ten State Standards).
Pipe above ceiling shall be run below the building insulation. Run piping as close to ceiling as
possible and "arch" building insulation over piping. Be certain there are no voids between
insulation batts.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
15401-2
I
I.
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
I
I
I
1.07
A.
I
I
I
I
1.08
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Accessories:
I. Wall hydrants and hose bibbs: Install in locations shown; set with flanges flush against wall
surfaces. Anchor securely in place.
2. Backflow Preventers: Provide indirect drain fitting at vent cOlmections and extend drain full size
to nearest drain or as shown on drawings.
3. Vacuum Breakers: Install on wall hydrants and hose bibbs in accordance with manufacturer's
te!nplates. Adjust non-freeze type for drainage.
4. Floor, wall and ceiling plates: Install on pipes passing through floors, walls, or ceilings, except
in chases or above ceilings. Set tight against finish surface.
DISINFECTION OF PIPING
B.
The potable water system shall be adequately disinfected as per Federal Specifications BB-C-120 and
subsequent to the disinfection, water samples shall be sent to the local Health Department (LHD) for
testing. LHD approval shall be obtained before the system is put into service.
Each unit of the completed water supply lines and distribution systems shall be disinfected BEFORE IT
IS PLACED IN OPERATION. The system shall be lilled with a chlorinated water solution containing
not less than fifty (50) parts per million of chlorine solution. Following a contact period of not less than
twenty-four (24) hours, the chlorinated water shall be flushed from the system with clear water until the
residual chlorine content is not greater than two-tenths (0.2) parts per million.
Contractor shall submit to the Architect, in triplicate a letter of Certification from an independent Testing
Lab acceptable to the Georgia Department of Public Health stating that the above disinfection procedure
has been completed satisfactorily.
C.
TESTING PIPE
General: Piping to be concealed and/or insulated shall be tested in place before concealing or covering.
Tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Architect or his designated representative. Piping located
underground sha II be tested before backfilling. Equipment, materials and instlUments for tests shall be
furnished by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner.
B.
Water Piping: Upon completion of the roughing-in and before setting fixtures, the entire hot and cold
water piping system shall be tested at a hydrostatic pressure of not less than 150 lbs. per square inch gauge,
and proved tight at this pressure for not less than 4 (four) hours. Where a portion of the water piping
system is to be concealed before completion, this portion shall be tested separately in a maImer described
for the entire system.
C.
The pressurelleakage test shall be conducted in accordance with A WW A Standard C600-87, Section 4.
The formula to be used to calculate the allowable leakage per hour shall be L = SD(P)5/l33200.
Where L ~:ailowable leakage (gals./hr.)
S = length of the pipeline tested (feet)
D = diameter of pipe (inches)
P = average test pressure (psig).
D.
END OF SECTION 15401
15401-3
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
I
1.01
A.
I
I
I
1.02
A.
I
I
I
I
1.03
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15405
SOIL, WASTE AND VENT SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION
B.
Refer to Section 15050 GENERAL PROVISIONS, Excavation, Trenching, Backfilling and Warning
Tapes. Provide underground Warning Tapes for all underground pipelines outside the building.
Complete interior system of soil, waste and vent piping to 5'-0" outside of building, or as noted on
drawings.
C.
Provide waste and drain cOlmections for equipment furnished by Owner or under another Division of the
Specifications. Make final connections to fixtures or equipment.
PIPE AND FITIINGS
Soil, waste;'and vent pipe and fittings to a point five feet outside the building and as indicated in the
drawings, shall be:
I. Aboveground and Below Ground: Except in HV AC Plenums: Schedule 40 PVC pipe
confom1ing to ASTM D2665 with solvent weld PVC drainage pattern fittings. All piping shall
bear NSF approval stamp.
2. Penetrations through fire rated walls, floors or partitions shall be made using Through-Penetration
Firestop Systems (XHEZ) listed in Underwriter's Laboratories BUILDING MATERIALS
DIRECTORY.
B.
Waste arms serving lavatories, counter sinks and water coolers shall be:
1. Schedule 40 PVC pipe confomUng to ASTM D2665 with solvent weld DWV fittings when used
with PVC drainage and vent system.
2. Fitted with trap adapter having only the threaded portion of fitting extending beyond wall.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Floor drains, cleanouts, fixture' carriers, interceptors, hydrants water hammer arrestors and roof drains:
Items shall be as shown in the schedule or on the drawings complete with accessories shown and as noted
otherwise.
B. Items shall be J. R. Smith as shown in the schedule.
c.
Items of equal constmction and performance as determined by manufacturer's comparison charts and as
manufactured by Zurn, Wade, Josam or Jonespec will be acceptable.
Where indicated on the drawings' and where required by the Local Authority, floor drains shall be fitted
with trap primer connections or floor drain riser shall have a fitting to receive the priming water.
E. Interior cleanouts in carpeted areas shall have carpet markers.
D.
F.
Cleanout plugs shall be bronze.
G.
Water closet flanges for PVC piping system shall be Charlotte Fig No. 812 with metal ring or equal
products by Jonespec or Smith.
Cleanouts: 'cleanouts shall consist oflong sweep fittings to an accessible location. Cleanouts shall be of
type indicated on the Drawings and shall be Smith, Wade, Josam, Jonespec or Zurn.
H.
I.
Traps: Each fixture and piece of equipment including floor drains and hub drains, including fixtures or
equipment provided under another Section, requiring connections to the drainage system shall be equipped
with a trap placed as near to the fixture as possible. No fixtures shall be double trapped. Traps for floor
drains and hub drains shall be deep seal "p" traps. All other traps unless noted shall be supplied under
Section - PLUMBING FIXTURES AND EQUIPMENT. Provide Trap Primers where indicated on the
Drawings. Connect to nearest water supply and extend to floor drains.
15405-1
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
J. Flashing:
I. Unless otherwise noted, vent pipes shall be flashed and made watertight at the roof with 4 pound
sheet lead. Exception: Flashing for single membrane roofing will be provided by another
Section.
2. Flashing shall extend not less than 12 inches from the vent pipes in all directions. Flashings for
vent pipes shall be extended, up the vent pipes and shall be turned down into the pipe a minimum
of I".
3. Flashing for Sloped Roofs: .No-Caulk roof flashing consisting of Thermo-Plastic base flashing
and neoprene collar.
4. Flashing thru metal roofs shall be of the type specifically approved by the metal roof
manufacturer. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the roof manufacturers printed details
and instructions and shall be acceptable to the roof manufacturer.
I
I
I
1.04 INSTALLATION
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Soil, Waste and Drain Piping:
1. Under no circumstances shall bricks, blocks or other supports be used to bring pipe to grade.
2. Horizontal soil, waste and drain piping 4" and larger shall be given a minimum grade of 1/8 inch
per foot unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Piping 3" and smaller shall have minimum
grade of 1/4" per foot. Main vertical soil and waste stacks shall be extended full size to the roof
line and 9" above as vents, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Locate plumbing vent
temunals so they are a minimum of 10 feet horizontally from air intakes. Changes in pipe size
or direction shall be made with standard fittings. Bushings are not acceptable. Fittings shall be
same weight/Schedule classification as the pipe on which they are installed. Reduction of the size
of drainage piping in the direction of flow is prohibited. Vent or tap Tees will not be pennitted
on waste lines.
3. Cleanouts:
a. :' " . After cleanout is set the cleanout plug shall be removed, the male threads lubricated with
).
" white non-hardening teflon lubricant equal to Real Tuf as manufactured by Hercules and
the plug reinstalled and tightened to 20 inch pounds.
b. Exterior cleanouts shall not be lubricated until after concrete pads have been poured.
Remove all traces of concrete from the Cleanout Top.
B. Accessories:
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
C.
1.
2.
3.
Floor Drains: Install in locations shown.
Hub Drains: Install in locations shown; provide increaser fitting and set hub rim 1/2 inches
(max.) above finish floor level. Provide loose set cast iron bar grate in increaser.
C1eanouts shall be of size and type and shall be provided as indicated on the drawings and where
required by Code. They shall be the same size as the pipe on which installed except the maximum
cIeanout size shall be 4". Cleanouts in carpeted areas shall have carpet markers.
Exterior Cleanouts: Set flush in concrete surfaces, Verify elevations after concrete fonns are set
and before concrete is placed. In unpaved areas set flush with finish grade with 18" x 18" x 12"
3000 psi concrete pad. Compact earth around cleanout body before fomling for concrete pad.
Traps: Each fixture and piece of equipment including floor drains and hub drains requiring
connections to drainage system shall be equipped with trap placed as near to fixture as possible.
Traps for floor drains and hub drains shall be deep seal "P" traps.
Vent Pipe Flashing unless otherwise noted: Preformed 4 lb. sheet lead flashing extending 8"
minimum onto roofall around vent. Turn down into vent pipe I" minimum. Flashings used with
single membrane roofs - see Section Roofillg.
4.
5.
6.
Pipe Joints: .
1. Joints for PVC pipe shall be made with the specific type solvent cement as recommended by pipe
manufacturer.
2. Joints between cast iron soil pipe and clay pipe or PVC pipe and clay pipe or other dissimilar
materials shall be made with Femco flexible couplings.
3. Joints for DWV copper tube and fittings shall be tube and socket sweat joints soldered with
Bridgit solder.
,',
15405-2
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
1.05 TESTING SOIL, WASTE AND VENT SYSTEMS
I
A. General: Opncealed and insulated piping shall be tested in place before concealing or covering. Tests shall
be conducted in the presence of the Architect or his designated representative. Piping located underground
shall be tested before backfilling. Equipment, materials and instnlments for tests shall be furnished by the
Contractor without additional cost to the Owner.
I
B. Drainage and Venting Piping: The piping of the drainage (including roof drain piping) and venting system
shall be tested with water before installing fixtures. Water tests shall be applied to the drainage and venting
system either in its entirety or in sections. - If the Test is applied to the entire system, all openings in the
piping shall be plugged except the highest opening, and the system shall be filled with water and tested with
at least a 10ft. Head of water. I f the system is tested in sections, each opening except the highest opening
of the section under test shall be plugged and each section shall be filled with water and tested with at least
a 10 foot head of water above the floor level on which the fixture is installed. In testing successive
- sections,-at least the upper 10 feet of the next preceding section shall be tested so that each joint or pipe
in the building except the uppermost 10 feet of the system has been submitted to a test of at least a 10
ft. head of water. The water shall be kept in the system or in the portion under test, for at least 30 minutes
before the inspection starts; the system shall then be tight at all joints.
C. Final test with smoke, as described in Standard Plumbing Code paragraph ^ 103.8.7.3 shall be imposed if
Architect requires assurance that the waste and vent system is gas tight.
I
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 15405
I
I
I
I
. i':',,;;
(~.; ,
I
I
I
I
I
I
15405-3
I
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
I
1.01
A.
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15424
W ATER HEATERS AND ACCESSORlES
GEORGIA LAW
B.
Water heaters and unfired pressure vessels shall comply with the "Georgia Laws Regulating Boilers and
Pressure Vessels, Chapter II" and the "Rules of Georgia Department of Labor, Safety Engineering,
Chapter 300-6-1, Georgia Boiler and Pressure Vessel Rules."
Water Heaters which exceed ~ of the following shall be ASME stamped:
1. Heat input of200,000 BTU per hour;
2. . Water temperature of21 0 degrees Fahrenheit; and
3. Nominal water capacity of 120 gallons.
I:
C.
Kitchen water heaters and any other water heaters serving Food Preparation areas shall bear the National
Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Seal.
Permits are required for boilers and water heaters with input of200,000 btuh and larger. Application for
Permit and Permit are available from Georgia Department of Labor, Safety Engineering Section, 223
Courtland Street, N.E.,Suite 301, Atlanta, Georgia 30303 - Telephone 1-404-656-2966.
I. Application for Permit must be on file with the Georgia Department of Labor before installation
work begins.
2. Charges for Pennits and Inspections shall be paid by the Contractor.
D.
I
1.02 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
I
I
I
I
A. Water heater shall meet or exceed ASHRAE 90A Requirements for energy efficiency and shall be factory
tested and shall cany a three-year non-prorated warranty for Commercial service. The heater shall have
storage and a recovery capacity as listed on the drawings. The tank shall be constructed 150 psi working
pressure hydrostatically tested at 300 psi. All interior surfaces will be coated with a glass coating for
corrosion and rust protection. Dip tube shall be high temperature polypropylene. Heaters larger than 120
gallon storage shall be ASME constructed and shall bear the ASME symbol. Exception: Point of use
water heaters (less than 20 gallon capacity will not carry 3 year warranty).
B. The water heater shall be insulated with heavy enameled steel jacket. Operating thermostats, high
temperature device (energy cut-off) and drain valve shall be factory installed. In addition to the standard
equipment shown on the manufacturer's specification sheet, the water heater shall be provided with ASME
. rated pressure and temperature relief valve.
1.03 RELIEF VALVES
C. Heater shall be A.O. Smith or equal models of Precision, Rheem, Ruud, State, Bradford White or PVI.
I
I
I
A. Relief valve for water heater shall be as required by the Standard Plumbing Codes and as recommended
by manufacturer and shall be self closing Pressure and Temperature valve ASME rated at 125 psi and 210
degrees F.
B. Valve shal!;be Watts, Cash-Acme, or Consolidated. Package heaters shall be fumished complete with
heater man\ifacturer's standard relief valves.
C. Provide Watts N36 Vacuum Relief Valve or equal by Zurn or Sparco for bottom feed water heater. Locate
vacuum reliefvalve above the top of the water heater and on the water heater side of the cold water cutoff
valve serving the water heater.
1.04 EMERGENCY DRAIN PANS
I
I
I
A. Provide Emergency Drain Pans under all water heaters except where water heater is located on a slab-on-
grade floor which has a floor drain within four (4) feet of the outer shell of the water heater.
15424-1
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
I
B. Drain pans shall be constructed of 26 gauge galvanized sheet metal. Pans shall be 2 inches larger on all
sides than the water heater. Sides of pans shall be 2 inches high with a hemmed edge. Bottom edge of one
side shall have I-inch copper female adapter soldered in place. All seams shall be lapped and soldered
liquid-tight.
1.05 EXPANSION TANKS
I
A.
Expansion tank shall be installed on the cold water supply to the water heater. Potable water expansion
tank shall beconstructed.of drawn steel with a thenlJal bonded epoxy liner in'the water containing area.
It shall have a butyl diaphragm separating the air chamber from the water. Expansion tanks shall be
manufactured by Watts, Flexcon or Amtrol.
I
I
END OF SECTION 15424
I
I
'. ,
1, ~,
t',.
..
., .
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
;\
I
15424-2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Augusta Commons; 09102
Augusta, Georgia .".l.
I
SECTION 15450
PLUMBING FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES
1.01
GENERAL
I
A. Unless otherwise specified, furnish, set .and connect all fixtures including all supports. All exposed
trimmings shall be chromium plated. Except .for special types, all fixtures shall be of the same
man).lfacturer. All exposed piping through walls, floors, or ceilings shall be provided with chrome plated
brass or stainless steel escutcheons.
I
B. Flush valves shall have non-hold-open feature, vacuum breakers, cover cap on angle stop. Provide
flushometer handles meeting the operating force levels required by ADA (no greater than 5Ib.) at full range
of system water pressure.
C. Flush valve connection to water supply systems shall be made with copper adapter kit furnished by the
flush valve manufacturer. Kit shall include brass pipe adapter, chrome plate sleeve and escutcheon.
Contractor shall order extra length sleeves from flush valve manufacturer when distance from wall to flush
valve exceeds standard sleeve length.
I
I
D. All spaces between fixtures and walls shall be sealed with a white non-hardening caulking compound.
E. All spaces between fixtures and floor shall be sealed with white ceramic tile grout.
I
F. Shims cut from sheet lead shall be used to level water closets installed on sloped or irregular floors.
I
G. All enameled cast iron or vitreous china fixtures shall be white unless otherwise noted.
,
I
H. Fixture Mallufachlrers shall be:
1. Cast Iron and Vitreous China Fixhlres:
a. American Standard
b. Kohler
c.; ; \. Eljer
d. .,:. Crane
2. Flush Valves
a. Sloan
b. Coyne Delaney
c. Zurn
. 3. Stainless Steel Sinks:
a. Elkay
b. Just
c. Moen
4. Faucets (Sinks and Lavatories):
a. American Standard
b. Chicago
c. Delta/Cambridge Brass
d. Kohler
e. Speakman
f. l' &S Brass
g. Zum
5. Electric Water Coolers (All models shall have stainless steel cabinets):
a. Ebco
b. E1kay
c. Halsey Taylor
d. Haws
e. Oasis
f. Sunroc
6. Mop Receptors and Accessories:
a. Fiat
b. Stem-Williams
c. Town & Country
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
15450-1
I
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
I
7. Ice Maker and Washing Machine Box:
a. Guy Gray
b. IPS Water-Tite
c. Plastic Oddities
I
I. Refrigerated water coolers (drinking fountains) sh<:1l be furnished with 5-Year Limited Warranty on
compressor and refrigeration system.
I
J. Refdgeran:t: . R-12 refrigerant shall not be used.
K. Fixtures:
1. Fixtures and trim shall be as listed on the drawings.
2. Fixture P-Traps unless noted shall be 17 gauge polished chrome plated cast brass with cast brass
nuts and C.P. cast brass slip nut for outlet connection. Continuous wastes unless noted shall be
17 gauge polished chrome plated brass pipe and fittings. Continuous wastes shall be End outlet
or Center outlet as indicated on the dra wings. P-trap shall be manufactured by McGuire, Sanitary
Dash, EBC or Zum.
a. Provide polished chrome or stainless steel box escutcheon at trap outlet to wall
connection. Box escutcheon shall be equal to R4000 Series manufactured by Dearborne
Brass, Zurn or McQuire.
3. Fixture stops unless noted shall be angle type Brasscraft CS40 Series with II2" chrome plated
sweat extension tube inlet and 3/8" o.d. compression outlet, stainless steel escutcheons and 3/8"
o.d. C.P. Riser. Equals by McGuire, EBC or Zurn shall be acceptable.
4. Fixture supply risers shall be chrome plated soft copper.
L. Handicap Lavatory and Sink P-Trap and Fixture Stop Insulation:
1. Handicap fixture P-Trap and hot and coldstops and risers shall be insulated with the TRUEBRO,
Handi Lav-Guard insulation kit, Model # 10 I, with Accessory # I 05 or equal by Plumberex or
Seton for offset wheelchair strainer, 3-piece interlocking trap assembly and 2-piece interlocking
stop and riser assemblies. Fasteners shall be nylon-type supplied with kit.
I
I
I
I
I
M. Vacuum Breakers:
1. Unless hose end fittings are furnished with vacuum breakers they shall be fitted with screw-on
devices with finish to match the faucet or valve.
I
N. Water Closet Seats: Seats shall be of the style and color (white, unless otherwise noted) as listed on the
drawings and shall be furnished with seI f-sustaining feature and concealed check. Equal products by Bemis,
Beneke, Olsonite, Church or Sperzel will be accepted.
I
O. Supports:
1. Piping runouts to fixtures shall be secured to the wall construction so that there is 110 horizontal
or vertical movement in the piping.
2. Wall hung fixtures shall be supported as specified for the individual fixture. Fixtures supported
'with wall hangers on masonry wall shall be fastened to the wall with not less than 3/8" bolts which
shilll'pass through the wall and be attached to a 16 gauge x 4" wide steel backplate on the
unfinished wall side. Where fixtures are hung on single masonry walls without a pipe chase
behind, they shall be mounted by use of3/8" toggle bolts.
3. . All mounting holes provided in fixtures shall be used for support. In addition to the main hangers,
II4" toggle bolts shall secure the bottom of all wall hung fixtures wherever drillings are provided
for this purpose to prevent uplift.
4. Fixtures to be supported by manufactured fixture supports are indicated in the Fixture Schedule.
Fixture support shall be designed to support the entire weight of the fixture independent of the
wall. Supports shall be selected to fit the fixture to be installed. Supports shall be as
manufactured by J. R. Smith, Josam, Jonespec or Zum.
P. Fixtures shall be accurately roughed. Fixtures not correctly located or roughed shall be removed, floor
and/or wall shall be broken out and roughing shall be corrected. Roughing shall be inspected and approved
by the Architect before patching and before resetting fixtures. Causes for rejection include but are not
limited to the following:
1. Water closets or urinals off center
2. Fixtures mounted at the wrong height or wrong location
3. Cocked P-traps
4. Off center or out of level fixture stops
I
I
I
I
I
I
15450-2
I
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
I
5. Flush valves not anchored
6. Fixture locations not meeting ANSI Handicap Code
7. Chrome trim defaced with tool marks
Q. Contractor shall make final connections to equipment and fixtures suppl ied under another Division or by
Owner.
I
R.
Trap Primers: Trap primers shall be provided for all floor drains in Public Toilet Rooms. Provide Sloan
F-72-A1 Trap Primer between flush valve and fixture, PPP, Inc. Series 500 or J. R. Smith Fig. 2699
Automatic Trap Primer (installed in cold water supply to frequently used fixlure). Provide 12 x 12 stainless
steel access door when trap primer is in a concealed location. Run 1/2 inch hard temper "K" copper
between trap primer and inlet connection.
I
S.
Water Hammer Arrestors: Provide water hammer arrestors where indicated on drawings. Unit shall be
constructed of stainless steel bellows arranged in a pressurized expansion chamber or may consist of an
air chamber constructed of Type L copper and containing a free floating piston with O-ring seals and shall
have a lifetime warranty. Units shall have P.D.1. symbol that relates to fixture unit rating. Units shall be
J.R. Smith 5000 Series "Hydro-Trot", PPP, Inc. SC Series or Hydra-Rester manufactured by Sioux Chief.
Equal products by Josam, Smith, Souix Chief, Wade, Watts or Zum will be acceptable.
I
I
END OF SECTION 15450
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
" '.1 ,'.
I
I
15450-3
I
I
,:,' "
..'
I
Augusta Commons, 09/02
Augusta, Georgia
-I
SECTION 15701
PIPING FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
1.01
GENERAL
I
A.
Pipes shall have burrs removed by reaming. Changes in direction shall be made with standard fittings.
Open ends of pipe shall be plugged during installation to keep dirt and other foreign material out of the
system.
1.
2.
Horizontal piping shall be installed level.
Refer to Section MECHANICAL SYSTEMS INSULATIONS for requirements for insulating
refrigerant lines before pipe joints are made.
I
1.02 PIPE AND FITIINGS
I
A. Condensate drain, cold water makeup, blow-off and other drains: Type "L" hard copper with wrought
copper fittings and Bridgit solder.
I
B. Refrigerant piping shall be installed by a refrigeration contractor licensed by the State. Refrigerant piping
unless noted shall be nitrogen charged ACR copper tube with wrought copper long radius elbows and
fittings and Sil-Fos IS, Stay-Silv 15 or Mueller Industries high tenlperature (1200 degrees F.) solder. Pipe
shall be as manufactured by Phelps, Chase, Anaconda, Mueller or Nibco. Suction line traps shall be
manufactured one-piece traps.
I
C. Pipe Joints:
I. Copper Tubing (except refrigerant piping) shall be cut square with tubing cutter and burrs shall
be removed. Both inside and outside of tubing shall be cleaned with fitting brush and sand cloth
before sweating. Joints for solder fittings shall be made with a non-corrosive paste flux and
solder as specified.
2. Ac1apters shall be copper fittings and shall be used to transition from solder joint to threaded
coiUlections.
3. Copper Tubing for Refrigerant Piping: Tubing shall be cut square with tubing cutter and burrs
shall be removed. Inside of fittings and outside of tubing shall be cleaned before brazing. Flux
shall be "Stay-Silv white brazing flux" by 1. W. Harris Co., or other high quality silver solder flux
by Handy & Ham10n or Mueller. Joints shall be brazed with high temperature silver solder (1200
degrees F.) brazing compound. Dry nitrogen shall be bled through the piping during brazing
operations to purge the piping. Provide sight glass and filter drier for each refrigerant liquid line.
Sight glass shall be moisture indicating type with view port.
. 4. Dielectric unions or dielectric flange sets shall be provided to COIUlect copper piping systems to
ferrous piping systems. Unions shall be 250 lb. as manufactured by EPCO, Capitol or Watts.
D. Pipe Testing and Cleaning:
1. All tests and cleaning shall be witnessed by Architect or his representative.
I
I
I
I
I
1.03 REFRIGERANT PIPING
I
A. Slope suction lines down toward compressor one inchll 0 feet. Locate traps at vertical rises against flow
in suction lines.
I
B. Refrigeration system cormections shall be copper-to-copper type properly cleaned and brazed. Use flux
only where necessary.
1. No soft solder connections will be allowed in system. I f used, refrigerant piping will be rejected
and will require repiping with new pipe and brazed joints.
2. Provide plastic or rubber grommets where piping passes through equipment cabinet or casing.
3. Provide discharge bypass valves where hot gas bypass piping is indicated on the drawings
(including all Energy Recovery Units):
a. Valve shall be externally equalized fully adjustable model with stainless steel
diaphragm.
b. Valves shall be sizes to provide full rated capacity of system served. Coordinate
selection with evaporator coil and condensing unit.
c. Approved manufacturers are: Alco, Henry, Mueller or Sporlan.
C. Braze expansion valve and sight glass connections.
I
I
I
.~ . .! \
I
15701-1
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.04
A.
B.
I
I
I
D. Circulate dry nitrogen through tubes being brazed to eliminate formation of copper oxide during brazing
operation.
E. The piping system shall be pressure tested with refrigerant specified for the unit at 25 psig backed up with
Dry Nitrogen to total pressure of 200 psig. Test pressure shall remain steady for 24 hours minimum.
Check each Joint while under test pressure with liquid leak detector and Halide torch or Electronic Leak
Detector. :,i
F. Ma!}e evacuation and leak test in presence of Architect after completing refrigeration piping systems.
Positive pressure test alone will not suffice for procedure outlined below.
1. Draw vacuum on each entire system with vacuum pump to 350 microns using vacuum gauge
calibrated in microns. Do not use cooling compressor to evacuate system nor operate it while
system is under high vacuum. Isolate compressor from system piping using shut-off valves prior
to pulling vacuum.
2. Break vacuum with refrigerant to be used and re-establish vacuum test. Vacuum shall hold for
24 hours at 500 microns without compressor running. Exception: 12 hours is acceptable for
system 5 tons and smaller.
3. Conduct evacuation and tests at 70 deg. F. ambient temperature or above.
4. Demonstrate 500 micron reading to Architect before charging system. Failure to demonstrate
reading will necessitate reclaiming refrigerant and re-evacuating system. Replacement refrigerant
shall be new (not reclaimed refrigerant).
5. Provide full operating charge of refrigerant and oil for each system. Install piping with as few
offsets as possible. If, during the I-year Warranty period, the sight glass shows any condition
other thall "Dry" the refrigerant charge shall be disposed of, the system re-evacuated as indicated
above and a new reFrigerant charge installed.
G.
Refrigerant Specialties:
I. Provide liquid line solenoid valves for 7-1/2 ton systems and larger and where recommended by
the HV AC equipment manufacturer for "Long Line Applications".
2. Provide Expansion Valves for 7-1/2 ton systems and larger:
a. .For pressure type distributors, externally equalized with stainless steel diaphragm, and
same refrigerant in them10static elements as in system.
b. Size valves to provide full rated capacity of cooling coil served. Coordinate selection
with evaporator coil condensing unit.
c. Approved Manufacturers are: Alco, Henry, Mueller or Sporlan.
3. Filter Drier:
a. Filter-drier shall have ODF solder connections. Braze the unit in the line using Sta-
Brite, Silver Solder, Sil Fos or similar brazing materials.
b. Size shall be full line size.
c. Approved Manufacturers are: Alco, Mueller, Sporlan or Virginia.
4. '" Sight Glass:
a. :,' '. Combination moisture and liquid indicator with protection cap.
b. Sight glass shall be full line size.
c. Approved Manufacturers are: Alco, Asco, Mueller or Sporlan.
5. Manual Refrigerant Shut-Off Valve:
a. Ball valves designed for refrigeration service and full line size.
b. Valve shall have cap seals.
c. Valves with hand wheels are not acceptable.
d. Provide service valve on each liquid and suction line at compressors 7-1/2 ton size and
larger.
e. Ifservice valves come as integral part of condensing unit, additional service valves will
not be required.
f. Approved manufacturers are: Henry, Mueller, Superior or Virginia.
REFRIGERANT
REFRIGERANT R-II or R-12 shall not be used in any system or system component.
AII procedures shall be in accordance with EP A regulations and in compliance of the Clean Air Act of
1990.
C.
Refrigerant used for testing and charging systems shall be "New" (not "Reclaimed") refrigerant.
END OF SECTION 15701
15701-2
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
I
SECTION 15773
SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP
1.01 SPLIT SYSTEM HEAT PUMP:
I
A. Unit shall be of size, type and capacity as indicated on the Drawings and shall be Trane. Equal units
meeting the following specifications and scheduled capacities and manufactured by Carrier, Lennox or
York will be acceptable.
I
B. Outdoor units shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel cabinet with weather resistant baked
enamel finish. The unit shall contain hemletic compressor with high and low pressure protection,
crankcase heater and compressor overload protection. Refrigerant circuit shall include vapor and liquid
line back-seating type service valves with gauge ports, filter and factory furnished holding charge ofR-22.
Compressors shall have a 5-year warranty. The outdoor coils shall be constructed of aluminum fins
mechanically bonded to copper or aluminum tube. The outdoor coil shall have expansion valve refrigerant
control during heating operation, and automatic temperature/pressure actuated defrost control system.
Condenser fans shall be direct drive, vertical discharge type. Controls shall be factory wired and readily
accessible. Compressors shall have 24 volt control transformer and magnetic contactor.
I
I
C. When the unit listed in the Equipment Schedule or the unit that is the "Basis of Design" has multiple
compressors, "equal" equipment with a single unloading compressor will not be acceptable.
I
D. Tandem compressors (two compressors driven by a single motor) will not be acceptable.
E. Provide condenser coil guard. Guard shall be shop fabricated of II2" x I II4" flattened diamond mesh
expanded aluminum. Guard shall have unit manufacturers approval for installation on unit. Factory
installed guards may be used if, in the opinion of the Engineer, it is equivalent to shop fabricated guard
described above.
I
I
F. Provide the following accessories:
I. 5-Minute Anti-Recycle Timer
2. Hard Start Kit for Single Phase Units
3. Crankcase Heater
4. Outdoor Thermostat for each Stage of Auxiliary Heat
5. Defrost Thermostat for Indoor Coil
6. Room Thermostat
I
I
G. . Where 230 volt nameplate rated condensing units are to operate on a 208 volt system, a Buck and Boost
transformer shall be fumished. Equipment vendor shall select transformer and shall include his
calculations and selection with the equipment submittal.
I
H. Indoor units shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel with baked enamel finish and shall be internally lined
with faced fiberglass insulation. Air handler shall be provided with a low voltage terminal board and fan
motor relay. Blower shall be belt or direct driven. Belt driven fan shall have a variable pitch drive pulley.
Direct drive motors shall have a minimum of three speeds. Evaporator coil shall have expansion device,
check valve and defrost thermostat accessory. Indoor unit shall be complete with filter rack and I-inch
thick (min.) di~posable filter(s). Filter(s) shall be furnished with frames. Unframed hogshair filter(s) are
not acceptable. One spare set of disposable filters shall be furnished for each unit.
I. Room thermosta.t shall be 7-day Programmable equal to Honeywell T7300 Series (provide multi-stage
where equipinent h~s that capability) with 97300 Series Sub-Base with OFF-COO~~AUTO-HEA 1'-
EM.HT. System SWitch, AUTO-ON Fan SWitch, Emergency Heat Red LED and Auxiliary Heat Green
LED. Provide a remote bulb outdoor them10stat to control each step of auxiliary heat.
I
I
I
J. Auxiliary electric heaters shall be of size and capacity and furnished with stages indicated on the drawings.
Heater shall be designed specifically for the indoor unit and shall meet all requirements of the National
Electric Code and Underwriters Laboratories and shall be so stamped.
I
I
15773-1
I
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
1.02 REFRIGERANT PIPE SIZE
I
A.
Pipe sizes shown on the drawings are for estimating purposes only. Final pipe sizes shall be selected by
the manufacturer and shall be included in the submittal data. Accessories (larger crankcase heaters, liquid
line solenoid valve, oversize suction accullluliltors, wind barnes, etc.) required or reconmlended by the
equipment manufacturer shall be provided at no additional cost.
I
END OF SECTION 15773
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
15773-2
I
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
I
1.01
A.
I
I
I
i':
SECTION 15795
ELECTRIC HEATERS
CABINET HEATERS
Unit shall consist of fintube heating element,. controls,. direct driven centrifugal fans all enclosed ill 16
gauge enamel finished cabinet. Unit shall be U.L. listed.
B.
Controls shall consist of a disconnect means to disconnect all ungrounded conductors, unit mounted
concealed adjustment "On-Off' switch, 24 volt transformer, wall thermostat, relay for remote night setback
and high limit cutout.
Cabinet shall be arranged for recessed wall/ceiling mounting with inlet and discharge as indicated on the
drawings and wall/ceiling trim kit. Units shall be Q-Mark, CU Series or equal products meeting the above
specifications as manufactured by Berko, Singer, Markel 6300 Series, Brasch or RaywalI.
C.
1.02 WALL HEATERS
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A.
Unit shall consist of totally enclosed metal sheathed heating element, propeller (not paddle) type fan,
permanently lubricated totally enclosed motor all enclosed in cabinet with baked enamel finished 16 gauge
bar type grille and 20 gauge steel wall box. Provide 18 gauge extension sleeve where drawing indicates
units are to be semi-recessed or surface mounted.
B.
Controls shall consist of unit mounting thermostat disconnecting all ungrounded conductors in the "OFF"
position and shall have relay for night setback. Provide 24 volt transformer and wall thennostat where
indicated on drawings or schedule.
C.
Unit shall be Q-Mark or equal products by Markel, Berko or Singer.
END OF SECTION 15795
:..:
15795-1
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
I
1.01
A.
I
I
1.02
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15820
FANS
GENERAL
All fans shaH bear the AMCA Certified Performance Rating Seal for Air. Fan sound level shaH not exceed
catalog value for the fan listed on the Drawings or Fan Schedule.
B.
Single phase belt driven motors shall be capacitor start, induction run type, resiliently'mounted with ball
bearings.
B.
IN-LINE FAN
...! '
Duct mounted supply, exhaust or return fans shall be of the centrifugal, in-line type, direct or centrifugal
belt driven, as indicated on the Drawings. The fan housing shall be of the square design constructed of
heavy gauge galvanized steel and shall include square duct mounting collars and access door.
The housing shaH be equipped with a service door assembly. The service door shall be of sufficient size
to permit easy access to aH interior components.
c.
The fan wheel shaH be of the aluminum backward inclined, centrifugal type. Wheels shaH be dynamically
and staticaHy balanced and shall overlap the spun inlet venturi for maximum performance.
Belt driven models shall have the motor and drives isolated from the air stream. Motors shall be of the
heavy duty type with permanently lubricated, sealed ball bearings. The wheel shaft shall be mounted in
heavy duty permanently sealed pillow block bearings. Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 165% of
driven horsepower. The motor pulleys shaH be adjustable for final system balancing.
D.
E.
Flexible wiring leads shaH be provided from the fan motor to an external mOllnted junction box and
disconnect switch pemutting access for service without disconnecting the field wiring.
F.
Fans shall be Model SQ, BSQ or BSQ-HP as manufactured by Greenheck. Equal products meeting the
above specifications and manufactured by Acme, Penn, Jenn-Air or Breidert wiH be acceptable.
END OF SECTION 15820
. . -~
:;/ l.~.
15820-1
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
I
1.01
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15840
AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
SHEET METAL DUCTWORK
General:
1. Wall Penetration Schedule: Sheet metal subcontractor shall provide for the contractor a list of
wall openings, floor openings, ceiling openings, roof openings, etc. List shall include locations,
size and height of bottom of opening above floor. Submit duplicate copy to ^ rchitect. Breaking
out or saw cutting of new constmction will not be allowed.
2. Ductwork drawings do not show all offsets and transitions that may be required. Contractor shall
make a job-site survey at various stages of constmction and coordinate with other trades to
determine where offsets or transitions are required before making drawings from which the
ductwork will be fabricated.
3. Requests for extras for reasons such as, "The duct is already fabricated and will not fit." will not
be considered.
4. All ductwork that will be painted shall be fabricated from mill phosphatizcd galvanized steel
(trade named "Paint Grip").
5. Furnish and install duct systems indicated and/or specified. Fabrication and erection shall be by
mechanics skilled and experienced in the sheet metal tracIe. Ductwork system shall be installed
to be completely free of vibration noises under all conditions of operations.
6. Submit Shop Standards RECT ANGULAR DUCT CONSTRUCTION and REI NfORCEMENT.
S~bmittal shall identify duct gauge, reinforcement spacing, Code Gracie, all as shown in
SMACNA DCS Appendix. Standing Drive Slip 1'-2 shall not be used.
7. The duct systems shall be classified as follows:
a. Low Pressure: All ductwork except Special Ducts and Metalwork.
b. Special ducts and metalwork: Flexible ducts and plenums.
I
1.02 METAL DUCTWORK
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
A. The following ductwork is included:
I. Supply, return, outside and exhaust air.
B. Ductwork unless otherwise noted, shall be constmcted of galvanized steel and shall be fabricated and
erected in strict accordance with First Edition 1985 HV AC Duct Constmctions Standnrds (DCS) Narrow
Scope Table 1-4 Ex. published by Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association
(SMACNA). Pressure velocity classification shall be low pressure for I" W.e. static pressure (positive
. or negative) with Class "C" seal. All transverse joints and branch intersections shall be sealed. Snaplock
seams and joints shall be sealed. Use Foster 30-02, M.E.1. 4441, Childers CP-72 nnme resistant high
velocity duct sealant to seal joints.
C. Special Ducts and Metalwork:
I. Insulated flexible duct shall have pressure rating of 10 inches (min.) W.e. positive pressure and
shall be Flexmaster Type 3M. Inner core shall be of woven and coated fiberglass liner. C = .23
maximum, with fiberglass reinforced metalized film vapor barrier. Thermaflex MKC or
Wiremold 57K will be acceptable.
D. Low Pressure Duct Construction:
1. Duct joints and locks shall be as illustrated in SMACNA DCS. Lap joints, except on round ducts,
will not be acceptable.
2. Transitions and offsets shall be as per SMACNA Fig. 2-9. Provide 3" wide sheet metal wall
flange where duct penetrates walls in partitions or ceilings in finished areas.
3. Supply and return branch takeoffs for rectangular ducts shall be as Sh0W11 on drawings and for
round branch ducts shall be equal to CroW11 No. 306 adjustable takeoff fitting or Flexmaster
Model STO. Spin-in fittings are not acceptable. Each branch duct shall be fitted with manual
volume damper with elevated operator.
4. Sleeves shall be provided where ducts penetrate walls, partitions, smoke partitions. or floor slabs.
5. Emergency Drain Pan: Provide 22 gauge galvanized emergency drain pan under all water heaters
and air handling units having water or drain connections. Drain pan shall extend 6" beyond unit
on all sides, shall have 2" high hemmed sides and 3/4" pipe coupling drain connection. All seams
and joints shall be soldered liquid tight. Exception: Emergency drain pans are not required for
slab-on-grade equipment.
15840-1
I
I
Augusta Commons,.09102
Augusta, Georgia :."
I
1.03
I
I
1.04
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
6. Provide I" high sheet metal stand-off bracket at all manual and motorized dampers and duct
mounted automatic temperature control devices.
DUCT LINER
A.
Certainteed Ultraliner, Schuller Lina-Coustic Pennacote, Knauf Duct liner M or Owens-Corning Aerollex
Duct Liner, meeting ASTM C I 071 with air surface coaled with acrylic coating, treated with EP A registered
anti-microbial agent proven to resist microbial growth as determined by ASTM 921 and 922, conforming
to FS-HH-I-545B Type I - flexible, flat, 1.5 lb./cu. ft. density (minimum), I" thick except as noted
otherwise. Duct liner and adhesive shall meet requirements of NFP A 90A and have UL fire hazard
classification not to exceed the following: flame spread 25, fuel contributed 40, smoke generated 50.
DUCT ACCESSORIES
Turning Vanes: Shall be single thickness lip to 36 inches in length; double thickness above 36 inches.
Vanes shall be constructed in accordnnce with SMACNA HV AC Duct Construction Standards Figure 2-3.
Install on vane rails.
B.
Flexible Duct Connections: Shall be provided where ductwork connects to air handling equipment (except
exhaust fans) and shall be Vent-Fabrics, Duro-Dyne or Ventlok 28 oz. min. water-proof and fire retardant
woven glass fabric double coated with neoprene, approved by UL.
e.
Manual Dampers: For rectangular duct: Opposed blade, constmcted with galvanized gauge steel blades
and equal to SMACNA DCS Fig. 2-15. End of damper operating rod shall be square to accommodate
damper operator. Manual dampers 12" or smaller in height may be single blade type equal to SMACNA
DCS Fig 2-14 constmcted of galvanized sheet metal.
1. Round damper shall be SMACNA DCS ~ig 2-14 with blade gauge as follows: 8" and smaller =
22 gauge, 9" - 12" = 20 gauge 13" and larger 18 gauge.
D. Damper End Bearings: Ventlok No. 607 and 609 or equal by Duro-Dyne or Crown.
E. Damper Operators: For volume dampers in rectangular ducts shall be Ventlok No. 637, elevated for one
inch in.s~!a,tion,or equal by Duro-Dyne or Crown.
F. Concealed Damper Operator: Provide Ventlok No. 666 concealed operator, extension rod and coupling
when manually operated dampers are located above non-accessible ceilings.
G. Air extractor shall be equal to Krueger Model EX-8 with blades on I (one) inch centers and shall be
. installed at each supply outlet and where indicated. Unit shall be modified for push rod operation.
1. Rod shall be 1/4" unthreaded rod, bolt cOlmected to the end extractor blade. Duct penetration
shall be made with a fitting equal to #603 Ventlok Ball Joint Bracket with setscrew. Equal
products by Tuttle and Bailey, Titus, HV AC Stuff or Anemostat will be acceptable.
H. Duct Collars fabricated of22 gauge steel shall be provided where duct passes through masonry walls and
partitions which extend full height to the underside of the roof stlUcture. Duct collar shall be provided on
both sides of walls and partitions, except collar shall be omitted on the side of the wall where registers and
grilles are installed. Flanges shall be installed tight against the wall. The space between the duct and the
collar shall be packed with commercial grade mineral wool (no asbestos).
I. Fire dampers and radiation dampers shall have "hour rating" compatible with the wall, ceiling or floor in
which they are installed. Fire dampers shall be rated in accordance with UL555 Standard for dynamic
dampers and shall bear a label indicating approval. (Exception: Narrow frame type dampers behind grilles
in 4" walls do not require dynamic dampers.) Fire dampers shall be installed in accordance with SMACNA
Fire Damper Guide and in accordance with the conditions of their listing and the
manufacturer's installation instructions. Fire dampers shall be manufactured by Air Balance, Inc., Phillips-
Aire, Ruskin, Louvers and Dampers, Nailor Ind., Inc., Safe-Air, or National Controlled Air.
1. Fire Damper Model Numbers shal\ be as follows:
a. One or two hour rated wal\s - Air Balance Model D 19B (Out of Airstream), D 19A (In
Airstream - use behind grilles).
b. Three or four hour rated walls - Air Balance Model D39B.
c. Damper behind grille in 4" (max.) one or two hour rated wall- Air Balance Modell19F.
2. FirelSmoke Combination Damper Model Numbers shall be as follows:
a. One or two hour rated walls - Air Balance Model FS2250A.
b. Three or four hour rated walls - Greenheck Model FSD 28.
15840-2
,:
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
I
I
I
I
I
I
c. Combination dampers shall be provided with an end switch or blade limit switch for use
in actuating remote annunciation.
3. Ceiling Radiation Damper Model Numbers shall be as follows:
a. Air Balance Model 229.
J. Smoke Dampers: Shall be pivoting blade smoke dampers equal to Air Balance Leakage and Temperature
Rated Model S2250 Classified by U.L. 555S Leakage Class Level II, temperature class, 250 degrees F. or
Nailor-Hart, Phillips-Aire, Ruskin, Nailor Industries, Inc., Louvers & Dampers, National Controlled Air
or Safe-Air: Damper shall be complete with recycling type V.L. listed electric operator mounted outside
the air stream on factory insta lied damper sleeve. Motor control voltage shall be compatible with the
control voltage provide under another Section. (Operators may be pneumatic if Automatic Temperature
Control System is pneumatic.) Smoke dampers shall be provided with end switch or blade limit switch for
use in actuating remote allliunciation.
K. Access Doors: Equal to Air Balance FSA-l 0 I, Flexmaster, National Controlled Air, Ruskin, National
Controlled Air, Nailor Industries, Inc., or Phillips-Aire FSA-l 00, double cam fasteners with 1" insulation.
Doors shall be 18" x I 2" except in small ducts where width shall be 2" smaller than widest duct dimension.
Access doors shall be installed adjacent to each fire damper, smoke damper and smoke detector.
L. Supply duct branch takeofTfittings shall be Crown No. 306 adjustable takeoff fitting or Flexmaster Model
STO with 1" mounting flange with gasket and prepunched holes or equal by Crown or Sheet Metal
Connectors.
1.05 DUCT SUPPORTS
I
I
A. All other ductwork shall be supported from structure above with galvanized iron bands of sizes and gauges
set forth in SMACNA Manuals specified hereinb~fore. Do not use nails in tension at upper attaclmlent.
B. Hangers shall extend down side of duct, tum under 1-1/2" minimum and be secured with sheet metal
screws to the sides and bottom of the duct. Hangers shall be installed before insulating duct.
1.06 GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS
I
I
I
I
1.07
I
B.
1.08
A.
I
I
I
I
A. Each grille and diffuser shall have a gasket for sealing to wall or ceiling surface. Each register and diffuser
shall have opposed blade key-operated damper. Provide denectfols for supply outlets except at ends of
duct run.
B. Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be as scheduled on the drawings. Provide square-to-round adapters
, with 2" round collar where round ducts connect to square neck diffusers. Filterback grilles shall be
furnished with 1 inch thick disposable filters.
e. Louvered face ceiling supply grilles shall have four (4) cones minimum.
D.
Grilles and Diffusers as manufactured by Metal-Aire, Krueger, J & J, Titus, Anemostat, Price or Tuttle and
Bailey will, ~~ accepted.
.'....
.oj
LOUVERS
A.
Louvers shall be extruded aluminum of size, type and manufacturer as shown on the Drawings. Products
manufactured by Krueger, American Warming, Louvers & Dampers, Ruskin, Aerolite, Vent Products,
Industrial Louvers, Arrow or Shipman are Acceptable. Submit Louver Performance Charts with submittal.
Furnish with baked enamel ftnish. Color selected by Architect.
FABRICATION
Ducts shall conform to dimensions shown: Aspect ratio (width by height) of duct may be changed but
cross-sectional area of altered duct shall not be less than that of duct indicated. The width to height ratio
of altered ducts shall not exceed 4 to I. Changing exposed round ductwork to square or rectangular is not
acceptable. Ducts shall be straight and smooth on inside. Provision shall be made for expansion and
contraction of ductwork. Internal ends of slip joints, unless noted otherwise, shall be installed in direction
of flow.
15840-3
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.09
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
B. Elbows shall be minimum centerline radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct unless otherwise
indicated; where elbow is installed with centerline radius less than specified above, tuming vanes shall be
installed per Fig. 2-2, Type RE3.
C. Elbows with cheek pieces smaller than 12 inches shall be full radius type.
D.
Use single thickness (Fig. 2-3) turning vanes up to 36" in length and double thickness above 36" in all
square elbows. Use "smaU" (Fig. 2-3) turning vanes in square elbows with width of cheek piece smaller
than 18".
E.
F.
G.
H.
Square throat-round heel elbows shall not be used.
All sides of rectangular ducts over 12" shall be cross-broken or shall be provided with roll seams 12" O.c.
AU other details of fabrication shall be as specified in SMACNA Manuals listed hereinbefore.
The Contractor shall be responsible for all dimensions, clearances, and arrangements of ducts to avoid
conflict. The drawings show the general arrangements and approximate locntions of ductwork. Actualjob
conditions shall be used to determine measurements and arrangements. Where the Contractor prefabricates
ductwork based on the Contract drawings, he shall be responsible for all dimensions. Where actual job
conditions".require Contractor to modify pre-fabricated ductwork, the Contractor shall make all changes
without additional cost to the Owner.
INST ALLA TION
B.
Ductwork:
1. General: Ductwork systems shall be installed to be free of vibration noises under all conditions
of operation. Grilles and other accessories shall not be installed on joints.
2. Ductwork shall be erected, joints sealed and accepted by the Architect before insulation is applied
- do not pre-insulate duct sections.
3. Provide angle flange and gasket to all equipment having flange connections. Provide supports
and install duct systems, duct liner, and accessories in accordance with requirements ofSMACNA
Manuals and/or hereinbefore specified.
4. Seal duct joints of all supply, retum, outside air and exhaust duct systems with a Fire Retardant
Duct Sealer, UL listed. Container shall bear UL Label. Sealer shall he designed for use with high
pressure and high velocity ductwork.
5. Pressure sensitive duct tape will not be permitted.
6. Manual and motor operated dampers shall have slot cut in end of extended damper shaft. Slot
shall be field cut, with a hacksaw, parallel to the damper blade.
7. Pre-insulated flexible duct shall not have bends or offsets greater than 45 degrees.
Duct Liner:
1. Install in accordance with SMACNA Manual "Duct Liner Applicalion Standard", First Edition-
1971, and in accordance with details shown on drawings. Install with a full (100% coverage) coat
of Foster 85-11 SparkFas adhesive and weld pins (not Stik Clips or Grip Nails) spaced 12" on
center in accordance with SMACNA Duct Liner Application Standard. Fasteners shall not
compress the liner more than 1/8 inch. DUCT SIZE SHOW~ ON THE DRAWING IS THE
METAL SIZE.
2. Liner shall be installed with the surface treatment exposed to the air stream. All interior surfaces
of all ductwork and fittings shall be completely covered with duct liner, without interruptions or
gaps, except where required by codes.
a. Unless factory coated, all transverse edges and exposed longitudinal joints of the duct
liner shall be coated.
3. All traverse joints shall be finnly butted without gaps. All rips and tears on the air stream surface
shall be repaired by coating damaged areas with approved adhesive, or coating, or shall be
repla~ed.
4. Transverse joint edges and nil exposed leading edges shall have a factory-applied edge coating
or shall be coated with adhesive.
5. Metal nosings (either channel or zee profile), or integrally formed from the ductwall, shall be
securely installed over traverse liner edges facing the air stream within 96 inches offan discharge:
C.
Accessories:
I. Tuming Vanes: Secure to duct with sheet metal screws 12" maximum o.c.
15840-4
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
I
2. Flexible Duct Connections: Provide where ductwork connects to each air handling device (except
exhaust fans) and elsewhere as shown. Joints shall be air tight.
3. Dampers. Install dampers where shown. Operation of each damper shall be checked for freedom
of operation. Binds and obstructions shall be eliminated. Exercise care so damper frames are not
"racked" .
4. Access Doors: Provide for each fire damper, smoke damper, duct mounted smoke detector,
firestat, motor operated damper, .duct heating coil, and other locations where indicated on the
drawings. Seal each door to be airtight. Exception: Where fire dampers can be reset by
removing grille or register access doors are not required. Access door shall be located so they
are within affi1S length of fusible links or reset devices.
5. Damper End Bearings: Provide where damper shafts extend through sides of duct. Secure to duct
with two (2) minimum sheet metal screws.
6. Damper Operators: Provide for each damper. Check each operator for freedom of movement and
eliminate obstructions.
7. Fire Dampers & Smoke Dampers: Install in accordance with SMACNA Fire Dampers and Heat
Stop Guide (1981).
8. Smoke Dampers shall be installed in locations required by NFPA 90A (whether shown on
drawings or not) in air handling system over 15,000 CFM to isolate the air handling equipment
including filters from the remainder of the system so as to restrict recirculation of smoke.
I
I
I
I
D. Supports:
1. Duct support details shall be as outlined in SMACNA Manuals specified hereinbefore. Provide
beam clamps as specified for attachment of supports to structure steel. Powder actuated fasteners
may be used in concrete slabs. Coated nails may be used in wood frame construction.
2. Insulated flexible round duct shall be installed where indicated on the Drawings. (Flexible duct,
unless shown otherwise, shall not exceed 4 feet in length and shall be supported 3 feet maximum
on center with 3" wide by 26 gauge galvanized hangers). Duct shall be secured to branch ducts
and equipment or outlets with Ventlok G10 stainless steel worm drive strap or nylon self locking
strap around the inner liner only. Duct insulation shall be sealed to adjacent duct or unit with
vapor barrier mastic.
3. S~pports contacting the duct shall not be less than I inch wide.
.\
I
I
I
I
E. Inspection and Testing:
I. All low pressure ductwork shall be inspected visually and approved in writing by the Architect
prior to insulating or concealment. In absence of such proof of acceptance, a leak test shall be
conducted. Air leakage shall not exceed 5% of the design air quantity at 1" W.C. static pressure.
A smoke test may be used in lieu of pressure test.
I
1.10
A.
CLEANING SYSTEM
I
All air plenums and inside of all air handling units shall be cleaned of all dirt, dust and debris. After the
systems have been cleaned, the filters shall be installed and system shall be placed in normal operating
condition.
B.
After system has been operated and prior to final inspection, remove all trash and debris from behind grilles
and diffusers.
I
1.11
A.
PAINTING
I
Paint ductwork behind air devices where ductwork behind air devices can be seen from normal sight lines.
Paint shall be Flat Black.
I
SEE TABLE 1-4 EX ATTACHED
I
I
I
i" ,
15840-5
I
~.~
I .
I
I
I
I
I
I
.....
~
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
.
i;
c::-u i:: : . :. .
. f' U !;;. n ..
.. f... . t c::::::...JJ '
je.: : t
I ; .} i
: =1/:.
I ..1 ::
: u:
" :". C
Augusta Commons, 09102
. Augusta, Georgia. ..
~.
Wz @
~W
:E
Clw
wu
:Ece
ceo
wLL..
~z
~UJ @
ce
~I
~I
w'
-.Ji
CDI
~:
2,
O.
F=
u
::>
0:
I-
C/)
2
o
U
I-
U
::>
o
UJ
a.
o
U'
C/)
$'
01
0::1
0::.
;1/
!
I@
/-
~
Z
UJ
:E
UJ
u
cei
o
LL.. :
z:
W
c:::
~
z
o
-,
UJ
C/,)
a:,
UJ
>
C/,)
z
c:::
a:
~
;8
.
~ i
=In Ii:
.,.UI!,-
. ; " . . i
;8
"
==>1n i,
UI a-
r .
I =In I.
-. UI ~-
.. : ...
;8
!
I
I
,
I
I
10
II.::.:'
i
I
'e
e
.. ::
"F'"':':' ~
OJ G f
rL;
. ..i:,:,:' :~
.: :,.'
: I ~ i
'f--.1...
. : .
. '1
. ;
~ . 1
i'.... .
i~
":
ii
i 3 ~
15"
ji
.t
z I I
!/ I
~Ii":
.I( : lit'
= I I ...
I! .
-I i a
i I I :l.
~I!;:;
!
I
I
';,
=,
:::
--
"'...:
u_
0",
-0
c
.
-~
~
'"
'"
...
=
!
,=i
I' " -
~ i: - ...
:;:.;;f ~
.i~ "'/ 15
l';"'!.~ ~ I ~
! !"", r
, mr/!
I'"
30\fl:!!J 300:J ':lNI3l:!
~
fi"
(,I) "e
. ; j' N
. t:l,
t:o w'
;i uz ! I
~ >= c:: I
~~~ ,8
('X\fl'll !JNI:J\fdS ':lNI3l:!
("NIWl '\f!J l:Jno
>--
U:E
::J-
ee
.--
=
- ::
lIC.~UI
, ...
.
=
I
; i"
z,
,
i .
"T I~:
I
I
,
,
J<:
j
~ /. :
3 ""
z .
'" I"':
:-. :'oJ:
,
I
I
e
~
I ~ .'
..- :;! )(
~ ~ I~~
! ." )_1 c: ! ::: : t .:t :
!~'ll~;'~t:I~"'~;
j-- --:--,-.-,-..-
: I
~
D
..
.. ) .,
: ;.,. ooj 0:" :.
:e ~ ~ : =/" : ~ ~
Jl ..:,:~:. I(
." ." : /' ...: ::. !.
It "~...I(S'r. J(
- - - - -I -... ..
,
a
.;
...
..
:~
~ .
~:l.
~~ ~
;;:
:!:~
I
I
I
,
!
I /. I I :
'w ::;I'.i.~
Q I ~ CI ~ ~ --
I '" f'i..- -i "J{
i 0< I cr . ~ I:r'..
.. ,r.. ..... I ,.. J
1"(-1":"'-
i i
':-::7f:!
I,;;
I:~~
. .
! ::!
! -
"" I :
go '.
., I ...
, I ·
_ J: I f:.
l !
1
:i. i
~ I
,
i~
'ct
'... .
, .
, .
, n
I:: ·
~ : ~
~:. ~:,
.
. "
. II: . II
t.. !..
::.
~
...
i x
,
, -
I
! I
i << I .
I I
"I <<
!
"
i " i ./ " !.
!elw/u.'t:o;-
f . I -
I "' 1+,.1., I
i ., 1"1', i '."', i
I ..., 1'-/:\iJ ! ~
I' ;. I!i!! ! I'
'"" ; "':'! ;n ,
U
~"':
..
'"
;:;
;..
"
15840-6
I
i..
I...
I ~ ..
I i
!
I
I
I -
J
i
i
!:
!:.
~ I I
.!I.~~.~
~_. ,~: ~:
tt ~ I ri --:".:
~$' I:X';<
r.._ !....,... .....,...
I
:! ;~~.:~
~ .,
"''''
~..
. .
~~
. i
i: ! .. .,
~~ '::.:~
.1( ""'...............
.. ~ ! lit y ~..
I......... ""1'4
::.
..
i
> I
G
E '
I
!
~ I
E I
I
I
<< I <<
I
I
I
!
~: I ~
i-
~ !
t.. /.
I
: I
f,
I
i
!
0'
g:!:
~is
~ I ~
I
.=;
~;~
. ~ ~
. . ti
.. ~ ~
x ! ;;
~;:a
. ~ .
[~ g
d;
- ~ .
~~wl!
, . f ~
;n~
~ ~ e I;
~ ;.1
;I:: f= 0
; "'~ ~
!oil3
t1i~'.i
"~Jgi
)- .:.:: .2
:z _ _ _..
W~._,
~ ~ Ii""
~" l! I
gjfji
~~
'2 ~
.S! 2
:: QJ
-g5
o .
(.)c
o
~'E
'C'g
c VI
"VI
'?<
-VI
t:> _
::Eg
_u
8lg
J:.c
eno
u
. .
....,
~ ~.5 C: ~ 0 -co "9 ~ -g &
(5 = z; oS 0. -; .. '" co
c: ~ ~ CIj ~:: ~ .~ n ;.. ~
~ 8 '0 .~ ~ g ~.t ~ ~ N
== Sl Q. U a .~ ~. E_ .5_ "'E" -g
~ = 2..s < .~ .~ _ _ .... ~
::~-~o Ole:: ~~ ~ Oi~ ,.gin
., .." ~ .E :: 5 ~ g eJ
' .Ed ~ r: l.> 1: .2 In:: (,,) ~ u ....
E_-:':.gU_ gE o5og:;:~
- ,; u S1'1ii.:: ::
S!:;:>Q :'g ui:>v.
~'~ ~ l.> .si g ~ .9 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
~ ~ :: ~ ~ E ~ .~~ e ~'g ~
e ~ :3 - C) '@ g E ,~ t:i ~ tr (5
~:-: "-g ~ ~ ,Q .E2:E t1 ~ 'E u
c: :.I ~ = .... > 'E c:::::=.... -'0 _
~,~ ~'~ ~ ~ z 8 ~ ~ ~ ..: .~
=~E.~S~~ a~~"=';~
.; 5 = ~ ~ ;;: U ~ ~ ?:: 'Cl
c:: 8 i: .? 0 . 2 C ;; c.'~ e .
E9'J1E"'E~In:;;:Jt.:~CJ~
1c'so~~~Eg~"Sr:g?:g
u-::;::=~;::o=(.)C.=1iiONiii
.n
<.!i
,..:
-.
~b ~ ~~.2 ~.8~.9
... N c: 'Vi u ~ E c 2 :g
.':~ '0 --"~ t)~F::a.
-;) '- d rJ = t:> > '" :: a.
~ -"-;:;:frE r: Q
..: C. .S:.:; 0 'C ~ .: ~.!!2 en
_~_ ~ 0 c:; '0 .... '5 ~u ~ ~ ';::
u '6:: ~ 0 CT .= 0. 'U >=
c~ !~:3:5~ ~,:)Q"
U.o c~CJ'Q_ ;C!.c:;
5 2 '0 ,5 .o'~ c: t) g ~ ~
-;, B~~c:"~ ~.51:liO
~;. VI ~ E.~ ~ - 5 c E
.s 2 ~ ,!:: In c: 0 "0 :1 CJ
c:>- -~lnCJ_ Co c:
g= ~ ~ES .-: 5'-vi
-0 ME~ue ..g~~Cs~
g. ~ CJ ._ \00' ....
i~ l~~~ ~.t::il~~
~~ S~~n:SE~g.o~~
:a c ,5 ,g ~ ~ E B ~ In 0 .S ~
~,g ,Cl'g E ...;~'t:,"9 g,,'E'Q
.. a g- == '5 E ~ g - tl ~ -.g E V)
enw:':uo~CjCJ'O~-uC:~BU
OO::)(Ca.__ o:;1;J~U)(~
b :"- UJ ~ en .5 ;:: '0 .:: :S 0 = D " '0
z..: N r-i -i
"
0,
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
I
I
1.01
A.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
SECTION 15900
IlVAC CONTROLS
CONTROL SYSTEM
Automatic temperature control system shall be of the Electric (not Electronic) type furnished and installed
under this Section (Section IS Mechanical).
B.
C.
Control system shall be furnished by a recognized Branch Office of the control device manufacturer.
Certification by the firm selling the control devices and preparing the control diagram is required. See
Specification Section GENERAL CONDITIONS for details. ^ site visit and system checkout is required
in order to write the letter of certification.
D.
Equipment, system design, wiring, supervision, startup, checkout and warranty shall be the individu<ll
responsibility of the Control Firm.
All line and low voltage control and interlock wiring for all items provided or included in DIVISION 15
shall be provided under this Division (HV AC CONTROLS) and installed in accordance with the
requirements of Division 16 (ELECTRICAL). All wiring shall be minimum of 16 ga. (low voltage), 12
ga. (line voltage) with 600 volt insulation, installed in galvanized EMT or rigid conduit.
E.
F.
Wall mounted control devices (thermostats, humidistats, override switches, etc.): Contractor shall
coordinate final location of devices to prevent conflict with tackboards, chalkboards, decorative paneling,
etc.
G.
Routing of that portion of conduit or raceway that is exposed shall be run adjacent to the power wiring
conduit.
H.
1.
All conduit or raceways shall be concealed.
All power wiring (for control devices) that is not included or provided in other Sections of the work sha 1\
be provided by this Section (HV AC CONTROLS). The nearest unswitched electrical circuit shall be the
source of power.
J.
The Control Firm shall select and provide control voltage for operation of control system. Voltage
selection shall be based on the building layout, control sequences and specific operating characteristics of
controlled components. The Control Firm shall be responsible for coordinating the control voltage of
devices which are integral with mechanical equipment supplied under Section 15000 MECHANICAL by
other vendors. This shall include but, not limited to, control voltage for wall heaters, unit heaters, louvers
and damper motors, fan starters, pump starters, etc.
K.
All controls shall be Commercial (not Residential) grade.
1.' All wiring, switches, relays, or other devices required by the control system shall be furnished
under this Section.
2. Prewired control cabinets shall be provided for all relays, switches, etc., where indicated on
drawings. Cabinets shall be baked enamel finished steel with keyed lock or equal and shall
contain program clocks and all relays and control devices. System switches shall be mounted in
the cabinet door. Numbered temlinal strips shall be provided.
3. Control devices shall be identified by nomenclature indicated on control drawings, function and
setp9int with engraved laminated bakelite nameplates with 3/16" (minimum) high letters..
Nameplates shall be affixed to the surface on which the device is attached (not the device cover).'
Cadmium plated screws shall be lIsed to secure the nameplate. Example - RELAY R-l.
4. Submittals shall include the following:
a. A ladder type control diagram, color coded, and with identified terminals shall he:
submitted 10 and approved by the Architect prior to starting any work. The control suh-.
contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer's of the equipment to which he must
connect, a control diagram showing the unit wiring and shall show all or part of the
diagram on his control diagram.
b. Descriptive literature for each control device.
15900-1
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
I
5. The control system shall be checked out on Cooling and Heating and "as-built" Framed Photostat
of control diagram posted. O\\11erS shall be instructed in operation of the system and a certificate
stating that the above requirements have been accomplished shall be sent to Architect prior to
Final Inspection.
6. Provide a permanent approved copy of control diagram framed under acrylic and fastened to wall
in the Main Equipment Room. Diagram shall indicate color coded wiring, and show terminal
identi fication. Furnish also I" = 50' scale plan showing location of all concealed or not readily
visible control devices. Identify devices as to function and set point.
7.. All Starters, disconnect switches, s\vitches, controllers, relays and valves shall be identified with
engraved laminated plastic nameplates. Nameplates shall sho\v function of the device and design
set point.
8. All control transfonners shall be fused on the primary and secondary sides.
9. Method of all interlock and control wiring shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the
specific item of equipment.
10. Firestats: Firestats shall be manual reset type and shall be installed in fan and AHU system having
capacity of 1,000 CFM or larger or fan wheels 12" diameter and larger or AHU's serving area
used for egress. Fans shall be arranged to shut dO\"11 automatically when the temperature of the
air in the system becomes excessive, as from a fire. for this purpose approved fixed temperature
thermostatic devices shall be provided as follows:
a. With a setting not in excess of 136/165 degrees F., at a suitable location in the return air
stream prior to exhausting from the building or being diluted by outside air.
11. Smoke Detectors:
a. Smoke detectors shall be located in the duct upstream of each smoke or comhination
firelsmoke damper. Detectors shall also be located on the wall adjacent to each smoke
or combination fire/smoke damper located in plenum smoke partition.
b. In systems of over 2,000 cfm capacity, smoke detectors approved for duct installation
shall be installed at a suitable location in:
I) The main supply duct on the downstream side of the filters to automatically
" stop the fan; and,
2) The return air stream, prior to exhausting from the building or being oiluted by
outside air, to automatically exhaust the smoke-laden return air or to stop the
fan.
a) Exception No. I: The smoke detector in the return air stream may be
omitted in systems of less than 15,000 cfm.
c. Smoke detectors and duct housings shall be provided under Section 16000
ELECTRICAL.
d. Detectors and duct housings used to activate smoke dampers and shut down air handlers
shall be mounted under Division 15000 MECHANICAL.
1) Sampling tubes shall extend full width of duct.
2) Provide access door at smoke detector.
3) Provide remote key-operated Test/Reset switch with indicator light for
detectors at air handling units. Locate above unit thermostat or as indicated on
the drawings. .
e. Test/reset switches, indicator lights and control wiring [rom the smoke detector to the
smoke or combination damper shall be provided under Section 15900 MECHANICAL
CONTROLS.
12. Smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers will be provided under Section 15840
Air Distribution System. Control of dampers shall be under this section (BV AC Controls).
a. A status panel for smoke dampers shall be provided in the ceiling below the individual
damper. Panel shall contain a red neon pilot light that shall be illuminated when damper
is closed.
b. Provide damper position interlock to ensure that smoke dampers are open 100% before
V A V unit fan is started.
13. Thermostats shall be commercial grade of type indicated in Sequence of Operation. Low limit
thermostats shall be concealed adjustment non-indicating type mounted 7 feet above the floor.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.02 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
I
A.
Smoke DetectorlAir Handling Unit:
1. In systems with air handling capacity above 2,000 CFr',1 and up to. and inc.luding .15,000 CFM,
the smoke detector shall, when sensing smoke, shut down the AIr Handing UnIt. Where an
outdoor condensing unit or heat pump is used it shall shut down those components (break the red
'",ire).
I
I
15900-2
I
I
Augusta Commons, 09102
Augusta, Georgia
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
2.
In systems over 15,000 CFM, the smoke detector shall also send a signal to close motorized
smoke dampers in order to isolate the Air Handling equipment (including filters) from the
remainder of the system.
In systems over 15,000 cfm, the smoke dampers shall close (thus isolating the air handling
equipment) whenever the unit fan is de-energized. The fan shall be interlocked with limit
s\vitches mounted on the smoke damper such that the fan cannot energize until all smoke dampers
are fully open.
3.
B. Firestat/ Air Handling Unit: Firestat shall, upon sensing temperatures in excess of the setpoint, de-energize
the unit fan.
C.
Smoke (or Combination) Damper/Smoke Detector: Upon sensing smoke at the detector, the damper shall
close. When the damper is closed, the indicator light shall illuminate as described above.
Heat Pump:
1. Thermostat shall be 7-day programmable equal to Honeywell T300 and a Q7300 sub-base having
a Off-Em-Ht.-Heat-Auto-Cool System switch and an Auto-On Fan switch. Provide multi-stage
heating and cooling thermostat where controlled unit has multi-stage capability. Outdoor
thermostat shall prevent strip heat from being energized above 45 degrees F.
a. System switching positions shall control thernlostat operation as follows:
I) OFF - heating and cooling systems are off. If the fan switch is at the AUTO
position, the cooling fan is also off.
2) HEAT - heating system is controlled by the thermostat. Cooling system is off.
3) AUTO - thermostat Rut()rnatically switches between heat and cool modes,
depending upon the indoor temperature.
4) COOL - thermostat conlrols the cooling system. Heating system if off.
5) EM.IIT - emergency hent relay is energized on call for heat. Cooling system
is off. Compressor is de-energized.
b. Fan switching positions shall conlrol fan operation as follows:
1) ON - fan operates continllously.
2) AUTO - fan operates as controlled by the thernlOstat in heat pump systems or
conventional cooling mode; fan shall operate as controlled by plenum switch
in conventional heating mode.
D.
E.
F.
Electric Heater: Unit shall be controlled by thermostat furnished with the unit.
Exhaust Fans:
1. See Fan Schedule for control sequence. When fan is controlled with light switch provide for each
Toilet Exhaust Fan a ICM Series 102 or eCjual"Delay on Break" relay. Set timer so fan will
continue to run for 5-minutes (adjustable .n) to 10 minutes) after lights are turned off.
2. Exhaust Fan: Where exhaust fan serves more than a single space; provide a line voltage relay for
each room and connect relays in parallel so that turning lights on in any room will start exhaust
fan.
END OF SECTION 15900
15900-3
I
I
I
I
1. 01
I
I
I
I
1. 02
I
I
I
I
1. 03
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
SECTION 16000
GENERAL
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS:
A.
All work of Section 16
requirements of:
shall
comply with the
l.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
General Conditions
Supplementary General Conditions
General Requirements
Specifications
Drawings
Modifications incorporated in the documents before
their execution.
WORK INCLUDED
A. This Division of the specifications (16000) covers the
complete interior and exterior electrical system for all
work shown on the drawings as specified herein providing
all material, labor and equipment required for the
installation of the electrical systems complete and in
operating condition.
B.
Include in the electrical work all the necessary
supervision and the issuing of all coordinating
information to any other trades who are supplying work
to accommodate the electrical installations.
DRAWINGS
A.
The drawings for electrical work utilize symbols and
schematic diagrams which have no dimensional
significance. The work shall therefore, be installed to
fulfill the diagrammatic intent expressed on the
electrical drawings.
B.
Review architectural drawings for door swings, cabinets,
counters, moldings and built-in equipment, conditions
indicated on architectural drawings shall govern. Prior
to rough-in of receptacles and systems outlets, refer to
architectural casework drawings for rough-in
coordination.
C.
Coordinate electrical work with the architectural
details, floor plans, elevations, structural and
mechanical drawings. Provide fittings, junction boxes
and accessories to meet conditions.
16000 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. 04
I
I
I
I
1. 05
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDell 02019
I
D.
Do not scale drawings.
equipment, or spaces
architectural, structural
specifically indicated on
Dimensions for layout of
shall be obtained from
or mechanical drawings unless
the electrical drawings.
E.
Discrepancies shown on different drawings, between
drawings and specifications or between drawings and
field conditions shall be promptly brought to the
attention of the 'Architect.
F.
Provide as used
specifications shall
adjust and test.
on the drawings and
mean, furnish, install,
in the
connect,
G.
The drawings and specifications are complimentary and
any work or material shown in one and omitted in the'
other, or described in the one and not shown in the
other, or which may be implied by both or either, shall
be furnished as though shown on both, in order to give
a complete and first class installation.
SITE INVESTIGATION
A.
Potential Contractors shall visit the project site prior
to bid date to satisfy themselves as to the existing
conditions and distances which may effect the cost of
the proj ect. Where work under this proj ect requires
extension, relocation, re-connecting or modifications to
existing equipment or systems, the existing equipment or
systems, shall be restored to their original condition,
wi th the exception of the work under this contract,
before the completion of this project.
SHOP DRAWINGS
A.
Submit for approval by the Architect all materials and
equipment to be incorporated in the electrical work.
B.
Submit only shop drawings which comply with the contract
documents. Shop drawings shall be checked and corrected
by the Contractor before they are submitted to the
Architect. Shop drawings that are not corrected by the
Contractor shall be returned for correction without
detailed notations by the Architect as to the necessary
corrections.
C.
Mark each individual submittal item to
specification section which pertains to the item.
show
D.
Submi t information as required under SUBMITTALS,
each of the individual electrical sections of
specifications.
for
the
16000 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. 06
I
I
I
1. 07
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. 08
I
EDC# 02019
I
E.
Data submitted shall contain all information required to
indicate compliance with equipment specified.
F.
Submit field information drawings to explain fully all
procedures involved in erecting, mounting and connecting
all items of equipment which differ from that specified.
G.
When Shop Drawings are reviewed, some errors may be
detected but others may be overlooked. This does not
grant the Contractor permission to proceed in error.
Regardless of any information contained in the Shop
Drawings, the requirements of the Drawings and
Specifications shall be followed and are not waived or
superseded in any way by the Shop Drawing review.
RECORD DRAWINGS:
A.
One complete set of electrical drawings shall be
reserved for as-built drawings. Any approved deviation
from the contract drawings shall be recorded on these
drawings. Drawings shall be checked monthly for
completeness.
B.
Completed as-built drawings shall be presented to the
Architect prior to final inspection.
MAINTENANCE AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS:
A.
Provide at the time of final inspection three sets of
maintenance and operating instruction for:
1. Lighting and Power Panelboards
2. Fuses
3. Wiring Devices
4. Lighting Fixtures and Lamps
5. Disconnect Switches
6. Photo Control and Contactors
7. Fire Alarm System/Intrusion Alarm System
8. Surge Protection System
B.
Furnish a qualified and accredited factory trained
technician to train personnel designated by the Owner in
the proper operation and maintenance of specialized
equipment.
C. The issuing of operating instructions shall include the
submission of the name, address, and telephone number of
the manufacturer's representative and service company
for each item of equipment so that service and spare
parts can be readily obtained.
CODES AND PERMITS:
16000 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. 09
I
I
I
I
1.10
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
A.
All electrical work shall meet or exceed the latest
requirements of the following codes and/or other
authorities exercising jurisdiction over the electrical
construction work and the project.
1. The National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) 1999
Edition
2. The National Electrical Safety Code (ANSI C-2)
3. The Life Safety Code (NFPA 101) - 2000 Edition
4. The Standard Building Code - 2000 Edition
5. Regulations of the local utility company with
respect to metering and service entrance.
6. Municipal and State ordinances governing electrical
work.
B. All required permits and inspection certificates shall
be obtained, and made available at the completion of the
work. Permi ts, inspections, and certification fees
shall be paid for as a part of the electrical work.
DEVIATIONS:
A.
No deviations from the plans and specifications shall be
made without the full knowledge and consent of the
Architect or his authorized representative.
B.
Should the Contractor find at any time during progress
of the work that, in his judgement, existing conditions
make desirable a modification in requirements covering
any particular item or items, he shall report such items
promptly to the Architect for his decision and
instruction.
COOPERATION:
A.
This Contractor shall schedule his work and in every way
possible cooperate with all other Contractors on the job
to avoid delays, interferences, and unnecessary work.
He shall notify them of all openings, hangers,
excavations, etc., so that proper provisions shall be
made for his work. This shall not relieve him of the
cost of cutting, when such is required.
B.
This Contractor shall do all cutting and excavating
necessary for the complete installation of his work, but
he shall not cut the work of any other Contractor
without first consulting the Architect. he shall repair
any work damaged by him or his workmen, employing the
services of the Contractor whose work is damaged.
C.
This Contractor shall by all means coordinate the
location of ceiling lighting fixtures, both recessed and
16000 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
1.11
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.12
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
surface mounted, with the Ceiling Contractor so that
proper hangers and supports shall be provided.
D.
Any conflict between electrical and other trades shall
be reported before construction starts. No extra
charges will be approved for work resulting from failure
to coordinate with other trades.
INSTALLATION:
A.
Raceways, fixtures, devices, and other electrical
equipment shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike
manner and in accordance with recognized good practice
for a first class installation.
B.
The Architect or his representative shall have the
authority to reject any workmanship not complying with
the contract documents.
C.
The Electrical Contractor shall personally or through an
authorized licensed and competent electrician,
constantly supervise the work from beginning to
complete and final inspection.
D.
Electrical equipment shall be installed in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations.
E.
Locations of proposed raceway, riser, location of
structural elements, location and size of chases method
and type of construction of floors, walls, partitions,
etc., shall be verified before construction starts.
F.
Consul t owner and utility companies for underground
lines before any underground work is started.
Contractors shall be responsible for any damage.
EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING:
A.
General. The Contractor shall perform all excavation to
install conduit structures and equipment specified in
this Division of the Specifications. During excavation,
materials for backfilling shall be piled back from the
banks of the trench to avoid over-loading and to prevent
slides and cave-ins. All excavated materials not to be
used for backfill shall be removed and disposed of by
the Contractor. Grading shall be done to prevent
surface water from flowing into trenches and other
excavations and water accumulating therein shall be
removed by pumping. All excavations shall be made by
open cut. No tunneling shall be done. All
requirements of OSHA shall be complied with.
16000 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.13
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDell 02019
I
B.
Trench Excavation. The bottom of the trenches shall be
graded to provide uniform bearing and support for each
section of the conduit on undisturbed soil at every
point along its entire length. Over depths shall be
backfilled with loose, granular, moist earth, tamped.
Removed unstable soil that is not capable of supporting
the conduit and replace with specified material.
c.
Backfilling. The trenches shall not be backfilled until
it is reviewed by the Architect or his representative.
The trenches shall be backfilled with the excavated
materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth,
loam, sandy clay, and gravel or soft shale, free from
large clods of earth or stones, deposited in 6" layers
and tamped until the conduit has a cover of not less
than the adjacent existing ground but not greater than
2" above existing ground. The backfilling shall be
carried on simultaneously on both sides of the trench so
that conduit is not displaced. The compaction of the
filled trench shall be at least equal to that of the
surrounding undisturbed material, except that trenches
occurring under paved areas or in areas to be filled
shall be backfilled in 6" maximum layers and each layer
compacted to 95% maximum density. Settling the backfill
with water will not be permitted. Any trenches not
meeting compaction requirements or where settlement
occurs shall have backfill removed down to the top of
the conduit then backfill with approved materials as
specified hereinbefore.
D.
Positively no tree roots are to be damaged, hand dig
where required. Damaged trees or shrubbery shall be
replaced in kind and must be approved by Engineer.
MATERIALS:
A.
Materials specified by manufacturer's name shall be used
unless approval of other manufacturers are listed in
addenda to these specifications. Request for prior
approval shall be submitted by mail only facsimile will
not be acceptable.
B.
Drawings
equipment
equipment
materials
indicating proposed layout of space, all
to be installed therein and clearance between
shall be submitted, where substitution of
alter space requirements on the drawings.
c.
Material Standards: All materials shall be new and
shall conform to the standards where such have been
established for the particular material in question.
Publications and Standards of the organization listed
below are applicable to materials specified herein.
16000 - 6
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.14
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL)
National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA)
Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA)
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
(IEEE)
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)
6.
7.
D.
Material of the same type shall be the product of one
manufacturer.
E.
Materials not readily available from local sources shall
be ordered immediately upon approval.
F.
The Architect shall have authority to reject any
materials, or equipment, not complying with these
specifications and have the Contractor replace materials
so rejected immediately upon notification of rejection.
G.
Any material or equipment so rejected shall be removed
from the job within 24 hours of such rejection,
otherwise the Architect may have same removed at the
Contractor's expense.
EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS:
A. All equipment requiring electrical power connections
shall be connected under this Division of these
specifications.
B.
Where electrical connections to
specific locations, such locations
from shop drawings.
equipment require
shall be obtained
C.
Drawings for location of conduit stub-up boxes mounted
in wall or floor to serve specific equipment, shall not
be scaled.
D.
Electrical circuits to equipment furnished under other
sections of these specifications are based on design
loads. If actual equipment furnished has loads other
than design loads electrical circuits and protective
devices shall be revised to be compatible with equipment
furnished at no additional cost to the Owner. Any
revisions must have prior approval by the Architect.
Before submi ttinq shop drawinqs, Electrical Sub-
Contractor shall alonq with the Mechanical Sub-
Contractor review vol taqe and load requirements for
mechanical and plumbinq equipment to determine the
compatibility between what is beinq furnished and what
is shown in the contract drawinqs. The Electrical Sub-
16000 - 7
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.15
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
Contractor shall
statement that
includinq review
Contractors.
alonq with his submittals submit a
he has reviewed all shop drawinqs
with the Mechanical and Plumbinq Sub-
E.
.Where equipment is indicated to be served thru conduit
stub-up, conduit shall be stubbed up not less than four
inches above floor where transition shall be made to
sealtite flexible conduit for connection to equipment.
F.
The Contractor's attention is invited to other Divisions
of these specifications, where equipment requiring
electrical service or electrically related work is
specified to become fully aware of the scope of work
required for electrical service or related work.
G.
Where electricity utilizing equipment is supplied
separate from the electrical work, and is energized,
controlled or otherwise made operative by electrical
work, the testing to provide the proper functional
performance of such wiring systems shall be conducted by
the trade responsible for the equipment. The electrical
work shall, however, include cooperation in such testing
and the making available of any necessary testing or
adjustments to the electrical equipment.
H.
Heating, air conditioning, and ventilating equipment is
specified to be furnished and installed under other
sections of these specifications. The controls,
likewise are specified to be furnished thereunder. All
necessary wiring, wiring troughs and circuit breakers
for power for this equipment shall be furnished and
installed under this section of the specifications, in
accordance with the plans and/or diagrams furnished with
the equipment, or shown on these plans. Starters
furnished by the Mechanical Contractor shall be
installed under this Division of the specifications.
Power wiring to auxiliary equipment on a piece of
equipment remote from its main terminal box and
interlocking of apparatus shall be accomplished under
Heating Ventilating Equipment section of the
specifications. Conduit and outlets for control wiring
shall be furnished and installed under Division 15 of
these specifications. Control conductors for mechanical
equipment shall not be installed in same conduit with
power conductors.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING, & PROTECTION
A.
Inspect materials upon arrival at Project and verify
conformance to Contract Documents. Prevent unloading of
unsatisfactory material. Handle materials in accordance
16000 - 8
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1.16
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
with manufacturer's applicable standards and suppliers
recommendations, and in a manner to prevent damage to
materials. Store packaged materials in original
undamaged condition with manufacturer's labels and seals
intact. Containers which are broken, opened, damaged,
or watermarked are unacceptable and shall be removed
from the premises.
B.
All material, except items specifically designed to be
installed outdoors such as pad mounted transformers or
stand-by generators, shall be stored in an enclosed, dry
building or trailer. Areas for general storage shall be
provided by the Contractor. Provide temperature and/or
humidity control where applicable. No material for
interior installation, including conductors, shall be
stored other than in an enclosed weather tight
structure. Equipment stored other than as speci fied
above shall be removed from the premises.
C. Equipment and materials shall not be installed until
such time as the environmental conditions of the job
site are suitable to protect the equipment or materials.
Condi tions shall be those for which the equipment or
materials are designed to be installed. Equipment and
ma terials shall be protected from water, direct
sunlight, cold or heat. Equipment or materials damaged
or which are subj ected to these elements are
unacceptable and shall be removed from the premises and
replaced.
CLEANING AND PAINTING
A.
Remove oil, dirt, grease and foreign materials from all
raceways, fittings, boxes, panelboard trims and cabinets
to provide a clean surface for painting. Touch-up
scratched or marred surfaces of lighting fixtures,
panelboard and cabinet trims, motor control center,
switchboard or equipment enclosures with paint furnished
by the equipment manufacturers specifically for that
purpose.
B.
Do not paint trim covers for flush mounted panelboards,
telephone cabinets, pull boxes, junction boxes and
control cabinet unless required by the Architect.
Remove trim covers before painting. Under no conditions
shall locks, latches or exposed trim clamps be painted.
C.
Unless indicated on the drawings or specified herein to
the contrary, all painting shall be done under the
PAINTING Section of these Specifications.
16000 - 9
I
I
I
I
1.17
I
I
I
1.18
I
I
I
I
1.19
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
D. Where plywood backboards are used to mount equipment
provided under Division 16, paint backboards with two
coats of light grey semi-gloss paint. Plywood shall be
3/4" fire rated plywood. Paint shall be fire retardant
paint.
GUARANTEE:
A.
Defective lamps shall be replaced up-to-date of
acceptance and shall be guaranteed for one year.
B.
All systems and component parts shall be guaranteed for
one year from the date of final acceptance of the
complete project. Defects found during this guaranteed
period shall be promptly corrected at no additional cost
to the Owner.
SERVICE:
A.
The electrical service and telephone/CATV service for
this project has been coordinated between the Engineer
and the Utility Company. However, before installing
service conduit (underground or mast), Contractor shall
contact Utility Company and verify voltage, location and
type of service. Prior to rough-in, coordinate an on-
site meeting with each Utility Company to review exact
requirements. Submit letter of coordination to Engineer
for review.
SCHEDULING OF OUTAGES
A.
Electrical work requiring interruption of electrical
power which would adversely affect the normal operation
of the other portions of the Owner's property, shall be
done at time other than normal working hours. Normal
working hours shall be considered eight A.M. to five
P.M. Monday through Friday.
B.
Schedule all work requiring interruption of electrical
power two weeks prior to actual shutdown. Submit
schedule in writing to Architect indicating extent of
system to be de-energized, date and time when power is
intended to be interrupted, and date and time power will
be restored. Schedule shall be subject to the review of
the Architect and the Representative of the Owner.
16000 - 10
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
END OF SECTION 16000
EDC# 02019
16000 - 11
I
I
I
I
1. 01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. 02
I
I
1. 03
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
I
SECTION 16010
LIGHTING AND POWER PANELBOARDS
SUBMITTALS
A.
Complete panelboard shop drawings shall be submitted,
listing as a minimum the following items:
1.
2.
3.
Voltage rating.
Bus assembly rating.
Main breaker rating by capacity, number of poles
and interrupting rating in RMS symmetrical amperes.
Surface or flush mounting.
Listing of branch breakers by capacity number of
poles and interrupting rating in RMS symmetrical
amperes.
Top or bottom feed.
A schedule similar to that shown on the drawings,
depicting branch breaker arrangement and breaker
sizes and giving full explanation for any
difference between the two.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Contractor utilizing switch gear other than Square "0"
Company, shall submit layout of electrical rooms
delineating placement of equipment.
MANUFACTURERS
A. For the purpose of
panels, equipment as
has been specified.
these specifications
1. G. E.
2. Siemens
3. Cutler Hammer
selecting quality and types of
manufactured by Square "0" Company
Following manufacturers meeting
are acceptable.
EQUIPMENT
A.
Furnish and install circuit breaker lighting and power
panelboards as indicated in the panelboard schedule and
where shown on the plans. Panelboards shall be of the
dead-front safety type, equipped with thermal magnetic
molded case circuit breakers with frame and trip rating
as shown in the schedule.
16010 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
I
B. Circuit breakers shall be HACR rated, quick-make,
quick-break, thermal-magnetic, trip-indicating, and have
common trip on all multi-pole breakers. Trip indication
shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking
position between ON and OFF, when the breaker is
tripped. Branch circuit breakers feeding convenience
outlets shall have sensitive instantaneous trip setting
of not more than 10 times the trip rating of the
breakers. Connection to bus in all panels shall be
bolted. All breakers shall be 20 ampere trip, unless
otherwise shown. All breakers shall be minimum for
120/208 volts (22,000) A.I.C. sym. unless otherwise
noted.
C. Bus bar connections to the branch circuit breakers shall
be the distributed phase type. Three-phase, four-wire
bussing shall be such that any three adjacent
single-pole breakers are individually connected to each
of the three different phases in such a manner that two
or three-pole breakers can be installed at any
location. All current-carrying parts of the bus
assembly shall be copper. Main ratings shall be as
shown in the panelboard schedule on the drawings.
D. Panel front shall be provided with a continuous piano
hinge on one side.
E. A steel circuit directory frame permanently attached
(spot welded) at factory (not glued), and card with a
clear plastic covering shall be provided on the inside
of the door. The directory card shall provide a space
at least 1/4" high x 3" long for each circuit.
F. All panels shall be equipped with a copper equipment
grounding bar. The bar shall have lugs of sufficient
size to handle all grounding conductors.
G. Sub-feed circuit breakers are not permitted in panels
unless specifically called for.
H. Provide mounting hardware for all spaces shown on
panelboard schedule.
I. Panelboard circuit numbering shall be such that starting
at the top, odd numbering shall be used in sequence down
the left hand side and even numbers down the right hand
side.
16010 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
I
J. Except where otherwise indicated on the drawings or
required to avoid conflicts, mount the panelboards so
the tops of the cabinets will be 6 feet above the
finished floors. For panelboards which are too high,
mount them so the bottoms of the cabinets will be not
less than 6 inches above the finished floors.
K. Locate the cabinets so that present and future conduits
can be connected to them conveniently. Coordinate the
dimensions of the cabinets with the dimensions of the
spaces designated for installation prior to fabrication
of the cabinets. Cabinet shall be minimum 20" wide.
L. Wiring in panelboards shall be neatly grouped and
secured with ty-wraps.
M. Electrical panels shall not be used as wireways or
junction boxes for control conductors.
N. Where spaces are called for in a panel, all mounting
hardware shall be provided for the frame size indicated.
O. Splices in panelboards are not permitted.
P. Provide a hasp at 20A/1P breaker serving the fire alarm
control panel. Hasp shall allow breaker to be locked in
the (on) position if required by local code.
END OF SECTION 16010
16010 - 3
I
I
I
I
1. 01
I
I
I
1. 02
I
I
1. 03
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDell 02019
I
B.
C.
SECTION 16015
FUSES
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop drawings shall be submitted and shall consist of
manufacturer's published literature and technical data
sufficient for the engineer to determine whether system
function will be adversely affected, whether proposed
fuses meet this specification, and whether they are
equal in quality.
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable manufacturers are:
1.
2.
3.
Littelfuse
Cefco
Gould - Shawmut
EQUIPMENT/MATERIAL
A.
All fuses rated 600 volts or less and used for main,
feeder, or branch circuit protection with 200,000 ampere
interrupting rating and shall be so labeled. Fuse
classes and sizes indicated on the drawings have been
selected to provide a fully coordinated selective
protection system. To maintain this design, all fuses
provided shall be furnished by the same manufacturer.
Should equipment provided require a different U.L. Class
or fuse size, the engineer shall be furnished with
sufficient data to ascertain that system function will
not be adversely affected.
Current-Limitinq Fuses 601-6000 Amperes
Fuses rated over 600 amperes shall be U. L. Class "L"
fuses, and shall have a minimum time delay of 10 seconds
at 500% rating.
Current-Limitinq Fuses 600 Amperes or Less
All fuses 600 amperes and below shall be true dual-
element time delay fuses with separate spring-loaded
thermal overload elements in all ampere ratings. All
ampere ratings shall be designed to open at 400 degrees
Fahrenheit or less when subjected to a non-load oven
test. To eliminate induction heating, all fuse ferrules
and end caps shall be non-ferrous and shall be bronze or
another alloy not subject to stress cracking.
16015 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
D. Spare Fuses
At the time of final acceptance, the contractor shall
furnish the owner's representative, not less than three
(3) spare fuses of each size and type installed. Spare
fuses at main switchgear are not required.
END OF SECTION 16015
16015 - 2
I
I
I
I
1. 01
I
1. 02
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. 03
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
SECTION 16020
RACEWAYS
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit manufacturer's literature for each type
conduit or tubing and fittings used in the project.
of
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable manufacturers of rigid steel and electrical
metallic tubing conduit are:
1. Allied Tube and Conduit Co.
2. Wheatland Tube Co.
3. Triangle
4. L.T. V.
5. American Brass
6. E.T. P.
7 . Robroy
B.
Acceptable manufacturer's of polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
conduit are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Certainteed
Georgia Pipe
Carlon
Can-Tex
Queen City
C.
Acceptable manufacturer's of conduit fittings, bushings,
and locknuts are:
1.
2.
3.
Q-Z/Gedney
Thomas and Belts
Raco
MATERIALS
A.
All metallic conduit and electric metallic tubing shall
be steel, of standard pipe dimensions, smooth inside and
out, and shall be galvanized. WheL'e the word "conduit"
is used hereinafter it shall mean either rigid steel
conduit, electric metallic tubing, flexible steel
conduit, liquid tight flexible steel conduit or schedule
40 plastic conduit. Intermediate grade conduit is not
acceptable.
16020 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
B. Gal vani zed rigid steel conduit shall be used in all
areas where it will be exposed to physical damage.
Schedule 40 plastic conduit shall be used underground
and in slab-on-grade. In no case shall plastic conduit
be exposed; switch to rigid steel conduit when turning
up exposed. All other conduit, unless otherwise
specified or called for on the plans, may be galvanized
electric metallic tubing. Any exposed conduit on
exterior of the building shall be galvanized rigid steel
only.
C. Plastic conduit shall be made from virgin polyvinyl
chloride C-300 compound. Conduit and fittings shall
carry a UL label. Fitting and cement shall be produced
by the same manufacturer as the conduit to assure system
integrity.
D. All conduit shall be concealed in building construction
except as noted or shown otherwise. In areas with no
finished ceiling and where conduit is run exposed all
runs down to switches, receptacles, etc. shall when
possible be concealed in wall. It is the intent of
these specifications that all conduit will be concealed
whenever possible.
E. EMT fittings shall be compression or and made of steel
for sizes two inches or smaller, steel set screw type
fi t tings may be used on sizes 2 1/2" or larger.
Connectors and couplings shall be rain tight and shall
have a nylon insulated throat. All fittings shall be
"UL" approved. Die cast, and indenter type fittings are
not acceptable. Fittings for flexible steel conduits and
liquid tight flexible conduit shall be steel and have
nylon insulated throat.
F. Rigid steel conduit and EMT shall be not less than ~
inch trade size, schedule 40 plastic conduit shall not
be less than 3/4" trade size and not less than required
by the NEe or indicated. Conduit runs with more than 5
#12' conductors shall not be less than 3/4".
G. Condui t and EMT systems indicated on the drawings for
communication and signaling systems are for typical
systems. Install conduit and EMT systems for the system
being installed.
H. Connect individual recessed lighting fixtures to the
conduit or EMT system with "maximum 6'-0" flexible,
galvanized steel conduit. Use flexible galvanized, steel
metal conduit for final connection to all rotating
equipment and transformers. The flexible conduits shall
be long enough to permit the full range of required
16020 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
movements without strain and to prevent the transmission
of vibration. Do not utilize flexible conduit to loop
between fixtures and devices.
1.
Galvanized rigid
connections:
and
steel
conduit
couplings
1. Install standard, conduit-threaded fittings.
2. Ream the ends of conduits after cutting and
threading them.
3. For connection to sheet metal boxes, cabinets and
other sheet metal enclosures, install locknuts on
the inside and outside of the enclosure for each
connection. See Section 16110 of these
specifications.
J. EMT couplings and connectors:
1. Ream the ends of EMT after cutting them.
2. Install the following threadless type fittings:
a. Connectors: steel compression type with
insulated throat or steel tap-on type with
insulated throat.
b. Couplings: steel compression or tap-on type.
K. Installation of plastic conduit:
1. Shall be installed in complete accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Shall be a minimum of 2 I -0" below finished grade
when not covered by concrete.
3. Shall have properly sized bond wire installed with
all circuits.
4. Bends and turns shall be kept to a bare minimum.
S. Extreme care shall be taken to avoid crushing or
cracking conduit. "DO NOT" run vehicles over
exposed conduit under any conditions.
6. All conduit and fittings shall be solvent welded.
7. Plastic conduit maybe turned up in masonry walls
only. PVC conduit shall be allowed to be routed
concealed in masonry walls to a maximum height of
48" A.F.F.
8. Do not install conduit in slab. All conduit shall
be installed a minimum of 6" below slab. Conduits
shall not be bunched together. Maintain 1"
clearance between conduits.
9. Plastic conduit shall not be bent with a propane
torch or open flame. Contractor shall utilize a
heat gun, heat blanket, or hot box. Plastic
conduit bent with such shall not be scorched or
marred.
16020 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
L. Insulated bushings:
1. Install nylon insulated bushings on the end of all
rigid conduit.
2. The insulating material shall be designed for
rugged, long service.
3. Bushings which consist of only insulating material
will not be accepted.
4. Fittings which incorporate insulated bushings will
be considered for approval in lieu of fittings with
separate bushings.
M. All couplings and connections in location where water or
other liquid or vapor might contact the conduit and EMT
shall also be watertight.
N. Close empty conduit and EMT as complete runs before
pulling in the cables and wires.
O. Install exposed conduit and EMT parallel to or at right
angles with the lines of the building. Locate them so
they will not obstruct headroom or walkways or cause
tripping.
P. Avoid bends or offsets where practicable:
1. Do not install more bends, offsets or equivalent in
any conduit or EMT run than permitted by the NEC.
2. Make bends with standard conduit bending machines.
3. Condui t hickeys may be used for making slight
offsets and for straightening conduits tubbed out
of concrete.
4. Conduit or EMT bent with a pipe tee or vise will
not be accepted.
5. Do not install crushed or deformed conduits or EMT.
Q. Install conduit or EMT clamps:
1. At intervals as required by the NEC.
2. Above suspended ceilings, metal supports may be
installed as permitted by the NEC, except that
conduit cannot be supported or secured to the T-bar
grid or from the wire supporting the T-bar grid.
3. Trapeze, split ring, band or clevis hanger may be
installed as permitted by the NEC. Trapeze hangers
shall be structural metal channels, angle irons or
preformed metal channel shapes with the conduit and
EMT runs held on specific center by U bolts, clips
or clamps. Do not support conduit from ceiling
suspension wire or from other conduit.
16020 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
4. Chain, wire or perforated strap supports will not
be acceptable. Nor are they acceptable as a means
of securing the conduit.
5. Fasten the clamps and other supports as follows:
a. For new masonry or concrete structures,
install threaded metal inserts prior to
pouring the concrete.
b. For existing solid masonry or reinforced
concrete structures:
1. Install expansion anchors and bolts or
approved power-set fasteners.
2. Expansion anchors and bolts shall be
not less that 1/4 inch diameter and
shall extend not less than 3 inches
into the concrete or masonry.
3. Power-set fasteners shall be not less
than 1/4-inch diameter and shall extend
not less than 1-1/4-inch into the
concrete.
c.
For hollow masonry
Bolts supported only
accepted.
For metal structures
Attachments to wood
metal insert or wood
be permitted.
install machine screws.
plug, raw 1 plug, soft
blocking will not
install toggle bolts.
by plaster will not be
d.
e.
R. For vertical runs of conduit of EMT:
1. Install supports for conduit, EMT, cables and wires
at intervals as required by the NEC and as
indicated on the drawings.
2. Condui t and EMT supports shall be supported by
framing for the floors.
S. Condui ts and EMT shall be kept 6" away from parallel
runs of steam or hot water pipes.
T. Clogged raceways shall be entirely free of obstructions
or shall be replaced.
U. Rigid steel conduit installed underground and in
concrete shall be wrapped with Scotchwrap #50 corrosion
protection tape.
V. All empty conduit shall have nylon pull cord installed
to provide for installation of cables, conductors or
wiring.
16020 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
W. Do not combine conduit homeruns. Each homerun shall be
separately routed directly to panel unless specifically
noted otherwise.
X. Install service conduit (TV, electrical, and telephone)
as follows:
1. All underground entrances shall have metallic
sleeves through building foundation walls and
extend to undisturbed ground to avoid shear, and
shall be full weight, threaded hot-dipped
galvanized rigid steel conduit.
2. All 90 degree bends to be rigid metallic conduit,
with a radius of not less than 10 times the
diameter of the conduit.
3. Maintain a minimum cover of 24 inches below final
grade for conduits.
Y. Telephone conduits:
1. Where telephone conduit runs are longer than 100'-
0" or have more than two 900 bends (or equivalent)
or have a reverse bend, pull boxes shall be
provided.
Z. Do not install conduit in cavity between concrete block
and brick. Conduit shall not be stubbed up into this
cavity or routed horizontally in cavity.
END OF SECTION 16020
16020 - 6
I
I
I
I
1. 01
I
1. 02
I
I
I
I
1. 03
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
SECTION 16030
CONDUCTORS
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted and shall consist of
manufacturer's published literature.
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable manufacturers are:
1. General 6. Cyprus Rome
2. Okonite 7. Essex
3. Senator 8. Carol
4. Triangle 9. Southwire
5. Pirelli 10. American
B.
All wiring shall be manufactured in the United States.
MATERIALS
A. Ratings and sizes:
1.
Shall be not less than indicated on the drawings
and not less than required by the NEC.
Minimum size shall be No. 12 AWG copper provided
the maximum voltage drops in the control circuits
will not adversely affect the operation of the
controls.
Conductor sizes indicated on the drawings are for
copper conductors.
2.
3.
B. Conductors and ground wires:
1.
2.
3.
Shall be copper.
Size No. 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded.
Size No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid.
C.
Conductor insulation:
1. Conductor insulation shall be the NEC type THHN.
D.
Wire shall be factory color coded in size No. 10 and
smaller. Color shall be by integral pigmentation with a
separa te color for each phase, neutral and grounding
conductor. Color code per phase shall be continuous
throughout the project.
E.
Manufacturer's name
shall be marked or
information
the overall
and other pertinent
molded clearly on
16030 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
jacket's outside surface or incorporated on marker tapes
within the cables and wires at reasonable intervals
along the cables and wires.
F. Cables and wires indicated on the drawings for
communication and signaling systems are for typical
systems. Install cables and wires for the system being
installed.
G. All wiring shall be in conduit unless specifically noted
otherwise.
H. Every coil of wire shall be in the original wrapping and
shall bear the Underwriters' Label of approval.
I. Where wires are left for connection to any fixture or an
apparatus, spare wire or cables shall be provided at the
ends for connections. Fixture connections at the outlet
box shall be made with insulated wire connectors.
J. Outer jackets shall be color coded as follows:
1. Three phase or single phase circuits, 120/208
volts:
a. Phase A - Black
b. Phase B - Red
c. Phase C - Blue
d. Neutral - White
e. Insulated ground wire - Green
2. Only for large power cables and wires which do not
have color coded jackets: No. 8 and larger.
a. Install bands of adhesive non-fading colored
tape or slip-on bands of colored plastic
tubing over the cables and wires at their
originating and terminations points and at
all outlets of junction boxes.
b. Color shall be permanent and shall withstand
cleanings.
K. Wiring for signal circuits shall conform to the
recommendations of manufacturers of the signal system I
being installed so the system shall have optimum I
performance and maximum service continuity.
Communication and signaling circuit wiring where run in
condui t below grade or in a damp location shall be
listed for use in a damp or wet location. Communication I
and signaling circuits run exposed above ceiling in an
environmental air plenum area shall be rated for plenum I
use.
16030 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
L.
No circuit wiring shall
Where the homerun exceeds
(minimum) wire shall be
circuits are not indicated
emergency branch circuits
unless noted otherwise.
be smaller than number 12.
100'-0" in length, number 10
used even though all such
on the plans. All wiring for
shall be number 10 (minimum)
M. When installing THHN extra care must be exercised so as
not to damage nylon jacket. When nylon jacket is
damaged wiring shall be removed from service, and
replaced with new conductors.
END OF SECTION 16030
16030 - 3
I
I
I
I
1. 01
I
1. 02
I
I
I
1. 03
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
SECTION 16040
OUTLETS
SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted and shall consist of
manufacturer's published literature.
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable manufacturers are:
1 . Raco
2. Steel City
3. Appleton
4. Hubbell
MATERIALS
A. Boxes shall be galvanized pressed sheet steel for all
concealed work.
B. Where conduit runs are exposed, outlet shall be of the
cast metal type.
C.
For concealed work each box shall be provided with a
square cornered plaster ring.
D.
Each surface lighting fixture, receptacle and switch
shall be provided with flush mounted outlet box. All
outlets installed in panels and other architectural
features shall be centered. The location of any outlet
may be moved as much as 10'-0" by the Architect before
the outlet is placed without incurring any extra cost.
All dimensions refer to the finished floor line. Outlet
boxes shall be pressed sheet steel and shall be
galvanized for all concealed work. Where conduit runs
are exposed outlets shall be of the cast metal type.
E.
Boxes shall be for the service and the type of outlet
and shall not be less than 4" square and 1-1/2" deep
except where otherwise specified. Boxes installed in
walls shall be provided with a square cornered 1-1/2"
plaster rinq installed flush with surface of wall.
Coordinate depth of plaster ring required for
particular wall construction. Each outlet box above
ceiling shall be supported from a structural member of
the building either directly or by using a substantial
and approved metal support. Conduit is not an approved
means of support. Boxes installed in wall shall be
supported either directly to a stud or between studs
16040 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
utilizing an approved bar hanger. In no case shall
switch box support and clips used for mounting boxes in
old work be used unless specifically called for. Top of
outlet box shall be level.
F. All ceiling or wall recessed outlet boxes or their
associated plaster rings shall be flush with the
finished surface. Using coverplate to secure wiring
devices or shimming the device is not acceptable.
Contractor shall exercise due care when cutting opening
in walls or ceilings for outlet boxes so that opening
size will permit the proper installation of boxes and
devices. Fixture studs in ceilings and bracket outlets
shall be bolted with stove bolts or shall be locking
type of stud mounting.
G. In addition to boxes indicated, install enough boxes to
prevent damage to cables and wires during pulling-in
operations.
H. Remove only knockouts as required and plug unused
openings. Use threaded plugs for cast metal boxes and
snap-in metal covers for sheet metal boxes.
1.
"There shall be no outlets installed back to back.
minimum of 4" shall separate each outlet."
A
J. Where the volume allowed per conductor exceeds that
allowed in Table 370-6 (b) of the NEC for the minimum
size outlet specified, a larger size outlet box shall be
used and shall be sized in accordance with the table
noted above.
K. Outlet boxes shall be clean and free from dust, paint,
dirt, plaster ready mix joint compound and lor any
other debris.
END OF SECTION 16040
16040 - 2
I
I
I
I
1. 01
I
I
1. 02
I
I
I
1. 03
I
I
I
I
1. 04
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
SECTION 16050
WIRING DEVICES AND DEVICE PLATE
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 16000,
GENERAL.
B. Provide product data showing configurations, finishes,
dimensions, and manufacturer's instructions.
REFERENCES
A.
FS W-C-596 Electrical Power
Receptacle, and Cable Outlet.
Connector,
Plug,
B.
FS W-S-896 - Switch, Toggle.
C.
NEMA WD 1 - General-Purpose Wiring Devices.
D.
NEMA WD 5 - Specific-Purpose Wiring Devices.
MANUFACTURERS
A.
For the purpose of selecting quality and type of device,
equipment manufactured by Arrow Hart has been specified.
The following manufacturers meeting this specification
are acceptable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Bryant
Pass and Seymour
Hubbell
Eagle
Leviton
PRODUCTS
A.
Switches: All wall switches shall be rated 20 ampere,
120/277 volts, have self grounding provisions, side
wiring only and shall be of the silent type. Color
shall be gray.
1. Single pole: Arrow Hart 1221.
2. Double pole single throw: Arrow Hart 1222.
3. Three way: Arrow Hart 1223.
4. Four way: Arrow Hart 1994.
5. Key switch single pole and three-way: Arrow-Hart
1191 and 1193 with 1187 cover plate, or Pass and
Seymour equal. Three way and four way key switches
shall be keyed alike.
16050 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
6. Single pole illuminated handle light switch lit in
(on) position: Arrow Hart 1991 ILC, clear handle.
7. Despard single pole switches installed in mullions.
Arrow Hart QS791.
B. Receptacle: All receptacles shall be of the grounding
type, of the configuration shown on the drawings and
shall be flush wall mounting type. Color shall be gray.
1. Standard duplex receptacle: 20 ampere, 125 volt,
NEMA type 5-20 R, 2 pole, 3 wire, straight blade,
U-grounding slot, specification grade. Arrow Hart
5342.
2. Isolated grounding duplex receptacle: 20 ampere,
125 volt, NEMA type 5-20 R, straight blade type, 2
pole, 3 wire, U-grounding slot, specification
grade. Arrow Hart IG 5362 GRY.
3. Power, receptacle with matching plug: 20 ampere,
125/250 volt, NEMA type 14-20, 3 pole 4 wire
grounded, straight blade type. Arrow Hart 5759
4. Power receptacle with matching plug: 20 ampere,
250 volt, NEMA type 6-20R 2-pole, 3 wire grounded,
straight blade type. Arrow Hart 5461 GRY.
5.
Power receptacle with matching plug:
250 volt, NEMA type 6-30R 2-pole,
grounded slot, straight blade type.
5700 N.
30 ampere,
3 wire, u-
Arrow Hart
6. Power receptacle with matching plug: 50 ampere,
125/250 volt, NEMA type 14-50R, 3-pole, 4 wire
grounded, straight blade type. Arrow Hart 5754 N.
7. Ground fault interrupter receptacle: 20 ampere,
125 volts, NEMA type 5-20R, 2-pole, 3-wire with
grounded U slot. Arrow Hart AHGF 5342.
C. Device plates: Plates shall be furnished for all
devices and outlets indicated on the drawings
(telephone, computer, TV, etc.). All plates on masonry
walls shall be oversized jumbo type.
1. FI ush mounted plates: Beveled type with smooth
rolled outer edge, stainless steel type 302 with
brushed finish.
2. Surface box plates, beveled, galvanized steel,
pressure formed for smooth edge to fit box.
16050 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1. 05
EDC# 02019
3. Die cast weatherproof cover. Lockable
vertical mounting. Intermatic #WPI0I0MC.
hasp
INSTALLATION
B.
A.
Switches:
1.
Switches shall be connected to the live side of the
circuit and shall control only the outlets
indicated.
2.
Conductors shall be looped around the terminal
screw.
3.
Where more than one switch is indicated in the same
location switches shall be gang mounted under a
common plate.
4.
Where multi-wire,
potential) occurs,
between switches.
277 volt switching (480 volt
a barrier shall be provided
5.
Center line of switches in general, shall be set
3' -6" above the floor (off posi tion down) and shall
clear the door trim or corner by 4" or center the
space occupied.
6.
Architectural plans shall be consulted before
placing switches so they will in every case be
located on the strike side of the door and clear
door, chair, window, and baseboard moldings.
7.
Switches shall be screwed tight to the boxes and
shall not depend on the cover plate to pull them
tight.
1.
Receptacles;
2.
3.
4.
Conductors shall be looped around the terminal
screws, "DO NOT BACK WIRE DEVICES."
Receptacles shall be grounded by the green
bond and shall be pigtailed as shown on
drawings.
wire
the
Receptacles shall be screwed tight to the plaster
ring or outlet box and shall not depend on the
device plate to pull them tight.
Center line of general use receptacles shall be in
general, set 18" above the floor with receptacle
16050 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
mounted in the vertical position and with grounding
pole at the top.
5. Coordinate receptacle height with Architectural
drawings and locate so that bottom of receptacle
plate shall be I" above counter or back splash and
clear all moldings.
6.
Center line of receptacles
lavatories in toilets shall
floor.
located adj acent to
be set 3'-6" above
7. Receptacles serving water coolers shall be located
within cooler housing or as close to bottom of
housing as possible. Cord serving unit shall be as
short as possible. In no case shall cord or
receptacle be seen from normal viewing angle.
8. All receptacles installed in bathrooms, toilets,
within 4 feet of lavatories or sinks or on
building exterior shall be ground fault circuit
interrupter type.
C. Plates:
1. Plates shall be level and all edges shall be in
full contact with wall.
2. Plates shall be furnished for all devices and other
outlets indicated on the drawings.
3. Install plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes
in unfinished areas above ceilings and on surface
mounted outlets.
4. Plates shall not be used to keep devices secure.
5. Plates shall be clean and free from dust, plaster
or paint and spots.
6. Plate shall cover openings around outlets.
END OF SECTION 16050
16050 - 4
I
I
I
I
1. 01
I
I
I
1. 02
I
I
I
I
1. 03
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
SECTION 16060
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS
SUBMITTALS
A.
Lighting fixture submittals shall consist of
manufacturer's literature including photometric data and
shall note on the submittals any special requirements
which have been specified.
B.
The Architect reserves the right to require sample
fixtures for approval.
C.
"Manufacturer's literature for all lamps."
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Lighting fixtures shall be selected from those fixtures
included in the fixture schedule as noted on the
drawings or in the specifications.
B.
Lamps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Sylvania
Phillips
General Electric
E.Y.E.
EQUIPMENT
A.
B.
c.
Review architectural plans
provide lighting fixtures
suspension system specified.
and specifications and
compatible with ceiling
Fixtures shall be selected from the fixture schedule not
only by catalog number but with consideration to
mounting, number and types of lamps, and reference notes
as contained in the fixture schedule and as noted on the
drawings and in the specifications. Manufacturers not
listed on fixture schedule or added by addendum will not
be accepted.
Fluorescent ballast shall be electronic type as
manufactured by Motorola, Advance, General Electric or
Magnetek. Ballast shall have five year warranty, total
harmonic distortion of less than 20%. Where fixtures
are shown with inboard/outboard lamps switched
separately provide two (2) ballast per fixture. Ballast
shall be instant start and parallel lamp operation.
16060 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
D. Support of lighting fixtures shall be the responsibility
of the fixture installer and shall be as. follows:
1. Fluorescent fixture flush mounted in exposed tee,
suspended acoustical tile ceilings shall be of the
lay-in type and shall be supported at diagonal
corners of the fixture, utilizing two (2) #14 gauge
steel wires attached to the bar joist or overhead
structure. Flexible conduit and wiring from outlet
box to fixture shall be 1/2"C., and number 12 THHN
conductors. Factory supplied whips of smaller
ratings are not acceptable.
2. Surface mounted fluorescent fixtures shall be
supported by light weight channel to two members of
the ceiling suspension system. Two support
channels are required. Surface mounted fixtures
mounted on sheet rock or plaster ceilings or low
density acoustical tile ceilings shall be mounted
wi th two 1/4" x 1/4" x 4" metal spacers between
fixture and ceiling. Spacers shall be located to
provide air gap between fixture and ceiling. Do
not place spacers directly over ballast.
3. Recessed incandescent, mercury vapor, high pressure
sodium, and metal halide fixtures shall be
installed using standard manufacturer's mounting
hardware.
4. Exit lights shall be mounted directly to the outlet
box and in case of ceiling mounted units the outlet
box shall be flush with the ceiling and shall be
supported by a 1-1/2" channel spanning between main
structural members of the suspension system.
Secure channel with metal fasteners.
5. Provide two exit lights in addition to those shown
in the event the Fire Marshall requires additional
units. Turn over to the Owner any exits not used.
E. Align, mount and level the lighting fixtures uniformly.
F. Avoid interference with and provide clearance for
equipment.
G. Lighting fixtures shall be located as shown on the
lighting plan. If for any reason this is impossible or
impractical, the Architect shall be notified immediately
for a decision as to the best direction for the shift.
16060 - 2
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
H. Upon completion of installation, lighting fixtures and
equipment shall be in first class operating order, in
perfect condition as to finish, free from defects. At
final inspection, fixtures shall be completely lamped,
be complete with required diffusers, reflectors, side
panels, louvers or the other components necessary to
complete fixtures. All fixtures and equipment shall be
clean and free from dust, insects, plaster or paint
spots. Any reflectors, diffusers, side panels or other
parts broken prior to final inspection shall be replaced
by contractor.
I. Lamps shall be provided for all fixtures:
1. Incandescent lamps shall be medium base, inside
frost extended service (minimum 2500 hours) .
2. 48" fluorescent lamps shall be 32 watt T8 41000 K.
3. Metal halide lamps shall be mogul base, of the
wattage called for in the fixture schedule and
shail be of the coated type.
END OF SECTION 16060
16060 - 3
I
I
I
I
1. 01
I
1. 02
I
I
I
1. 03
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
c.
D.
E.
SECTION 16070
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop drawings shall be submitted and shall consist of
manufacturer's published literature.
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Acceptable manufacturers are:
1. Square "0" Company
2. G. E.
3. Siemens
4. Cutler Hammer
EQUIPMENT
A.
Disconnect switches shall be provided for all motors and
strip heaters located out of sight of motor controller,
and where specifically indicated on the drawings.
Disconnect switches shall disconnect all ungrounded
conductors. When exposed to weather, enclosure shall be
NEMA - 3R. Switches shall be installed to be fully
accessible in accordance with Article 110-16 of the
National Electrical Code.
B.
All disconnects shall be heavy duty type and shall be
equipped with factory installed equipment ground kit
bonded to the can for grounding purposes.
For single phase motors, a single or double-pole
toggle switch, rated only for alternating current, will
be acceptable for capacities less than 30 amperes,
provided the ampere rating of the switch is at least 125
percent of the motor rating. Enclosed safety switches
shall be horsepower rated in conformance with Table III
of Fed. Spec. W-D-8 65. Switches shall disconnect all
ungrounded conductors.
Each disconnect ground mounted serving exterior AIC
units shall be equipped with a padlock (Master 3206) all
keyed alike.
All disconnects shall be equipped with provisions to.
lock the handle in the OFF position.
16070 - 1
I
I
F.
I
I G.
I H.
I.
I
J.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
All disconnects shall be fusible type, fused in
accordance with the name plate data on the unit.
Disconnects serving water heaters or resistance heat
strips shall be fused at 125% of the full load amps of
the unit.
Install fuses so that ampere rating can be read without
having to remove fuses.
All fuses shall be as noted in Section 16015.
Disconnects shall be identified as required under
Section 16120.
Maintain 3'-0" clearance in front of disconnect having
voltage rating of 250 volts and 4'-0" clearance in front
of disconnect having voltage rating of 480 volts. Do
not locate disconnect over other electrical equipment
(i.e.: transformers).
END OF SECTION 16070
16070 - 2
I
I
I
1. 01
I
I
1. 02
I
I
I
I
I
1. 03
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
SECTION 16090
PHOTO CONTROL AND CONTACTOR
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submittal shall be manufacturers published literature.
MANUFACTURERS
A. Photo Controls:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Tork
Paragon
General Electric Company
Siemens
Intermatic
B.
Contactors:
1. Square" Oil Company
2. Cutler-Hammer
3 . ASCO
4. G. E.
5. Intermatic
A.
EQUIPMENT
B.
C.
Photo control shall be rated at 1800 V .A., 90% power
factor on 120 volt system. Switching mechanism shall be
hermetically sealed and shall be calibrated to close
circuit when illumination falls below five foot
candles. Switching mechanism shall contain delay
feature to prevent circuit opening in transient
illumination such as headlights from passing vehicles.
(Photo Control shall contain manually adjustable light
level slide.) Orient photo control light sensing
element north.
Contactor shall be electrically held, 120 or 277 volt
operating coil and in NEMA 1 enclosure. The number and
rating of poles shall be as noted on the drawings.
Time clock shall be 24 hour type with astro dial and
general purpose indoor case. Time clock shall be
digital type with battery backup.
END OF SECTION 16090
16090 - 1
I
I
I
I
1. 01
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
SECTION 16100
PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES AND FITTINGS
PULL BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES AND FITTINGS
A.
Boxes shall be provided in the raceway systems wherever
required for the pulling of wires and the making of
connections.
B.
Pull boxes of not less than the minimum size required by
the National Electrical Code Article 370 shall be
constructed of code-gauge galvanized sheet steel. Boxes
shall be furnished with screw-fastened covers. Covers
on flush wall mounted boxes in well appointed areas
(offices, reception, classrooms, media center, etc)
shall be minimum 1/16 302 stainless steel. Boxes
located on the exterior of the building shall be
watertight. Covers shall be secured with tamper proof
screws.
C.
Boxes shall be securely and rigidly fastened to the
surface of which they are mounted or shall be supported
from structural member of the building either directly
or by using a substantial and approved metal rod or
brace.
D.
All boxes shall be so installed that the wiring
contained in them can be rendered accessible without
removing part of the building.
E.
Where several circuits pass through a common pull box,
the circuits shall be tagged to indicate clearly their
electrical characteristics, circuit number and
designation.
F.
All junction boxes larger than 4" x 4" flush mounted in
wall shall have overlapping cover plate to cover rough-
in openings.
END OF SECTION 16100
16100 - 1
I
I
I
PART 1 GENERAL:
I
1. 01
RELATED DOCUMENTS
SECTION 16110
GROUNDING
I
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract
documents including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to the
Section.
A. The work required under this section of the
specifications consists of furnishing, installation and
connections of the building secondary grounding systems.
Exterior branch circuit wiring and feeder conductors
extended beyond the building are included. The building
electrical system shall be a 3 phase, 4 wire grounded
wye delta system supplemented with equipment grounding
system. Equipment grounding system shall be established
with equipment grounding conductors; the use of metallic
raceways for equipment grounding is not acceptable.
I
I
1. 02
SUMMARY
I
I
I
1. 03
QUALITY ASSURANCE
I
A.
Industry Referenced Standards: The following
specifications and standards are incorporated into and
become a part of this Specification by Reference.
I
1.
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publications:
I
No.44
No.83
No.467
No.493
I
No.4 8 6
I
2.
National
(NEMA)
I
WC-5
WC-7
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
Rubber-Insulated Wire &
Thermoplastic-Insulated
Electrical Grounding
Equipment
Thermoplastic-Insulated Underground
Feeder & Branch Circuit Cables
Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs
Cables
Wires
&
Bonding
Electrical
Manufacturers'
Standards
Thermoplastic Insulated Wire & Cable
Cross-Linked-Thermosetting Polyethylene
Insulated Wire
16110 - 1
I
I
3.
National Fire Protection Association Publication
(NFPA) :
I
No.70
National Electrical Code (NEC)
I
B.
Acceptable Manufacturers: Products produced by the
following manufacturer which conform to this
specification are acceptable.
I
1.
Hydraulically applied conductor terminations:
I
I
a. Square 0
b. Burndy
c. Ilsco
d. Scotch (3M)
e. Thomas and Betts (T&B)
f. Anderson
I
2.
Mechanically
terminations:
applied
(crimp)
conductor
I
a.
b.
c.
d.
Scotch (3M)
Ideal
Thomas and Betts (T&B)
Burndy
I
PART 2 PRODUCTS:
2.01
GENERAL MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS
I
A.
Provide all materials under this section of the
specifications. All materials shall be new.
I
B.
All materials shall be UL listed and bear a UL label.
I
C.
Refer to the specific specification section
description and requirements of materials
herein for installation.
for the
mentioned
I
2.02
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
I
A. Grounding electrode conductor shall be bare or green
insulated copper conductor sized as indicated on the
drawings.
B.
Equipment grounding conductors shall be green insulated
type THHN conductors sized as indicated on the drawings.
Where size is not indicated on the drawings, conductor
size shall be determined from the National Electrical
Code table of sizes of equipment grounding conductors.
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
16110 - 2
I
I
C.
Bonding jumpers shall be flexible copper bonding jumpers
sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code
table on sizes of equipment grounding electrode
conductors.
I
I
2.03
TRANSFORMERS & MOTOR CONTROLLERS
I
A. Provide a conductor termination grounding lug bonded to
the enclosure of each transformer and motor controller.
I
I
B. Provide an equipment ground bar with bonding screw in
each disconnect for grounding purposes.
2.04
DEVICES
I
A. Each receptacle and switch device shall be furnished
with a grounding screw connected to the metallic device
frame. Bond equipment grounding conductor to each
outlet box. For isolated ground receptacles, bond
equipment grounding conductor to box, and isolated
ground conductor to device grounding screw.
I
2.05
GROUND RODS
A.
Ground rods shall be 3/4" x 10'-0" copper clad steel.
Connection to all ground rods shall be by exothermic
weld.
I
PART 3 EXECUTION
I
3.01
INSTALLATION
B
A.
Ground all non-current carrying parts of the electrical
system, i.e., wireways, equipment enclosures and frames,
j unction and outlet boxes, machine frames and other
conducti ve items in close proximity with electrical
circuits, to provide a low impedance path for potential
grounded faults.
I
I
B.
Service entrance and separately derived electrical
systems, grounding electrode system.
II
1.
The neutral conductor of the electrical service
serving the premises wiring system shall be
grounded to the ground bus bar in the service
equipment which shall be grounded to the cold water
system, the ground rod system, and other grounding
electrodes specified herein or indicated on the
drawings. Grounding electrode conductors shall be
installed in rigid, non-metallic conduit to point
of ground connection, unless subject to physical
damage in which case they shall be installed in
II
II
II
EDC# 02019
II
16110 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
II
II
II
II .
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
EDC# 02019
II
galvanized rigid steel. Where metallic conduit is
permitted, bond conduit at both ends to grounding
electrode conductor with a UL bonding bushing.
2. Make connection to main water line, entering the
building. Make connections ahead of any valve or
fittings whose removal may interrupt ground
continuity. Install a bonding jumper of the same
size as the grounding conductor around the water
meter.
3. Bond together the following systems to form the
grounding electrode system. All system connections
shall be made as close as possible to the service
entrance equipment and each connected at the
service entrance equipment ground bus. Do not
connect electrode systems together except at ground
bus.
a. Cold water piping system
b. Ground rod system
c. Structural steel metal building frame, see
detail on drawings
4. Grounding electrode connections to structural
steel, reinforcing bars, ground rods, or where
indicated on the drawings shall be with chemical
exothermic weld connection devices recommended for
the particular connection type. Connections to
piping shall be with UL listed mechanical ground
clamps.
5. Bonding shall be in accordance with the National
Electrical Code.
6. Install ground rods where indicated on the drawings
with the top of the ground rods 12" below finished
grade.
C. Equipment Grounding Conductor
1. Grounding conductors shall be provided in all
branch circuit raceways and cables. Grounding
conductors shall be the same AWG size as branch
circuit conductors.
2. Grounding conductors for feeders are typically
indicated on the drawings and the raceway is sized
to accommodate grounding conductor shown. Where
grounding conductor size is not indicated on the
drawings, conductor shall be in accordance with the
16110 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
EDell 02019
U
equipment grounding conductor table of the National
Electrical Code.
3. A grounding conductor shall be installed in all
flexible conduit installations. For branch
circuits, grounding conductor shall be sized to
match branch circuit conductors.
4. A feeder serving several panelboards shall have a
continuous grounding conductor which shall be
connected to each related cabinet grounding bar.
5. The equipment grounding conductor shall be attached
to equipment with bolt or sheet metal screw used
for no other purpose. Where grounding conductor is
stranded, attachment shall be made with lug
attached to grounding conductor with crimping
tools.
6. Ground all motors by drilling and tapping the
bottom of the motor junction box with a round head
bolt used for no other purpose. Conductor
attachment shall be through the use of a lug
attached to conductor with a crimping tool.
7. Equipment grounding conductors shall terminate on
panelboard, switchboard, or motor control center
grounding bus only. Do not terminate on neutral
bus. Provide a single terminals lug for each
conductor. Conductor shall terminate the same
section as the phase conductors originate. Do not
terminate neutral conductors on the ground bus.
C. Other Grounding Requirements
1. Each telephone backboard shall be provided with a
No.6 grounding conductor. Ground conductor shall
be routed to ground bar in nearest panel. Terminate
conductor by stapling to backboard. Provide 6 I
slack conductor.
2. Lighting fixtures shall be grounded with a green
insulated ground wire secured to the fixture with
a UL listed bond lug, screw, or clip specifically
made for such use.
16110 - 5
I
I
3.02
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
II
-
II
II
II
EDC# 02019
II
A.
TESTING
Upon completion of the ground rod installation,
grounding resistance reading shall be taken before
connection is made to the building cold water piping
system. Ground resistance readings shall not be taken
within forty-eight hours of rainfall. Results of ground
resistance readings shall be forwarded, in writing,
immediately to the Architect and Owner.
END OF SECTION 16110
16110 - 6
I
I
I
I
1. 01
I
1. 02
I
II
II
1. 03
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
EDC# 02019
II
A.
B.
C.
D.
SECTION 16120
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
SUBMITTALS
A. Submit sample of laminated plastic identification plate
with lettering.
MATERIALS
A.
Laminated plastic plates with 3/16" high white letter
etched on black background.
Plates shall be permanently mounted utilizing pop rivets
or a permanent mastic/epoxy.
Painted, stenciled or indented tape identification is
not acceptable.
B.
C.
ITEM IDENTIFICATION
All electrical apparatus such as wiring troughs,
panelboards, individual circuit breakers, transformers
and disconnect switches shall have laminated plastic
identification plates. Identification shall match
labeling shown on plans.
A "steel" circuit directory frame permanently attached
at factory (not glued), and a directory card with a
plastic covering shall be provided on the inside of each
panel door. The directory shall be typed to identify
the load fed by each circuit and the areas served.
Spaces or room numbers shown on the drawings are not
necessarily the final numbers to be assigned to these
areas. The Contractors shall before completion of the
project obtain from the Architect final space or room
numbers so that it can be typed onto directory.
Circuit breakers and disconnects shall identify the
equipment served and circuit and panel from which it is
served.
On all panelboards the exterior identification plate
shall match that on the drawings and the panel and
circuit number serving the panel shall be designated
within the panel.
END OF SECTION 16120
16120 - 1
I
I
I
I
1. 01
I
,I
il
II
I
II
-
11
-
II
g
II
II
II
EDC# 02019
II
F.
G.
SECTION 16130
DATA/VOICE CONDUIT AND OUTLET SYSTEM
CONDUIT SYSTEM
A.
Provide a complete system of conduits and outlet boxes
for the installation of data/voice wiring. Each data or
data/voice outlet shall have a 1" conduit routed from
the flushed recessed outlet box up to the accessible
ceiling space above. Turn conduit out above ceiling
with a 900 horizontal elbow and terminate with an
insulated bushing. Provide nylon pull string in
condui t.
B.
All conduit and outlet boxes shall be for data/voice
cable only. Joint use with sound systems, fire,
telephone, etc. it is not acceptable.
c.
Location of outlets shall be as shown on the drawings.
D.
Height of wall outlets shall be as noted on the
drawings. All wall outlet boxes in new construction
shall be two gang type, 4" x 4" x 2 1/8" deep, with
single gang plaster rings. Plaster rings shall be flush
with finish of wall. Coordinate depth of plaster ring
required with type of wall construction.
E.
Install a quaduplex receptacle at the telephone
backboard and serve with a dedicated 20 ampere 120 volt
circuit. The telephone shall consist of one - 3/4" x 4'
x 8' plywood. Paint all sides and edges to match room
finish. Install a #6 ground conductor from the nearest
ground bar in panel, provide 8'-0" of coiled slack at
board. Plywood shall be fire rated. Paint shall be fire
retardant.
See site plan for routing of telephone service conduit.
Prior to routing of conduit, coordinate an on-site
meeting with local utility company to determine exact
location. Provide a 200 pound minimum pull strength
nylon cord in the service conduit. Cap off any conduit
not utilized.
Each data network rack shall be grounded with a #6
copper routed in ~" conduit to the ground bar in the
nearest panel. If conduit is metal, provide,grounding
bushings at each end of conduit. Provide a quadruplex
isolated ground receptacle at each data network rack and
serve from a dedicated 20 amp, 120 volt circuit.
16130 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
\1
I
I
I
II
II
II
II
I
II
II
II
EDC# 02019
II
H. Conduit and its installation shall be as covered under
Section 16020 of these specification.
I. Outlets and their installation shall be covered under
Section 16040 of these specifications.
J. All conduit shall be concealed unless otherwise noted.
K. Provide 302 jumbo stainless steel blank wall plates for
all outlets not cabled.
END OF SECTION 16130
16130 - 2
I
I
I
I
1. 01
I
I
I
1. 02
I
il
II
II
I
I
I
II
II
II
II
EDC# 02019
II
SECTION 16140
FIRE ALARM/INTRUSION ALARM SYSTEM
SUBMITTALS
A.
Shop drawings shall be submitted as follows:
1.
2.
Manufacturer's published literature.
One line schematic diagram covering the complete
building system.
MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable manufacturers are:
1. Radionics
2 . Moose
3 . Ademco
B.
The acceptable manufacturers systems listed in
shall be installed by the authorized local
dealer/representative for that product. The
dealer representative shall hold a current low
contractor's license. .
1. 02 A,
factory
factory
voltage
Acceptable dealer/representatives:
1. Southeastern Security and Time - Baxley, Augusta,
Savannah, Georgia
2. Dixie Communication - Augusta & Macon, Georgia
3. Siemens Building Technologies, Inc. - Augusta,
Georgia
4. Augusta Sound - Augusta, Georgia
Any other interested parties shall submit a company
resume showing years in business, certification stating
that he is an authorized representative for the
manufacturer of the equipment he is submitting for
approval and that he maintains a fully equipped
and stocked service shop and shall respond to service
calls within 12 normal working hours, list of key
personnel, copies of appropriate licenses and list of
recently completed jobs during the normal prior approval
period.
16140 - 1
I
I
1. 03
I
I
I
I
I
II
1. 04
JI
11
I
II
II
I
II
g
1. 05
II
II
EDC# 02019
II
SCOPE
A.
This specification covers the installation of a complete
electronically operated fire alarm/intrusion alarm
system within the building and shall be electrically
supervised and shall include, but not be limited to, the
following components:
1.
Manual non-code type alarm
boxes, combination vibrating
horns and flashing light,
control equipment, duct
smoke detectors, intrusion
alarm devices, conduit, and
wiring.
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
The alarm equipment and all wirinq shall be installed
and interconnected by a factory certified installer and
placed in workinq order. The name of the manufacturer
and serial or identification numbers shall appear on
all major components. Electrical supervision of the
system shall conform to provisions of Article 240. NFPA
Standard 72. Corresponding parts of all similar type
equipment units shall be interchangeable, and locks for
all cabinets shall be keyed alike. All devices,
equipment and combination thereof shall be of the
manufacturer's current production. All component parts
of the system and the control unit shall be approved for
the purpose intended. The stamp, label, seal or
certificate of the Underwriter's Laboratories or the
Factory Mutual Laboratories shall be considered as
acceptable evidence of such approval.
B. Fire Alarm/Intrusion Subcontractor shall submit a
certification stating that he is an authorized
representative for the manufacturer of the equipment he
is submitting for approval and that he maintains a fully
equipped and stocked service shop and shall respond to
service within 12 normal working hours.
DRAWINGS AND MANUALS
A.
Three copies of complete instructions for the operation,
inspection, testing and maintenance of the system,
including wiring diagrams and replacement parts list
16140 - 2
I
I
I
I
1. 06
I
I
I
I
,I
1. 07
,I
:1
I
I
11
I
1. 08
11
JI
I
EDC# 02019
I
shall be furnished upon final acceptance of the system.
Also provide all special tools that are necessary for
the maintenance of the equipment and include one set of
fuses for each type and size.
INSTALLATION
A.
A qualified fire/intrusion alarm technician shall
install, adjust and test the equipment. The technician
shall be qualified by training and experience in the
installation and operation of the fire/intrusion alarm
system specified. The technician shall instruct
operating personnel in the operation, adjustment and
maintenance of the system. A statement signed by the
person or persons instructed shall be supplied to the
Architect prior to final operation.
B. Provide a written certification that the system is in
complete and proper working order and in compliance with
all codes.
SYSTEM OPERATION
A.
Operation of any manual or automatic initiating device
shall cause a general alarm to sound.
B.
Also circuits and audible sounding devices shall be
electrically supervised. In the event of an open
circuit or ground in the system, loss of operation of
supervisory power, or other supervised component
failure, a trouble signal shall be actuated until the
system is restored to normal. A silencing switch shall
be provided for silencing the trouble alarm.
C.
The system shall operate from one 120 volt circuit.
D.
Each initiating device shall be illuminated on a LCD
annunciator.
SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A.
Fire alarm/intrusion alarm control panel: Furnish and
install where shown an zoned control panel mounted in a
recessed mounted code gauge steel cabinet, equipped with
lock and keys. Panel shall be equipped with for voice
evacuation operation, providing a digital tape and
microphone for voice override. The control shall provide
16140 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
:1
I
11
II
II
-
II
II
II
I
II
EDC# 02019
II
in one cabinet all necessary relays, resistors,
compensators and power supplies for the signal circuits
and duct type smoke detectors shown on the drawings and
which are designated for 24 volt D.C. operation. Each
signal circuit shall be capable of handling up to 10-24
volt D.C. horns. Provide battery backup with trickle
charger.
The panel shall be equipped with a UL listed digital
dialer for off premises central station monitoring, also
provide voice/pager dialer - United Securities Products
#AVD-4+2.
Provide a 3/4" conduit from fire alarm panel to nearest
telephone backboard for remote station monitoring. Final
connection to a monitoring station shall be the
responsibility of the Owner.
B. Manual stations: Provide manual alarm stations,
semi-flush mounted, of the pull-lever type, key
resettable. Housing shall be of cast metal or impact
resistance plastic with raised letters designating
function and operating instructions. Housing will be
red enamel with white lettering.
C. Signal device: Provide combination low power D. C.
strobe/horn with high intensity flashing strobe light
for both audible and visual signaling or strobe light
for visual signaling only. Minimum sound level indoors
at 10 feet shall be 90 db. Maximum current draw for
horn and strobe light of 0.063 amps, nominal voltage of
24 D.C. Units shall be flush wall mounted 6'-8" above
the finished floor at points noted on the drawings.
Minimum candela level shall be 75 candela. Candela level
for areas under 300 square feet may be 15, all strobes
shall be synchronized.
D. Smoke detectors shall be furnished, installed and
connected under Division 16. Power supply for detectors
shall be 24 volt D. C. and supplied from Fire Alarm
control panel. Detectors shall be photo electric type.
Each detector shall have flashing LED for operational
walk check.
E. Heat detectors, where called for, shall be provided,
installed and connected under Division 16. Detectors
shall be combination rate of rise and fixed temperature
rated for a minimum of 1350 F, and shall be rated at 2000
F where required (i.e., Kitchen).
16140 - 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
il
II
II
I
-
m
II
II
II
II
II
II
EDC# 02019
m
F. Each fire alarm circuit shall be protected from
lightning by installing surge protection devices either
internally or externally. Circuits run between buildings
shall be individually protected in addition to
protection at control panel.
G.
All conductors shall be installed in conduit.
installation shall be as covered under Section
these specifications.
Conduit
16020 of
H. Number and size of conductors shall be as required by
manufacturer of system being installed. Any cable run
in conduit below grade shall be moisture proof, cable
shall be equal to West Penn Aqua seal.
I. At time of final inspection, Contractor shall turn over
a red-lined set of plans showing device location, device
address, and device descriptor. Panel shall be fully
programmed to denote location of addressable device.
Provide a written report denoting that all fire alarm
devices have been tested and are operable.
J. When the passive infrared detector notes an intrusion in
shall cause an auto-dialer to transmit telephone calls
to supervisory personnel. Also, the system shall
energize the audio alarm. All components shall be
double supervised for disarrangements. Arm defeat key
shall permit authorized access to the building. Digital
key pad shall be located at the central monitoring and
transmitting equipment to arm or disarm the entire
system.
l. Detector, Radial Pattern - Pu1nix #PA7100, surface
ceiling mounted.
2. Detector, wide angle Pulnix #PA7012, surface
ceiling mounted.
3. Detector, long range Pulnix #PA7030, surface
ceiling mounted.
END OF SECTION 16140
16140 - 5
I
I
I
I
I
I
:1
II
I.
I
II
II
II
a
II
n
II
II
II
1. 01
1. 02
1. 03
EDC# 02019
SECTION 16160
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS
FOR
MAIN SERVICES AND DISTRIBUTION PANELS
SUBMITTALS
A.
Electrical and mechanical drawings for the TVSS shall be
provided by the manufacturer which show unit dimensions,
weights, mounting provisions, connection details and
layout diagram of the unit.
B.
The manufacturer shall furnish an equipment manual with
installation, operation, and maintenance instructions
for the specified unit.
C.
Documentation of unit's UL 1449 suppression rating shall
be included as required product data submittal
information.
D. The contractor shall provide detailed compliance
exception statements to all provisions of this
specification ten (10) days prior to the bid date.
MANUFACTURERS
A.
For the purpose of selecting quality and type of TVSS
units, equipment as manufactured by Current Technology
Inc. has been specified. The following manufacturers
meeting these specifications are acceptable.
1. Innovative Technology, Inc.
2. United Power
3. Surge Suppression, Inc.
4. Liebert
B.
The manufacturer shall provide a Limited Five-Year
Warranty, from the date of installation, against failure
when installed in compliance with applicable
national/local electrical codes and the manufacturer's
recommended installation, operation and maintenance
instructions.
GENERAL
A.
These specifications describe the electrical and
mechanical requirements for a high-energy suppression
fil ter system utilizing transient voltage surge
suppression (TVSS) for application in Category C (Main
Service Entrance) and Category B (Distribution Panels)
areas as defined by the IEEE C62.4l standard.
16160 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
il
il
II
II
I
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II EDC# 02019
B. The specified unit shall provide effective high energy
transient voltage clamping and surge current diversion
for all electrical modes of equipment connected
downstream from the facility's main distribution panel
or main over current device. The unit shall be designed
for parallel connection to the facility's wiring system.
C. All Category B (distribution panels) shall include a
high frequency atlenvation filter for all modes of
protection the TVSS is providing.
D. The unit shall include, but not be limited to, an
engineered solid-state high-performance suppression
system, utilizing Selenium Cells and/or arrays of fused
non-linear voltage dependent Metal Oxide Varistors
(MOV) .
E. The suppression system shall not utilize gas tubes,
spark gaps, or any other components which might short
or crowbar the line, thus leading to interruption of
normal power to connected loads. The suppression system
shall not incorporate non-field replaceable fusing,
circuit boards, plug-in or quick-connect connections as
part of any surge current carrying path.
F. All internal wiring associated with the suppression
filter system and subject to surge currents shall
utilize low-impedance copper bus bar and/or copper
conductor or equal. All internal connections associated
with the suppression/filter system and which are subject
to surge currents shall be made with compression type
solder less lugs and shall be bolted in place.
G. The unit shall be connected to the panel or switch gear
by means of a circuit breaker as specified on the
drawings or as recommended by the manufacturer. An
integral fused disconnect shall not be furnished with
the unit unless otherwise specified. Provide breaker at
panel per manufacturer's recornrnendation.
H. Uni ts shall be provided in a NEMA 1 type enclosure
constructed of minimum 14 gauge steel, painted inside
and out with rust inhibi ting paint. Surface or flush
mount enclosures are specified on the drawings.
I. The unit shall be installed as close as practical to the
wiring system in accordance with applicable
national/local electrical codes and the manufacturer's
recommended installation instructions. Maximum 6 I
connections shall be made wi th copper conductor and
shall not be any longer than is reasonably necessary,
avoiding unnecessary bends. When possible, current
carrying conductors between the panelboard and the
suppression unit shall be twisted together.
16160 - 2
I
I
I
I
il
11
II
II
I
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
I
I
1. 04
EDC# 02019
C.
D.
E.
F.
J.
The unit shall include mechanical lugs for each phase,
neutral and ground, where applicable. The lugs shall
accommodate up to a 1/0 AWG copper conductor.
K.
The unit shall include externally mounted visual
indicators that monitor the on-line status of each phase
of the unit (L.E.D.s, neon lamps, etc.).
L.
The unit shall include the manufacturer's nameplate and
UL inspection labels on interior of cabinet.
STANDARDS
A.
The specified unit shall be designed, manufactured and
tested in compliance with the following standards:
1.
American National Standards Institute and Institute
of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE
C62.41-1991 and C62.45-1987).
National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(NEMA) .
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 70
[NEC], 75, and 78) .
Underwriters Laboratories (UL 1449 and 1283) .
2.
3.
4.
B.
The maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) or
threshold voltage of all suppression components utilized
in the unit shall not be less than 125% of the
facility's nominal operating voltage for 120 volt
systems and not less than 115% of the facility's nominal
operating voltage for 208, 277, and 480 volts.
Based on ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991's standard 8/20
microsecond current waveform, and in accordance with
NEMA Publication No. LS 1-1992, the tested single-pulse
surge current capacity, in amps, of the unit shall be no
less than the following:
MODE OF PROTECTION
L-N
L-G
N-G
Distribution Panels:
40,000
40,000
40,000
The unit shall be UL 1449 Listed as a Transient Voltage
Surge Suppressor.
The unit shall be factory tested following IEEE C62.41
and C62.45 guidelines without failing or degrading the
UL 1449 Surge Suppression Rating by more than 10%.
In accordance with NEMA Standard LS 1-1992, the
suppression unit shall provide protection modes as
follows:
16160 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
II
11.
11
II
m
I
II
II
II
II
II
II EDC# 02019
1. Fi ve (5) modes of protection for a single phase
configuration:
. Line-to-Neutral (2)
. Line-to-ground (2)
. Neutral-to-ground (1)
2. Seven (7) modes of protection for a three phase wye
configuration:
. Line-to-Neutral (3)
. Line-to-Ground (3)
. Neutral-to-Ground (1)
G. The environmental operating parameters for the unit
shall meet or exceed the following conditions:
1. Operating temperature range shall be -40 to +60 C
(-40 to +140 F).
2. Operation shall be reliable in an environment with
5% to 95% non-condensing relative humidity.
3. The unit shall not generate noise levels in excess
of 10dB, "A" weighted.
4. No appreciable magnetic fields shall be generated.
Unit shall be capable of use directly in computer
rooms in any location without danger to data
storage systems or devices.
H. For purposes of quality assurance, the unit shall be
"burned-in" at the factory, applying nominal voltages
for which a particular unit is designed.
I. A list of customer-replaceable spare parts where
applicable shall be included in the unit's documentation
set.
END OF SECTION 16160
16160 - 4
I
I
I
I
1. 01
I
I
I
,I
II
1. 02
.11
II
II
1. 03
II
II
II
II
II
II
EDC# 02019
II
SECTION 16175
FIRES TOPPING
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. The requirements of the general conditions,
supplementary conditions, and division 1, general
requirements, apply to Work in this Section.
B.
Coordinate work of this Section with the work of the
following Sections to properly execute the work in the
order to maintain the hourly ratings of the walls and
floors where firestopping and smoke seals are applied.
1. Section 13300 - Concrete Work
2. Section 04200 - Masonry Work
3. Section 07860 - Smoke Seals
4. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers
5. Section 09250 - Dry Wall
6. Division 16 Section - Electrical Work
DESCRIPTION
A.
This Section describes the requirements for furnishing
and installing firestopping for fire-rated construction.
This includes:
1.
All openings
assemblies,
accommodating
conduits, etc.
in fire-rated floors and wall
both blank (empty) and those
penetrating items such as cables,
A.
REFERENCES
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
ASTM E 814: "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Through-
Penetration Firestops"
UL 1479, UBC 7-5: (both are same as A above)
ASTM E 119: "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Building
Construction and Materials"
UL263, UBC 7-1: (both are same as C above)
UL 2079: "Standard for Tests for the Fire Resistance of
Building Joint Systems"
Published Through-Penetration Systems by recognized
independent testing agencies.
1.
2.
UL Fire Resistance Directory.
Warnock Hersey Certification Listings, current
year.
16175 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
II.
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
1. 04
1. 05
1. 06
EDC# 02019
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Firestopping materials shall conform to Flame (F) and
Temperature (T) ratings as required by local building
code and as tested by nationally accepted test agencies
per ASTM 814, UL 1479 or UL 2079. The F rating must be
a minimum of one (1) hour but not less than the fire
resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated. T
rating, when required by code authority, shall be based
on the measurement of the temperature rise on the
penetrating item(s) . The fire test pressure
differential of a minimum 0.01 inches of water column is
required.
B.
Fire stopping products shall be asbestos free, free of
any PCBs and free of any lead.
C. Do not use any product containing
require hazardous waste disposal.
solvents,
or that
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit manufacturer's product literature for each type
of Firestop material to be installed. Literature shall
indicate product characteristics, typical uses,
performance, limitation criteria and test data.
B.
Submit manufacturer's Warranty.
C.
Material Safety Data Sheets:
firestop product.
Submi t MSDS for each
D. Shop Drawings: Show typical installation details for
methods of installation. Indicate which firestop
materials will be used where and thickness for different
hourly ratings.
PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials in the manufacturers' original,
unopened containers or packages with manufacturers'
name, product identification, lot number, UL or Warnock
Hersey labels, and mixing and installation instructions,
as applicable.
B.
Store materials in the original, unopened containers or
packages, and under conditions recommended by
manufacturer.
C.
All fires top materials shall be installed prior to
expiration of shelf life.
16175 - 2
I
I
1. 07
I
I
II
il
II
II
II
G.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
II
2.01
ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
II
A.
II
II
II
2.02
MATERIALS
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Verify existing conditions
starting work.
and substrates before
B.
Do not use materials that are based on organic solvents.
C.
During installation, provide masking and drop cloths to
prevent firestopping products from contaminating any
adjacent surfaces.
D.
Conform to ventilation requirements by manufacturer's
installation instructions or Material Safety Data Sheet.
E.
Weather Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of
firestop products when temperatures are in excess of or
below the manufacturer's recommendations.
F.
Schedule installation of firestop products after
completion of penetration item installation but prior to
covering or concealing of openings.
Coordinate this work with work of other trades.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
products of one of the following manufacturers as shown
below and further defined by the materials listed in
Part 2.02 of this section.
1.
The RectorSeal Corporation. Products as listed are
a standard of generic types.
International Protective Coatings
3M Company
Hilti
2.
3.
4.
A. Firestop Mortars:
II
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
1.
Metacaulk Fire Rated Mortar by The RectorSeal
Corporation
KBS Mortar by International Protective Coatings
HILTI FS635 Firestop Compound
2.
3.
16175 - 3
I
I
I
I
I
il
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
G.
H.
B.
Firestop Sealants and Caulks:
1. Metacaulk 950 by The RectorSeal Corporation
2. Metacaulk 835 by The RectorSeal Corporation
3. Metacaulk 805 by The RectorSeal Corporation
4. Metacaulk 1000 by The RectorSeal Corporation
5. CP 25WB+Caulk by 3M
6. Flame-Safe FS900 Series by International Protective
Coatings.
7. HILTI FS-One Intumescent Firestop Sealant
C.
Firestop Putty:
1. Metacaulk Fire Rated Putty by The RectorSeal
Corporation
2. Metacaulk Fire Rated Putty pads by The RectorSeal
Corporation
3. MPS-2 Moldable Putty Stix by 3M
4. MPP-4S Moldable Putty Pads by 3M
5. HILTI CP618 Firestop Putty
D.
Firestop Sleeves:
1.
2.
3.
Metacaulk Pipe Collars by The
Corporation
Plastic Pipe Devices by 3M
HILTI CP6421643 Firestop Collar
RectorSeal
E.
Intumescent Wrap Strips:
1. Metacaulk Wrap Strip by The RectorSeal Corporation
2. FS-195 Wrap Strip by 3M
3. HILTI
F.
Firestop Mastic:
1. Metacaulk 1100 by The RectorSeal Corporation
2. HILTI
3. 3M
Accessories:
1. Forming /Damming Materials: Mineral Fiberboard or
other type recommended by manufacturer.
2. Primer, sealant and sol vent cleaner: As
recommended by firestop manufacturer.
Where subject to movement, firestop products used shall
remain flexible to allow for such normal movement of
building structure and penetrating item(s) without
affecting the integrity of the firestop system.
16175 - 4
I
I
PART 3 - EXECUTION
I
3.01
EXAMINATION
I
A. Examine the areas and conditions where firestops are to
be installed and notify the Architect of conditions
detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work.
B. Verify the penetrating item(s) are permanently installed
and construction of fire rated assemblies are completed
prior to firestop installation.
C. Prior to installation of firestop systems, clean
surfaces of penetrating item(s) that will be in contact
with firestop materials. Do not use any cleaning
material that will either attack penetrating item(s) or
firestop product to be installed.
I
II
II
3.02
CONDITIONS REQUIRING FIRES TOPPING
II
A.
General:
1.
Provide fire stopping for conditions specified
whether or not firestopping is indicated, and, if
indicated, whether such material is designated as
insulation, safing or otherwise.
Insulation types specified in other Sections shall
not be installed in lieu of firestopping material
specified herein.
II
2.
II
I
B.
Penetrations:
II
1. Penetrations include conduit, cable, wire, or other
elements which pass through one or both outer
surfaces of a fire rated floor, wall, or partition.
2. Except for floors on grade, where a penetration
occurs through a structural floor or roof and a
space would otherwise remain open between the
surfaces of the penetration and the edge of the
adjoining structural floor or roof, provide
firestopping to fill such spaces in accordance with
ASTM E 814 (UL 1479).
3. These requirements for penetrations shall apply
whether or not sleeves have been provided.
Firestop the annular space between sleeve and
surrounding surfaces.
II
II
I
I
C.
Provide firestopping to fill miscellaneous voids and
openings in fire rated construction in a manner
essentially the same as specified herein before.
I
D.
All junction boxes larger than 4' x 4" located in a
rated wall shall be protected on sides and back of box
with firestop putty pads as required to maintain
integrity of rated wall.
I
EDC# 02019
16175 - 5
I
I
I
3.03
I
I
I
I
II
II
II
3.04
II
II
3.05
II
II
II
II
II
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
INSTALLATION
A.
Regulatory requirements: Install fires top products in
accordance with fire rated test assemblies as published
by either UL or Warnock Hersey or accordance with
manufacturer engineer drawings.
B.
Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's
instructions for installation of through-penetration
firestop systems.
1.
Firestop all holes or voids made in fire resistive
assemblies, made by penetrations, to ensure against
the passage of flames, smoke, and toxic gases.
Protect materials from damage on surface subjected
to traffic and install cover plate as required on
any installed firestop system that will or may be
subject to traffic.
Tool surfaces of firestop products to provide a
smooth and clean appearance.
2.
3.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Follow safety procedures recommended in Material Safety
Data Sheets.
B. Examine penetration firestopped areas to ensure proper
installation before concealing or enclosing areas.
C. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by
Architect.
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A.
Remove equipment, materials and debris, leaving areas in
undamaged and clean conditions.
B.
Neatly cut and trim materials.
END OF SECTION
16175 - 6
I
I
I
I
1. 01
I
1. 02
I
I
II
1. 03
II
II
I
II
II
m
II
II
II
Ii
EDC# 02019
I
SECTION 16220
CONSTRUCTION REVIEWS INSPECTION AND TESTING
GENERAL
A. Comply with Division 1 - General Requirements.
CONSTRUCTION REVIEWS
A.
The Architect or his representative shall observe and
review the installation of all electrical systems shown
on the drawings and as specified herein.
B.
Before covering or concealing any
slab, in wall or above ceiling,
notify the Architect so that
installation.
conduit below grade or
the contractor shall
he can review the
CONTRACTOR'S FINAL INSPECTION
A.
At the time of the Contractor I s final inspection, all
systems shall be checked and tested for proper
installation and operation by the Contractor in the
presence of the Architect or his representative.
B.
The Contractor shall furnish the personnel, tools and
equipment required to inspect and test all systems.
C.
Following is a list of items that the contractor must
demonstrate to the Architect or his representative as
complying with the plans and specifications. Please
note that this list does not necessarily represent all
items to be covered in the final inspection, but should
give the Contractor an idea of what is to be reviewed.
1. Service ground, show connection to ground rod and
cold water main.
2. Demonstrate that main service equipment is properly
bonded.
3. Demonstrate that all panels have breakers as
specified, ground bar, copper bus, typed directory
for circuit identification and that they are free
of trash.
4. Demonstrate that all conduits are supported as
required by the National Electrical Code.
5.
Demonstrate that all outlet boxes above or on the
ceiling are supported as required by the National
Electrical Code.
16220 - 1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EDC# 02019
I
6. Demonstrate that outlet boxes in wall or ceilings
of combustible materials are flush with surface of
wall or ceiling, and that outlet boxes in walls or
ceilings of non-combustible materials are so
installed that the front edge of the box or plaster
ring is not set back more than 1/4".
7. Demonstrate that outlet boxes in wall are secure.
8. Demonstrate that all devices are properly secured
to boxes, that device plates are properly aligned
and are not being used to secure device.
9. Utilizing a Woodhead No. 1750 testing device,
demonstrate that all 125 volt receptacles are
properly connected.
10. Demonstrate that all fixtures have specified lamps,
ballast and lens, and that they are supported as
required by the National Electrical Code or as
called for on the drawings or in the
specifications.
11. Demonstrate that all disconnects requiring fuses
are fused with the proper size and type, and that
all disconnects are properly identified.
12. Demonstrate that Fire Alarm/Intrusion Alarm System
is in proper working order and meeting all
requirements outlined in specifications,
ini tia ting an alarm signal from each manual and
automatic device (including smoke detectors) .
END OF SECTION 16220
16220 - 2